Home

Agilent Technologies A.18.00 User's Manual

1. BEEP DISP Originate a call from the mobile station IF FNSet_state Originate THEN DISP Read rcdd data 12345 ELSE Print error END IF IF NOT FNSet state Release THEN CALL Print error PRINT Program completed END Cond test set SUB Cond test set COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr DARIA KAKI Ck Ck Ck Ck kk Sk Ck kk e kk kk kk Sk kk kk ck ck ck ck kck ck ck ck ck k ck ck kc kck ck kk kk Prompt operator to make sure that no RF power is applied to the RF IN OUT port when the power meter is zeroed 1 eK kk kk kk Ck Ck kk Ck Kk kk kk Ck kk e kk kk Sk kk kc kc I ck ck ckck ck ck ck ck ck ck kc kck ck k kk kk BEEP DISP Remove all input power to the test set then press Continue PAUSE OUTPUT Inst addr DISP RFAN RFAN PME ZERO BEEP DISP Reconnect all cables then press Continue PAUSE OUTPUT Inst addr DISP CONF CONF NOTC AFGEN1 SUBEND Cnfg srvc intrp SUB Cnfg srvc intrp COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr OUTPUT Inst addr RST CLS ESE 60 SRE 160 OUTPUT Inst addr STAT CALLP PTR 0 NTR 0 OUTPUT Inst addr STAT CALLP ENAB 63 STAT OPER ENA 512 OPC ON TIMEOUT Bus addr 10 GOTO Cnfg failed ENTER Inst addr Cnfg complete OFF IMEOUT Bus addr SUBEXIT Cnfg failed BEEP PRINT Cnfg srvc intrp SUB timed out on OPC query STOP SUBEND Srvice interupt SUB Srvice interupt COM COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr Prog
2. EF FNOrder Order INT COM Io addresses IN EG EG Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem ER Parm ER Inst addr Bus addr Example Programs COM Prog control INTEGER Std event Wait time INTEGER Ptr value Call proc even SELECT Order CASE Power Ptr value 32 OUTPUT Inst addr STAT CALLP PTR amp VALS Ptr value OUTPUT Inst addr CALLP ORD CHNG PL amp VALS Parm amp CASE Mainten Ptr value 16 OUTPUT Inst addr STAT CALLP PTR amp VALS Ptr value OUTPU Inst addr CALLP ORD MAINTEN CASE Alert Ptr value 32 OUTPUT Inst addr STAT CALLP PTR amp VALS Ptr value OUTPUT Inst addr CALLP ORD ALERT END SELECT LOOP WAIT Wait time OUTPUT Inst addr ESR STAT CALLP EVEN ENTER Inst addr Std event Call proc even IF Std event TH EN RETURN O0 ETURN 1 IF BIT Call proc even LOG Ptr value LOG 2 THEN END LOOP FNEND Print error SUB Print error OPTION BASE 1 COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr COM Prog control INTEGER Std event Wait time INTEGER N DIM Error message 255 Error 5 20 Error 2 Query Error 3 Device Dependent Error 4 Execution Error 5 Command WAIT 1 Allow time for Error Queue to be updated
3. 465 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL DATA Screen Handoff See Handoff on page 452 for programming information Order See Order on page 454 for programming information Page See Page on page 455 for programming information Page See Page on page 455 for programming information prog g See Register on page 458 for programming information Register See Register on page 458 for programming information Release See Release on page 459 for programming information 466 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Reading the CALL DATA Screen Message Fields This section provides programming information on how to read the individual fields from the decoded reverse control channel and reverse voice channel signaling messages available on the CALL DATA screen Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL DATA Screen The syntactical structure for reading one or more fields from an individual message is as follows General Syntax CALLP lt message name gt lt field name gt lt gt lt gt lt additional field gt lt gt Call Data Screen Message and Field Names Table 49 on page 467 lists the message names used to access each of the signaling messages available on the CALL DATA screen Table 49 CALL DATA Screen Signaling Message Names Message Me
4. DECoder E V NAMPs JA S zd NTACs Y GATE See Real Number Setting Syntax l l Gate Time f Does not include the STATe command M CHANnel Cntl CY a A 2 ae Voice mn 2 Returns quoted string DTMF A GATE RVC J aes DSAT Measure lt Data 2 lt DTMF gt j Returns quoted string STANDard_ NAMPS Ead NTACS 2 Returns quoted string A TRIGger space Joe string gt Y a 7 Returns quoted string SGEDACS 4 5 x ANA DISPlay Radio gt 7 lt Repeater Returns quoted string CDELay gt 2 slots gt i y y 3 slots DA i 5 slots gt 8 slots gt LN eee J 3 Returns quoted string STANdard _ 9600 j 4800 Returns quoted string DEC continued 142 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS dec sec Decoder AMPs or TACs and CDCSs DTMF FGEN and DPAG DECoder a AMPS O GATE BLOCKs M TACS See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe command STANdard space gt gt Rom AMPS CM Measure lt TACS gt e JTACS gt 23 Returns quoted string MESSage lt space gt lt FOCCA amp B gt C Y lt FOCC A Ds aa FOCC B DS lt FVC J lt RVC E S b 25 Returns quoted string ec TRIGger See Integer Number Setting Syntax Does not include INCRement command
5. ENTER 714 Meter on off returns a 1 ON or O OFF This queries the state of the measurement reference point for the TX Power measurement 197 Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands NOTE NOTE 198 To Set A Measurement Reference Point Use the REFerence VALue commands to set a measurement reference point Syntax REFerence VALue lt real number Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW REF VAL 20 This sets the measurement reference point for the TX Power measurement to 20 watts When setting a measurement reference point any non Attribute Unit unit of measure must be specified in the command string otherwise the current Attribute Unit is assumed by the Test Set Refer to Attribute Units AUNits on page 81 To Query A Measurement Reference Point Use the REFerence VALue commands to query a measurement reference point Syntax REFerence VALue Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW REF VAL ENTER 714 Ref val This queries the measurement reference point for the TX Power measurement When querying a measurement reference point through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric values in Attribute Units regardless of the current Display Units or GPIB Units settings Numeric values are expressed in scientific notation Refer to Attribute Units AUNits on page 81 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS efpkc sec NOTE NOTE Equ
6. Figure 20 illustrates how to insert a memory card into the Test Set s front panel To remove a memory card simply pull it out The Test Set s memory card label is marked with an arrow that must be inserted on the same side as the arrow shown on the front panel slot 341 Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Using Memory Cards NOTE Memory cards may be inserted and removed with the Test Set powered on or off Av Figure 20 Inserting a Memory Card 342 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS memcard fo Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Using Memory Cards Setting the Write Protect Switch Figure 21 The SRAM memory card s write protect switch lets the user secure its contents from being overwritten or erased The switch has two positions see Figure 21 e Read write The memory card contents can be changed or erased and new files may written on the card e Read only The memory card contents can be read by the Test Set but cannot be changed or erased Read write setting S Read only setting Setting the SRAM Write Protect Switch 343 Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Using Memory Cards The Memory Card Battery SRAM memory cards use a lithium battery to power the card Listed below are the batteries for the Test Set s SRAM cards SRAM cards typically retain data for over 1 year at 25 C To retain data the battery should be replaced annually SRAM Card Battery
7. J Na NH AFG2 AMP Continued On Next Page we AFG2 continued 1 AM FM and LEVel correspond to the setting of the AFGen2 To field AP Returns quoted string A SEND D J w Z STOP 7 103 AF Generator 2 Encoder AFGenerator2 N ENCoder 4 FVCMessage espace gt lt string e MESSase MESSage A i nr J space C lt string 1 See Real Number Setting Syntax A i S gt See Real Number Setting Syntax n LE Vel See Real Number Setting Syntax GFREQuency See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe command e STANDard gt lt gt lt space C K lt AMPS hee TACS X JTACS 104 we AFG2 continued 1 AM FM and LEVel correspond to the setting of the AFGen2 To field S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS afg2_enc sec 7 Returns quoted string Fx ae gt for H N Returns quoted string NY gt Jey f Ne DS NA Returns quoted string A NAMPs or NTACs AFGenerator2N ENCoder Al BUSY DS lt space ro o gt Ilde DA o Busy M lt WS Delay gt lt lstBitDly 5 AF Generator 2 Encoder Sof Y Returns quoted string INCRement command only oJ qu ad f Ss FN Space gt gt ie Cntl gt Voice M 25 Re
8. EN CDMA CMEasure ON DECoder A N DUPLex D NEP 1OConfigure MESSage PCONfigure PDCtest PHPtest HA RINTerface RX N SANalyzer A Ce SERViee a Returns current screen Display Ma DISP continued 145 Display DISPlay ES 146 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS disp sec gt lt space gt al 25 NG N T CONfigure gt TDMA test TFReq 3 THO T TBasic al gt gt TPRint E TSEQn i l dSPee Returns current screen Measure MEASure gt IW MEAS continued Measure NIU Does not include the STATe command Y m ar gt J RESet MACPower K d En gs N CLRATio K Na P ER M OURATio N a B CLLEVel N KULEVel Returns real value NW See Number Measurement Syntax AFRequenoy i i l ACLevel ae i Y N fe CAM 2j N COMCURRAO y M T y E A M J x 3 gt gt DCFM J N N T gt DC Volts N M 1 B gt DISTN DA DISTortion j M N FM y a v Kt gt FREQuency Jj N k SINAD gt SINAD N KK i SNR i Nef d Returns real value A S E OV SELect SINAD gt UC Distn DS SNR gt AF Freq R DC Level Current A 3 Returns quoted string 147 Measure MEASure ES M
9. CALLP PN CFVORder FVC O Mes ES CALLP continued p o Call Processing cy EE a Hang y pee i pta y Ve 7 ka S SCC WA Le PSCCode jM espace gt lt 2 chars required 5 De PSCC a M Returns quoted string K RSVD gt lt space 9 char required gt e 7 TRSVD y E bot Qu A Returns quoted string gt lt space gt NE 2 chars required gt gt Returns quoted string ITN Has AA eCREServed N AH LOCal espace om o 5chars required gt Local Lin Returns quoted string ORD Qualifier spacej 3 chars required 5e Wan y Returns quoted string ORDQ e CORDer Order PARiy Parity Returns quoted string Returns quoted string duel oe 5 chars required O Returns quoted string m gt lt 2 chars required MA Pi j 139 Call Processing CALLP E 7 S FV Voice Na 140 FVC VMes PSCCode VMACode _ PARity SCCode CHANnel Y Jm Y TTT egent Jj space A SCC N 2 Y CZ espace gt PSCC jac TE VMAC Chan ES i pey J rasvpy TE 8 char required M REServed y MC a 5 Returns quoted string DES 2 chars require
10. 52 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Chapter 1 Using GPIB Remote Local Modes Remote Local Modes Remote Mode In Remote mode all front panel keys are disabled except for the LOCAL key POWER switch Volume control and Squelch control The LOCAL key is only disabled by the Local Lockout bus command When in Remote mode and addressed to Listen the Test Set responds to the Data Remote Local Clear SDC and Trigger messages When the Test Set is in Remote mode the R annunciator will be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen and triggering is set to the state it was last set to in Remote mode if no previous setting the default is FULL SETTling and REPetitive RETRiggering When the Test Set is being addressed to Listen or Talk the L or T annunciators will be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen Local Mode In Local mode the Test Set s front panel controls are fully operational The Test Set uses FULL SETTling and REPetitive RETRiggering in Local mode When the Test Set is being addressed to Listen or Talk the L or T annunciators will be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen Remote or Local Mode When addressed to Talk in Remote or Local mode the Test Set can issue the Data and Status Byte messages and respond to the Take Control message In addition the Test Set can issue the Service Request Message SRQ Regardless of whether it is address
11. Example OUTPUT 714 RFG FREQ INCR DUN KHZ This sets the increment value s Display Units to kHz for the RF Generator s frequency When querying a field setting through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric values in GPIB Units or Attribute Units regardless of the field s current Display Units setting Numeric values are expressed in scientific notation Refer to Attribute Units AUNits on page 81 and GPIB Units UNITs on page 78 To Query the Increment Value Display Units Use the INCRement DUNits commands to query the units of measure used to display the increment value Refer to Display Units DUNits on page 75 for description of Display Units Syntax INCRement DUNits Example OUTPUT 714 RFG FREQ INCR DUN ENTER 714 Disp unit This queries the increment value s Display Units for the RF Generator s frequency 191 Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands NOTE NOTE 192 INCRx10 The INCRx10 Data Function increases the increment setting by a factor of 10 new increment setting current increment setting x 10 Integer only fields such as Intensity and Print Adrs have a fixed increment of 1 and cannot be changed Syntax INCRement MULTiply Example OUTPUT 714 RFG FREQ INCR MULT If the RF Generator s frequency increment is 1 MHz this command increases increment value from 1 MHz to 10 MHz INCR 10 The INCR 10 Data Function reduces
12. Example OUTPUT 714 STAT COMM ENAB 256 Clearing the Enable Register The ENABLE register is cleared by writing to it with an integer value of zero S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations GPIB Service Requests GPIB Service Requests The Test Set is capable of generating a service request when it requires the Active Controller to take action Service requests are generally made after the Test Set has completed a task such as making a measurement or when an error condition exists such as an internal self calibration has failed The mechanism by which the Active Controller detects these requests is the SRQ interrupt Interrupts allow for efficient use of system resources because the Active Controller may be executing a program until an SRQ interrupt occurs If SRQ interrupts are enabled in the Active Controller the occurrence of an interrupt can initiate a program branch to a routine which services the interrupt executes some remedial action The operating and or programming manuals for each controller describe the controller s capability to set up and respond to SRQ interrupts This section describes the steps necessary to properly configure the Test Set to request service using the Service Request SRQ function 293 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations GPIB Service Requests Setting Up and Enabling SRQ Interrupts Test Set status information is maintai
13. OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW ER 714 Tx_power OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR FREQ ERR ER 714 Tx freq error OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR FREQ ER 714 Af freq OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR FM ER 714 Fm deviation 449 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen ESN dec ESN hex 450 This information string contains the electronic serial number ESN in decimal form received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel in response to a forward control channel message The ESN dec field is only displayed when the Display field is set to Data and a reverse control channel message containing this information has been decoded Refer to the Display field description on page 444 for information on how to read data displayed in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen This information string displays the electronic serial number ESN in hexadecimal form received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel in response to a forward control channel message The ESN hex field is only displayed when the Display field is set to Data and a reverse control channel message containing this information has been decoded Refer to the Display field description on page 444 for information on how to read data displayed in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen S agilent 89
14. INTERNAL gt y YA CARD RAM A DISK A Returns quoted string 119 Configure I O Configure CONFigure ES ESPA Port A SPB Port B N B AUD D Serial Baud Data Len gth M XPACe w CONF continued 120 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS conf sec e PARity V DATA STOP j Stop Length eGRPACe i space O 150 DA o 300 DS a 600 gt is 1200 J he 2400 M he 4800 M i 9600 C 19200 7 Returns quoted string _ K lt None gt S Odd 4 a Even gt aa Always 1 gt lt Always 0 Da Returns quoted string C 7Bits eq 8 Bits Returns quoted string 1 Bit CY 2 Bits Returns quoted string URo Xon Xoff lt None Returns quoted string Configure I O Configure CONFigure ES sl SPORE wA MBAUD gt mee Serial Baud 150 300 600 Jy T T Y Z bd A 7 A 7 gt 4800 9600 19200 Returns quoted string quoted string None AN Odd M Even eS Always 1 b Always 0 Dd a T AA e PARity _ xm Space e XX i 7 ae Returns quoted string ek i oN DATA 7 Bits gt p Data Length 8 Bits b Returns quoted string M ae hs 1 ON STOP 1 Bit Jp Sto
15. Invalid separator The parser was expecting a separator and encountered an illegal character For example the colon used to separate the FREQ and AMPL commands should be omitted in the following command RFG FREQ 850 MHZ AMPL 35 Data type error The parser recognized a data element different than one allowed For example numeric or string data was expected but block data was encountered GET not allowed A Group Execute Trigger was received within a program message see IEEE 488 2 7 7 Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than expected for the header For example the ESE common command only accepts one parameter receiving ESE 36 1 is not allowed Missing parameter Fewer parameters were received than required for the header For example the ESE common command requires one parameter receiving ESE is not allowed S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errormsg fb Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error 110 111 112 113 114 120 121 123 124 Command header error An error was detected in the header Header separator error A character which is not a legal header separator was encountered while parsing the header Program mnemonic too long The header contains more than twelve characters see IEEE 488 2 7 6 1 4 Undefined header The header is syntactically correct but it is undefined for this specific device F
16. MEAS DEC Continued On Next Page 150 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS meas sec gt Returns up to 19 real values See Multiple Number Measurement Syntax e space gt DISPlay Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Measure Returns integer value al Returns quoted string ABSolute Returns up to 17 real values See Multiple Number Measurement Syntax DISPlay lt space gt lt Freq gt O y oveFnEmo Returns quoted string A Ne HReturns up to 17 real values See Multiple Number Measurement Syntax e SYMBol ES MEAS DEC Continued On Next Page y yA A Returns quoted string p 151 Measure MEASure N QUID e MPTI327 ML BUFFer Sa A NSLots TIMe J 23 Returns quoted string Returns integer value Returns integer value Returns real value RATE tDATA gt NL E CFGENeratoP x AS FREQuency Does not include the METer command Returns quoted string Returns real value NFRames STORed FRAMes Lon pP ESTatus CTSEQuential y FREQuency SYMBol
17. Meas RECCW RECCW RECCW C Ei RECCW D RECCW E lt Phone Number lt Called number Order event initiated from Test Set Handoff event initiated from Mobile Call Processing State Diagram S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Annunciator None ESN hexadecimal SCM Station Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Using the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface Using the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface NOTE In order to use the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface a mobile station must be powered on and connected to the Test Set Option 004 Tone Digital Signalling is required in an HP 8920A in order to use the Call Processing Subsystem Attempting to access the Call Processing Subsystem without Option 004 installed will generate an Option not installed error Connecting a Mobile Station Figure 32 on page 430 shows a typical example of how to connect a mobile station to the Test Set You may need a special fixture to access the mobile station s antenna audio in and audio out signals These fixtures are available from the mobile station s manufacturer If any audio testing is to be done on the mobile station the audio input microphone input to the mobile station and the audio output speaker output from the mobile station must be connected to the Test Set If no audio testing is to be
18. Screen DESTination space eC Serial RCN x er Print Port pe bon gt al N S aralle FFEN gt FF at end Returns quoted string SFESTart j FF at start gt p lt Yes lt No m LINEs JT Returns quoted string LINes ba M OC PRINer f N Model HPMOdel M HPModel Y gt ThinkJet gt QuietJet gt PaintJet gt DeskJet gt LaserJet A Epson FX 80 A Epson LQ 850 2 wu 23 i J lt Returns quoted string space gt C lt string gt nae 2 Returns quoted string e TITLe IW CONF continued 118 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS conf sec CONFigure ES Configure I O Configure S RFIMpedance RFGen Volts e RTSWitching RX TX Cntl COFT evel OFLevel JN RF Level MODE D Offset e RFINout RF In Out e DUPLex Duplex Out CANTenna Antenna In SRLocation gt RX TX Cntl wat CONF continued a lt gt lt space Os 50 ohm gt C 7 lt emf o Returns quoted string Carrier gt e gt J PIT gt 0 Returns quoted string Does not include the STATe commands f See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe commands See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe commands See Real Number Setting Syntax
19. TRIGger MODE TRIGger MODE OUTPUT 714 OUTPUT 714 Settling Syntax Settling Examples RETRigger REPetitive RETRigger SINGle RIG MODE R REP RIG MODE R SING TRIGger MODE SETTling FAST TRIGger MODE SETTling FULL OUTPUT 714 OUTPUT 714 RIG MODE FAST RIG MODE FULL 229 Triggering Measurements Trigger Mode and Measurement Speed 230 There are two generalized scenarios which can be described for GPIB triggering control The first is to have the Test Set return measurement results as fast as possible and assume that the control program will handle all transient settling and value tolerance activities The second scenario is to have the Test Set return the most reliable accurate fully settled measurement results that it can even if it takes some time to do this Trigger Mode Settings for Fastest Measurements Use the following Test Set configuration and trigger mode settings for the fastest possible measurement speed See Increasing Measurement Throughput on page 234 for more information on improving measurement throughput 1 Range hold all auto ranging and auto tuning functions and set ranges and frequency through GPIB This avoids autoranging autotuning delays 2 Use REPetitive RETRiggering This avoids Trigger Event processing del
20. The query form of the command that is DSPecifier can be used to determine which method is currently being used to build the contents of the signaling messages See Reading the CALL BIT Screen Message Fields on page 484 for information on how to read the contents of the individual messages Syntax DSPecifier lt gt lt STD BITS gt lt gt DSPecifier Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP DSP OUTPUT 714 CALLP DSP STD ENTER 714 Build method See Handoff on page 452 for programming information This field is used to send an order type mobile station control message on the forward voice channel to the Mobile Station The orders available are Change Power to Power Level 0 7 Maintenance put the mobile station in maintenance mode Alert alert the mobile station The Order field is a one of many selection field To send an order to the mobile station position the cursor on the Order field and select it A list of choices is displayed Position the cursor on the desired order and select it Once the selection is made a mobile station control message is sent to the Mobile Station The Access annunciator will light momentarily while the Test Set is sending the mobile station control message A mobile station must be actively connected on a voice channel to the Test Set that is the Connect annunciator lit before attempting to send an order to a mobile station S agilent 8920
21. Agilent Technologies Learning Products Department 24001 E Mission Liberty Lake WA 99019 9599 U S A All Editions and Updates of this manual and their creation dates are listed below Rev A December 1997 Rev B April 2000 Safety Summary The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument Agilent Technologies Inc assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements GENERAL This product is a Safety Class 1 instrument provided with a protective earth terminal The protective features of this product may be impaired if it is used in a manner not specified in the operation instructions All Light Emitting Diodes LEDs used in this product are Class 1 LEDs as per IEC 60825 1 This product has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC Publication 1010 Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring Apparatus and has been supplied in a safe condition This instruction documentation contains information and warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the product in a safe condition ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS This instrument is intended for indoor use in an installation category II pollution degree 2 environmen
22. C 2 chars required gt y Returns quoted string lt 4 chars required gt Returns quoted string Returns quoted string 15 chars required O De Returns quoted string 4 M n A 1 char required AA Returns quoted string 3 chars required gt D Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Parity CALLP E _e RSVD END 7 CPARity gt CALLP continued gt RINCrement gt E REG INC E TYPE gt T 1T2 iDCCode ACTion i al lt REServed Hana N 7 crim pace net y Sal 3 DCC WAT REA je espace ACT Un RINCrement A space pe REGINCR Un Tas ee f RSVD je space zd END OHD Nal 3 NES 7 lt 4 chars required gt Call Processing gt lt 2 chars required HO Returns quoted string N 2 N ON A 2 chars required AA Returns quoted string Returns quoted string y 12 chars required S Returns quoted string lt 4 chars required O De Returns quoted string 4 T AN A 1 char required AA Returns quoted string Nef OVERhead yeux lt lt 3 chars required gt CY Returns quoted string Parity Returns quoted string 133 Call Processing CALLP a 134 M RIDentify
23. Controller C1 System Controller C3 Send REN C4 Respond to SRQ C11 No Pass Control to Self No Parallel Poll Drivers E2 Tri State Drivers Chapter 1 Using GPIB Addressing Addressing Factory Set Address The Test Set s GPIB address is set to decimal 14 at the factory The address can be changed by following the instructions in Setting the Test Set s Bus Address on page 49 Extended Addressing Extended addressing secondary command capability is not implemented in the Test Set Multiple Addressing Multiple addressing capability is not implemented in the Test Set Setting the Test Set s Bus Address The Test Set s GPIB bus address is set using the HP IB Adrs field which is located on the I O CONFIGURE screen To set the GPIB bus address select the I O CONFIGURE screen and position the cursor next to the HP IB Adrs field The address can be set from decimal 0 to 30 using the numeric DATA keys or by pushing and then rotating the Cursor Control knob There are no DIP switches for setting the GPIB bus address in the Test Set The new setting is retained when the Test Set is turned off Displaying the Bus Address The Test Set s GPIB bus address can be displayed by pressing and releasing the SHIFT key then the LOCAL key The address is displayed in the upper left hand corner of the display screen 49 Chapter 1 Using GPIB IEEE 488 1 Remote Interface Message Capabilities IEEE 488 1 Rem
24. If you do not have access to the Internet one of these centers can direct you to your nearest representative United States Test and Measurement Call Center Toll free in US 800 452 4844 Europe 31 20 547 9900 Canada 905 206 4725 Japan Measurement Assistance Center 81 426 56 7832 81 426 56 7840 FAX Latin America 305 267 4288 FAX Australia New Zealand 1 800 629 485 Australia 0800 738 378 New Zealand Asia Pacific 852 2599 7777 852 2506 9285 FAX Manufacturer s Declaration This statement is provided to comply with the requirements of the German Sound Emission Directive from 18 January 1991 This product has a sound pressure emission at the operator position lt 70 dB A Sound Pressure Lp lt 70 dB A e At Operator Position e Normal Operation e According to ISO 7779 1988 EN 27779 1991 Type Test Herstellerbescheinigung In this Book Diese Information steht im Zusammenhang mit den Anforderungen der Maschinenl rminformationsverordnung vom 18 Januar 1991 e Schalldruckpegel Lp lt 70 dB A e Am Arbeitsplatz e Normaler Betrieb e Nach ISO 7779 1988 EN 27779 1991 Typpr fung Chapter 1 Using HP IB describes the general guidelines for using HP IB and how to prepare the Test Set for HP IB usage This chapter includes example programs for controlling the basic functions of the Test Set Chapter 2 Methods For
25. SS 4800 DA al Y Returns quoted string RATE Jem space f See Real Number Setting Syntax Data Rate Does not include the STATe command Valid range 4 000 to 10 000 e CNCH espace See Integer Number Setting Syntax Control Channel MCNRX space 1 See Real Number Setting Syntax RX Frequency Does not include the STATe command CNTX jJ space See Real Number Setting Syntax TX Frequency Does not include the STATe command WKCH gt space See Integer Number Setting Syntax Working Channel Le WKRX gt space 1 See Real Number Setting Syntax RX Frequency Does not include the STATe command e WKTX JT space 1 See Real Number Setting Syntax TX Frequency Does not include the STATe command CLGID D space See Integer Number Setting Syntax Logical ID Valid range 1 to 16382 GPID jJ space See Integer Number Setting Syntax Group ID Valid range 1 to 2048 SID D space See Integer Number Setting Syntax Site ID Valid range 0 to 32 SIGNaling Signaling Deviation SUB DS NO MER Sub Audible Deviation b See Real Number Setting Syntax I D See Real Number Setting Syntax 5 See Real Number Setting Syntax Se RXSTart j RX Test RXSend Handshake we AFG2 continued S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS afg2_enc sec AF Generator 2 Encoder MPT1327 AFGenerator228 ENCoder N MPTI327 Syst
26. This queries the high end point and low end point display units of the analog bar graph meter for the TX Power measurement When querying the METER Data Function through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric values in Attribute Units regardless of the current Display Units or GPIB Units settings Numeric values are expressed in scientific notation S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS efpkc sec Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands REF SET The REF SET Data Function establishes a measurement reference point The GPIB command REFerence is used to select this data function programmatically To Turn Measurement Reference Points ON and OFF Use the REFerence STATe boolean commands to turn measurement reference points ON and OFF The boolean parameter can be a 1 or ON to turn measurement reference points on and a 0 or OFF to turn measurement reference points off Syntax REFerence STATe ON or 1 REFerence STATe OFF or 0 Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW REF STAT ON This turns the measurement reference point for the TX Power measurement ON To Query the State of Measurement Reference Points Use the REFerence S TATe commands to query the state of a measurement reference point The query returns a 1 if a measurement reference points is ON and a O if a measurement reference points is OFF Syntax REFerence STATe Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW REF STAT
27. Writing the Enable Register Syntax ESE integer Example OUTPUT 714 ESE 255 The ESE command sets the bit pattern bits 0 through 7 of the Standard Event Status Enable Register The Standard Event Status Enable Register allows the programmer to indicate the occurrence of one or more events as defined by bits 0 through 7 of the Standard Event Status Register in bit 5 of the Status Byte Register The bit pattern set by the ESE command is determined by selecting the desired event s from the Standard Event Status Register setting the value of the bit position s to a logical one setting the value of all non selected bit positions to a logical zero and sending the binary weighted decimal equivalent of bits 0 through 7 after the ESE command For example if the programmer wished to have the occurrence of a Command Error bit position 5 in the Standard Event Status Register and the occurrence of a Query Error bit position 2 in the Standard Event Status Register to be reflected in bit 5 of the Status Byte Register the binary weighted decimal value of the bit pattern for the Standard Event Status Enable Register would be determined as follows Bit Position 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Logical Value 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 Binary 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Weighting Decimal Value 0 0 432 0 0 4 0 0 36 Example OUTPUT 714 ESE 36 The decimal value of the bit pattern must be a positive integer in th
28. lt 14 chars required gt SID1 7 Returns quoted string NA C gt RSVD pace C 3 chars required gt Y f RSVD Y P c q Z Kd REServed F Y Returns quoted string NAWComing lt space gt lt 4 chars required 5 NAWC Returns quoted string OVERhead JM espace pool m 3 chars required gt Jt OHD 7 Returns quoted string Oc PARity Returns quoted string Parity CALLP ch E n Y SPOM2 eee C SPOMESSAGE2 Y SPC Word 2 M eTYPE re space gt gt TIT2 uu J gt TIT2 J lt iDCCode M gt i DCC We y _ SERial He pee p US Z UA MM ES NEAL a i ae gt EXTended space e gt Y NX zu f E Ne QE V C ON E os uu AT E gt REGHome RHOMe y N REGR Lo a RROam P _ REGRoam_ 0 DTX DT Nfield B N 1 space gt C Call Processing o YA 2 chars required DD 1 Pi Returns quoted string N 2 N ON A 2 chars required AA Returns quoted string YO ON 1 on m lcharrequied gt 2 Returns quoted string 1 char required gt D Returns quoted string gt lt 1l char required gt CH NP Returns quoted string Cx 1 char required gt Re
29. to bit 1 of Status Byte Register N Em k zi E N a w N A o ch4drw12 drw 5 Condition Transition Event Enable Register Filter Registers Register Register Figure 15 Hardware Status Register 2 Group 280 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Table 23 shows the Hardware Status Register Group 2 s Condition Register bit assignments Table 23 Hardware Status Register Group 2 Condition Register Bit Assignments ES ul Condition Comment 15 32768 Not Used Always 0 Defined by SCPI Version 1994 0 14 16384 Unused in Test Set 13 8192 Unused in Test Set 12 4096 Unused in Test Set 11 2048 Inconsistent ACP Channel Bandwidth and Resolution Bandwidth 10 1024 ACP Channel Bandwidth or Channel Offset Too Wide 9 512 AFGenl Frequency Exceeds Variable Frequency Notch Filter Range 8 256 Requested Audio Voltage Too Large for AFGen2 7 128 Requested FM Deviation Too Large for RF Generator Frequency 6 64 Requested Simultaneous AM and FM Simultaneous AM and FM Modulation modulation is not allowed 5 32 Audio Input Level Auto Ranging Error 4 16 RF Input Level Auto Ranging Error 3 8 RF Input Frequency Auto Tuning Error 2 RF Gen RF Anl RF Offset Frequency RF Gen Tune Freq RF Anal Combination Not Possible Tune Freq not equal to RF Offset Freq 1 2 RF Generator Amplitude Level Too High for
30. 40 ENTER 714 Error_num Error_msg 50 PRINT Error num Error msg 60 END Example response 113 Undefined header 265 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Questionable Data Signal Register Group The Questionable Data Signal Register Group contains information about the quality of the Test Set s output and measurement data This status group is accessed using the STATus commands The Questionable Data Signal Register Group uses 16 bit registers and includes a Condition Register Transition Filters an Event Register an Enable Register and a Summary Message Refer to the Status Reporting Structure Overview on page 239 for a discussion of status register operation Figure 12 shows the structure and STATus commands for the Questionable Data Signal Register Group 266 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting STATus QUEStionable CONDition 2 PTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable A NTRansition a lt integer gt STATus QUEStionable EVENt 2 STATus QUEStionable ENABle Cinteger gt Summary Message Bit Logical OR to bit 3 of Status Byte Register M a a o In gt jo wm Ja 5 ch4drw10 drw Condition Transition Event Enable Register Filter Registers Register Register Figure 12 Questionable Data Signal Register Group 267 Chapter 5
31. 5110 OUTPUT Inst addr CALLP CSYS amp Sys amp 5120 GOSUB Wait loop 5130 IF Error flag THEN 5140 RETURN 0 5150 ELSE 5160 RETURN 1 5170 END IF 5180 Wait loop LOOP 5190 WAIT Wait time 5200 EXIT IF Oper complete OR Error flag 5210 END LOOP 5220 RETURN 5230 FNEND 5240 6000 Set state DEF FNSet state State 6010 COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr 6020 COM Prog control INTEGER Oper complete Wait time Error flag 6030 INTEGER Ptr value 6040 Oper complete 0 Initialize to zero at start of any state change 6050 Error flag 0 Initialize to zero at start of any state change 6060 SELECT State 6070 CASE Active 6080 Ptr value 1 524 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb EG ER Cch 6090 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 6200 6210 6220 6230 6240 6250 6260 6270 6280 6290 6300 6400 6410 6420 6430 6440 6450 6460 6470 000 010 020 030 040 050 060 070 080 090 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 O1 00000050 O Oo o o A d J 1 CASI t t E Handoff t t Register r value 1 Page r value 32 r value 32 Originate r value 32 Rel
32. AM FM AMPS TACS TDMA CDMA etc are defined by an industry standard and are used to test all radio types within that class However for a specific radio type the test s may remain the same but the information needed to test the radio changes For example a portable hand held may have different transmit power levels than a mobile the RF power test is the same but the power levels supply voltages pass fail limits etc can be different There are two approaches which can be used to provide the software with the information needed to test a radio a hardcode the information directly into the software or b store the information outside the program code itself and make it available to the software as needed Hardcoding the information into the software has several serious drawbacks changing the information is difficult and the software becomes specific to that radio type Storing the information outside the program code and making it available to the software as needed overcomes both of these problems that is the information is easy to change and the software is not specific to a particular type of radio The Test Set s automated user interface was designed using this approach Agilent Technologies has developed software specifically designed to run on the Test Set The Agilent 11807 Radio Test Software provides the user with a library of industry standard tests All radio specific information has been removed from the software The
33. Call Processing Status Register Group See Call Processing Status Register Group on page 271 for a detailed description of the Call Processing Subsystem Status Register Group See Status Reporting Structure Overview on page 239 for detailed information on status register groups and status reporting Using the Call Processing Status Register Group To Control Program Flow The Call Processing Subsystem uses annunciators to indicate its current state That is if the Call Processing Subsystem is in the connected state the Connect annunciator will be lit Bits 0 through 5 of the Condition register in the Call Processing Status Register Group mirror the condition of the annunciators That is if the Connect annunciator is lit bit 5 of the Condition register will be TRUE logic 1 and all other bits will be FALSE logic 0 Under most circumstances a control program will need some means of determining the state of an interaction between the control program the Call Processing Subsystem and the mobile station For example if the control program wishes to register a mobile station the control program will have to send a command to put the Call Processing subsystem into the Active state then once in the Active state send a registration message by putting the Call Processing Subsystem into the Register state and then determine when to read the mobile station s registration information in order to make a determination as to whethe
34. Chapter 1 Using GPIB Getting Started a The AF Anl Infield the De Emphasis field the Detector field and the AF Analyzer Measurement field measurement displayed in upper right portion of CRT display are e set to their preset values upon entering the screen for the first time since power up OR e set to their preset values if the PRESET key is selected OR e setto the last setting made while in the screen b The AF Analyzer AF Anl In De Emphasis and Detector fields are e set to their preset values whenever entering the screen OR e set to their preset values if the PRESET key is selected RX TEST Screen and TX TEST Screen Priority Field Preset Values Priorit RX TEST Field Hidden TX TEST oer On y Screen Preset On RX TEST Screen Preset Field TX TEST Value Screen Value Screen RF Gen 80 dBm No Off Yes Amplitude AFGenl To FM No Audio Out Yes AF Anl In Audio In Yes FM Demod No Detector RMS Yes Pk Max No De emphasis Off Yes 750 us No AF Analyzer SINAD No Audio Freq No Measurement 37 Chapter 1 Using GPIB Getting Started Guideline 2 When developing programs to make measurements always follow this recommended sequence 1 Bring the Test Set to its preset state using the front panel PRESET key This initial step allows you to start developing the measurement sequence with most fields in a known state 2 Make the measurement manually using the front panel contro
35. Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation Attribute Units AUNits Attribute Units are the units of measure used by the Test Set when sending or receiving numeric data through GPIB for the MEASure commands REFerence METer HEND LEND INT HLIMit and LLIMit refer to Number Measurement Syntax on page 177 for further details These measurement commands are analogous to the front panel Data Function keys REF SET METER HI LIMIT and LO LIMIT respectively Attribute Units use the same set of units of measure as the GPIB Units except Frequency Error but are only used with the MEASure commands REFerence METer HEND LEND INT HLIMit and LLIMit Table 11 lists the Attribute Units used in the Test Set Table 11 Attribute Units Parameter Unit of Measure Power Watts W or dBm DBM Amplitude Volts V Frequency Hertz Hz Time Seconds S Data Rate Bits per second BPS Current Amperes A Resistance Ohms OHM Relative Level decibels DB or percent PCT Marker Position Division DIV FM Modulation Hertz HZ AM Modulation Percent PCT Default Data Function Values The majority of measurements made with the Test Set can be made using the Data Functions REF SET METER AVG HI LIMIT and LO LIMIT Measurements which can be made using the Data Functions have a black bubble with the comment See Number Measurement Syntax in their syntax path If one or more of
36. Consider the following example where the user wishes to determine from an external controller if the IBASIC program running on the Test Set has finished executing The example programs show how this might be accomplished with and without using the WAIT query command 413 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem Example BASIC program without using the WAIT query command 10 OUTPUT 714 PROG STAT RUN 20 LOOP 30 OUTPUT 714 PROG STAT 40 ENTER 714 StateS 50 EXIT IF State STOP OR State PAUS 60 END LOOP 70 DISP IBASIC program not running 80 END Example BASIC program using the WAIT query command 10 OUTPUT 714 PROG STAT RUN 20 OUTPUT 714 PROG WAIT 30 ENTER 714 Dummy Program will hang here until IBASIC program stops 40 DISP IBASIC program not running 50 END Using the EXECute Command The PROGram EXECute command can be used to list edit and control IBASIC programs in the Test Set from an external controller This eliminates having to use the cursor control knob and provides a more efficient way of making small changes to programs The full range of IBASIC program commands can be executed from an external controller using the PROGram EXECute command The following operations are given as typical examples of using the PROGram EXECute command NOTE The program commands and syntax used to send data from the exte
37. DEC MPT1327 page 144 DEC NAMPs page 142 DEC NTACs page 142 DEC TACS page 143 DEC TSEQuential page 144 Oscilloscope OSC page 154 RF Analyzer RFA page 161 RF Generator RFG page 163 Radio Interface RINT page 164 Spectrum Analyzer SAN page 165 92 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ch3intro fb Chapter 4 GPIB Commands GPIB Syntax Diagrams Instrument Command Number Setting Syntax Diagrams Integer Number Setting Syntax page 174 Real Number Setting Syntax page 175 Multiple Real Number Setting Syntax page 176 Measurement Command Syntax Diagrams Measure MEAS page 147 Trigger TRIG page 173 Measurement Command Number Setting Syntax Diagrams Number Measurement Syntax page 177 Multiple Number Measurement Syntax page 179 Instrument Function Syntax Diagrams Configure and I O Configure CONF page 117 Display DISP page 145 Program PROG page 159 Save Recall Registers REG page 160 Status STAT page 168 System SYS page 169 Tests TEST page 170 GPIB Only Command Syntax Diagram Special SPEC page 167 93 Chapter 4 GPIB Commands GPIB Syntax Diagrams Diagram Conventions Use the following diagram to see the conventions used in the syntax diagrams Statement elements are connected by lines Each line can be followed in only one direction as indicated by the arrow at the end of the line Any combination of statement elements that can
38. E Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR FM HLIM DUN KHZ OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR FM LLIM DUN KHZ This sets the high and low measurement limit Display Units to kHz for the Audio Frequency Analyzer FM Deviation measurement When querying measurement limits through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric values in Attribute Units regardless of the current Display Units or GPIB Units settings Numeric values are expressed in scientific notation Refer to Attribute Units AUNits on page 81 To Query the Display Units for High and Low Measurement Limits Use the HLIMit DUNIits and LLIMit DUNits commands to query the units of measure used to display the high and low measurement limit values Refer to Display Units DUNits on page 75 for description of Display Units Syntax Hd HLIMit DUNits LLIMit DUNits E Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR FM HLIM DUN ENTER 714 Hi disp unit OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR FM LLIM DUN ENTER 714 Lo disp unit This queries the high measurement limit Display Units for the Audio Frequency Analyzer FM Deviation measurement When querying measurement limits through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric values in Attribute Units regardless of the current Display Units or GPIB Units settings Numeric values are expressed in scientific notation Refer to Attribute Units AUNits on page 81 187 Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands
39. Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands To Reset Measurement Limit Detection Use the HLIMit RESet and LLIMit RESet commands to reset measurement limit detection Once a high or low measurement limit has been exceeded HLIMit EXCeeded returns a 1 or LLIMit EXCeeded returns a 1 measurement limit detection is disabled until reset by the RESet command Syntax Hd IMit RESet IMit RESet E Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR FM HLI OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR FM LLIM RES This resets high and low measurement limit detection for the Audio Frequency Analyzer FM Deviation measurement INCR SET The Increment Set Data Function sets the increment value for real number numeric entry fields The GPIB command INCRement is used to select this data function programmatically To Set the Increment Value Use the INCRement command to set the increment value Syntax INCRement Example OUTPUT 714 RFG FREQ INCR 2 5 MHZ This sets the increment value for the RF Gen Freq field to 2 5 MHz When setting the value of a numeric field such as RF Gen Freq any non GPIB Unit unit of measure must be specified in the command string otherwise the current GPIB Unit is assumed by the Test Set Integer only fields such as Intensity and Print Adrs havea fixed increment of land cannot be changed 189 Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands NOTE 190 To Query the Increment Value Use the INCRement comman
40. HD mm F3 WFOM F4 OHD Parity H H EVE 001 001000000011 Figure 50 C FILMESS Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message 2 binary characters required DCC Digital color code field 2 binary characters required 498 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb CMAC RSVD1 F2 RSVD2 F3 WFOM Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions Control mobile attenuation field Indicates the mobile station power level associated with reverse control channel 3 binary character required Reserved for future use all bits must be set as indicated 2 binary characters required Control filler message field 2 All bits must be set as indicated 2 binary characters required Reserved for future use all bits must be set as indicated 2 binary characters required Control filler message field 3 All bits must be set as indicated 1 binary character required Wait for overhead message field 1 binary character required 499 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions F4 OHD Parity 500 Control filler message field 4 All bits must be set as indicated 4 binary character required This field displays the overhead message type e A 100 indicates a global action message e A 1
41. Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Operation Calibration Call Processing and Questionable Data Signal e Any previously received Operation Complete command OPC is cleared e Any previously received Operation Complete query command OPC is cleared e Calibration data is not affected The GPIB interface is reset any pending Service Request is cleared e The contents of the RAM memory are unaffected e The Test Set s display screen is in the UNLOCKED state Front panel PRESET Key 306 The Front panel Reset is accomplished by pressing the PRESET key on the front panel of the Test Set For the CONFIGURE PRINT CONFIGURE TESTS Execution Conditions TESTS Printer Setup and I O CONFIGURE screens Table 29 lists the fields which are restored initialized when the front panel PRESET key is pressed The restored state or initialized value is listed below the field name Fields which are not listed are maintained at their current value whatever that may happen to be All fields in the TESTS Main Menu screen and the TESTS External Devices screen are maintained at their current state value The current state value of the maintained fields can be ascertained programmatically S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Table 29 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Instrument Initialization Screen Fields Restored Initialized During Front Panel Reset CONFIGURE Screen Fields PRINT CONFIGURE Screen Fields TESTS
42. MODE E lt space m Func Gen gt a Tone Seq DS a DTMF gt lt CDCSS gt Digi Page A E AMPS TACS y lt NAMP NTACS gt lt NMT M MPT1327 gt LTR J lt EDACS P2 Returns quoted string COUTPut D See Real Number Setting Syntax PEMPhasis space po 3 On CY lt off Bx RD Returns quoted string POLarity Norm i Invert Returns quoted string SEND K MODE D Single oC E Burst BN Cont M Step b 7 Returns quoted string STOP gt 4 we AFG2 continued 102 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS afg2_enc sec AMPS or TACS AFGenerator2 amp ENCoder A AMPS AF Generator DELay D See IntegerNumber Setting Syntax B I Delay INCRement command only eO CHANnel 2 space gt C Y lt Cntl lt Voice gt l AM See Real Number Setting Syntax d y See Real Number Setting Syntax LEVel gt See Real Number Setting Syntax DATA BUSY y pa Me Busy Idle Mee Busy M lt WS Delay lt lstBitDly gt Ml Y Returns quoted string Returns quoted string RATE B See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe command DUTest J lt space C Mobile CY uta Cell 7 FILLer o 3 AA Returns quoted string k par i ey y space WU string C 2 Encoder
43. REG ID Na CALLP continued IN TYPE bI o SN b 2 sz QA T 1T2 N y x equi PA Hara y Space gt MC 2 chars required gt gt 25 Returns quoted string Pi iDCCode espace gt C 2 chars required gt DCO La IDENtify eO REGID y 0 END 7 END 0 espace eC END Un y Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string OVERhead espace pol lt 3 chars required gt Jramomp AD 20 chars required DON 1 char required SCH OHD ee PAET PARIS Parity Returns quoted string Returns quoted string CALLP EN gt CFMessage gt l C FILMESS Me CALLP continued K Ti Hama y gt uu J TIT2 y Sef 2 iDCCode E gt i DCC IN 2 et FIELD Nal Fl f CMACode space e CMAC RSVDI J ae paco pe gt RSVD1 Es Call Processing m YA 2 chars required N 1 Returns quoted string N 2 N ON A 2 chars required AA Returns quoted string 4 6 chars required gt CH Returns quoted string gt lt 3 chars required gt gt H Returns quoted string lt 2 chars required gt aft Nu eC RESERVEDI Returns quoted string 4 xu cone ya YESO 2 chars required
44. Set Strip LF off and Append LF off It is important that the line feeds that are in the ASCII file not be stripped or the file transfer will not work 9 Select or enter the file name to transfer 10 Begin the transfer by selecting OK At this point each line of the program will rapidly scroll across the screen of the Test Set When the transfer is finished the prompt Down load of ASCII file complete will be displayed on the Test Set Before running the downloaded program execute a SCRATCH command on the IBASIC Command Line to remove the ASCII_DN download program from Test Set memory Next execute a GET TEMP CODE command on the IBASIC Command Line This will load the ASCII text into the IBASIC program memory Finally execute a RUN command on the IBASIC Command Line This will run the program If any syntax errors are present in the program IBASIC will generate the appropriate error messages 390 S agilenti8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS libasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 3 Developing Programs Using Word Processor on a PC Least Preferred Sending ASCII Text Files over RS 232 with ProComm Communications Software NOTE Set up the ProComm terminal emulator software on the PC as covered in Setting Up ProComm Revision 2 4 3 on your PC on page 369 On the Test Set enter and run the ASCII DN download program in the IBASIC controller When the prompt Ready to receive ASCII file data is displayed on the T
45. Setting Up Microsoft Windows Terminal on your PC Windows Version 3 1 1 2 3 4 5 Start the Terminal program in Windows From the Terminal Menu select Settings then Emulation Select DEC VT 100 ANSI From the Terminal Menu select Settings then Terminal Preferences Edit the Terminal Preference settings to match the following Terminal Modes Line Wrap Off Local Echo Off Sound Off Columns 132 e CR gt CR LF Inbound Off Outbound O e Cursor Block Blink On Terminal Font Fixedsys Translations None Show Scroll Bars On Buffer Lines 100 e Use Function Arrow and Ctrl Keys for Windows Off From the Terminal menu select Settings then Text Transfers Edit the Text Transfer settings to match the following Flow Control Standard Flow Control e Word wrap Outgoing Text at Column Off From the Terminal menu select Settings then Communications Edit the Communications settings to match those of the Test Set S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports Example Terminal Communications Settings e Baud Rate 9600 e Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 e Parity None Flow Control Xon Xoff e Connector Com1 be sure to match your current setup e Parity Check Off Carrier Detect Off Setting Up ProComm Revision 2 4 3 on your PC ProComm is a general purpose telecommunications softwar
46. of screen Leave the next thr lines for external control or 40 comment them out for IBASIC Test Set stand alone control 50 60 PLOTTER IS CRT 98627A 70 Your display may have a different specifier 80 GRAPHICS ON Enable graphics to plot the waveform 490 WINDOW 0 399 0 179 500 B QA DB BBB WB 510 PEN 1 Turn on drawing pen 520 MOVE 0 89 5 Trace 0 4000 89 5 530 FOR I 1 TO 416 540 DRAW 1 416 399 89 5 Trace I 4000 89 5 550 NEXT I 560 END 90 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS guidelin fb GPIB Commands Chapter 4 GPIB Commands GPIB Syntax Diagrams GPIB Syntax Diagrams GPIB Command Syntax Diagram Listing Instrument Command Syntax Diagrams AF Analyzer AFAN page 97 AF Generator 1 AFG1 page 100 AF Generator 2 AFG2 Pre Modulation Filters page 101 AF Generator 2 and Encoder AFG2 ENC page 102 AFG2 AMPS page 103 AFG2 CDCSs page 107 AFG2 DPAGing page 108 AFG2 DTMF page 107 AFG2 EDACs page 114 AFG2 FGENerator page 110 AFG2 LTR page 113 AFG2 MPT1327 page 115 AFG2 NAMPs page 105 AFG2 NMT page 111 AFG2 NTACS page 105 AFG2 TACS page 103 AFG2 TSEQuential page 110 Adjacent Channel Power ACP page 95 Call Process CALLP page 122 Decoder DEC page 141 DEC AMPS page 143 DEC CDCSs page 143 DEC DPAGing page 143 DEC DTMF page 143 DEC EDACs page 142 DEC FGENerator page 143 DEC LTR page 144
47. 10130 CLEAR Inst addr 10140 OUTPUT Inst addr trig abort mode retr rep 10150 DISP you should have the box back 10160 ENABLE 10170 Cannot recover 10180 DISP Cannot regain control of the Test Set 10190 STOP 10200 SUBEND 10210 11010 Meas sinad SUB Meas sinad 11020 COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr 11030 INTEGER N 11035 ON TIMEOUT Bus addr 5 RECOVER Timed out 11040 OUTPUT Inst addr DISP CME AFG1 DEST FM FREQ 1KHZ FM 8KHZ FM STAT ON 11050 OUTPUT Inst addr AFAN INP AUDIO IN DEMP OFF DET RMS 11060 OUTPUT Inst addr AFAN FILT1 C MESSAGE FILT2 gt 99KHZ LP 11070 OUTPUT Inst addr MEAS AFR SEL SINAD RFG AMPL 116DBM 11080 OUTPUT Inst addr TRIG MODE RETR SINGLE SETT FULL 11090 Avg sinad 0 11100 FOR N 1 TO 5 11110 OUTPUT Inst_addr TRIG MEAS AFR SINAD 11120 ENTER Inst_addr Sinad 11130 Avg_sinad Avg_sinad Sinad 11140 NEXT N 11150 PRINT USING K 3D 2D K SINAD Avg sinad N dB at 116 dBm 11160 OUTPUT Inst addr TRIG MODE RETR REP SETT FULL 11170 OUTPUT Inst addr RFG AMPL 47DBM DISP ACNT 11180 SUBEXIT 534 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb PRPPRPRPRPRPRPRP EB 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem 1190 Timed out ON TIMEOUT Bus addr 5 GOTO Cannot recover CLEAR Inst addr OUTPUT Inst addr trig abort mode retr rep DISP you should have the box back ENAB
48. 13 8192 Unused in Test Set 12 4096 Unused in Test Set 11 2048 Unused in Test Set 10 1024 Unused in Test Set 9 512 Unused in Test Set 8 256 Unused in Test Set 7 128 Unused in Test Set 6 64 Unused in Test Set 5 32 Call Processing subsystem bit state mirrors the condition of the Connect pseudo in the Connect state LED on the CRT display 12ON 0 OFF 4 16 Call Processing subsystem bit state mirrors the condition of the Access pseudo is in the Access state LED on the CRT display 12ON 0 OFF 3 8 Call Processing subsystem bit state mirrors the condition of the Page pseudo is in the Page state LED on the CRT display 12ON 0 OFF 2 4 Unused in Test Set 1 2 Call Processing subsystem bit state mirrors the condition of the Register pseudo is in the Register state LED on the CRT display 12ON 0 OFF 0 1 Call Processing subsystem bit state mirrors the condition of the Active pseudo is in the Active state LED on the CRT display 1 ON 0 OFF 273 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting 274 Accessing the Call Processing Status Register Group s Registers The following sections show the syntax and give programming examples using the Instrument BASIC programming language for the STATus commands used to access the Call Processing Status Register Group s registers Reading the Condition Register Syntax STATus CALLProc CONDition Example OUTPUT 714 STAT CALLP COND ENTER 714 Re
49. CALTernate LM E AFG2 NMT Continued On Next Page 2 A Ex See Integer Number Setting Syntax 111 AF Generator 2 Encoder AFGeneratorZW ENCoder E DUTest gt Traffic Area ALTERnate P MAIN aN wee AFG2 continued 112 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS afg2_enc sec eC RATE Does not include the STATe command e STANdard lt lt space O TARea ys 7 7 a gt 7 III MS gt BS M Bd lt MTX Returns quoted string STD450 gt C STD900 BENELUX FRANCE AUSTRIA SPAIN TURKEY THAILAND MALAYSIA SAUDII SAUDI2 CRO SLOV HUNGARY BULGARIA A M 4 dh d A S T WAAAY Returns quoted string See Integer Number Setting Syntax AF Generator 2 Encoder LTR AFGenerator228 m ENCoder N IA T X See Integer Number Setting Syntax SH RATE gt See Real Number Setting Syntax Data Rate Does not include the STATe command CMESSage D space C Messagel 2 D LTR Message lt Message2 Pu NE Returns quoted string STANdard space C LTR DD D Returns quoted string we AFG2 continued 113 AF Generator 2 Encoder EDACs AFGenerator28 ENCoder S 114 M CEDACs The STANdard slection automatically changes the Polarity setting STANdard D Vr space CK 9600 AY EA
50. D UTPUT Inst addr trig abort mode retr rep ISP you should have the box back ABLE Cannot recover T DISP Cannot regain control of the Test Set STOP SUBEND 1 Meas sinad SUB Meas sinad COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr INTEGER N ON TIMEOUT 7 5 RECOVER Timed out OUTPUT Inst addr DISP CME AFG1 DEST FM FREQ 1KHZ FM 8KHZ FM STAT OUTPUT Inst addr AFAN INP AUDIO IN DEMP OFF DET RMS OUTPUT Inst addr AFAN FILT1 C MESSAGE FILT2 99KHZ LP OUTPUT Inst addr MEAS AFR SEL SINAD RFG AMPL 113DBM OUTPUT Inst addr TRIG MODE RETR SINGLE SETT FULL Avg sinad 0 FOR N 1 TO 5 OUTPUT Inst_addr TRIG MEAS AFR SINAD ENTER Inst_addr Sinad Avg_sinad Avg_sinad Sinad EXT N RINT USING K 3D 2D K SINAD Avg_sinad N dB at 116 dBm PUT Inst addr TRIG MODE RETR REP SETT FULL UTPUT Inst addr RFG AMPL 30DBM DISP ACNT SUBEXI Timed out ON TIMEOUT Bus addr Time out value RECOVER Cannot recover OUTPUT Inst addr trig abort mode retr rep ENABLE DISP you should have the box back SUBEXIT Cannot recover DISP Cannot regain control of Test Set STOP SUBEND d oomwz S E OUTPUT Inst addr DISP ACNT CALLP MOD MEAS MEAS RFR POW FREQ ERR PRINT USING K 2D 3D K Carrier
51. ENTER 714 Num of avgs This queries the number of averages for the AVG Data Function for the Audio Frequency Analyzer Distortion measurement S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS efpkc sec Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands HI LIMIT and LO LIMIT The HI LIMIT and LO LIMIT Data Functions are used to define a measurement window which can be used to detect measured values which are outside the defined limits The GPIB commands HLIMit high limit and LLIMit low limit are used to set these data functions programmatically To Turn High and Low Measurement Limit Checking ON and OFF Use the HLIMit STATEe and LLIMit STATe commands to turn high and low measurement limit checking ON and OFF Syntax HLIMit STATe ON HLIMit STATe OFF LLIMit STATe ON LLIMit STATe OFF Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR DISTN HLIM STAT ON OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR DISTN LLIM STAT ON This turns high and low measurement limit checking ON for the Audio Frequency Analyzer Distortion measurement 185 Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands To Query the State of High and Low Measurement Limit Checking Use the HLIMit STATe and LLIMit STATe commands to query the current state of the high and low measurement limit checking The returned value is either 0 OFF or 1 ON Syntax T HLIMit STATe LLIMit STATe E Example OUTPUT 714 M
52. Execution Error decimal value 2 4 16 Bit 3 Device Dependent Error decimal value 2 3 8 Bit 2 Query Error decimal value 2 2 4 I Std event reg 32 416 8 44 1 I Set up the Standard Event Status Enable Register to generate th Summary Message OUTPUT Inst address ESE Std event reg 1 2 Calibration Status Register Group Condition register conditions which will set the Summary Message TRUE if they occur Bit 4 TX Auto zero failed decimal value 2 4 16 Bit 3 Voltmeter Self cal failed decimal value 2 3 8 I Bit 2 Counter Self cal failed decimal value 2 2 4 Bit 1 Sampler Self_cal failed decimal value 2 1 2 299 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations 87 88 Enable Register to generate a Service Request SRQ if the Summary Message s become TRUE GPIB Service Requests 410 Bit 0 Spec Anal Self cal failed decimal value 2 0 1 420 430 Calibration_reg 16 8 4 2 1 440 450 l Set the Transition Filters to allow only positive transitions in 460 the assigned condition s to pass to the Event Register 470 l 480 OUTPUT Inst_address STAT CAL PTR Calibration_reg 490 OUTPUT Inst_address STAT CAL NTR 0 500 510 Set up the Calibration Status Register Group Enable Register to 520 generate the Summary Message 2 38 M 540 OUTPUT Inst address STAT CAL ENAB Calibration reg 550 560 The Calibration
53. Figure 31 on page 428 illustrates the primary call processing functions available in the Call Processing Subsystem Each box represents a call processing state and includes the measurement information available while in that state Each box also includes the name of the annunciator on the call processing screen that will be lit while in that call processing state Events which trigger transitions between the various states are shown on the diagram Events which are initiated from the Test Set are shown in solid lines and events which are initiated from the mobile station are shown in dashed lines 427 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Description of the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface State Idle Annunciator None Meas None Active gt Page State Page Annunciator e Page Meas RECCW A RECCW B RECCW C State Active Annunciator e Active Meas None State Register Annunciator Register Meas RECCW A RECCW B RECCW C Phone Number ESN hexadecimal SCM Register State Access Annunciator es Access Meas None Release END key pressed while on an active State Connected Annunciator e Connect Meas RVCOrdCon TX Freq Error TX Power FM Deviation voice channel Figure 31 428 SEND key pressed while Roaming or in Service mode Y State Originate
54. If you are not familiar with SCPI it is recommended that you obtain a copy of the book A Beginner s Guide to SCPI ISBN 0 201 56350 Addison Wesley Publishing Company Test Set PROGram Subsystem 396 The Test Set was designed to store only one IBASIC program in RAM memory at any given time The PROGram Subsystem commands as implemented in the Test Set operate differently than described in the SCPI Standard In addition the SCPI PROGram Subsystem commands which were designed to support multiple programs are not supported in the Test Set S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb NOTE Supported SCPI Commands Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem The Test Set supports the following subset of the SELected SCPI commands e SELected DEFine e SELected DEFine e SELected DELete ALL e SELected EXECute e SELected NUMBer e SELected NUMBer e SELected STATe e SELected STATe e SELected STRing e SELected STRing e SELected WAIT Unsupported SCPI Commands The Test Set does not support the following SCPI commands e CATalog e SELected DELete SELected SELected MALLocate SELected MALLocate SELected NAME SELected NAME EXPLicit DEFine EXPLicit DEFine EXPLicit DELete EXPLicit EXECute EXPLicit MALLocate EXPLicit MALLocate e EXPLicit NUMBer e EXPLicit NUMBer EXPLicit STATe EXPLicit STATe e EXPLicit STRing e EXPLicit S
55. LOCation NAME 7 H RUNTESt RUN seperated by commas as j J Returns quoted string Returns quoted string MC RAM gt hee ROM M M Card A ce Disk 2 P p law lt space C J lt string gt e 1 ing 2 Returns quoted string Returns unquoted string 3 elements yas Ne S LIB Rary TEST continued seperated by commas 171 Tests m l 7 A gt CSEQNumber ES 7s space gt gt lt integer value gt 2 NUMBer a 2 7 space gt lt integer value SPEC X QUE o UJ e INUMBer rN wf NL gt i gt strin gt uM g uu seperated by commas Returns unquoted string 3 elements a a space gt lt integer value mU gt lt real value gt i C lt string gt gt lt real value gt e o INS 4 STRing space SN FON Ig yA real value gt e espace gt lt integer value Upper 7 Lower M Both A None 2 seperated by commas Returns unquoted string 4 elements TC real value 5 D NA gt No N rS f j XSpace gt i ace string Example TEST SEQN NUMB 3 1 Y 3 N 7 Y This command sets the number and the order of tests steps for test 1 tests all channels Y yes All Chans for test 3 does not testall c
56. NO eC Auto AN Manual gt Returns quoted string RF Generator RF Generator T E C RFGenerator J For RF Generator measurements see the MEASure command diagram 1 CATTenuator gt On gt 5 Cy n lt i EA Atten Hold Off b Returns quoted string J e AMPLitude See Real Number Setting Syntax gt FREQuency See Real Number Setting Syntax HE Does not include the STATe command FM Coupling DCZero jJ J COUPling space gt AC OY DC gt 2 Returns quoted string MODulation m AOUT 3 space OK AC C Audio Out MS DC P n Returns quoted string EXTernal K Mace A See Real Number Setting Syntax FM See Real Number Setting Syntax DESTination space gt ae AM pK Mod In To lt MVD gt Returns quoted string 4 PEMPhasis lt space OK lt On gt L Mic Pre Emp CUBE qe Py MODE space gt gt Auto puro ma Hoa 4 7 o M AA Returns quoted string OUTPu space e lt RF Out gt De lt Dupl A m Returns quoted string RF power must not be applied while zeroing Set the RF GENERATOR screen Amplitude field to off to prevent internal cross coupling into the power detector while zeroing 163 Radio Interface CCONFigure l
57. Operation Status Register Group The Operation Status Register Group contains information about the state of the measurement systems in the Test Set This status group is accessed using the STATus commands The Operation Status Register Group uses 16 bit registers and includes a Condition Register Transition Filters an Event Register an Enable Register and a Summary Message Refer to the Status Register Structure Overview on page 245 for a discussion of status register operation Figure 8 shows the structure and STATus commands for the Operation Status Register Group STATus OPERation CONDition 2 PTRansition STATus OPERation integer 2 NTRansition integer STATus OPERation EVENt STATus OPERation ENABle lt integer gt Summary Message Bit Logical OR to bit 7 of Status Byte Register N ak En E E N a w N E k o 5 Condition Transition Event Enable eee Register Filter Registers Register Register Figure 8 Operation Status Register Group 252 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Table 18 shows the Operation Status Register Group Condition Register bit assignments Table 18 Operation Status Register Group Condition Register Bit Assignments Bit Number raus Condition Comment 15 32768 Not Used Always 0 Defined by SCPI Version 1
58. Processing Subsystem commands ACTive REGister PAGE HANDoff RELease The Call Processing Subsystem Status Register Group should be used to control program flow 219 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands CLS Clear Status NOTE ESE Standard Event Status Enable ESE Standard Event Status Enable Query ESR Standard Event Status Register Query 220 The CLS command clears the contents sets all bits to zero of all Event Registers summarized in the Status Byte The CLS command also empties all queues removes all current messages which are summarized in the Status Byte except the Output Queue The following Event Registers are affected Hardware 1 Status Register Hardware 2 Status Register Questionable Data Signal Register Standard Event Status Register Operational Status Register Calibration Status Register Communicate Status Register The Following message queues are affected Error Message Queue The CLS command does not clear the contents of the Message screen which is displayed on the CRT when SHIFT RX is selected This display is only cleared when the unit is powered on The Test Set responds to the ESE command See Standard Event Status Register Group in the Advanced Operations chapter of the Agilent 8920B Programmer s Guide for a detailed explanation of the ESE command The Test Set responds to the ESE command See Standard Event Status Register Group in the Advanced Operations c
59. RECEIVE ADDRESS 10 manne Serial Port B ch6drw4 drw Figure 26 Connecting the Test Set Serial Port to a PC or Terminal Table 40 Port 9 or Port 10 serial cable connections RJ 11 pins Signal DB 9 pins 6 Transmit Address 10 2 5 Transmit Address 9 2 4 Ground 5 3 not used 2 Receive Address 9 3 1 Receive Address 10 3 364 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports Serial Port 9 Configuration Table 41 on page 366 and the following paragraphs describe how to configure Serial Port 9 for communications with an external PC or terminal Implications of the various choices are discussed 1 Under the To Screen menu select More then select IO CONFIG 2 The I O CONFIGURE screen will be displayed 3 Set the Serial Baud Rate Parity Data Length Stop Length Rev Pace and Xmt Pace fields to match your PC or terminal settings The recommended settings are shown in Table 41 on page 366 These settings will be retained by the Test Set They will not change if the PRESET key is pressed if the Test Set receives a RST Common Command or the power is turned on and off 4 Setthe Serial Infieldto Inst This routes Serial Port 9 to the IBASIC Command Line field Characters typed on the external PC or terminal will now appear in the IBASIC Command Line 5 Set the IBASIC Echo field to ON This will cause IBASIC character output from commands
60. Radio Interface GRINTerface gt a SIN Terruptl y S e 6cINTerup2 J 4 N e STATus DE See Integer Number Setting Syntax gt 7 fo Nl A I Arm gt Disable UM Returns quoted string zd Returns Armed or Disabled A Returns integer value e PARallel K eCINPut Ja DATA Ne A READ Me OUTPut K Mo T d DATA Se High en CH Low ES Returns quoted string Ed See Integer Number Setting Syntax 164 S agilent s SEND D AS lt s ee e 920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS rin sec Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Analyzer SANalyzer E For Spectrum Analyzer measurements see the MEASure command diagram f e CATTenuator s space Os aa 40 dB gt Input Atten et 20 dB M lt 0 dB A Returns quoted string MODE Jj space O Auto APO e Hold Y A Returns quoted string SN y C CFRequency e DISPlay y 1 dB div 2 dB div 10 dB div gt x s 3 space gt J UU T lt 7 Returns quoted string 4 CONTroI E lt lt space a 5 lt Main gt L Y lt RF Gen gt Marker DS Auxiliary gt Returns quoted string Ed See Integer Number Setting Syntax See Real Number Setting Syntax tEXCurision S gt POSitionl i Does not include the STATe command 3 See Real Number Setting Syntax C NPLevel
61. Reading the Event Register Syntax STATus HARDwarel EV ENt Example OUTPUT 714 STAT HARD1 EVEN ENTER 714 Register value 287 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Clearing the Event Register The EVENT register is cleared whenever it is queried or whenever the Common Command CLS is sent to the Test Set Reading the Enable Register Syntax STATus HARDwarel ENABle Example OUTPUT 714 STAT HARD1 ENAB ENTER 714 Register value Writing the Enable Register Syntax STATus HARDwarel ENABle integer Example OUTPUT 714 STAT HARD1 ENAB 256 Clearing the Enable Register The ENABLE register is cleared by writing to it with an integer value of zero 288 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Communicate Status Register Group Figure 17 The Communicate Status Register Group contains information about the Test Set s hardware This status group is accessed using the STATus commands The Communicate Status Register Group uses 16 bit registers and includes a Condition Register Transition Filters an Event Register an Enable Register and a Summary Message Refer to the Status Reporting Structure Overview on page 239 for a discussion of status register operation Figure 17 shows the structure and STATus commands for the Communicate Status Register Gro
62. Returns quoted string 300 Hz e RBANdwidth Res BW Carrier Ref B NA 2 7 J a 1 kHz gt WS J m 1 Returns quoted string o Unmod RMODulation Mod RES ma Returns quoted string 95 Adjacent Channel Power ACP 96 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS acp sec AF Analyzer AF Analyzer CAFANalyzer d AIN J space Gnd LH Audio In Lo hee Float 4 Ge 60 ToHi v Returns quoted string CURRent x 4 e J ZERO y kt a Suis CY CDEMPhasis OS lt lt space A 750 uS 2T lt Off b e GAIN b NN NE y De Emp Gain lt gt lt space 8C MS DETector gt Y E A Pk Det To e SETTling wee AFAN continued IN AT ii 0C PKLocation 3 J gt y 9 1 A 0 Returns quoted string 0 dB 10 dB 20 dB 30 dB Returns quoted string RMS RMS SQRT2 PK PK PK 2 PK MAX PK HOLD PK HOLD PK 2 Hd PK MX Hd WEN 7 J 12 Returns quoted string o a AA Cy A Jl SINN j Iu X ES No en Na ULLAL lt space C Filters Y B Se De Emp gt 7 Returns quoted string J GN FN space PN lt Fast gt C Slow A Returns quoted string 97 AF Analyzer AFANalyzer gt ELResistor gt 1 See Real Number Setting Syntax i Does not in
63. S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS memcard fb Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Mass Storage Access Mass Storage Access Program and data files stored on the Test Set s various mass storage locations can be selectively accessed from the following screens The TESTS IBASIC Controller screen Any type of file can be accessed from this screen either through an IBASIC program or the IBASIC command line The TESTS Main Menu screen using the Select Procedure Location and Select Procedure Filename fields Only procedure files shipped with Agilent 11807 software or procedure files created using the TESTS Save Delete Procedure screen of the TESTS Subsystem can be accessed using these fields When created procedure file names are prefixed with a lower case p pFM TEST A corresponding code file prefixed with a lower case c CFM TEST on the must reside on the same media for the procedure to work Refer to the TESTS screen description in the User s Guide for further information on the TESTS Subsystem The TESTS Save Delete Procedure screen using the Select Procedure Location and Enter Procedure Filename fields This screen is used to create procedure files When created procedure file names are prefixed with a lower case p pFM TEST The Signaling Decoder screen in NMT mode Only user written NMT tests can be accessed from this screen NMT test files must be saved with a lower case n prefix nNMT
64. Time Seconds S Data Rate Bits per second BPS Current Amperes A Resistance Ohms OHM Relative Level decibels DB or percent PCT Marker Position Division DIV FM Modulation Hertz HZ AM Modulation Percent PCT Use the UNITS command to determine the GPIB Units for a measurement result or field setting refer to Reading Back GPIB Units on page 80 for more information 78 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS guidelin fo Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation Changing GPIB Units Use the UNITs command to change the GPIB Units setting for selected measurement or instrument setup fields Only the GPIB units for power relative level and frequency error can be changed Table 10 lists the measurement and instrument setup fields which have changeable GPIB Units Table 10 GPIB Units That Can Be Changed Function Available GPIB Units TX Power measurement W or DBM Adjacent Channel Power LRATio URATio DB or PCT LLEVel ULEVel W or DBM SINAD measurement DB or PCT DISTN measurement DB or PCT SNR measurement DB or PCT RF Generator Amplitude W or DBM or V or DBUV Frequency Error HZ or PPM For example the following BASIC language program statements change the GPIB Units for the TX Power measurement from W to dBm OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW UNIT DBM 79 Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation 80 Reading Back GPIB
65. mobile station s RF carrier while on a voice channel Four characteristics of the RF carrier are measured TX Freq Error TX Power FM Deviation and AF Frequency The Meas information is only available in the connected state that is the Connect annunciator is lit Figure 36 on page 449 shows the layout of the CALL CONTROL screen when Meas is selected S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen CALL CONTROL Display Data Meas T4 Frea Error FM Deviation kHz 0 0 19 3 050 O Active E esiste TA Power EN AF Frea C heces 0 00854 B 96908 B Connect bL Type Yoice Channel Rssiennment Ta Screen 038 m Chan Handot f MEF 5000 ME Release Amplitude O Pr Ll eo Order dBn 5 SID SAT 5970 EME SPEC AHL EEFI MS Id Phone Hun Hore Figure 36 CALL CONTROL Screen with Meas Selected Reading The Modulation Quality Measurement Fields The MEAS selection brings some of the Test Set s Audio Analyzer fields and some of the Test Set s RF Analyzer fields onto the CALL CONTROL screen for the purpose of making modulation quality measurements on the mobile station s RF carrier while on a voice channel The measurement results contained in these fields are accessed using the MEASure command See Measure on page 147 for detailed command syntax Syntax See Measure on page 147 Example
66. redefining an existing program deleting a nonexistent program or in general referencing a nonexistent program Illegal variable name An attempt was made to reference a nonexistent variable in a program Program currently running Certain operations dealing with programs are illegal while the program is running For example deleting a running program is not possible Program syntax error Indicates that syntax error appears in a downloaded program 561 Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error 562 286 300 310 811 312 313 314 315 330 350 Program runtime error Device specific error This code indicates only that a Device Dependent Error as defined in JEEE 486 2 11 5 1 1 6 has occurred System error Indicates that some error termed system error by the device has occurred Memory error Indicates that an error was detected in the device s memory PUD memory lost Indicates that the protected user data saved by the PUD command has been lost Calibration memory lost Indicates that nonvolatile calibration data used by the CAL command has been lost Save recall memory lost Indicates that the nonvolatile data saved by the SAV command has been lost Configuration memory lost Indicates that nonvolatile configuration data saved by the device has been lost Self test failed Queue overflow This code indi
67. space gt GPIB units gt Returns GPIB units K 178 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS nms sec Multiple Number Measurement Syntax Multiple Number Measurement Syntax Previous Syntax E gt DUNits 3 gt lt space unis gt LS Se Returns units UNITS E lt gt lt space gt lt GPIB units gt Returns GPIB units C N STATE m space gt gt 1 Ms ad xy ON y l lt OFF gt 2 Returns lor0O 179 Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands Most front panel keys have an equivalent GPIB command for remote use The various key functions are explained in more detail in the User s Guide All command examples are in BASIC SHIFT key CANCEL key CURSOR CONTROL knob These functions are not required for GPIB use and have no equivalent GPIB commands DATA Keys In addition to the numeric keys the DATA keys contain the units of measure keys and the ON OFF YES NO and ENTER keys Setting units of measure through GPIB is described in Specifying Units of Measure for Settings and Measurement Results on page 75 The ON OFF function is described in Using the STATe Command on page 87 The YES NO and ENTER keys are not required for GPIB use and have no equivalent GPIB commands 180 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS efpkc sec Equivalent Front Panel Key Comma
68. such as LIST PRINT or DISPLAY or error messages to echo characters to Serial Port 9 the characters will in turn show up on the external PC or terminal screen This will allow program listings and syntax error messages to be seen on the external PC or terminal 6 Another method which can be used to output characters to the external PC or terminal is to execute the IBASIC command PRINTER IS 9 This causes IBASIC to direct all print output to Select Code 9 Select Code 9 is the Test Set s Serial Port 9 Select Code 1 is the Test Set s CRT Select Code 1 is also the default address for the PRINTER IS command so all program printer output defaults to the Test Set s CRT unless changed with the PRINTER IS command 7 Setthe Inst Echo field to ON This will cause characters to be echoed back to the external PC or terminal as they are received at Serial Port 9 If the echo feature of the external PC or terminal is also enabled all the characters sent to the Test Set will be displayed twice on the external PC or terminal Enable echo on only one device either the Test Set or the external PC or terminal 365 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports Receive and Transmit Pacing When receiving characters into the IBASIC Command Line field the Test Set s microprocessor responds to each entry and no buffering is required Therefore when using your PC or terminal to send characters to the IBASIC C
69. 1 on the Test Set Save Recall register files stored on the Test Set s various mass storage locations can be accessed using the front panel SAVE and RECALL keys 333 Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage DOS and LIF File System Considerations DOS and LIF File System Considerations Program and data files can be stored and retrieved from IBASIC using either the DOS or LIF file system The media format DOS or LIF is determined automatically by the IBASIC file system when the mass storage device is first accessed and the appropriate format is used from then on DOS and LIF use different file naming conventions In addition the Test Set uses certain file naming conventions which are unique to the Test Set Unexpected file operation can occur if proper consideration is not given to the file naming conventions File Naming Conventions NOTE 334 LIF File Naming Conventions The LIF file system is used by Instrument BASIC on the HP 9000 Series 200 300 Workstations It is a flat file system which means that it has no subdirectories The LIF file system allows up to 10 character file names which are case sensitive The LIF file system preserves the use of uppercase and lowercase characters for file storage and retrieval For example the file names Filel FILE1 filel and FiLel could represent different files LIF files cannot start with a space and any file name longer than 10 characters is considered an error The Test Set s
70. 284 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Table 24 shows the Hardware Status Register Group 1 s Condition Register bit assignments Table 24 Hardware Status Register Group 1 Condition Register Bit Assignments Bit Binary da Nubes Weighting Condition Comment 15 32768 Not Used Always 0 Defined by SCPI Version 1994 0 14 16384 Radio Interface Card Interrupt 2 Tripped 13 8192 Radio Interface Card Interrupt 1 Tripped 12 4096 Signaling Decoder Measurement Results Available 11 2048 Signaling Decoder Input Level Too Low 10 1024 Signaling Decoder is Measuring 9 512 Signaling Decoder is Armed 8 256 Signaling Encoder Sending If the Signaling Mode selected has two Auxiliary Information information fields such as the AMPS Filler and Message fields and both fields are being sent this bit will be set 7 128 Signaling Encoder Sending If the Signaling Mode selected has only one Information information field and the field is being sent this bit will be set high If the Signaling Mode selected has two information fields such as the AMPS Filler and Message fields and only one field is being sent this bit will be set high This bit is not active if the Signaling Encoder Mode is set to Function Generator 6 64 Communication Register 1 one or more of the enabled events have Group Summary Message occurred since the last readi
71. 31 Mass Storage Devices 323 accessing 333 default locations 331 EPSON cards 329 330 341 external disk drives 328 351 initializing media for 338 345 350 OTP card 330 341 overview 325 PCMCIA cards 329 330 341 RAM Disk 327 349 ROM card 330 341 ROM Disk 327 340 selecting 332 SRAM card 329 341 write protecting 343 Mass storage locations default values 331 selecting 332 Mass Storage Volume Specifier 345 Measure HP IB command syntax diagram 147 measurement active 27 41 querying ON OFF state 88 querying value 27 42 74 recommended sequence 38 turning ON and OFF 87 Measurement speed increasing see In creasing Measurement Speed 234 Memory Cards 323 address 345 battery see Battery 344 initializing 338 345 inserting 341 Mass Storage Volume Specifier 345 OTP cards 330 part numbers 341 removing 341 ROM cards 330 SRAM cards 329 using 341 write protect switch 343 message abbreviated address word 501 access 492 access type parameters global action Index 492 C FILMESS 498 control filler 498 extended address word order 502 extended address word voice channel assignment 504 FCC mobile station control word 1 501 FCC mobile station control word 2 or der 502 FCC mobile station control word 2 voice channel assignment 504 FVC mobile station control order 506 FVC mobile station control voice channel assignment 508 FVC O Mes 506 FVC V Mes 508 MS IntVC
72. 334 storing code files 338 File types 338 Files backing up 346 copying 347 storing 338 Firmware error non recoverable 547 first word of called address 473 Front panel functions not programmable 47 ON OFF key 87 180 Front panel keys CANCEL key 180 CURSOR CONTROL knob 180 ENTER key 180 HOLD key 205 HP IB command syntax 180 k1 k5 k1 k3 keys 205 LOCAL key 201 MEAS RESET key 201 NO Key 180 PRESET key 201 PREV key 205 PRINT key 205 RECALL key 202 SAVE key 202 SHIFT key 180 YES key 180 FVC mobile station control message order 506 voice channel assignment 508 H Hardware Status Register 1 Group 284 accessing registers contained in 286 condition register bit assignments 285 Hardware Status Register 2 Group 280 accessing registers contained in 282 condition register bit assignments 281 HFS Hierarchical File System 334 Hierarchical File System HFS 334 HP 8920A Memory Card Part Numbers 341 HP 8920B Memory Card Part Numbers 341 HP IB Active Controller 43 313 314 address displaying 49 200 address factory setting 49 address setting 49 200 arming measurements 231 Attribute units changing 83 Attribute units definition 81 Attribute units guidelines 86 Attribute units querying 86 changing a field setting 45 Common Commands 208 Common Commands RST 201 Common Commands TRG 224 configuration 43 display units changing 76 display units defi
73. 45 Chapter 1 Using GPIB Getting Started The following example reads several fields Example OU OU EN OU OU 714 D ISP AFAN Display the AF Analyzer screen 714 AFAN INP Query the AF Anl In field 714 Af input Enter returned value into a string ariable 714 DISP RFG Display the RF Generator screen 714 RFG FREQ Query the RF Gen Frequency field EN ER 714 Freq Enter the returned value into a numeric variable NOTE When querying measurements or settings through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric GPIB Units or Attribute Units regardless of the current Display Units setting Refer to GPIB Units UNITSs on page 78 and Attribute Units AUNits on page 81 for further information values in To Make a Simple Measurement The basic method for making a measurement is very similar to the method used to read a field setting 1 Use the DISPlay command to access the screen containing the desired measurement 2 Usethe MEASure form of the syntax for that measurement to place the measured value into the Test Set s output buffer 3 Enter the value into the correct variable type within the program context refer to Chapter 4 GPIB Commands for proper variable type The following example measures the power of an RF signal Example oO U OU PU PU nter th Display the RF Analyzer screen 714 D
74. 6 conductors Three of the wires are designated as Serial I O Port address 9 and the other three wires are designated Serial I O Port address 10 also referred to as Serial Port B These select codes cannot be changed 360 S agilenti8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS libasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports Serial Port 9 Serial Port 9 is used for developing and editing IBASIC programs since it can be connected directly to the IBASIC Command Line field It can also be used for data I O from an IBASIC program Settings can be changed from the I O CONFIGURE screen using IBASIC commands executed from the IBASIC Command Line field or using IBASIC commands executed from an IBASIC program Serial Port 10 Serial Port 10 is primarily used for data I O from an IBASIC program to a device under test DUT Settings can be changed using IBASIC commands executed from the IBASIC Command Line field or using IBASIC commands executed from an IBASIC program but not from the I O CONFIGURE screen Reason for Two Serial Ports A typical application uses serial port 10 to send and receive data to and from a DUT and uses serial port 9 to print or log test results to a serial printer or PC In the program development environment serial port 9 can be used to communicate with the external PC or terminal and serial port 10 can be connected to a serial printer for generating program listings or as the de
75. 714 MEAS AFR FM REF STAT OFF SUBEND S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONFIGURE Screen Programming the CALL CONFIGURE Screen CALL COHFIGURE CHAR Ta Pur cero Detector FMS To Screen Figure 57 The CALL CONFIGURE Screen This screen is used to set some of the less commonly used Test Set configuration parameters When the CALL CONFIGURE screen is displayed and the Call Processing Subsystem is in the Connect state the host firmware constantly monitors the mobile station s transmitted carrier power If the power falls below 0 0005 Watts the error message RF Power Loss indicates loss of Voice Channel will be displayed and the Test Set will terminate the call and return to the Active state 517 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONFIGURE Screen NOTE CMAX 518 In order to ensure that the host firmware makes the correct decisions regarding the presence of the mobile stations s RF carrier the Test Set s RF power meter should be zeroed before using the Call Processing Subsystem Failure to zero the power meter can result in erroneous RF power measurements See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 433 for information on zeroing the RF Power meter manually Refer to Using the Analog Call Processing Subsystem in the Application Guide for op
76. 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Page Page Register Register Release Set Message Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL BIT Screen See Page on page 455 for programming information See Page on page 455 for programming information See Register on page 458 for programming information See Register on page 458 for programming information See Release on page 459 for programming information This field is used to select the desired forward control channel or forward voice channel message to be displayed The MESSage command is used to control this field The query form of the command that is MESSage can be used to determine which forward control channel or forward voice channel message is currently being displayed See Reading the CALL BIT Screen Message Fields on page 484 for information on how to read the contents of the individual messages Syntax MESSage Forward Control or Voice Channel Message Word gt lt gt MESSage Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP MESS SPC WORD1 OUTPUT 714 CALLP MESS ENTER 714 Message 483 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL BIT Screen Reading the CALL BIT Screen Message Fields This section provides programming information on how to read the contents of individual fields in the signaling messag
77. 9 512 Unused in Test Set 8 256 Unused in Test Set 7 128 Unused in Test Set 6 64 Unused in Test Set 5 32 Unused in Test Set 4 16 TX Power Auto Zero Failed 3 8 Voltmeter Self Calibration Failed 2 4 Counter Self Calibration Failed 1 2 Sampler Self Calibration Failed 0 1 Spectrum Analyzer Self Calibration Failed 277 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting 278 Accessing the Calibration Status Register Group s Registers The following sections show the syntax and give programming examples using the Instrument BASIC programming language for the STATus commands used to access the Calibration Status Register Group s registers Reading the Condition Register Syntax STATus CALibration CONDition Example OUTPUT 714 STAT CAL COND ENTER 714 Register_value Reading the Transition Filters Syntax STATus CALibration PTRansition STATus CALibration NTRansition Example OUTPUT 714 STAT CAL PTR ENTER 714 Register_value Writing the Transition Filters Syntax STATus CALibration PTRansition lt integer gt STATus CALibration NTRansition lt integer gt Example OUTPUT 714 STAT CAL PTR 256 Reading the Event Register Syntax STATus CALibration EVENt Example OUTPUT 714 STAT CAL EVEN ENTER 714 Register value S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Cha
78. ADRS The ADRS key displays the Test Set s GPIB address in the upper left hand corner of the CRT There is no equivalent GPIB command for the ADRS key The current address can also be viewed by looking at the HP IB Adrs field on the I O CONFIGURE screen The Test Set s GPIB address can be changed through GPIB by using the CONFigure BADDress commands If the Test Set s GPIB address is changed programmatically all future GPIB commands must use the new address Syntax CONFigure BADDress integer number Example OUTPUT 714 CONF BADD 15 This sets the Test Set s GPIB address to 15 The Test Set s GPIB address can be queried through GPIB by using the CONFigure BADDress commands Syntax CONFigure BADDress Example OUTPUT 714 CONF BADD ENTER 714 Address This queries the Test Set s GPIB address S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS efpkc sec Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands LOCAL The LOCAL key returns the Test Set to local front panel control The Test Set returns to Local operation full front panel control when either the Go To Local GTL bus command is received the front panel LOCAL key is pressed or the REN line goes false When the Test Set returns to local mode the output signals and internal settings remain unchanged except that triggering is reset to TRIG MODE SETT FULL RETR REP The LOCAL key will not function if the Test Set is in the local lockout mode MEAS RESE
79. BASIC User s Handbook 323 Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Default File System Default File System Default File System The Test Set s default file system is the Logical Interchange Format LIF System The LIF file system is used by Instrument BASIC on the HP 9000 Series 200 300 Workstations See LIF File Naming Conventions on page 334 for further information on the LIF file system This implies that the Test Set expect a LIF formatted media for operations as shown in Table 37 Stored Program Code File Types on page 338 The Test Set s file system supports both LIF and DOS The media format DOS or LIF is determined automatically by the Test Set s file system when the mass storage device is first accessed and the appropriate format is used from then on for mass storage operations Table 31 Test Set Default File System Activity Default File System Manual front panel operations LIF a SAVE RECALL register access b TESTS Subsystem file access c Signaling Decoder NMT file access IBASIC mass storage operations LIF is default DOS is also LIF supported GPIB commands for LIF a SAVE RECALL register access b TESTS Subsystem file access c Signaling Decoder NMT file access TESTS Subsystem LIF a Procedure files b Library files c Code files 324 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS memcard fo Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Mass Storage Dev
80. BASIC subprogram In order for this subprogram to work properly the following conditions must be true when the subroutine is called e Call Processing Subsystem is in the Connect state that is the Connect annunciator is lit the mobile station s speaker output is connected to the Test Set s AUDIO IN connector e the mobile station s microphone input must be connected to the Test Set s AUDIO OUT connector The intended purpose of this example subprogram is to illustrate how to program the ANALOG MEAS screen There are a variety of ways to make an RF Sensitivity measurement The method used in this example is based upon the EIA IS 19 B Standard May 1988 The method and standard chosen for any particular application will depend upon the mobile station being tested S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc f 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the ANALOG MEAS Screen SUB Meas_sinad TEGER Loop_counter UTPUT 714 DISP CME UTPUT 714 AFG1 DE PUT 714 AFAN 1 E FM FREQ 1KHZ FM 8KHZ FM STAT ON AUDIO IN DEMP OFF DET RMS PUT 714 AFAN FILT1 C MESSAGE FILT2 gt 99KHZ LP UTPUT 714 MEAS AFR SEL SINAD UTPUT 714 RFG AMPL 116DBM UTPUT 714 TRIG MODE RETR SINGLE SETT FULL Running total 0 FOR Loop counter 1 TO 5 OUTPUT 714 TRIG MEAS AFR
81. CDCSs 4 DIME FGENerator Y GATE D See Real Number Setting Syntax i Does not include the STATe command J N DPAGing J GATE D See Real Number Setting Syntax Trigger Pattern bin ie uunc 2 Returns quoted string Does not include the STATe command V 5STANdard gt A UTS ay AA we DEC continued GSC AY gt lt POCSAG gt 2 Returns quoted string 143 Decoder TSEQuential MPT1327 and LTR DECoder a S gt TSEQuential D Ke MPT1327 TIME K NS tN GATE STANdard _ See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe command MC CCIRI CY MEL CCIR2 M lt CCITT A EEA gt hee EIA S a Euro J c NATEL M ZNEI J ce ZVEI2 Jj Returns quoted string WA Y MODE ee LTR IN SLOT gt Di PA RESPONSE DS 7 Returns quoted string M DISPlay xe space gt gt lt Radio ae lt Repeater e Returns quoted string V 5STANdard gt e se 144 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS dec sec AA space O LTR Returns quoted string Display CDISPlay gt lt space gt X ACNTrol B Fe ACPower X AFAN alyzer A CANanlyzer e CBIT LA 5 CON Figure p 5 CDANalyzer 2
82. CODE DOMAIN ANALYZER TESTs TESTS Main Menu CDMAtest CDMA DUAL MODE CELLULAR TFReq TESTS Channel TEST Information CGENerator CDMA GENERATOR THLP TESTS HELP CONFigure CONFIGURE TIBasic TESTS IBASIC Controller DECoder SIGNALING DECODER TMAKe TESTS Save Delete Procedure DUPLex DUPLEX TEST TPARm TESTS Tests Parameters ENCoder SIGNALING ENCODER TPRint TESTS Printer Setup HELP HELP TSEQn TESTS Order of Tests IOConfigure I O CONFIGURE TSPec TESTS Pass Fail Limits MESSages MESSAGE TX TX TEST OSCilloscope OSCILLOSCOPE PCONfigure PRINT CONFIGURE PDCtest PDC CELLULAR TEST PHPtest PHP CELLULAR TEST RFANalyzer RF ANALYZER 206 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS efpkc sec Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands 207 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands IEEE 488 2 Common Commands The IEEE 488 2 Standard defines a set of common commands which provide for uniform communication between devices on the GPIB These commands are common to all instruments which comply with the IEEE 488 2 Standard These commands control some of the basic instrument functions such as instrument identification instrument reset and instrument status reporting The following common commands are implemented in the Test Set Table 14 Test Set IEEE 488 2 Common Commands Mnemonic Command Name CLS Clear Status Command ESE Standard Event Status Enable Command ESE Sta
83. Call Processing Subsystem Programming the ANALOG MEAS Screen Requirements for Using The ANALOG MEAS Screen CAUTION The Test Set must be in the connected state that is the Connect annunciator is lit in order to use the ANALOG MEAS screen The mobile station s speaker output must be connected to the Test Set s AUDIO IN connector and the mobile station s microphone input must be connected to the Test Set s AUDIO OUT connector in order to use the ANALOG MEAS screen Refer to Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set on page 430 for connection information If the mobile station does not have audio connections the ANALOG MEAS screen cannot be used The host firmware does not monitor the mobile station s transmitted carrier power while the ANALOG MEAS screen is displayed If the power falls below 0 0005 Watts no error message is displayed nor will the Test Set terminate the call while on the ANALOG MEAS screen How To Program The ANALOG MEAS Screen AF Anl In AF Freq The ANALOG MEAS screen combines some of the Test Set s Audio Analyzer fields and some of the Test Set s RF Generator fields onto one screen for the purpose of testing the audio characteristics of the mobile station Only those fields which are pertinent to testing the mobile station s audio characteristics have been combined onto the ANALOG MEAS screen Since the fields on the ANALOG MEAS screen are imported from other screens those fields are programmed
84. Command bits 0 5 bit 6 and bit 7 are unaffected The STB Status Byte Query allows the programmer to determine the current contents bit pattern of the Status Byte Register and the Master Summary Status MSS message as a single element The Test Set responds to the STB query by placing the binary weighted decimal value of the Status Byte Register and the MSS message into the Output Queue The response represents the sum of the binary weighted values of the Status Byte Register s bits 0 5 and 7 weights 1 2 4 8 16 32 and 128 respectively and the MSS summary message weight 64 Thus the response to STB when considered as a binary value is identical to the response to a serial poll except that the MSS message of 1 indicates that the Test Set has at least one reason for requesting service Refer to the IEEE 488 2 1987 Standard for a complete description of the MSS message The decimal value of the bit pattern will be a positive integer in the range of 0 to 255 The response data is obtained by reading the Output Queue into a numeric variable integer or real S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Example BASIC program to read Status Byte with STB command 10 INTEGER Stat byte reg Stat byte Mstr sum msg 20 OUTPUT 714 STB 30 ENTER 714 Stat byte reg 40 Stat byte BINAND Stat byte reg 191 mask out the MSS bit 50 PRINT Stat byte 60 Mst
85. Does not include the STATe command SAN continued lt CINPut D RF In DAY E Ant M E l i Returns quoted string MARKer y MM l GCFREquency Center Freq SPEAK gt J NEE Wet Peak RLEVel _ J S Ref Level 165 Spectrum Analyzer SANalyzer a TI RFGenerator Re REAOL space om h VAT lt Track Fixed 2 Returns quoted string Nw RLE Vel gt See Real Number Setting Syntax SPAN gt See Real Number Setting Syntax TGENerator CAMPLitude See Real Number Setting Syntax COFRequency See Real Number Setting Syntax Offset Freq Does not include the STATe command e CDESTination RFOut gt C Port Dupl Pa Returns quoted string SWEep gt Kx Norm gt gt 7 7 a lt Invert 7 Returns quoted string n Er UEEITRACe 74 i i NORMalize Ae A Only 270 Port lt A B gt Returns quoted string A G SaAVE Y SAVE 3 Save B MHOL4 No Pk Avg gt C Y a Pk Hold gt lt Avg 1 gt lt Avg 2 gt Avg 3 zd lt Avg 4 A lt Avg 5 M Avg 10 M a Avg 20 M lt Avg 50 gt Avg 100 A Returns quoted string 166 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS san sec GPIB Only Commands GPIB Only Commands SPECial A AA TOTALUSERRAM_ Returns integer
86. Enter a file name then initiate the file transfer The PC is now looking for ASCII text to come in the serial port Load the program to be transferred into the Test Set Execute the IBASIC LIST command on the IBASIC Command Line The program listing will be sent to Serial Port 9 and be received by the terminal emulator software on the PC When the listing is finished terminate the file transfer by selecting Stop on Windows or Escape on ProComm 392 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Serial I O from IBASIC Programs Serial I O from IBASIC Programs There are two serial ports available for I O input output to peripherals external to the Test Set To bring data in to the Test Set through the serial port s use the IBASIC ENTER command To send data out use the OUTPUT command Serial Ports 9 and 10 The Test Set uses a small RJ 11 female connector on the rear panel for connecting to the two serial ports This connector has six wires 3 for Serial Port Address 9 and 3 for Serial Port Address 10 For information about serial port configuration refer to the Test Set Serial Port Configuration on page 360 For connection information refer to Figure 26 on page 364 Before using either port the RS 232 protocol must be established by setting baud rate pacing and the other settings as explained in Test Set Serial Port Configuration on page 360 Functionally from an I O perspective t
87. Execution Conditions Screen Fields TESTS Printer Setup Screen Fields T O E CONFIGUR RX TX Cntl Auto PTT Print Title field is cleared Test output location Crt Test output location CEC Save Recall Internal RF Offset Off Results output All Results output All Gen Anl 0 000000 If Unit Under Test Fails Continue Range Hold Auto All Test Procedure run mode Continuous Notch Coupl None RF Display Freq RF Chan Std MS AMPS User Def Base Freq 800 000000 Chan Space 30 0000 Gen Anl 45 000000 RF Level Offset Off RF In Out 0 0 Duplex Out 0 0 Antenna In 0 0 307 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Instrument Initialization The Front panel Reset condition in the Test Set was specifically designed to configure the instruments for manual testing of an FM radio The Front panel Reset default display screen is the RX TEST screen Other operational characteristics are also affected by the Front panel Reset as follows e All pending operations are aborted e Measurement triggering is set to TRIG MODE SETT FULL RETR REP e Any previously received Operation Complete command OPC is cleared e Any previously received Operation Complete query command OPC is cleared e The Test Set s display screen is in the UNLOCKED state e The Power up self test diagnostics are not performed The GPIB
88. FM TEST 704 1 Files that have been stored using the STORE command must be retrieved using the LOAD command STORE FM TEST 704 1 LOAD FM TESTS 704 1 338 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS memcard fo Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage DOS and LIF File System Considerations TESTS Subsystem DOS File Restrictions The Test Set uses IBASIC revision 1 0 The IBASIC 1 0 file system cannot distinguish between DOS files that have been SAVEd and those that were STOREd As shown in Table 37 on page 6 338 SAVE and STORE both produce a file type DOS This can result in undesired operation when trying to run a Test procedure from the TESTS Main Menu screen The process for running a Test Procedure is described below The potential problem is described in step 3 1 The procedure file location is selected using the Select Procedure Location field 2 The desired procedure file is selected using the Select Procedure Filename field When the procedure file is selected the Test Set loads the specified procedure file into memory One of the pieces of information in the procedure file is the name of the code file used with that procedure 3 TheRun Test softkey is selected When the Run Test softkey is selected the Test Set attempts to load the code file into memory If the code file is located on a DOS formatted media the Test Set will attempt to GET the file the Test Set assumes the file was stored using the SAVE
89. FOR N 2 TO 5 IF BIT Std event N THEN PRINT A amp Error N amp error has occurred OUTPUT Inst addr SYSTem ERRor ENTER Inst addr Error number Error message PRINT Error number Error message END IF NEXT N 533 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Example Programs 7190 IF BINAND Std_event 195 THEN 7200 BEEP 4210 PRINT Unrecognized condition Standard Event register Std event 7220 END IF 7230 STOP 7240 SUBEND 72590 1 10000 Meas carrier SUB Meas carrier 10010 COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr 10015 ON TIMEOUT Bus addr 5 RECOVER Timed out 10020 OUTPUT Inst addr DISP ACNT CALLP MODE MEAS MEAS RFR POW FREQ ERR 10030 ENTER Inst addr Power Freq error 10040 OUTPUT Inst addr MEAS AFR FREQ FM 10050 ENTER Inst addr Audiofreg Deviation 10060 PRINT USING K 2D 3D K Carrier Power Power Watts 10070 PRINT USING K 2D 3D K Audio Frequency Audiofreq 1000 kHz 10080 PRINT USING K 2D 3D K FM Deviation Deviation 1000 kHz 10090 PRINT USING K 2D 3D K Carrier Freq Error Freq error 1000 kHz 10100 SUBEXIT 10110 Timed out 10120 ON TIMEOUT Bus addr 5 GOTO Cannot recover
90. HP BASIC ON TIMEOUT Example Program Comments for Recommended Routine Table 7 Comments for Measure Function from ON TIMEOUT Example Program Program Line Number Comments 50 Send a Selected Device Clear SDC to the Test Set to put the GPIB subsystem into a known state This allows the control program to regain programmatic control of the Test Set if it is in an error state when the program begins to run 60 Command the Test Set to abort the currently executing measurement cycle This will force the Test Set to stop waiting for any measurement results to be available from measurements which may be in an invalid state when the program begins to run 290 Turn event initiated branches off except ON END ON ERROR and ON TIMEOUT to ensure that the Measure function will not be exited until it is finished 300 Set up a timeout for any I O activity on the GPIB This will allow the function to recover if the bus hangs for any reason 310 Set the triggering mode to single followed by a trigger immediate command This ensures that a new measurement cycle will be started when the TRIG IMM command is sent This sequence that is set to single trigger and then send a trigger command guarantees that the measurement result returned to the ENTER statement will accurately reflect the state of the DUT when the TRIG IMM command was sent The IMM keyword is optional 320 Send the query command pas
91. Key HOLD SHIFT PREV Keys PRINT SHIFT TESTS Keys ADRS SHIFT LOCAL Keys ASSIGN SHIFT k4 Keys RELEASE SHIFT k5 Keys 47 Chapter 1 Using GPIB Remote Operation Remote Capabilities Table 5 48 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Conformance to the IEEE 488 1 1987 Standard For all IEEE 488 1 functions implemented the Test Set adheres to the rules and procedures as outlined in that Standard Conformance to the IEEE 488 2 1987 Standard For all IEEE 488 2 functions implemented the Test Set adheres to the rules and procedures as outlined in that Standard with the exception of the OPC Common Command Refer to the OPC Common Command description IEEE 488 1 Interface Functions The interface functions that the Test Set implements are listed in Table 5 Test Set IEEE 488 1 Interface Function Capabilities Function Capability Talker T6 No Talk Only Mode Extended Talker TO No Extended Talker Capability Listener L4 No Listen Only Mode Extended Listener LEO No Extended Listener Capability Source Handshake SH1 Complete Capability Acceptor Handshake AHI Complete Capability Remote Local RL1 Complete Capability Service Request SRI Complete Capability Parallel Poll PPO No Parallel Poll Capability Device Clear DC1 Complete Capability Device Trigger DT1 Complete Capability
92. Line field as explained under Method 2 Developing Programs on the Test Set Using the IBASIC EDIT Mode on page 381 With this setup when ASCII characters are received they are sent to the IBASIC Command Line field When a carriage return line feed is received the Test Set will parse the line into the IBASIC program memory Each line takes about two seconds to scroll in and be parsed This becomes very time consuming for long programs An alternative for longer programs is discussed later in this section To start the transfer process make sure there is no program in the Test Set s IBASIC RAM memory by executing a SCRATCH command from the IBASIC Command Line The following example shows how to transfer a short program 100 lines using Microsoft Windows Terminal 1 Make sure the Test Set cursor is in the upper left of the IBASIC Command Line field 2 Select the Terminal application in the Accessories Group Set it up as de scribed in earlier in this chapter 3 Select the following Settings Text Transfers Flow Control Line at a Time Delay Between Lines 25 10 Sec Word Wrap Outgoing Text at Column Off 4 Select the following Transfers Send Text File Following CR Strip LF selected Append LF not selected 5 Select the text file to be transferred and begin the transfer by selecting OK 387 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 3 Developing Programs Using Word Processor on a PC Least Preferred As the transfer sta
93. Messages If an error occurs while in the Call Processing Subsystem an appropriate error message will be placed in the Error Message Queue The control program can read the Error Message Queue to retrieve the error message See Error Message Queue Group on page 264 for detailed information on the Error Message Queue If an error occurred while attempting to decode data messages received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel or reverse voice channel the raw data message bits are displayed in hexadecimal format in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen Figure 33 on page 434 shows the layout of the CALL CONTROL screen when a decoding error has occurred The raw data bits can be read by the control program Refer to the Display field description on page 444 for information on how to read data in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen CALL CONTROL Cc M RECC Error Return i Error Data Received from RECC Active Word 1 hex 7OD29BED1 Register Word 2 hex CE1EF8963 Page Word 3 hex 9DDEE47FA Access Connect System Tvpe Voice Channel Assisnment To Screen RMPS Cntrl Chan CALL EEE CALL Amplitude CALL CALL ANLG S SPEC ANL Figure 33 CALL CONTROL Screen with Decoding Error Message Display 434 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fo Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Using the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface
94. Prog control INTEGER Wait time Oper complete ER Ptr value Call proc even CAL CAL CAL P AMPL amp VAL Ampl amp DBM SID amp VALS Sid LP VCH amp VALS Vch LP SAT amp VAL Sat amp HZ amp VMAC amp VALS Vmac STAT CALLP PTR 1 CALLP CCH amp VALS Cch CAL INTEG OUTPUT Inst_addr OUTPUT Inst_addr OUTPUT Inst_addr OUTPUT Inst_addr GOSUB Wait_loop OUTPUT Inst_addr GOSUB Wait_loop IF Oper_complete THEN RETURN O0 ELSE RETURN 1 END IF Wait_loop LOOP WAIT Wait_time OUT ENT E z IF BI D LOOP PUT Inst addr LP CSYS amp Sys amp ESR STAT CALLP EVEN ER Inst addr Std event Call proc even IF Std event TH l Call proc even LOG 1 LOG 2 THEN RETURN Oper complete 1 EN R ETURN Oper complete 0 531 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem 509 510 511 512 513 XT N SUBI zZ s UTPUT Inst_addr CALLP RCDD amp Fields N N amp ENTER Inst_addr Rcdd N PRINT RCDD amp VALS N amp amp Rcdd N Example Programs 3290 FNEND 4000 Set state DEF FNSet_state State 4010 COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr 4020 COM Prog co
95. S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Table 30 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Screen Fields Restored Initialized During RST Reset Instrument Initialization CONFIGURE Screen Fields PRINT CONFIGURE Screen Fields TESTS Execution Conditions Screen Fields TESTS Printer Setup Screen Fields YO CONFIGURE RX TX Cntl Auto PTT Print Title field 1s cleared Test output location Crt Test output location Crt Save Recall Internal RF Offset Off Results output All Results output All Gen Anl 0 000000 If Unit Under Test Fails Continue Range Hold Auto All Test Procedure run mode Continuous Notch Coupl None RF Display Freq RF Chan Std MS AMPS User Def Base Freq 800 000000 Chan Space 30 0000 Gen Anl 45 000000 RF Level Offset Off RF In Out 0 0 Duplex Out 0 0 Antenna In 0 0 309 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Instrument Initialization The RST Reset condition in the Test Set was specifically designed to configure the instruments for manual testing of an FM radio The RST Reset default display screen is the RX TEST screen Other operational characteristics are also affected by the RST reset as follows e All pending operations are aborted e Measurement triggering is set to TRIG MODE SETT FULL RETR REP e Any previously received Operation Complete
96. SAVE The SAVE key is used to save an instrument state The GPIB commands REGister S AVE are used to select this function programmatically The SAVE RECALL mass storage device is selected using the SAVE RECALL field on the I O CONFIGURE screen Syntax REGister SAVE file name gt Example OUTPUT 714 REG SAVE SETUP1 This saves the instrument state to a file named SETUPI S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS efpkc sec NOTE Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands Removing Saved Instrument States One or all of the saved instrument states can be removed from the selected save recall mass storage device The save recall mass storage device is selected using the SAVE RECALL field on the I O CONFIGURE screen The GPIB commands REGister CLEar are used to perform this function programmatically Syntax REGister CLEar file name gt REGister CLEar ALL The REGister CLEar ALL command is only valid for the internal SAVE RECALL mass storage device To clear all saved instrument states from the Card RAM or Disk SAVE RECALL mass storage devices each file must be removed individually using the REGister CLEar file name gt command Example OUTPUT 714 REG CLE SETUP2 This clears the instrument state SETUP2 from the selected SAVE RECALL mass storage device Example OUTPUT 714 REG CLE ALL This clears all saved instrument stat
97. SAVE RECALL files is selected using the SAVE RECALL field on the I O CONFIGURE screen The SAV command cannot be used to save the present state of the Test Set to a file with a name which contains non numeric characters or a decimal number greater than 99 To save the present state of the Test Set to a file with a name which contains non numeric characters or a decimal number greater than 99 use the REG SAVE filename command see SAVE in the Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands section of chapter 4 of the Agilent 8920B Programmer s Guide S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS ieee sec IEEE 488 2 Common Commands 223 Triggering Measurements Triggering Measurements Trigger Event 224 The measurement cycle is started triggered by the occurrence of a trigger event The reliability and accuracy of the measurement result as well as the speed of the measurement cycle are influenced by the trigger mode in effect at the time the trigger event occurs Some modes are faster than others some modes provide settling for signals that may contain transients The best triggering mode to use will depend upon the measurement requirements repeatability accuracy and speed The Test Set starts a measurement cycle when a valid Trigger Event is received A Trigger Event is analogous to telling the Test Set to start the measurement now There are three commands that can be used to issue a Trigger Event to the Test Set through GP
98. Selected Output Port 0 1 Spectrum Analyzer Reference Level Too High Low For Selected Input Port 281 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting 282 Accessing the Hardware Status Register 2 Group s Registers The following sections show the syntax and give programming examples using the Instrument BASIC programming language for the STATus commands used to access the Hardware Status Register 2 Group s registers Reading the Condition Register Syntax STATus HARDware2 CONDition Example OUTPUT 714 STAT HARD2 COND ENTER 714 Register_value Reading the Transition Filters Syntax STATus HARDware2 PTRansition STATus HARDware2 NTRansition Example OUTPUT 714 STAT HARD2 PTR ENTER 714 Register value Writing the Transition Filters Syntax STATus HARDware2 PTRansition integer STATus HARDware2 NTRansition integer Example OUTPUT 714 STAT HARD2 PTR 256 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Reading the Event Register Syntax STATus HARDware2 EVENt Example OUTPUT 714 STAT HARD2 EVEN ENTER 714 Register value Clearing the Event Register The EVENT register is cleared whenever it is queried or whenever the Common Command CLS is sent to the Test Set Reading the Enable Register S
99. Selects the RF Gen screen 50 UTPUT Addr AFG1 FM STAT OFF urns FM OFF O O O 60 OUTPUT Addr RFG AMPL 66 DBM Sets RF Gen ampl to 66 dBm 70 OUTPUT Addr RFG FREQ 500 MHZ Sets RF Gen freq to 500 MHz 80 OUTPUT Addr RFG AMPL STAT ON Turns RF Gen output ON 90 OUTPUT Addr DISP SAN Selects Spectrum Analyzer s screen 100 OUTPUT Addr SAN CRF 500 MHZ Center Frequency 500 MHz 110 MEASUREMENT SEQUENCE 120 OUTPUT Addr TRIG Triggers reading 130 OUTPUT Addr MEAS SAN MARK LEV Query of Spectrum 140 Analyzer s marker level 150 ENTER Addr Lvl Places measured value in variable Lvl 160 DISP Lvl Displays value of Lvl 170 END The RF Generator s output port and the Spectrum Analyzer s input port are preset to the RF IN OUT port This allows the Spectrum Analyzer to measure the RF Generator with no external connections The Spectrum Analyzer marker is always tuned to the center frequency of the Spectrum Analyzer after preset With the RF Generator s output port and Spectrum Analyzer input port both directed to the RF IN OUT port the two will internally couple with 46 dB of gain giving a measured value of approximately 20 dBm While not a normal mode of operation this setup is convenient for demonstration since no external cables are required This also illustrates the value of starting from the preset state since fewer programm
100. Status Register Group Summary Message is passed to 570 the Status Byte Register through Bit 8 in the Questionable 580 Data Signal Register Group Condition Register The Questionable 590 Data Signal Register Group must be configured to set its Summary 600 Message TRUE if the Summary Message from the Calibration Status 610 Register Group is TRUE Therefore Bit 8 2 8 256 in the Questionable 620 Data Signal Register Group Enable Register must be set HIGH 630 640 OUTPUT Inst address STAT QUES ENAB 256 650 660 3 Hardware Status Register 1 Group 670 Condition register conditions which will set the Summary Message 680 TRUE if they occur 690 Bit 5 Measurement limits exceeded decimal value 2 5 32 700 Bit 4 Power up Self test failed decimal value 2 4 16 710 Bit 3 Overpower protection tripped decimal value 2 3 8 720 730 Hardwarel_reg 32 16 8 740 750 Set the Transition Filters to allow only positive transitions in 760 the assigned condition s to pass to the Event Register 770 780 OUTPUT Inst address STAT HARD1 PTR Hardwarel reg 790 OUTPUT Inst address STAT HARD1 NTR 0 800 810 Set up the Hardware Status Register 1 Group Enable Register to 820 generate the Summary Message 830 840 OUTPUT Inst address STAT HARD1 ENAB Hardwarel reg 850 860 4 Set the correct Summary Message bit s in the Service Request 0 0 0 89 300 Bit 5 Standard Event Status Regist
101. Syntax PROGram SELected STRing lt varname gt lt svalues gt Example setting the value of a simple string variable OUTPUT 714 PROGram SELected STRing Variable data or OUTPUT 714 PROG STR Variable data Example of setting the value of a string array with 3 elements of 5 characters each such as Ar ray 2 5 OUTPUT 714 PROGram SELected STRing Array 12345 12345 12345 or OUTPUT 714 PROG STR Array 12345 12345 12345 With Option Base 0 set in IBASIC array indexing starts at 0 STRing lt varname gt The STRing query command is used to return to an external controller the current value of string variables or arrays in an IBASIC program in the Test Set varname is the name of an existing string variable or string array in the IBASIC program If the variable name var name is longer than 12 characters it must be sent as string data var name enclosed in quotes For example OUTPUT 714 PROG STR Var name Attempting to send a var name longer than 12 characters as character data var name not enclosed in quotes will generate the following error HP IB Error 112 Program mnemonic too long If the programmer wishes to append the IBASIC string identifier onto the string variable name the string variable name must be sent as string data that is enclosed in quotes For example OUTPUT 714 PROG STR Var name Appending the IBASI
102. TPUT GFile Prog line St Chars xferd Chars xferd L EXIT IF Chars_xferd gt Chars_ END LOOP ENTER 714 Msg terminator SSIGN File TO D o e p D ongest program line in Test Set DIM File name 10 Holds the name of file to store IBASIC pro file to store IBASIC program R 714 USING X D iH Count length Get length of count field program includes CR LF on each line R 714 USING VALS Count length amp D Chars total program add 5 records for buffer rs total 256 45 in one program line ore in file EN Prog_line 2 CR LF not read total ITerminate the block data transfer 401 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem 402 DELete ALL The DELete ALL command is used to delete an IBASIC program in the Test Set If the IBASIC program in the Test Set is in the RUN state an IBASIC Error 284 Program currently running error is generated and the program is not deleted Syntax PROGram SELected DELete ALL Example OUTPUT 714 PROGram SELected DELete ALL or OUTPUT 714 PROG DEL ALL EXECute lt program_command gt The EXECute command is used to execute from an external controller an IBASIC program command in the Test Set s built in IBASIC Controller program command is string data representing any legal IBASIC command If the string data does not represent a legal IBASIC command an IBASIC Error 285 Pr
103. The optional unit size parameter in the following procedure specifies the memory area in 256 byte blocks set aside for each disk unit Follow these steps to initialize volumes 1 2 or 3 1 Access the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen 2 Using the rotary knob or an external terminal enter and execute the IBASIC command INITIALIZE MEMORY 0 lt unit number 1 3 gt lt unit size For example INITALIZE MEMORY 0 1 50 350 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS memcard fb Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Using External Disk Drives Using External Disk Drives The Test Set supports only GPIB external disk drives Certain configuration information is required by the Test Set to access external disk drives The I O CONFIGURE screen s GPIB Mode field must be set to Control any time an external disk drive is used by the Test Set To load files from the TESTS screens or NMT Signaling Decoder screen the disk s mass storage volume specifier must be entered in the External Disk Specification field on the TESTS External Devices screen for example 702 1 Initializing External Disks All new external disk media must be initialized before it can be used to store information External disk media can be initialized for either LIF Logical Interchange Format or DOS Disk Operating System format using the Test Set See DOS and LIF File System Considerations on page 334 External disk media can be
104. XXXXAXXXXX A alpha character X numeric character The form returned will depend upon the manufacturing date of the Test Set being queried Example program 10 20 30 40 50 DIM A 72 OUT PUT 714 IDN EN ER 714 AS PRI END T AS Example response Agilent Technologies 8920B US35210066 B 02 31 209 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands OPT Option The OPT command tells the Test Set to identify any reportable device options Identification or filters installed in the unit The Test Set responds to the OPT command by Query placing information which describes any reportable installed options into the Output Queue The data is in ASCII format The response data is obtained by reading the Output Queue into a string variable The response data is organized into fields separated by commas Example program 10 20 30 40 50 DIM A 255 OUTPUT 714 OPT ENTER 714 A PRINT AS END Example response CCITT 6KHZ BPF 210 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS ieee sec RST Reset IEEE 488 2 Common Commands The RST command resets the Test Set When the RST command is received the majority of fields in the Test Set are restored to a default value some fields are maintained at their current state and some are initialized to a known state Other operational characteristics are also affected by the RST command as follows e All pendi
105. accessing registers contained in 291 condition register bit assignments 290 Configure HP IB command syntax diagram 117 control filler message 498 controller external 30 44 COPY_PL 346 Copying a volume 347 Copying files 347 D data functions AVG 182 AVG querying number of averages via HP IB 184 AVG querying ON OFF state via HP IB 183 AVG resetting via HP IB 184 AVG setting number of averages via HP IB 184 AVG turning ON OFF via HP IB 183 guidelines for using 181 182 HI LIMIT 185 HI LIMIT detecting if limit exceeded via HP IB 188 HI LIMIT querying display units via HP IB 187 HI LIMIT querying ON OFF state via HP IB 186 HI LIMIT querying setting via HP IB 188 HI LIMIT resetting limit detection via HP IB 189 HI LIMIT setting display units via HP IB 187 HI LIMIT setting value via HP IB 186 HI LIMIT turning ON OFF via HP IB 185 INCR SET 189 INCR SET querying display units via HP IB 191 INCR SET querying mode via HP IB 190 INCR SET querying value via HP IB 190 INCR SET setting display units via HP IB 191 INCR SET setting mode via HP IB 190 INCR SET setting value via HP IB 189 INCR Up Down Arrow keys 193 keys 181 LO LIMIT 185 LO LIMIT detecting if limit exceeded via HP IB 188 LO LIMIT querying display units via Index HP IB 187 LO LIMIT querying ON OFF state via HP IB 186 LO LIMIT querying se
106. and prompts are sometimes accompanied by a beep or warble NOTE Warbles and Beeps A warble sound indicates that an instrument damaging event is occurring Beeps often occur only with the first occurrence of the message Prompts are generally silent 546 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errormsg fb Non Recoverable Firmware Error The non recoverable firmware error is very important It appears when an unanticipated event occurs that the Test Set s firmware cannot handle The message appears in the center of the Test Set s display and except for the two lines in the second paragraph has the following form Non recoverable firmware error Please record the 2 lines of text below and contact Agilent Technologies through your local service center or by calling 800 827 3848 USA collect and asking to speak to the 8920A Service Engineer Address error exception at line number 0 To continue operation turn POWER off and back on Follow the instructions in the message Unfortunately you will not be able to recover from this condition You must switch the Test Set off and back on When you rerun the test where the Error Message occurred it may not occur again If it does reappear it would be helpful to Agilent to record exactly what the configuration of the instrument was when the error appeared and contact HP 547 GPIB Errors Most GPIB errors occur when the control program attempts to query a measu
107. b Set the Test Set s GPIB Controller capability using the Mode field e Talk amp Listen configures the Test Set to not be the System Controller The Test Set has Active Controller capability take control pass control in this mode Use this setting if the Test Set will be controlled through GPIB from an external controller Control configures the Test Set to be the System Controller Use this setting if the Test Set will be the only controller on the GPIB Selecting the Control mode automatically makes the Test Set the Active Controller NOTE Only one System Controller can be configured in a GPIB system Refer to Passing Control on page 313 for further information 3 Ifa GPIB printer is or will be connected to the Test Set s rear panel GPIB connector then a access the PRINT CONFIGURE screen b select one of the supported GPIB printer models using the Model field c setthe Printer Port field to HP IB d setthe printer address using the Printer Address field 43 Chapter 1 Using GPIB Getting Started Using the GPIB with the Test Set s built in IBASIC Controller The Test Set has two GPIB interfaces an internal only GPIB at select code 8 and an external GPIB at select code 7 The GPIB at select code 8 is only available to the built in IBASIC Controller and is used exclusively for communication between the IBASIC Controller and the Test Set The GPIB at select code 7 serves three purposes 1 It allows the Tes
108. be generated by starting at the root element and following the line the proper direction is syntactically correct An element is optional if there is a path around it The drawings show the proper use of spaces Where spaces are required they are indicated by a hexagon with the word space in it otherwise no spaces are allowed between statement elements Root Element Black oval at root level indicates continuation from previous page Field Name A La Returns quoted string Indicates the name of the display screen s field that is controlled by this command element Directs the user to a specific Instrument Command Measurement Command or Number Setting Command syntax diagram The Number Setting Commands are used to format numeric data and configure various A Does not included the STATe command A instrument measurement parameters Notes indicate which if any Number Setting Commands are not supported by this particular path 94 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ch3intro fb Adjacent Channel Power ACP ACPower K q TM S CBAN Channel BW COFFset Ch Offset See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe command 1 See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe command Adjacent Channel Power ACP Ratio MEASurement ACP Meas j J C al Level gt CN J
109. be sent as string data lt var_name gt enclosed in quotes For example OUTPUT 714 PROG NUMB WVar_name 10 Attempting to send a lt var_name gt longer than 12 characters as character data lt var_name gt not enclosed in quotes will generate the following error HP IB Error 112 Program mnemonic too long If an attempt is made to set the value of a numeric variable or array and no IBASIC program is in the Test Set an IBASIC Error 282 Illegal program name is generated If an attempt is made to set the value of a numeric variable or array and the numeric variable specified in lt varname gt does not exist in the program an IBASIC Error 283 Illegal variable name is generated If the specified numeric variable cannot hold all of the specified lt numeric_values gt an IBASIC Error 108 Parameter not allowed is generated Syntax PROGram SELected NUMBer lt varname gt lt nvalues gt Example setting the value of a simple variable OUTPUT 714 PROGram SELected NUMBer Variable 15 or OUTPUT 714 PROG NUMB Variable 15 Example setting the value of a one dimensional array Array 5 with 6 elements OUTPUT 714 PROGram SELected NUMBer Array 0 1 2 3 4 5 or OUTPUT 714 PROG NUMB Array 0 1 2 3 4 5 Individual array elements cannot be set with the NUMBer command 403 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem NOTE NOTE 404 Example setting the value of a two dimens
110. be stored re stored erased and retrieved from the RAM Disk The RAM Disk is partitioned into four separate units 0 3 Each unit is treated as a separate disk The size of each disk can be specified in 256 byte increments The four RAM Disk units are designated MEMORY 0 0 to MEMORY 0 3 For example to catalog the contents of RAM Disk unit 0 from the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen execute the following command CAT MEMORY 0 0 Volume 0 s contents can be viewed and loaded from the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen the TESTS Main Menu screen the TESTS Save Delete Procedure screen and the Signaling Decoder screen in NMT mode Volumes 1 2 and 3 can only be accessed from the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen RAM Disk Erasure The contents of RAM Disk are easily lost Unit 0 can be overwritten by the RAM MNG utility program ROM Disk Unit 1 can be overwritten by the COPY PL utility program ROM Disk The contents of all units are lost when the SERVICE screen s RAM Initialize function is executed Therefore RAM Disk should only be used for non permanent short term storage of program or data files 349 Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Using RAM Disk Initializing RAM Disks Each RAM Disk unit must be initialized before it can be used Unit 0 can be initialized using the RAM_MNG procedure stored on internal ROM Disk Volumes 1 2 and 3 must be initialized from the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen
111. be used to control program flow Refer to Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem on page 425 for more information on controlling program flow using the call processing subsystem status register group Example program Using OPC to generate a Service Request LE2400 5 100100 20 IS 2 OO CO OO OO O e PRR 0 NR ue Mice a 140 214 OUTPUT 714 SRE 32 Enable SRO on events in the Standard Event Status Register OUTPUT 714 ESE 1 Enable Operation Complete bit in Standard Event Status Register ON INTR 7 15 CALL Srvice interupt Set up interrupt ENABLE INTR 7 2 Enable SRQ interrupts OUTPUT 714 DISP RFG RFG OUTP Dupl AMPL 0 dBm FREQ 320 MHz OPC LOOP Dummy loop to do nothing DISP I am in a dummy loop END LOOP END SUB Srvice interupt PRINT All operations complete Note This interrupt service routine is not complete Refer to Status Byte Service Request Enable Register in Status Reporting in the Agilent 8920B Programmer s Guide for complete information SUBEND The above program enables bit 0 in the Standard Event Status Enable Register and also bit 5 in the Service Request Enable Register so that the Test Set will request service whenever the OPC event bit becomes true After the service request is detected the program can take appropriate action Refer to Status Byte Register on page 241 and Service Request Ena
112. being displayed in the top right hand portion of the screen If the data message s cannot be correctly decoded the raw data message bits are displayed in hexadecimal format Figure 33 on page 434 shows an example of the raw data message bits being displayed in hexadecimal format in the top right hand portion of the screen when a decoding error has occurred The messages are displayed in six non labeled received data fields that is there is no field label on the display screen The fields are named RCDD1 through RCDD6 The first and topmost field is RCDD1 The last and lowermost field is RCDD6 Figure 35 on page 445shows the position of the received data fields on the CALL CONTROL screen The control program queries these received data fields to obtain the displayed information strings CALL CONTROL Display Data Meas received data field REDDI received data field RCDD2 is id s received data field RCDD3 Page received data field RCDD4 Rccess received data field RCDDS Connect received data field RCDD6 System Tvpe Voice Channel Assisnment To Screen RMPS Cntrl Chan 334 Chan Amplitude Pur Luli SRT Figure 35 CALL CONTROL Screen Received Data Fields 445 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen Information Strings Available From The Received Data Fields Table 46 lists the information strings available from the reverse control channel data messages rece
113. command causes the Test Set to set bit 0 Operation Complete in the Standard Event Status Register to the TRUE logic 1 state when the Test Set completes all pending operations Detection of the Operation Complete message can be accomplished by continuous polling of the Standard Event Status Register using the ESR common query command However using a service request eliminates the need to poll the Standard Event Status Register thereby freeing the controller to do other useful work The OPC command does not necessarily cause bit 0 in the Standard Event Status Register to be set true immediately following a measurement completion or the completion of a state or condition change in the Test Set The instrument control processor is able to query the signal measurement instrumentation to determine if a measurement cycle has completed However the instrument control processor is not able to query the signal generation instrumentation to determine if the signal s have settled In order to ensure that all signals have settled to proper values the instrument control processor initiates a one second delay upon receipt of the OPC OPC and WAI commands In parallel with the one second timer the instrument control processor commands all active measurements to tell it when the measurement s are done If an active on measurement displays four dashes and the Test Set is configured with a PCS Interface the OPC OPC and WAI commands are never
114. control this field Refer to the Real Number Setting Syntax section of the for detailed information on the various parameters which can be used with the AMPLitude command To query the current setting of the amplitude field use the AMPLitude command Syntax AMPLitude real number units AMPlitude Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP AMPL 50 DBM OUTPUT 714 CALLP AMPL ENTER 714 Amp1_val This information string displays the called phone number in decimal form received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel when the mobile station originates a call The Called Number field is only displayed when the Display field is set to Data and a reverse control channel message has been decoded when the mobile originates a call Refer to the Display field description on page 444 for information on how to read data displayed in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen 441 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen Chan The Chan is divided into two fields The left hand field displays the voice channel number assignment being used by the Test Set and the mobile station A numeric value is only displayed when the Test Set s Connected annunciator is lit connected state A is displayed if a mobile station is not actively connected on a voice channel This is a read only field The AVCNumbe
115. done Turn off any measurements that may cause this condition or command the Test Set to single trigger mode If the Test Set is not configured with a PCS Interface and an active measurement displays four dashes the conditions required to satisfy OPC OPC and WAI commands may be satisfied but a valid measurement result will not be obtained It is only when all active measurements are done and the one second timer has elapsed that the OPC OPC and WAI commands are satisfied Many state changes or measurement cycles take much less than one second For this reason OPC should not be used when program execution speed is an issue 213 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands CAUTION The OPC command should not be used for determining if a call processing state command has completed successfully Call processing subsystem states do not complete a state is ither active or inactive Using the OPC command with a call processing subsystem state command results in a deadlock condition The control program will continuously query the output queue for a 1 but a 1 will never be placed in the output queue because the command never completes For example the following command sequence should not be used OUTPUT 714 CALLP ACTive OPC The OPC command should not be used with any of the following call processing subsystem commands ACTive REGister PAGE HANDoff RELease The Call Processing Subsystem Status Register Group should
116. done only the antenna needs to be connected to the Test Set 429 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Using the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface TCO RF IN OUT ANT IN AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN HI LO Speaker Out Mi h I icrophone In Mobile Station Manufacturer s Special Fixture Antenna Figure 32 Connecting a Mobile Station to the Test Set NOTE Do not connect the antenna of the mobile station to the ANT IN port on the front panel of the Test Set as this will cause the overpower protection circuitry to trip when the mobile station is transmitting Refer to the ANT IN field description in the User s Guide for further information Refer to the User s Guide for detailed information on connecting a mobile station to the Test Set 430 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc f Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Using the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface Accessing the Call Processing Subsystem Screens Table 44 The Call Processing Subsystem screens are accessed by selecting the CALL CONTROL CALL DATA CALL BIT CALL CONFIGURE or ANALOG MEAS screens using the DISPlay command The mnemonics used to select a particular screen with the DISPlay command are shown in Table 44 The query form of the DISPlay command that is DISPlay can be used to determine which sc
117. e SCC eee e Returns quoted string MINumber JM space e gt lt 10 chars required gt 1 Y ORDQ e CORDer Order MIN2 ee M Returns quoted string RSVD space 1 char required gt OE 7 GSvD y E bot QUA cse e cREServed J Returns quoted string LOCal espace om o 5chars required gt Local Lin Returns quoted string ORD Qualifier spacej 3 chars required 5e Wan y Returns quoted string duel oe 5 chars required O Returns quoted string PARiy Parity Na CALLP continued Returns quoted string 137 Call Processing CALLP EE 138 M MS Voice MS IntVCh N TYPE S TIT2 MlINumber CHANnel PARity ma CALLP continued SCCode CVMACode J A ES 2 EA Returns quoted string space pe 2 chars required 5 e y SCC A 7 Le Returns quoted string gt lt 10 chars required gt Nac Spice e MIN2 n Returns quoted string A space lt 3 chars required 5 e VMAC Lus s Returns quoted string je space o9 R 11 chars required gt C Chan Lia kat Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Parity N y x equi my Hara y Space gt MC 2 chars required gt 25 FS
118. exactly as they would be on their home screen To set up the fields program the appropriate instrument To make measurements use the MEASure subsystem This field selects the input for the Audio Frequency analyzer See AF Analyzer on page 97 for programming command syntax This field is a one of many field used to select the type of measurement to be made by the Audio Frequency Analyzer on the audio signal being measured See Measure on page 147 for programming command syntax 511 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the ANALOG MEAS Screen AFGenl Freq AFGen1 To Amplitude De Emphasis Detector 512 This field sets the output frequency of Audio Frequency Generator 1 See AF Analyzer on page 97 for programming command syntax This field has two subfields e the upper subfield sets the destination port for Audio Frequency Generator 1 FM RF Generator FM modulator AM RF Generator AM modulator Audio Out AUDIO OUT connector on front panel of Test Set e the lower subfield sets the e FM modulation deviation if upper subfield set to FM AM modulation depth if upper subfield set to AM amplitude of audio signal volts RMS at the AUDIO OUT connector if upper sub field set to Audio Out For testing mobile stations the upper field is normally set to FM and the lower field set to the desired FM deviation in kHz See AF Generator 1 on page 100 for programming command s
119. file system does not support the HFS hierarchical file system used with Instrument BASIC Therefore no directory path information can be used during mass storage operations with LIF files DOS File Naming Conventions The DOS file system is used on IBM compatible personal computers The DOS file system is hierarchical which means it supports subdirectories The DOS file system allows up to 8 character file names with an optional extension of up to 3 characters The file name is separated from the extension if it exists with a period DOS file names are case independent The characters are stored as upper case ASCII in the DOS directory but the files may be referenced without regard to case The DOS file system always converts any lowercase characters to uppercase when files are stored For example the file names Filel FILEI filel and FiLel all represent the single DOS file FILE S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS memcard fb Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage DOS and LIF File System Considerations The period may appear in the name but only to separate the file name from the extension The period is not considered part of the file name itself If the name portion of a DOS file name is longer than 8 characters it is truncated to 8 characters and no error is generated Similarly if the extension is longer than 3 characters it is truncated to 3 characters and no error is given Test Set File Naming Conventions T
120. forward voice channel signaling messages For any call processing function that is setting the message stream on the active control channel registering the mobile station paging the mobile station handing off the mobile station or releasing the mobile station the user is responsible for setting the contents of all signaling messages used in that function The Call Processing Subsystem host firmware uses the messaging protocol as defined in the applicable industry standard The contents of the applicable fields on the CALL CONTROL screen and the CALL CONFIGURE screen are not updated to reflect any changes made while in the Bits mode There is no coupling between the Bits mode and the Test Set For example if a mobile sta tion was actively connected to the Test Set on a voice channel and the user changed the CHAN field on the forward voice channel mobile station control message FVC V Mes and sent that message to the mobile station the mobile station would change its voice channel assignment However the Test Set will stay on the voice channel assignment specified in the Chan field on the CALL CONTROL screen This situation will result in a dropped call The Bits mode should not be used to change any parameter that can be set on any other Call Processing Subsystem screen 481 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL BIT Screen Handoff Order 482 The DSPecifier command is used to control this field
121. gt F2 Y l Returns quoted string _ lt RSVD2 ergy espace om Deen 2 chars required gt Y RSVD2 space q PA Lg wy RESERVED y lt ES Returns quoted string AE SS gt lt 1 char required CY F3 Y 7 Returns quoted string Nets WFOMessage espace po A 1 char required O 7 A Returns quoted string FIELD4 space gt a lt 4 i d F4 y 7 OVERhead gt OHD m space gt C e 25 A 4 chars required Returns quoted string j 3 chars required gt Returns quoted string Returns quoted string gt PARity Parity 135 Call Processing CALLP a GI MS Word MS WORD 1 136 ES CALLP continued Mo TYPE pO ONE dl T 1T2 iDCCode gt lt space one 2 chars required CC DCC MINumber 2 space j 24 chars required gt y MINI y S AN s equi a Hara y Space gt MC 2 chars required gt gt 25 b Returns quoted string e Returns quoted string NA PARity Parity Returns quoted string Returns quoted string CALLP Y Call Processing gt MSORder SN MSMessOrd TYPE Drg VP e 2 chars required gt NY T Ha Ji 5 Returns quoted string amp gt space 2 chars required 5
122. in local Indicates that a command is not executable while the device is in local due to a hard local control see JEEE 488 2 5 6 1 5 For example a device with a rotary switch receives a message which would change the switches state but the device is in local so the message can not be executed S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errormsg fb Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error 202 210 211 212 213 214 215 220 Settings lost due to rtl Indicates that a setting associated with a hard local control see IEEE 488 2 5 6 1 5 was lost when the device changed to LOCS from REMS or to LWLS from RWLS Trigger error Trigger ignored Indicates that a GET TRG or triggering signal was received and recognized by the device but was ignored because of device timing considerations For example the device was not ready to respond Arm ignored Indicates that an arming signal was received and recognized by the device but was ignored Init ignored Indicates that a request for a measurement initiation was ignored as another measurement was already in progress Trigger deadlock Indicates that the trigger source for the initiation of a measurement is set to GET and subsequent measurement query is received The measurement cannot be started until a GET is received but the GET would cause an INTERRUPTED error Arm deadlock Indicates that the arm source for the in
123. in non volatile memory They remain unchanged until modified using an IBASIC command 395 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem PROGram Subsystem Introduction The PROGram Subsystem provides a set of commands which allow an external controller to generate and control an IBASIC program within the Test Set The PROGram Subsystem in the Test Set is a limited implementation of the PROGram Subsystem defined in the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI Standard The PROGram Subsystem commands as implemented in the Test Set can be used to download an IBASIC program from an external controller into the Test Set upload an IBASIC program from the Test Set into an external controller control an IBASIC program resident in the Test Set from an external controller setorquery program variables within an IBASIC program which is resident in the Test Set execute IBASIC commands in the Test Set s IBASIC Controller from an external controller SCPI PROGram Subsystem The SCPI PROGram Subsystem was designed to support instruments which can store multiple programs in RAM memory at the same time The SCPI PROGram Subsystem provides commands which allow multiple programs to be named defined and resident in the instrument at the same time The Test Set does not support this capability For complete information on the SCPI PROGram Subsystem refer to the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI Standard
124. in the Test Set are built A queue is a data structure containing a sequential list of information The queue is empty when all information has been read from the list The associated Summary Message is TRUE logic 1 if the queue contains some information and FALSE logic 0 if the queue is empty Queues can be cleared by reading all the information from the queue Queues except the Output Queue can also be cleared using the CLS clear status command A status queue can also be referred to as a Status Register Group ch drw04 drw Queue Summary Message Bit Queue Empty 6 Queue Not Empty 1 Figure 6 Status Data Structure Queue Mode 250 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Status Register Group Contents Figure 7 shows the Status Register Groups in the Test Set The contents of each Status Register Group is explained in the following sections Logical OR Calibration Status Register Group T Status Byte Re E pug i rg 1 m E E LI Es Ed Ex s E e Es SMB S MSS PS T lt m Standard Event Status Register Group Notes C Condition Register TR Transition Filter Registers Pos and Neg EV Event Register EN Enable Register SMB Summary Message Bit Logical OR ch4drw5 ds4 TR EV EN Test Set Status Register Groups 251 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting
125. initialized from the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen by inserting the new media into the external disk drive and executing the following IBASIC command INITIALIZE lt volume type gt lt external disk mass storage volume specifier gt where the lt volume type gt can be LIF or DOS For example INITIALIZE DOS 702 1 To verify that disk media has been properly initialized execute the IBASIC command CAT lt external disk mass storage volume specifier gt For example CAT 3 7021 351 Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Using External Disk Drives 352 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS memcard fo IBASIC Controller 353 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Introduction Introduction 354 The Test Set contains an instrument controller that can run programs to control the various instruments in the Test Set and instruments devices connected to the Test Set s external I O ports GPIB serial and parallel Refer to Overview of the Test Set on page 26 for a complete description of the Test Set s hardware architecture The instrument controller runs a subset of the Rocky Mountain BASIC programming language called Instrument BASIC or IBASIC Using this programming language it is possible to develop programs which use the Test Set s instruments to automatically test a variety of radios Software is available from Agilent Technologies the Agilent 11807 series for testing the majo
126. input signal before measuring 0 0 10 01 5 CQ No Ra ie O 0000 ccc C 200 OUTPUT Dut TRIG Trigger all active measurements 210 OUTPUT Dut MEAS AFR FM Request an FM deviation measurement 220 ENTER Dut Dev Read measured value into variable Dev 230 PRINT USING K D DDD K Measured FM Dev 1000 kHz peak 240 DISP Continue when ready Set up user prompt 245 Set up interrupt on softkey 1 250 ON KEY 1 LABEL Continue 15 GOTO Proceed 260 LOOP Loop until the key is pressed 270 END LOOP 280 Proceed OFF KEY Turn off interrupt from softkey 1 290 DISP Clear the user prompt 300 310 Measure and plot oscilloscope trace to s the waveform shape 320 DIM Trace 0 416 Oscilloscope has 417 trace points 330 OUTPUT Dut DISP OSC Display the Oscilloscope screen 340 OUTPUT Dut TRIG Trigger all active measurements 350 OUTPUT Dut MEAS OSC TRAC 360 Request the oscilloscope trace 370 ENTER Dut Trace 89 Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation 380 Read the oscilloscope trace into array Trace 390 CRT is X Y 0 0 in lower left corner 400 to 399 179 upper right 10 Each pixel is about 0 02 mm wide by 0 03 mm tall not square 20 Scale vertically for 0 kHz dev center screen and 4 kHz dev top 30
127. is the Connect annunciator is lit A is displayed if a mobile station is not actively connected on a voice channel This is a read only field The AVCPower command is used to query the contents of the left hand subfield There is no command form of the AV CPower command Syntax AVCPower Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP AVCP ENTER 714 Active vc pwr e The right hand subfield highlighted field is used to enter the Voice Mobile Attenuation Code VMAC The VMAC determines the mobile station power level to be used on the designated voice channel the channel number entered into the Chan right hand subfield The VMACode command is used to control the right hand subfield The query form of the command that is VM A Code can be used to determine the current VMAC setting Syntax VMACode VMACode integer number 0 to 7 gt Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP VMAC 3 OUTPUT 714 CALLP VMAC ENTER 714 Vmac setting 457 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen Register Register 458 This field is used to initiate a registration of the mobile station connected to the Test Set The Test Set must be in the active state that is the Act ive annunciator lit before attempting to register a mobile station The REGister command is used to control this field There is no query form of the REGister command Syntax REGister Example OUTPUT
128. kk kk SI I I kk kk AS 65 Chapter 2 Methods For Reading Measurement Results HP BASIC MAV Example Program Comments for Recommended Routine Table 8 Comments for Measure Function from MAV Example Program Program Line Number Comments 50 Send a Selected Device Clear SDC to the Test Set to put the GPIB subsystem into a known state This allows the control program to regain programmatic control of the Test Set if it is in an error state when the program begins to run 60 Command the Test Set to abort the currently executing measurement cycle This will force the Test Set to stop waiting for any measurement results to be available from measurements which may be in an invalid state when the program begins to run 290 Turn event initiated branches off except ON END ON ERROR and ON TIMEOUT to ensure that the Measure function will not be exited until it is finished 300 Set up a5 second timeout for any I O activity on the GPIB This will allow the function to recover if the bus hangs for any reason The length of the timeout will be implementation dependent 310 Set the triggering mode to single followed by a trigger immediate command This ensures that a new measurement cycle will be started when the TRIG IMM command is sent This sequence that is set to single trigger and then send trigger command guarantees that the measurement result returned to the ENTER statement will accurately re
129. lt 126 150 OUTPUT 10 USING K CHRS I 160 Outputs characters all on one line 170 OUTPUT 10 USING K CHRS I 180 Outputs characters all on one line 190 END WHILE 200 OUTPUT 800 CONF SPOR SIN Inst Sets port 9 to IBASIC entry 180 EXECUTE CURSOR HOME Places cursor at left of IBASIC entry S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Serial I O from IBASIC Programs Serial Port 10 Information Serial Port 10 is sometimes called Serial Port B in Test Set documentation and programs The default Serial Port 10 settings are the same as Serial Port 9 They are Serial Baud rate 9600 Parity None Data Length 8 Bits Stop Length 1 Bit Receive and Transmit Pacing Xon Xoff Serial in Not available for Port 10 2X gw UY Se p GE ja IBASIC and Instrument Echo Not available for Port 10 There is no Test Set screen that shows Serial Port 10 s settings Therefore to know Serial Port 10 settings they must either be set or queried using IBASIC commands For example the following IBASIC program queries the baud rate setting of Serial Port 10 10 DIM Setting 20 20 OUTPUT 800 CONF SPB BAUD Initiates a query 30 ENTER 800 Setting 40 DISP Setting 50 END This program returns a quoted string If the baud rate is set to 9600 the returned ASCII character string is 9600 Serial Port 10 settings are held
130. missing Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because of missing device hardware For example an option was not installed Mass storage error Indicates that a mass storage error occurred S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errormsg fb Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 Missing mass storage Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because of missing mass storage For example an option that was not installed Missing media Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because of a missing media For example no disk Corrupt media Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because of corrupt media For example bad disk or wrong format Media full Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because the media was full For example there is no room on the disk Directory full Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because the media directory was full File name not found Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because the file name on the device media was not found For example an attempt was made to read or copy a nonexistent file File name error Indicates that a legal program command or query coul
131. must be set as indicated 8 binary character required VMAC This field displays the voice mobile attenuation code It shows the mobile station power level associated with the designated voice channel 3 binary character required CHAN Channel number field Indicates the designated voice channel 11 binary character required Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 509 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the ANALOG MEAS Screen Programming the ANALOG MEAS Screen Figure 56 510 ANALOG MEAS TX Frea Error kHz FH Deviation kHz 0 176 2 304 TH Power EUM 0 084 To Screen Amplitude AFGen Frea RF Anl In FM Denod kHz RFGenl To Filter 1 Fri 300Hz HPF dB n Filter 2 kHz PERA De Enmphosis 230 us Otf Detector Pk The ANALOG MEAS Screen The ANALOG MEAS screen is used to make RF and audio measurements on the mobile station connected to the Test Set while on an active voice channel Refer to Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem in the Agilent Technologies 6920 User s Guide for detailed information on the operation and manual use of the ANALOG MEAS screen The information presented in this section covers the ANALOG MEAS screen programming commands and how to use them S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the
132. negative transitions NTR or either PTR or NTR A positive transition means a condition bit changed from 0 to 1 A negative transition means a condition bit changed from 1 to 0 In the Test Set the Transition Filters are implemented as two registers a 16 bit positive transition PTR register and a 16 bit negative transition NTR register A positive transition of a bit in the Condition register will be latched in the Event Register if the corresponding bit in the positive transition filter is set to 1 A positive transition of a bit in the Condition register will not be latched in the Event Register if the corresponding bit in the positive transition filter is set to 0 A negative transition of a bit in the Condition register will be latched in the Event Register if the corresponding bit in the negative transition filter is set to 1 A negative transition of a bit in the Condition register will not be latched in the Event Register if the corresponding bit in the negative transition filter is set to 0 Either transition PTR or NTR of a bit in the Condition Register will be latched in the Event Register if the corresponding bit in both transition filters is set to 1 No transitions PTR or NTR of a bit in the Condition Register will be latched in the Event Register if the corresponding bit in both transition filters is set to 0 247 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting 248 Transition Filters are read write Transition Filte
133. on page 472 RECCW D Message Fields on page 473 RECCW E Message Fields on page 474 Reverse Voice Channel Messages for Order Confirmation RVCOrdCon Message Fields on page 475 Refer to the User s Guide for detailed information on the operation and manual use of the CALL DATA screen S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Access Active Active Connect Display Word Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL DATA Screen See Access on page 439 for programming information See Active on page 440 for programming information See Active on page 440 for programming information See Connect on page 444 for programming information This field is used to select the desired reverse control channel or reverse voice channel message to be displayed The DATA command is used to control this field The query form of the command that is DATA can be used to determine which reverse control channel or reverse voice channel message is currently being displayed See Reading the CALL DATA Screen Message Fields on page 467 for information on how to read the contents of the individual messages Syntax DATA lt gt lt RECCW A RECCW B RECCW C RECCW D RECCW E RVCOrdCon gt lt gt DATA Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP DATA RECCW A OUTPUT 714 CALLP DATA ENTER 714 MessageS
134. operating and or programming manuals for each controller for information describing the controller s capability to set up and respond to SRQ interrupts For register groups with Condition Registers and Transition Filters start at step 1 For register groups with no Condition Register or Transition Filters start at step 5 Determine which conditions as defined by their bit positions in the Register Group Condition Register should cause the Summary Message to be set TRUE if they oc cur Determine the polarity of the bit state transition which will indicate that the condi tion has occurred Set the Register Group Transition Filters to the correct polarity to pass the bit state transition to the Event Register Go to step 6 Determine which conditions as defined by their bit positions in the Register Group Event Register should cause the Summary Message to be set TRUE if they occur Setthe correct bits in the Register Group Enable Register to generate the Summary Message if the condition has been latched into the Register Group Event Register If the Summary Message is a bit in a Register Group that is not the Status Byte Reg ister go to step 1 Setthe correct bits in the Service Request Enable Register for all Register Group Summary Messages selected in steps 1 through 6 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations GPIB Service Requests Example Progr
135. output signals and internal settings remain unchanged except that triggering is reset to TRIG MODE SETT FULL RETR REP The LOCAL key will not function if the Test Set is in the local lockout mode Local Lockout Yes Local Lockout disables all front panel keys including the LLO LOCAL key Only the System Controller or the POWER switch can return the Test Set to local mode front panel control 50 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Chapter 1 Using GPIB IEEE 488 1 Remote Interface Message Capabilities Table 6 Test Set IEEE 488 1 Interface Message Capability Continued IEEE Message Type Implemented Response 488 1 Message Clear Lockout Yes The Test Set returns to local mode front panel control REN Set Local and local lockout is cleared when the REN bus control line goes false When the Test Set returns to local mode the output signals and internal settings remain unchanged except that triggering is set to TRIG MODE SETT FULL RETR REP Service Request Yes The Test Set sets the Service Request SRQ bus line true SRQ if any of the enabled conditions in the Status Byte Regis ter as defined by the Service Request Enable Register are true Status Byte Yes The Test Set responds to a Serial Poll Enable SPE bus SPE command by sending an 8 bit status byte when addressed SPD to talk Bit 6 will be true logic 1 if the Test Set has sent STB the SRQ message MTA Status Bi
136. particular application will depend upon the mobile station being tested 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 516 Ooo OO OOO OO Uu ER 714 Deviation UB Meas_hum_noise UTPU 714 DISP CME UTPU 714 AFG1 DES AUDIO OUT FREQ 1KHZ OUTP INCR 01V UTPU 714 AFG1 0UTP 50 MV UTPU 714 AFAN INP FM DEMOD DEMP 750 US DET PK UTPU 714 AFAN FILT1 C ESSAGE FILT2 gt 99KHZ LP UTPU 714 MEAS AFR SEL AF FREQ UTPU 714 RFG AMPL 47DBM UTPU 714 TRIG MODE RETR SINGLE SETT FULL PEAT OUTPUT 714 TRIG MEAS AFR FM IF Deviation gt 8300 THI EN OUTPUT 714 AFG1 OUTPut INCR DOWN IF Deviation lt 7700 THI EN OUTPUT 714 AFG1 OUTPut INCR UP UNTIL Deviation gt 7700 AND Deviation lt 8300 OUTPU 714 AFAN DET RMS OUTPUT 714 TRIG MEAS AFR FM ENTER 714 Deviation OUTPU 714 MEAS AFR FM REF STAT ON VAL VALS Deviation amp HZ OUTPU 714 AFG1 OUTPut STAT OFF OUTPUT 714 TRIG MEAS AFR FM E ER 714 Deviation PRINT USING K 3D 2D K FM Hum and Noise Deviation dB OUTPU 714 TRIG MODE RETR REP SETT FULL OUTPU
137. reason see JEEE 488 2 7 7 6 2 For example an END message was received before the length was satisfied Block data not allowed A legal block data element was encountered but was not allowed by the device at this point in parsing Expression error This error as well as errors 171 through 178 are generated when parsing an expression data element 555 Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error 556 171 178 180 181 183 184 200 201 Invalid expression The expression data element was invalid see IEEE 488 2 7 7 7 2 for example unmatched parentheses or an illegal character Expression data not allowed A legal expression data was encountered but was not allowed by the device at this point in parsing Macro error This error as well as errors 181 through 184 are generated when defining a macro or executing a macro Invalid outside macro definition Indicates that a macro parameter placeholder was encountered outside of a macro definition Invalid inside macro definition Indicates that the program message unit sequence sent with a DDT or DMC command is syntactically invalid see Macro parameter error Indicates that a command inside the macro definition had the wrong number or type of parameters Execution error This code indicates only that an Execution Error as defined in JEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 has occurred Invalid while
138. reli able measurements 230 Trigger modes settling 226 229 Triggering measurements 224 units of measure 75 uploading programs to Test Set 380 using 25 HP IB command syntax ACPower 95 AFANalyzer 97 AFGeneratorl 100 AFGenerator2 101 102 AUNits 83 AUNits 86 AVERage 573 RESet 184 STATE 183 STATe 183 VALue 184 VALue 184 CALLP 122 CONFigure 117 BADDress 200 CPRocess 122 DECoder 141 diagram structure 92 DISPlay 145 204 DUNits 76 DUNits 77 ENCoder 102 front panel keys 180 guidelines 71 HLIMit DUNits 187 DUNits 187 EXCeeded 188 RESet 189 STATE 185 STATe 186 VALue 186 VALue 188 HP IB only commands 167 INCRement 189 193 DIVide 192 DUNIts 191 DUNIts 191 MODE 190 MODE 190 MULTiply 192 INCRement 190 Integer Number Setting 174 LLIMit DUNits 187 DUNits 187 574 EXCeeded 188 RESet 189 STATE 185 STATe 186 VALue 186 VALue 188 MEASure 147 RESet 201 METer HEND 195 DUNits 196 DUNits 196 HEND 195 INTerval 194 INTerval 194 LEND 195 DUNits 196 DUNits 196 LEND 195 STATe 193 STATe 194 Multiple Number Measurement 179 Multiple Real Number Setting 176 Number Measurement 177 OSCilloscope 154 PROGram 159 Real Number Setting 175 REFerence DUNits 199 DUNits 199 STATe 197 STATe 197 VALue 198 VALue 198 REGister 160 CLEar 203 RECall 202 Index SAVE 202 RF
139. request will depend upon the needs of the particular application S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Using the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface When To Query Data Messages Received From The Mobile Station The Call Processing Subsystem makes available to the control program many data messages received from the mobile station For example if the Test Set sends a registration message to the mobile station the registration information MIN ESN SCM received from the mobile station can be read by the control program The data messages are displayed on the CRT after the successful completion of the call processing function registration page origination etc When call processing functions complete state changes occur within the Call Processing Subsystem For example when a registration completes the Call Processing Subsystem exits the register state the Register annunciator is turned off and returns to the active state the Active annunciator is turned on The control program should only query the Test Set for the data messages after all the state transitions are complete For example the control program should not attempt to read the MIN ESN or SCM until after the Register annunciator is turned off and the Active annunciator is turned on This is because the Test Set has a multitasking architecture wherein multiple processes execute on
140. s have settled In order to ensure that all signals have settled to proper values the instrument control processor initiates a one second delay upon receipt of the OPC OPC and WAI commands In parallel with the one second timer the instrument control processor commands all active measurements to tell it when the measurement s are done When all active measurements are done and the one second timer has elapsed the OPC OPC and W AI commands are satisfied The OPC command should not be used for determining if a call processing state command has completed successfully Call processing subsystem states do not complete a state is ither active or inactive Using the OPC command with a call processing subsystem state command results in a deadlock condition The control program will continuously query the output queue fora 1 buta will never be placed in the output queue because the command never completes For example the following command sequence should not be used OUTPUT 714 CALLP ACTive OPC The OPC command should not be used with any of the following call processing subsystem commands ACTive REGister PAGE HANDoff RELease The Call Processing Subsystem Status Register Group should be used to control program flow Refer to Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem on page 425 for more information on controlling program flow using the call processing subsystem status register group S agile
141. should not be used to change any parameter that can be set on any other Call Processing Subsystem screen The contents of the applicable fields on the CALL CONTROL screen and the CALL CONFIGURE screen are not updated to reflect any changes made while in the CALL BIT screen There is no coupling between the CALL BIT screen and the Test Set S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL BIT Screen For example changing the value of the SAT color code field SCC in the forward control channel mobile station control message MS IntVCh does not change the setting of the SAT field on the CALL CONTROL screen When using the CALL BIT screen the user is responsible for setting the contents of all messages used in a messaging protocol When using the CALL BIT screen the Call Processing Subsystem host firmware sends the correct message s at the correct time s as defined in the applicable industry standard Message content is the responsibility of the user Using the CALL BIT screen requires expert knowledge of the call processing messaging protocols used in the selected system that is the system selected in the System Type field on the CALL CONTROL screen The contents of eleven different messages can be modified from this screen The message to be modified is selected using the Set Message field The eleven messages whose contents can be modified are e Forw
142. station control message A mobile station must be actively connected on a voice channel to the Test Set that is the Connect annunciator lit before attempting to send an order to a mobile station The query form of the command that is ORDer can be used to determine the last order sent to the mobile station using the ORDer command Syntax ORDer lt gt lt order message gt lt gt ORDer Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP ORD CHNG PL 0 OUTPUT 714 CALLP ORD ENTER 714 Last ord sent OUTPUT 714 CALLP ORD 454 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Page Page Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen This field is used to initiate a page to the mobile station connected to the Test Set The Test Set must be in the active state that is Active annunciator lit and the MS Id information must be correct before attempting to page a mobile station The PAGE command is used to control this field There is no query form of the PAGE command Syntax PAGE Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP PAGE When lit the Page annunciator indicates that the mobile station connected to the Test Set is currently being paged on the forward control channel The Page annunciator is not programmable The state of the Page annunciator is reflected in the Call Processing Status Register Group Condition Register bit 3 See Call Processing Status Re
143. string RAMFORIBASIC gt Returns integer string jaa eee ar Returns integer string RAMDISKALLOC e SAVEREGALLOC D 0 Returns integer string eO RELAYCOUNT D gt Returns an array of 7 numbers seperated by commas NL 167 Status Status GSTATus IS MPRESet D efCALibration Js HARDwarel M4 HARDware2 J OPERation N Y QUEStionable COMMunicate CALLProc X y EVEN O DY K pa ae NC CONDition Returns integer value MCENABIE K M eh CNTRansition pal 7 TETUER A PTRansition JN oJ space gt integer value gt y Returns integer value O A 168 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS stat sec System System 7 A J SYSTem 5 7 2 Returns integer value quoted string V Nul 169 Tests Tests COMMentl 7 Comment for new procedure COMMenQ N Comment for new procedure CONFigure space gt lt integer value gt RO string gt V tHEADingl eld i HEADing2 JN External Devices N i da aS lt integer value gt lt j 2 Lora A 1 lt space gt gt lt integer value gt Returns unquoted string 5 elements seperated by commas e EXECution gt Port B DESTination lt lt space gt gt lt Crt ANY 3 AL
144. the command line as a quoted alphanumeric string Quotes are used with all Underlined toggling and One of many menu choice fields See Changing A Field s Setting in chapter 1 of the User s Guide for field type descriptions For example to set the RF Generator s Output Port field to Dup1 duplex the Dupl would be entered into the command string RFG OUTP Dupl or RFG OUTP Dupl Using Spaces When changing a field s setting a space must always precede the setting value in the command string regardless of the field type command space value RFG FREQ lt space gt 850MHZ RFG ATT lt space gt OFF IDE BOOK CHAPTERS guidelin fb Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation Using Colons to Separate Commands The GPIB command syntax is structured using a control hierarchy that is analogous to manual operation The control hierarchy for making a manual instrument setting using the front panel controls is as follows first the screen is accessed then the desired field is selected then the appropriate setting is made GPIB commands use the same hierarchy The colon is used to separate the different levels of the command hierarchy For example to set the AF Analyzer input gain to 40 dB the following command syntax would be used DISP AFAN AFAN INP GAIN 40 dB Using the Semicolon to Output Multiple Commands Multiple commands can be output from one program line by separating th
145. the increment setting by a factor of 10 new increment setting current increment setting 10 Integer only fields such as Intensity and Print Adrs have a fixed increment of 1 and cannot be changed Syntax INCRement DIVide Example OUTPUT 714 RFG FREQ INCR DIV If the RF Generator s frequency increment is 10 MHz this command reduces the increment value from 10 MHz to 1 MHz S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS efpkc sec Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands Increment Up Down Arrow Keys The Increment Up Down Arrow Keys Data Functions change the field s setting by one increment value up or down The increment value is determined by the INCR SET INCRement Data Function Syntax INCRement UP or DOWN Example OUTPUT 714 RFG FREQ INCR UP This increases the RF Generator s frequency by one increment value METER The METER Data Function enables disables the analog bar graph meter for certain measurements The GPIB command METer is used to select this data function programmatically To Turn the Meter ON and OFF Use the METer STATe commands to turn the meter ON and OFF The parameter can be a 1 or ON to turn the meter on and a 0 or OFF to turn the meter off Syntax METer STATe ON or 1 METer STATe OFF or 0 Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW MET ON This turns the analog bar graph meter ON for the TX Power measurement 193 Equ
146. the purpose of the Local Lockout mode in that the Active Controller will lose control of the test set 2 Instrument configuration is reset to the power up condition thereby losing the instrument configuration set by the Active Controller Clear Lockout Set Local The Test Set returns to Local mode when it receives the Clear Lockout Set Local message No instrument settings are changed by the transition from Remote mode with Local Lockout to Local mode but triggering is reset to FULL SETTling and REPetitive RETRiggering 55 Chapter 1 Using GPIB Remote Local Modes 56 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Methods For Reading Measurement Results Chapter 2 Methods For Reading Measurement Results Background Background 58 One of the most common remote user interface operations performed on an Test Set is to query and read a measurement result Generally this operation is accomplished by sending the query command to the Test Set followed immediately by a request to read the requested measurement result Using Hewlett Packard Rocky Mountain BASIC RMB language this operation would be written using the OUTPUT and ENTER command as follows OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW ENTER 714 Power Using this programming structure the control program will stay on the ENTER statement until it is satisfied that is until the Test Set has returned the requested measurement result This stru
147. to ten N10 the first value displayed is the average of 1 measurement the second value displayed is the average of two measurements the third value displayed is the average of three measurements the tenth value displayed is the average of 10 measurements For readings greater than N the data function approximates a hardware single pole RC low pass filter If the AVG data function is enabled programmatically and the number of averages is set to ten N 10 the first value returned through GPIB is the average of 1 measurement the second value returned through GPIB is the average of two measurements the third value returned through GPIB is the average of three measurements the tenth value returned through GPIB is the average of 10 measurements Each successive reading would mimic the output of a single pole RC low pass filter that had been initially charged to the value of the tenth reading If a true average value is desired that is Vayg V V2 V3 Vy N the recommended procedure through GPIB is to take N sequential readings and calculate the average within the program context 182 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS efpkc sec Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands To Turn Measurement Averaging ON and OFF Use the AVERage STATe commands to turn the averaging data function ON and OFF Syntax AVER age STATe ON AVERage STATe OFF Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR DISTN AVER STAT ON This turns the AV
148. various parts of the instrument Many commands generate data which must be sent back to the controller This data is buffered in the Output Queue until it is read by the controller The availability of data is summarized in the MAV bit of the Status Byte Register The state of the MAV message indicates whether or not the Output Queue is empty The MAV message is TRUE logic 1 when there is data in the Output Queue and FALSE logic 0 when it is empty The Output Queue is read by addressing the Test Set to TALK and then handshaking the bytes out of the Output Queue Depending upon the type of command sent the data may appear in the Output Queue almost immediately or it may take several seconds as is the case with some Signaling Decoder measurements Care should be exercised when reading the Output Queue since the GPIB bus will by design wait until the data is available before processing further bus messages Reading the Output Queue Example Enter 714 Output_data 263 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Error Message Queue Group The Error Message Queue Group is an implementation of the status queue model described in Status Queue Model on page 250 The Error Message Queue queue type is a first in first out FIFO queue that holds up to 20 messages The Error Message Queue Group includes a FIFO queue but no Message Available MAV Summary Message Refer to the Status Reporting Structure Overview on page 239
149. which Controller will be monitoring the bus to determine if communications have failed only the System Controller can unconditionally demand control of the bus and reset it to a known state using the IFC line Ensure that only one Controller connected to the bus is configured as the System Controller or bus conflicts will occur When Active Controller Capability is Required The Test Set must be the Active Controller on the bus under the following conditions 1 314 whenever the Test Set needs to control any device connected to the GPIB bus such as an external disk drive an external printer or an external instrument whenever a screen image is printed to an external GPIB printer Whenever an instrument configuration is saved or recalled from an external GPIB disk drive Whenever running any Agilent 11807 Radio Test Software package which uses an ex ternal GPIB device such as a disk drive a printer or an instrument Whenever running any IBASIC program which uses an external GPIB device such as a disk drive a printer or an instrument S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Passing Control Passing Control to the Test Set Control is passed to the Test Set when it is addressed to TALK and then receives the Take Control Talker TCT command The programming or controller command which implements the pass control protocol as outlined in the IEEE 488 1 and 488 2 Standards is lang
150. 0b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS mrnss sec Number Measurement Syntax Number Measurement Syntax Previous Syntax MEW its v space GPIB units 732 Returns GPIB units lt OFF gt Returns 1 or 0 DUNits D m pacem units gt A Returns units Ss 7 lt space real value AN units Y Sa HILIMit eCLLIMit Returns real value H Me DUNits space unis gt Returns units Ma EXCeeded gt Returns or 0 Ve RESet 4 VeGSTATe Osee ced em Ve ON y lt OFF gt J Returns 1 or 0 ES Continued hey 177 Number Measurement Syntax Previous Syntax A METer gt HEND Returns 1 or 0 H LEND y space gt lt real value gt A gt lt units gt Returns real value Sof DUNits e space units gt j Returns units H A INTerval D x space integer value 5 S Returns integer value H REFerence gt lt lt space gt lt real value gt VALue y Me units Returns real value H DUNits space gt units gt gt Returns units M STATe space XI gt eG gt J OFF y Returns 1 or 0 H ON y lt oF gt Returns 1 or 0 A C CUNITS
151. 10 indicates this is the first word of the system parameter overhead parameter message e A 111 indicates this is the second word of the system parameter overhead message 3 binary character required Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions MS WORD1 Message Fields Figure 51 T1T2 DCC MIN1 Parity Set Message MS WORD1I FCC Mobile Station Control Message Abbreviated Address Word MS WORD Message Fields This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message 2 binary characters required Digital color code field 2 binary characters required First part of the mobile identification number field 24 binary character required Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 501 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions MSMessOrd Message Fields Figure 52 Send Word T1T2 SCC MIN2 RSVD 502 Set Message MSMessOrd FCC Mobile Station Control Message Extended Address Word Tit2 SCC MIN2 RSVD Local E 00000 MSMessOrd Message Fields The Send Word field sends the currently defin
152. 1750 1760 1770 1780 1790 302 URN Srvice_hardl This routine would determine which bit s TRUI would determine which bit s in the S and Event Register to clear it it will NOT latch another tandard Event take appropriate action If the Event Register is his routine would determine which bit s Event Register ar c Event Register to clear it h another event from t the Test Set from generating another SRQ logic 1 vent thereby preventing from generating another SRQ in the Calibration Status and take If the Event Register is he Condition in the Hardware Status Register 1 Group Event Register are TRUE logic 1 and take appropriate action NOTE Read the Event Register to clear it If the Event Register is not cleared it will NOT latch another event from the Condition Register thereby preventing the Test Set from generating another SRO UTPUT Inst address STAT HARD1 EVEN ENTER Inst address Event reg RETURN SUBEND S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Instrument Initialization Instrument Initialization This section discusses the various methods available to the programmer to initialize the Test Set to a known state With over 22 instruments utilizing greater than 25 screens containing hundreds of fields which can be p
153. 180 IF FNSet state Register THEN 190 Read rcdd data 1234 Pass the numbers of the RCDD fields to be read 200 ELSE 210 Print error 220 END IF 230 IF NOT FNSet state Page THEN CALL Print error 240 Meas carrier 250 IF FNOrder Power 7 THEN 260 Read rcdd data 1 270 ELSE 280 Print error 290 END IF 300 OUTPUT Inst addr CALLP VCH 211 VMAC 4 SAT 5970Hz 310 IF NOT FNSet state Handoff THEN CALL Print error 320 Meas sinad 330 IF NOT FNOrder Mainten 0 THEN CALL Print error 0 dummy variable 340 IF FNOrder Alert 0 THEN 0 dummy variable to satisfy parm list 350 INPUT Did the phone ALERT Y N Yes no 360 IF Yes no 1 1 N OR Yes no 1 1 n THEN 370 PRINT Phone failed to ALERT 380 STOP 390 END IF 400 ELSE 10 Print error 20 E 30 IF NOT FNSet_state Release THEN CALL Print_error 40 BEEP 4 4 END IF 4 4 450 DISP Originate a call from the mobile station 4 4 4 4 60 IF FNSet state Originate THEN 70 DISP 80 Read_rcdd_data 12345 90 ELSE 530 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb 500 510 520 530 540 1000 Cnfg_stat_reg 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 3000 3010 3020 3021 3030 3040 3050 3060 3070 3100 3110 3120 3130 3140 3150 31
154. 20 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb FM Deviation NOTE Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen This field displays the measured FM deviation of the RF carrier being transmitted by the mobile station on the reverse voice channel Four dashes indicate that no carrier is present to measure A numeric value would only be displayed in the connected state that is the Connected annunciator is lit The FM Deviation field is only displayed when the Display field is set to Meas Refer to the Display field description on page 444 for information on how to read measurement results from this field When the CALL CONTROL screen is displayed the Test Set s instrumentation is configured for optimal performance of the signaling decoder Two characteristics of the instrumentation which have a significant affect on the performance of the signaling decoder are 1 audio frequency gain and 2 post detection filtering While the CALL CONTROL screen is displayed the audio frequency gain stages are fixed that is autoranging is tuned off This is necessary to ensure that no signaling bursts are missed as a result of the audio gain stages autoranging in response to a burst of signaling data Fixing the audio gain stages may result in a slight accuracy degradation for FM deviation measurements less than 7 kHz In addition the post detection bandwidth is set at 20 Hz and gt 99 kHz in t
155. 20 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller The TESTS Subsystem TESTS Main Menu Please select a procedure to load 1 TI Acontinue LOAD TEST PROCEDURE Select Procedure Location Help Select Procedure Filename Library Program Description To Screen RF GEN CUSTOMIZE TEST PROCEDURE SET UP TEST SET SCOPE SPEC ANL PH Execution Cond ENCODER MEE External Devices MUI Printer Setup A IBASIC Cntrl MEE Channel Information MEE Test Paraneters EIU Order of Tests Sa Pass Fail Limits MEA Sove Delete Procedure ch6drw7 drw Figure 30 The TESTS Main Menu Subsystem Screen TESTS Subsystem User Interface Screens The TESTS Subsystem allows the user to easily modify the test subroutines parameters specifications and configuration to correspond to the requirements of a specific radio There are several user interface screens provided to allow the user to make modifications 423 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller The TESTS Subsystem To access any of these screens position the cursor on the desired field and push the rotary knob The Order of Tests screen lets the user select the desired test s from the full set of available tests in the loaded procedure file The Channel Information screen defines the transmit and receive frequencies used for the selected tests The Pass Fail Limits screen defines the specifications used to generate pass fail
156. 241 status queue model 250 status register model 247 status register structure overview 245 status registers in Test Set 251 status reporting structure operation 249 structure overview 239 Summary Message definition 248 Transition filter definition 247 writing the Status Byte Register 245 Storing code files 338 System Controller 314 system parameter overhead word 2 mes sage 489 Index T Terminal Configuration 372 Test Set Attribute units changing 83 Attribute units definition 81 Attribute units guidelines 86 Attribute units querying 86 default file system 324 display units changing 76 display units definition 75 display units guidelines 77 display units querying 77 file name conflicts 336 file system 334 file types 338 HP IB units changing 79 HP IB units definition 78 HP IB units guidelines 80 HP IB units querying 80 IEEE 488 1 Interface Function Capa bilities 48 IEEE 488 1 Remote Interface Message Capabilities 50 initializing see Instrument Initializa tion 303 instruments contained in 27 interfacing to using serial ports 360 local mode 53 54 operating modes 26 overview 26 remote mode 53 54 remote operation 47 STATe command definition 87 STATe command guidelines 88 status registers 251 units of measure 75 writing programs for 26 31 Tests HP IB command syntax diagram 170 TESTS Subsystem 419 default mass storage locations 332 DOS file
157. 3 Method 1 Program Development on an External BASIC Language Computer 375 Method 2 Developing Programs on the Test Set Using the IBASIC EDIT Mode 381 Method 3 Developing Programs Using Word Processor on a PC Least Preferred 385 Uploading Programs from the Test Set toaPC 392 Serial I O from IBASIC Programs 393 PROGram Subsystem 396 The TESTS Subsystem 419 Contents 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Description of the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface 426 Using the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface 429 Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen 439 Programming the CALL DATA Screen 464 CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions 468 CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions 487 ogramming the ANALOG MEAS Screen 510 ramming the CALL CONFIGURE Screen 517 Example Programs 520 21 Contents 22 9 Error Messages Contents Index 569 23 Contents 24 Using GPIB 1 GPIB was formerly called HP IB for Hewlett Packard instruments Some labels on the instrument may still reflect the former HP name 25 Chapter 1 Using GPIB Overview of the Test Set Overview of the Test Set 26 The Test Set combines up to 22 separate test instruments and an Instrument BASIC IBASIC Controller into one package All of the Test Set s functions can be automatically controlled through application programs running on the built in IBASIC Con
158. 60 3170 3180 3190 3200 3210 3250 3281 Print_error END IF END IF NOT FNSet_stat PRINT Program completed Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Example Programs Release THEN CALL Print_error SUB Cnfg_stat_reg COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr ON TIM ENTER OFF T SUBEX TIT Cnfg failed BEEP STOP SUBEND OUTPUT Inst addr RST CLS SRE 0 STAT CALLP PTR 0 NTR 0 OPC EOUT Bus addr 10 GOTO Cnfg failed Inst addr Cnfg complete IMEOUT Bus addr PRINT Cnfg stat reg SUB timed out on OPC query Cond test set SUB Cond test set COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr o Ck kk Ck Ck Kk ek Ck kk Ck Sk Ck kk Ck Sk kk ke kk kk kk Sk Sk kk ko kk kk Sk kk kk Sk kk Sk kk Sk kk Sk KKK kc k ko KK KK Prompt operator to make sure that no RF power is applied to the RF IN OUT port when o Ck kk Kk Ck Ck Ce Ck Ck kk Ck Sk Ck kk kk kk ke kk kk Sk kk ko kk kk Sk kk Sk kk kk Sk kk Sk Mk Sk Sk ko ko Sk RARA ko ko KKK OUTPUT OUTPUT SUBEND Cnfg base sta DI the power meter is zeroed Inst addr DISP RFAN RFAN PME ZERO I Inst addr DISP CONF CONF NOTC AFGEN1 EF FNCnfg base sta INTEGER Cch Vmac Vch Sid Sat REAL Ampl Sys COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr COM
159. 714 CALLP REG When lit the Register annunciator indicates that the mobile station connected to the Test Set is being commanded to register with the Test Set The Register annunciator is not programmable The state of the Register annunciator is reflected in the Call Processing Status Register Group Condition Register bit 1 See Status Reporting in the Application Guide for further information S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Release Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen This field is used to terminate an active voice channel connection with the mobile station When the Release field is selected a mobile station control message with a Release order is sent to the mobile station on the forward voice channel A mobile station must be actively connected on a voice channel to the Test Set that is the Connect annunciator lit before attempting to send a release order to the mobile station The RELease command is used to control this field There is no query form of the RELease command Syntax RELease Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP REL 459 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen SAT 460 The Sat field is divided into two fields The left hand field displays the current SAT tone frequency assignment for the current voice channel being used by the Test Set and the mobile s
160. 8 1 defined Group Execute Trigger GET message and has the same effect as a GET when received by the Test Set The Test Set responds to the TRG command by triggering all currently active measurements 221 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands RCL Recall Instrument State SAV Save Instrument State 222 The RCL command restores the state of the Test Set from a file previously stored in battery backed internal memory on a memory card on a RAM disk or on an external disk The RCL command is followed by a decimal number in the range of 0 to 99 which indicates which Test Set SAVE RECALL file to recall The mass storage location for SAVE RECALL files is selected using the SAVE RECALL field on the I O CONFIGURE screen The RCL command cannot be used to recall files with names which contain non numeric characters or a decimal number greater than 99 To recall SAVE RECALL files saved with names which contain non numeric characters or a decimal number greater than 99 use the REG RECall filename command see RECALL in the Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands section of chapter 4 of the Agilent 8920B Programmer s Guide The SAV command saves the present state of the Test Set into a file in battery backed internal memory on a memory card on a RAM disk or on an external disk The SAV command is followed by a decimal number in the range of 0 to 99 which indicates the name of the stored SAVE RECALL file The mass storage location for
161. 942 Phone 619 697 8790 FAX 619 697 5955 CompuServe Number 765 16 254 Negative numbered error messages take the form ERROR XX lt error message gt For example Error 128 Numeric data not allowed or Error 141 Invalid character data S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errormsg fb IBASIC Error Messages IBASIC Error Messages are associated with IBASIC operation IBASIC error messages can have both positive and negative numbers Only the negative numbered messages are explained in this documentation Refer to the GPIB Error Messages on page 544for information on negative numbered error messages the error message associated with a negative number is the same for GPIB errors and IBASIC errors IBASIC error messages take the following form IBASIC Error XX error message For example IBASIC Error 286 Program runtime error 543 GPIB Error Messages GPIB Error Messages are associated with GPIB operation GPIB error messages take the following form HP IB Error XX error message or HP IB Error lt error message gt For example HP IB Error 410 Query INTERRUPTED or HP IB Error Input value out of range 1 GPIB was formerly called HP IB for Hewlett Packard instruments Some labels on the instrument may still reflect the former name 544 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errormsg fb Text Only Error Messages Text only error messages are generally associated with
162. 994 0 14 16384 IBASIC Program Running 1 2 an IBASIC program is running on the built in IBASIC controller 13 8192 Unused in the Test Set 12 4096 Unused in the Test Set 11 2048 Unused in the Test Set 10 1024 Unused in the Test Set 9 512 Call Processing Status Register 1 one or more of the enabled events Group Summary Message have occurred since the last reading or clearing of the Event Register 8 256 Unused in the Test Set 7 128 Unused in the Test Set 6 64 Unused in the Test Set 5 32 Unused in the Test Set 4 16 Unused in the Test Set 3 8 Unused in the Test Set 2 4 Unused in the Test Set 1 2 Unused in the Test Set 0 1 Unused in the Test Set 253 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting 254 Accessing the Operation Status Register Group s Registers The following sections show the syntax and give programming examples using the Instrument BASIC programming language for the STATus commands used to access the Operation Status Register Group s registers Reading the Condition Register Syntax STATus OPERation CONDition Example OUTPUT 714 STAT OPER COND ENTER 714 Register_value Reading the Transition Filters Syntax STATus OPERation PTRansition STATus OPERation NTRansition Example OUTPUT 714 STAT OPER PTR ENTER 714 Register_value Writing the Transition Filters Syntax STATus OPERation PTRansitio
163. A units gt lt DOWN gt j space units gt Returns units m spaco lt gt LINear gt Me LOGarithm Y Returns LIN or LOG STATe lt OFF gt 4 Returns 1 r0 4 175 Multiple Real Number Setting Syntax Multiple Real Number Setting Syntax Previous Syntax space integer value NDS real value gt 7 gt units gt as gt I space integer value Returns real value DUNIts D space gt integer value AA units gt gt lt space gt gt lt integer value gt Returns units INCRement J lt space integer value gt lt Teal value gt A units gt lt UP gt A ee al ra J space m integer value gt Returns real value e DUNits Jom pace m integer value gt gt lt units gt 2 lt space gt gt lt _ integer value gt lReturns units MODE Yep integer value lt LINear Y ii Lf lt space gt gt integer value gt Returns LIN or LOG gt DIVide gt lt spaco gt integer value gt MULTiply lt space gt gt lt integer value gt UNITS space gt integer value Dom GPIB units gt integer value Returns GPIB units 176 S agilent 8920 892
164. A suffix was encountered after a numeric element which does not allow suffixes Character data error This error as well as errors 141 through 148 are generated when parsing a character data element Invalid character data Either the character data element contains an invalid character or the particular element received is not valid for the header Character data too long The character data element contains more than twelve characters see IEEE 466 2 7 7 1 4 Character data not allowed A legal character data element was encountered where prohibited by the device S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errormsg fb Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error 150 151 152 158 160 161 168 170 String data error This error as well as errors 151 through 158 are generated when parsing a string element Invalid string data A string data element was expected but was invalid for some reason see IEEE 486 2 7 7 5 2 For example an END message was received before the terminal quote character Parity error Parity error String data not allowed A string data element was encountered but was not allowed by the device at this point in parsing Block data error This error as well as errors 161 through 168 are generated when parsing a block data element Invalid block data A block data element was expected but was invalid for some
165. ANalyzer 161 RFGenerator 163 RINTerface 164 SANalyzer 165 SPECial 167 STATe 87 STATe 88 STATus 168 169 TESTs 170 TRIGger 173 ABORt 228 IMMediate 228 MODE 229 UNITs 79 UNITs 80 use of single quotes 41 use of spaces 41 72 using colons to separate commands 73 using question mark to query setting field 74 using quotes for strings 72 using semicolon colon command sepa rator 73 238 using semicolon to output multiple commands 73 using upper lower case letters 71 HP IB only commands HP IB command syntax diagram 167 I I O Configure HP IB command syntax diagram 117 IBASIC avoiding program hangs 40 command line 356 Controller 26 28 29 44 Controller default mass storage loca tion 331 Controller interfacing to using serial ports 360 Controller architecture 28 29 Controller screen 355 COPY command 347 copying files 347 default file system 324 EDIT mode entering exiting 383 error messages 539 GET command 338 INITIALIZE command 338 345 350 331 initializing media 338 language 28 LOAD command 338 making a simple measurement 46 Mass Storage Volume Specifier MSD 345 MSI 345 passing control back using PASS CON TROL 316 program development see Program Development 357 requesting HP IB active control 317 running programs 38 SAVE command 338 selecting mass storage devices 332 STORE command 338 storing files 338 IEEE 488 1 compliance 47 48 Interfa
166. ARKE eO LEVel K Returns real value Ma See Number Measurement Syntax Does not include the METer command TRACe Returns 417 real value RFRequency K FREQuency N e ERRor Ne 7 y ABSolute SANalyzer b S eGMARKer K FREQuency GA B LEVel NED Returns real value Mei IE See Number Measurement Syntax Returns real value IE See Number Measurement Syntax Does not include the METer command Returns 417 real value we MEAS continued 148 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS meas sec MEASure DECoder K eCAMPS Y Sa A Y TACS ON x a A i Ml NBITs CDATA Y NX A e CDATa DATA P CDCSS K BITS C BN CODes JN RATE WA A ON DPAGing J DATA _ Measure a fReturns integer value J _ Returns quoted string A Returns quoted string A ES 7 Returns real value a Ma Sce Number Measurement Syntax Does not include the METer command Returns quoted string A RATE me y wa MEAS DEC Continued On Next Page JReturns real value pu a ee See Number Measurement Syntax Does not include the METer command 149 Measure MEASure amp DIME SH SYMBol _
167. Active Measurement 41 Adjacent Channel Power HP IB command syntax diagram 95 AdvanceLink HP 68333F Version B 02 00 terminal emulator 371 384 AF Analyzer HP IB command syntax diagram 97 AF Freq CALL CONTROL screen 441 AF Generator 1 HP IB command syntax diagram 100 AF Generator 2 HP IB command syntax diagram 101 102 pre modulation filters 101 ANALOG MEAS Screen amplitude 512 de emphasis 512 detector 512 example measurement routines 514 filter 1 513 filter 2 513 fm deviation 513 how to program analog meas screen 511 requirements for using analog meas screen 511 tx freq error 513 tx power 513 Analog MEAS Screen af anl in 511 af freq 511 af gen1 freq 512 af genl to 512 Annunciators 42 Arming measurements 231 ASCII Text Files sending with ProComm Communica tions Software 391 sending with Windows Terminal 390 569 memory card 344 part numbers 344 Cc Calibration Status Register Group 276 accessing registers contained in 274 278 condition register bit assignments 272 277 Call Bit Screen access 481 active 481 connect 481 data spec 481 handoff 482 modifying the call bit screen message fields 486 page 483 reading the call bit screen message fields 484 register 483 release 483 set message 483 Call Bit screen Order 482 Call Control Screen access 439 active 440 amplitude 441 called number 441 cnt channel 443 connect 444 display 444 ESN dec 450 E
168. Addr DISP TIB Displays the IBASIC screen 160 OUTPUT Addr PROG EXEC CLS Clears the Test Set display 170 OUTPUT 714 PROG DEF Initiates the upload of whole program 180 ENTER Addr USING X D Count len Number of lines in program 190 ENTER Addr USING VALS Count_len amp D Char_count Number of characters 200 210 File name 1 CREATE ASCII C htb386 code 1 05 Char_count 256 5 220 Number of records reserved for upload 230 File name 2 ASSIGN GFile TO C htb386 code 240 250 DISP Transferring code from Test Set 260 LOOP Program transfer loop 270 ENTER Addr Lines ICR LF terminates each line 280 PRINT Line Displays new lines on Test Set display 290 OUTPUT File Line ITransfer new line to file 300 Char count Char count LEN Line 2 Reduces Char count by the number of 310 characters in current line 320 EXIT IF Char count 0 330 END LOOP 340 350 ASSIGN File TO Cleans out file buffer 360 ENTER Addr Line Close off reading 370 CLEAR SCREEN 380 DISP Transfer complete 390 LOCAL Addr 400 END 380 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 2 Developing Programs on the Test Set Using the IBASIC EDIT Mode Method 2 Developing Programs on the Test Set Using the IBASIC EDIT Mode If a BASIC language computer is not available program development can be done directly on the Test Set using the IBASIC EDIT mode A terminal or PC connected t
169. Advanced Operations Status Reporting Table 20 shows the Questionable Data Signal Register Group s Condition Register bit assignments Table 20 Questionable Data Signal Register Group Condition Register Bit Assignments NE Wes Condition Comment 15 32768 Not Used Always 0 Defined by SCPI Version 1994 0 14 16384 Unused in Test Set 13 8192 Unused in Test Set 12 4096 Unused in Test Set 11 2048 Unused in Test Set 10 1024 Unused in Test Set 9 512 Unused in Test Set 8 256 Calibration Register Group Summary 1 one or more of the enabled events Message have occurred since the last reading or clearing of the Event Register 7 128 Unused in Test Set 6 64 Unused in Test Set 5 32 Unused in Test Set 4 16 Unused in Test Set 3 8 Unused in Test Set 2 4 Unused in Test Set 1 2 Unused in Test Set 0 1 Unused in Test Set 268 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Accessing the Questionable Data Signal Register Group s Registers The following sections show the syntax and give programming examples using the Instrument BASIC programming language for the STATus commands used to access the Questionable Data Signal Register Group s registers Reading the Condition Register Syntax STATus QUEStionable CONDition Example OUTPUT 714 STAT QUES COND ENTER 714 Register value Reading th
170. Agilent Technologies 8920A RF Communications Test Set Programmer s Guide Firmware Version A 18 00 and above ANTIN MICI VOL SQUELC 6 6 o9 PETITS RF IN OUT DUPLEX OI vow O Y Ades Agilent Part No 08920 90220 Printed in U S A April 2000 Rev B Notice Edition Print Date Copyright Agilent Technologies 1997 2000 No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means including electronic storage and retrieval or translation into a foreign language without prior agreement and written consent from Agilent Technologies Inc as governed by United States and international copyright laws The material contained in this document is subject to change without notice Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent Technologies Inc shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material U S Government users will receive no greater than Limited Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 14 June 1987 or DFAR 252 227 7015 b 2 November 1995 as applicable in any technical data
171. BASIC programming language used on the HP 9000 Series 200 300 System Controllers IBASIC is the only programming language supported on the built in IBASIC Controller Similarities Between the Test Set s IBASIC Controller and Other Single Tasking Controllers The architecture of the IBASIC Controller is similar to that of other single tasking instrumentation controllers Only one program can be run on the IBASIC Controller at any given time The program is loaded into RAM memory from some type of mass storage device Five types of mass storage devices are available to the Test Set SRAM memory cards ROM memory cards external disk drives connected to the GPIB interface internal RAM disc and internal ROM disc Three types of interfaces are available for connecting to external instruments and equipment GPIB RS 232 and 16 bit parallel available as Opt 020 Radio Interface Card Figure 2 shows how information is routed inside the Test Set when it is in Internal Automatic Control mode In Manual Control mode certain Test Set resources are dedicated to manual operation These resources are switched to the IBASIC Controller when an IBASIC program is running These include the serial interface at select code 9 the GPIB interface at select code 7 the parallel printer interface at select code 15 and the CRT In Manual Control mode front panel information instrument settings measurement results data input from the DUT is routed to the CRT thro
172. Bm FM FM 3 KHZ 321 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Passing Control 600 OUTPUT Internal_gpib DISP TX MEAS RFR POW 610 ENTER Internal_gpib Meas_power 620 630 OUTPUT External_gpib Printer_addrs Measured power Meas power 640 650 OUTPUT External_gpib Pwr_suply_addrs VSET 0 660 670 SUBEND 322 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb NOTE Memory Cards Mass Storage This chapter contains information about using the mass storage devices available in the Test Set for storing and retrieving program and data files Access to the mass storage devices in the Test Set was designed primarily for the built in IBASIC Controller The Test Set s mass storage devices are not directly accessible by an external controller The programming examples used in this chapter apply only to the Test Set s built in IBASIC Controller Indirect access to the Test Set s mass storage devices is available through the PROGram EXECute command Refer to the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI for generic information on the PROGram EXECute command The IBASIC programming examples are provided to assist the programmer in understanding the use of the Test Set s mass storage devices They are not intended to be a comprehensive description of the IBASIC mass storage commands and procedures For detailed information on IBASIC commands refer to the Instrument
173. C string identifier onto the string variable name without enclosing the string variable name in quotes will generate the following error HP IB Error 101 Invalid character 409 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem NOTE For simple string variables the value is returned as a quoted string This is an example For string arrays the values are returned as a comma separated list of quoted strings This is an example This is an example The string array elements are returned in ascending order Array 0 Array 1 Array 2 etc If an attempt is made to query the value of a string variable or array and no IBASIC program is in the Test Set an IBASIC Error 283 Illegal variable name is generated If an attempt is made to query the value of a string variable or array and the string variable specified in lt varname gt does not exist in the program an IBASIC Error 283 Illegal variable name is generated Syntax PROGram SELected STRing lt varname gt The program commands and syntax used to enter string data from the Test Set into the external controller will depend upon the programming language used in the external controller The examples which follow represent the capabilities of Rocky Mountain BASIC programming language running on an HP 9000 300 Series Controller 410 Example of querying the value of a simple string variable OUTPUT 714 PROGram SELected STRing Variable ENTE
174. CB Common Command or to a default address of 0 decimal if no PCB command was received Control will automatically be passed under the following conditions Test Set is the Active Controller and an IBASIC Program is Running The IBASIC program running in the Test Set is PAUSED The IBASIC program running in the Test Set finishes executing AnIBASIC RESET occurs while the IBASIC program is running e Control is passed back immediately if the System Controller executes a bus reset IFC Test Set is the Active Controller and no IBASIC Program is Running Control will be passed back within 10 seconds of receiving bus control if no controller commands are executed such as printing a screen image to an GPIB printer or saving recalling an instrument configuration from an GPIB disk drive e Control is passed back immediately if the System Controller executes a bus reset IFC e Control is passed back at the completion of a controller command such as printing a screen image to an GPIB printer or saving recalling an instrument configuration from an GPIB disk drive Passing Control Back Using IBASIC PASS CONTROL Command The Test Set will pass control back to another Controller when the IBASIC PASS CONTROL command is issued while an IBASIC program is running on the built in IBASIC Controller Refer to the HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook for a complete description of the IBASIC PASS CONTROL command S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOO
175. Connect Active Active Connect Order Connect Access Connect Connect Any state Active Current state Active Active The Access state may occur more than once during state transitions For example Connect Access Access Connect The number of times the Access state occurs is situation and system dependent If for some specific application need it is necessary to query the data messages before all state transitions have occurred the control program may have to wait some finite amount of time before requesting the data or request the data multiple time checking for the presence of data each time or some combination of the two Call Processing Subsystem state changes can be monitored by the control program through the Call Processing Status Register Group See Call Processing Status Register Group on page 435 for further information Siagilenti8920189200PRGGUIDEBOOKICHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen Figure 34 Access CALL CONTROL Display lata Meas Phone Num 509 993 5879 Active ESN dec 195 10862995 Register ESN hex C3ASC193 Page SCM Class IIIs Disconts 25 MHz Access Connect System Tvype Voice Channel Rssisnnment To Screen AMPS Cntrl Chan CALL CALL Amplitude CALL CALL dBm ANLG S SID 5970Hz SPEC ANL The CALL CONTROL Screen The CALL CONTROL screen is the p
176. E EE EEE EEE EEE FE ERE FE AE E TE EE EE E E EE EE E E E E E E E E E E EE HH HEHE EE HE This program must be loaded into the Test Set and run on the Test Set It directs ASCII characters that come in the Serial Port 9 to a file named TEMP_CODE on an SRAM card After the transfer is complete you must SCRATCH this program and GET the transferred program from the TEMP_CODE file EEEE HE AE HE AE HE AE EE AE E E E E E E EEE ERE E ERE EEE ERE ERE EEE EGE HEE HEHE HEHE HEE HE EH HE HH COM File name File name 10 DIM In 200 File name TEMP CODE IFile name on RAM card CLEAR SCREEN CLEAR 9 Clears Test Set serial bus OUTPUT 800 RST Set up Test Set Serial Port 9 to receive ASCII text file OUTPUT 800 CONF SPORT BAUD 9600 PAR None DATA 8 Bits OUTPUT 800 CONF SPORT STOP 1 Bit RPAC Xon Xoff XPAC Xon Xoff OUTPUT 800 CONF SPORT SIN IBASIC IBECHO OFF CALL Code File name In END Purge it SUB Purge it Purges File name on card COM File name File name OFF ERROR PURGE File name amp INTERNAL SUBEND Code SUB Code File name In ON ERROR CALL Purge it Branches if CREATE statement returns error CREATE ASCII File _name amp INTERNAL 650 ICreates file on card OFF ERROR ASSIGN File TO File_name amp INTERNAL PRINT
177. EAS AFR DISTN LLIM STAT ENTER 714 Lo state 1 ON O OFF OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR DISTN HLIM STAT ENTER 714 Hi state 1 ON O OFF This queries the state of high and low measurement limit checking for the Audio Frequency Analyzer Distortion measurement To Set High and Low Measurement Limits Use the HLIMit VALue and LLIMit VALue commands to set the high and low measurement limit values Syntax T LIMit VALue LLIMit VALue Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR FM HLIM 7 5 KHZ OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR FM LLIM 2 5 KHZ This sets a high measurement limit of 7 5 kHz and a low measurement limit of 2 5 kHz forthe Audio Frequency Analyzer FM Deviation measurement NOTE When setting high and low limit values a non Attribute Unit unit of measure must be specified in the command string otherwise the current Attribute Unit is assumed by the Test Set Refer to Attribute Units AUNits on page 81 186 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS efpkc sec NOTE NOTE Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands To Set the Display Units for High and Low Measurement Limits Use the HLIMit DUNIts and LLIMit DUNits commands to set the units of measure used to display the high and low measurement limit values Refer to Display Units DUNits on page 75 for description of Display Units Syntax Hd HLIMit DUNits disp units LLIMit DUNits disp units
178. ER 714 Value or OUTPUT 714 PROG NUMB Variable ENTER 714 Value This example assumes that the variable named Value in the ENTER statement is the same type as the variable named Variable in the IBASIC program Example querying the value of a one dimensional array Array 5 with 6 elements OUTPUT 714 PROGram SELected NUMBer Array ENTER 714 Result array or OUTPUT 714 PROG NUMB Array ENTER 714 Result_array This example assumes that the array named Result_array in the ENTER statement is di mensioned exactly the same as the array named Array in the IBASIC program NOTE Individual array elements cannot be queried with the NUMBer command 405 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem Example querying the value of a one dimensional array whose name is known but whose current size is unknown DIM Temp 5000 This will hold 250 numbers 20 characters each DIM Result_array 500 This array will hold up to 501 values OUTPUT 714 PROG NUMB Array Query the desired array ENTER 714 TempS Enter the values into a temporary string variable N 1 Initialize array pointer assume option base 0 REPEAT Start loop to take values from string and put in array N N 1 Increment array pointer Pos comma POS Temp Result array N VAL TempS 1 Pos comma 1 Put value into array 100 TempS Temp Pos_comma 1l Remove value from temporary string 110 UNTIL POS T
179. FM radios and when displayed automatically configure six priority fields in the Test Set for this purpose The priority fields and their preset values are listed in Table 3 on page 37 When the TX TEST screen or the RX TEST screen is displayed certain priority fields are hidden and are not settable The priority fields which are hidden are listed in Table 3 on page 37 NOTE When the TX TEST screen or the RX TEST screen is displayed any GPIB commands sent to the Test Set to change the value of a hidden priority field are ignored Hidden priority fields on the TX TEST or RX TEST screens are not settable manually or programmatically Displaying either of these screens automatically re configures the 6 priority fields as follows 1 When entering the RX TEST screen a the RF Generator s Amplitude field the AFGen1 To field and the AF Analyzer s measurement field measurement displayed in upper right portion of CRT display are e set to their preset values upon entering the screen for the first time since power up OR e set to their preset values if the PRESET key is selected OR e setto the last setting made while in the screen b the RF Generator Amplitude field and the AFGen1 To field are e set to their preset values whenever entering the screen OR e set to their preset values if the PRESET key is selected 36 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Table 3 2 When entering the TX TEST screen
180. Freq Error Freq error 1000 kHz ON 527 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Example Programs Comments for SRQ Example Program Table 52 Comments For SRQ Example Program Program Line Comment Number 80 When running on an external controller no wait is required When running on the Test Set s internal IBASIC controller a wait is required The loops have a WAIT statement included so that only this line need be changed when running on the Test Set s internal IBASIC controller 230 The number of the received data field s to be read is passed to the Read_rcdd_data subprogram as string data In this example fields 1 2 and 3 will be read The order in which the field numbers are passed dictates the order in which they are printed 370 380 A dummy variable is required to satisfy the FNOrder function passed parameter list This is necessary because IBASIC does not support the OPTIONAL keyword in function and subprogram passed parameter lists 2020 Reset the Test Set RST Clear the status reporting system CLS Set up the desired interrupt conditions in the Test Set Standard Event Status Register Group Event register conditions which will set the Summary Message TRUE if they occur Bit 5 Command Error decimal value 245 32 Bit 4 Execution Error decimal value 2 4 16 Bit 3 Device Dependent Error decimal value 2 3 8 Bit 2 Query Error decimal value 2 2 4 324164844 60 Th
181. G Data Function ON for the Audio Frequency Analyzer Distortion measurement To Query the Measurement Averaging State Use the AVERage STAT commands to query the current state of the averaging data function The returned value is either 0 OFF or 1 ON Syntax AVERage STAT Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR DISTN AVER STAT ENTER 714 State_on_off 1 ON O OFF This queries the state of the AVG Data Function for the Audio Frequency Analyzer Distortion measurement 183 Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands 184 To Reset Averaging Use the AVERage RESet commands to restart the averaging algorithm used to calculate an averaged measurement Syntax AVERage RESet Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR DISTN AVER RES This resets the AVG Data Function for the Audio Frequency Analyzer Distortion measurement To Set the Number of Averages Use the AVERage VALue commands to set the number of averages used by the averaging algorithm Syntax AVERage VALue Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR DISTN AVER VAL 25 This sets the number of averages to 25 for the AVG Data Function for the Audio Frequency Analyzer Distortion measurement To Query the Number of Averages Use the AVERage VALue commands to query the number of averages used by the averaging algorithm Syntax AVERage VALue Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR DISTN AVER VAL
182. GER Inst addr Bus addr 10030 DIM Reda 6 40 10040 INTEGER N 10050 WAIT 1 Allow time for RCDD data fields to be updated 10060 FOR N 1 TO LEN TRIMS Fields 10070 OUTPUT Inst addr CALLP RCDD amp Fields N N amp 10080 ENTER Inst addr Rcdd N 10090 PRINT RCDD amp VALS N amp amp Rcdd N 10100 NEXT N 10110 SUBEND 10120 11000 Meas_carrier SUB Meas_carrier 11010 COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst_addr Bus_addr 11015 ON TIMEOUT Bus_addr 5 RECOVER Timed_out 526 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200 1210 12000 12010 12020 12025 12030 12040 12050 12060 12070 12080 12090 12100 12110 12120 12130 12140 12150 12160 12165 12170 12180 12190 12200 12210 12220 12230 12240 12250 12260 errererrrrrrrrrrrrr rrr rrr m Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Example Programs ENTER Inst addr Power Freq error OUTPUT Inst addr MEAS AFR FREQ FM ENTER Inst addr Audiofreg Deviation PRINT USING K 2D 3D K Carrier Power Power Watts PRINT USING K 2D 3D K Audio Frequency Audiofreq 1000 kHz PRINT USING K 2D 3D K FM Deviation Deviation 1000 kHz SUBEXI Timed out ON TIMEOUT Bus addr 5 GOTO Cannot recover CLEAR Inst addr O
183. I HHZKIVNV JA YAZXTVNV WNAY LOHdS ASIA WOU YATIOALNOO THVMGHVH TOAL AdOOSOTIIOSO OISVal NOD LNSIINQ LLSNI ANYO ASHOINHIA YAZATVNV AV NOLLVIA IOHNI MHOOONS THNVd DNITVNDIS NHD NOLLONNA TH NAD AV HONDI AYV LOY AVAAHA Ht NHD AV AYVMAAVH TOULNOD NAJAOS OL NAD da TANVd LNOYH VIVA LOG ANY SLINSHY LNSIASSOSVHIA Internal Automatic Control Mode Figure 2 33 Chapter 1 Using GPIB Getting Started Getting Started What is GPIB 34 The General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB is an implementation of the IEEE 488 1 1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation Incorporation of the GPIB into the Test Set provides several valuable capabilities Programs running in the Test Set s IBASIC Controller can control all the Test Set s functions using its internal GPIB This capability provides a single instrument automated test system The Agilent 11807 Radio Test Software utilizes this capability Programs running in the Test Set s IBASIC Controller can control other instruments connected to the external GPIB The Test Set requires Option 103 RS 232 HP IB Centronics Current Measurement An external controller connected to the external GPIB can remotely control the Test Set The Test Set requires Option 103 RS 232 HP IB Centronics Current Measurement A GPIB printer connected to the external GPIB can be used to print test results and f
184. I Language ENGLISH Terminal Mode Alphanumeric Remote To enter your PC s selected serial port number often Serial 1 Printer I F None Memory Size 32K Plotter I F None Video Type select your display type Forms Path no entry Screen Size select your size 23 or 24 4 Press DONE to return to the Config screen 5 Press REMOTE CONFIG to set up the Serial port you selected above in Remote To Baud Rate 9600 Parity DataBits None 8 Enq Ack NO Asterisk OFF Chk Parity NO SR CH LO Recv Pace Xon Xoff CS CB Xmit NO XmitPace Xon Xoff 371 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports 6 Press DONE to return to the Config screen 7 Press TERMINAL CONFIG Terminal Id 2392A LocalEcho OFF CapsLock OFF Start Col 01 Bell ON XmitFnctn A NO SPOW B NO InhEolWrp C NO Line Page D LINE InhHndShk G NO Inh DC2 H NO Esc Xfer N YES ASCII 8 Bits YES Fld Separator down arrow or US BlkTerminator up arrow or RS ReturnDef musical note or CR Copy Fields Type Ahead NO Row Size 160 Host Prompt Character left arrow or D1 Horiz Scrolling Increment 08 8 Press DONE to return to the Config screen 9 Press DONE to return to the Terminal screen 10 Press MAIN to return to the Main screen 11 Press EXIT ADVLINK to exit Terminal Configuration Use the cable information in Table 39 on page 362 and Figure 25 on page 363 for connect
185. I Mass Storage Is command has been used to change the mass storage location to a different device the INTERNAL 4 designation must be used to access the memory card slot Any changes to the mass storage location made with the MSI Mass Storage Is command are lost when the Test Set is turned off Memory Card Initialization All new SRAM cards must be initialized before they can be used to store information The RAM_MNG procedure stored on the internal ROM Disk can be used to quickly initialize any SRAM memory card SRAM Memory Cards can also be initialized from the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen by inserting the memory card into the front panel slot and executing the following IBASIC command INITIALIZE lt volume type gt INTERNAL 4 where the lt volume type gt can be LIF or DOS To verify that the memory card has been properly initialized execute the IBASIC command CAT INTERNAL 4 If the error message ERROR 85 Medium uninitialized appears on the screen the memory card has not been properly initialized Check the SRAM battery to ensure that it s charged and inserted correctly in the battery holder 345 Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Backing Up Procedure and Library Files Backing Up Procedure and Library Files Making a backup copy of procedure and library files helps guard against file loss due to memory card or battery failure Using the COPY_PL ROM Program The COPY_PL procedure on the
186. IB e A Group Execute Trigger Command GET as defined by IEEE 488 1 1987 e A Trigger Common Command TRG as defined by IEEE 488 2 1987 e A TRIGger MMediate Test Set command All three commands are equivalent and have the same effect when received by the Test Set The Test Set responds to the three commands by triggering all currently active measurements A measurement is defined as active if 1 itis on the currently displayed screen 2 itis in the ON state From a programming perspective this means that the screen which contains the measurement of interest must be made available using the DISPlay command and that the measurement STATe must be ON S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS tm sec Triggering Measurements Trigger Modes The Trigger Mode is defined by two parameters retriggering and settling Retriggering Retriggering refers to what a measurement does once it has completed a measurement cycle There are two options 1 Single retriggering causes the measurement cycle to stop once a valid measurement result has been obtained A valid trigger command must be received to start the measurement again When a measurement cycle is completed the values for all active measurements are held until another trigger command is received This allows the control program to query a group of measurements that were triggered at the same time This is the same functionality as the front panel HOLD function When the trigger mode i
187. ISP RFAN easure the 714 M RF power and place result in output buffer EAS RER POW measured value into a numeric variable EN ER 714 Tx_power The above example is very simple and is designed to demonstrate the fundamental procedure for obtaining a measurement result Many other factors must be considered when designing a measurement procedure such as instrument settings signal routing settling time filtering triggering and measurement speed 46 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Chapter 1 Using GPIB Remote Operation Remote Operation The Test Set can be operated remotely through the General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB Except as otherwise noted the Test Set complies with the IEEE 488 1 1987 and IEEE 488 2 1987 Standards Bus compatibility programming and data formats are described in the following sections All front panel functions except those listed in Table 4 are programmable through GPIB Table 4 Non Programmable Front Panel Functions Function Comment ON OFF Power Switch Volume Control Knob Squelch Control Knob The position of the Squelch Control knob cannot be programmed How ever squelch can be programmed to either the Open or Fixed position Refer to the Test Set s User s Guide for more information Cursor Control Knob SHIFT Key CANCEL Key YES Key NO Key ENTER Key Backspace left arrow Key PREV
188. K CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Passing Control Requesting Control using IBASIC The Test Set has the capability to request control of the bus from the Active Controller from a running IBASIC program using the IBASIC command EXECUTE REQUEST CONTROL When the EXECUTE REQUEST CONTROL command is executed from a running IBASIC program the Request Control bit bit 1 of the Test Set s Standard Event Status Register is set to the TRUE logic 1 condition The Active Controller detects the request in the Test Set s Standard Event Status Register either as a result of an SRQ indication by the Test Set or by some polling routine which periodically checks bit 1 of the Standard Event Status Register of all potential controllers on the bus The Active Controller would then send the Test Set the address to which the Test Set is to later pass control using the PCB Common Command The Active Controller would then pass control to the Test Set Pass Control Examples The following examples illustrate how pass control could be implemented in two of the common Test Set operating configurations 1 Test Set controlled by an external controller and 2 Test Set running an IBASIC program with an external Controller connected to GPIB bus Passing Control While the Test Set is Controlled by an External Controller This example illustrates passing control between the Test Set and an external controller while the Test Set is being
189. LE Cannot recover DISP STOP SUBEND Cannot regain control of the Test Set Example Programs 535 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Example Programs Comments for Polling Example Program Table 53 Comments For Polling Example Program Program Line Number Comment 70 The polling loops require a wait statement to allow the Test Set time to process The loops have a WAIT statement included so that only this line need be changed to set the polling wait time 190 The number of the received data field s to be read is passed to the Read_rcdd_data subprogram as string data In this example fields 1 2 and 3 will be read The order in which the field numbers are passed dictates the order in which they are printed 330 340 A dummy variable is required to satisfy the FNOrder function passed parameter list This is necessary because IBASIC does not support the OPTIONAL keyword in function and subprogram passed parameter lists 6060 Ptr_value is the value that the positive transition filter will be set to The value is determined by which pseudo LED will light when the desired command is completed For example a successful order to change power is indicated by the Connect pseudo LED lighting Therefore the Ptr_value is set to 32 245 for the Power command 1020 Reset the Test Set RST Clear the status reporting system CLS Clear the Service Req
190. LP continued P gt Dig 10 ya lt J Dig 11 x gt lt J Dig 12 7 Y lt Dig 13 3 lt J Dig 14 i m x PE em 3 Dig 15 N 25 lt Dig 16 Parity Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string CALLP RCOConfirm Order Returns quoted string Confirmation Message cii NAWComing V NAWO m gt C 2 1 TFleld y d LOCa j Local CORDQualifier o ORDQ etORDer m Order V RSVD gt gt lt RSVD REServed F gt PARIity Ma CALLP continued Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Parity Call Processing Returns quoted string Returns quoted string 129 Call Processing CALLP EA 130 Na CALLP continued a SPOMI n M a FRN IN U CSPOMESSAGEI s E Jam y Space a 2 chars required a SPC Word 1 MT 1T2 y 2 Returns quoted string DCCode AA space aaa 2 chars required _ gt x A DCC SIDentify space e
191. M memory can be edited one line at a time from an external controller using the PROGram EXECute command as follows PROG EXEC existing program line number modified program line gt where existing program line number modified program line represents an existing IBASIC program line For example to edit the following existing program line in the Test Set 30 OUTPUT 814 AFAN DEMP GAIN 20 dB to 30 OUTPUT 814 AFAN DEMP GAIN 10 dB execute the following command from the external controller OUTPUT 714 PROG EXEC 30 OUTPUT 814 AFAN DEMP GAIN 10 dB Quoted strings such as those used in OUTPUT commands must use double quotes 415 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem 416 Listing A Program Execute the following command on the external controller to list an IBASIC program which is resident in the Test Set to the currently specified IBASIC Controller LIST device OUTPUT 714 PROG EXEC LIST Downloading An IBASIC Program Into the Test Set The following procedure uses the PROGram Subsystem commands to transfer an IBASIC program which is resident in the memory of the external controller from the external controller to the Test Set This procedure assumes the Test Set s GPIB address is set to 14 The example also assumes the external controller is an HP 9000 Series 300 Controller 1 2 Access the Test Sets TESTS IBASIC Controller scree
192. Memory Cards Mass Storage Mass Storage Device Overview Table 33 ROM Disk Mass Storage Overview Mass f Mass Storage Physical Mass Storage Media Supported File Storage a Type Location Volume Specifier Type System s Name ROM Disk Read only Test Set MEMORY 0 4 N A LIF memory internal memory board Typical Uses e Permanent storage of factory supplied utility programs e Permanent storage of factory supplied diagnostic programs Comments e Non erasable e Not available for user program or data storage e Not available for Save Recall register storage Table 34 External Disk Mass Storage Overview Mass Mass Physical Mass Storage Volume A Supported Storage Storage Location Specifier Media Type File Name Type p System s External GPIB Hard Connected to VIxxan Hard disk NA LIF DOS Disk disk drive Test Set s XX device address 0 30 Floppy disk GPIB Floppy external GPIB n unit number range 3 5 in DS Disk disk drive device dependent Typical Uses e Permanent program and data storage Permanent Save Recall register storage Comments e High capacity device dependent e Slowest access time of Test Set s mass storage devices 328 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS memcard fo Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Mass Storage Device Overview Table 35 SRAM Card Mass Storage Overview Mass Physical Mass Storage Supported Storage Mass S
193. Mode and its impact on measurement speed 2 Autoranging Autotuning The autoranging and autotuning functions continuously calculate and adjust gain and frequency tuning settings to provide the optimum instrument setup for each measurement This results in greater measurement accuracy but increases measurement cycle time The autoranging and autotuning functions can be turned off to decrease the measurement cycle time S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Increasing Measurement Throughput Time to first reading after making new settings is usually much slower than the repetitive reading rate once the first reading has been returned The main contributor to first reading measurement time is hardware autoranging Hardware autoranging time can be eliminated by first establishing the expected AF and RF signal levels into the Test Set With these signal levels present the Test Set will autorange allowing the operator to determine the attenuation and gain settings of the RF input attenuator as displayed in the RF ANALYZER screen and to determine the various IF and audio gains as displayed in the AF ANALYZER screen The attenuation and gain settings determined in manual mode should be recorded for use in writing the program In the control program select Gain Control Hold default is Auto and make the settings recorded in manual mode When the control program runs the signal levels into the Te
194. NAL 4 9122 9133 4 9153 9154 ROM or SRAM card chSdrw1 drw Figure 19 Internal and External Mass Storage Devices 326 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS memcard fb Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Mass Storage Device Overview Programs and data can be retrieved from any of these mass storage devices Programs and data can only be stored to RAM disk external disk or SRAM card mass storage devices The IBASIC file system supports both the LIF Agilent Technologies s Logical Interchange Format file system and the MS DOS Microsoft Disk Operating System file system The following paragraphs provide an overview of the five types of mass storage devices Table 32 RAM Disk Mass Storage Overview Mas Mass Storage i Mass Storage Volume Media Supported Storage Type Physical Location Specifier Type File Name yP p yP System s RAM Disk Non volatile Test Set s internal MEMORY 0 unit number N A LIF DOS random access memory board unit number 0 1 2 or 3 memory default 0 Typical Uses Temporary program and data storage Temporary Save Recall register storage Comments Easily overwritten or erased Not recommended for permanent program or data storage Unit 0 can be overwritten by the RAM_MNG utility program ROM Disk Unit 1 can be overwritten by the COPY PL utility program ROM Disk Units 2 and 3 are not overwritten by any ROM Disk utility program 327 Chapter 6
195. NOTE 188 To Query the High and Low Measurement Limit Settings Use the HLIMit VALue and LLIMit VALue commands to query the high and low measurement limit settings Syntax Hd LIMit VALue LIMit VALue E Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR FM HLIM VAL ENTER 714 High_limit OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR FM LLIM VAL ENTER 714 Low limit This queries the high and low measurement limits for the Audio Frequency Analyzer FM Deviation measurement When querying measurement limits through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric values in Attribute Units regardless of the current Display Units or GPIB Units settings Numeric values are expressed in scientific notation Refer to Attribute Units AUNits on page 81 To Detect If a Measurement Limit Has Been Exceeded Use the HLIMit EX Ceeded and LLIMit EXCeeded commands to detect if a measurement limit has been exceeded The returned value is either 0 NO or 1 YES Syntax Hd sIMit EXCeeded sIMit EXCeeded E Example ENTER 714 Hi limit exced 1 YES 0 NO OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR FM LLIM EXC ENTER 714 Lo limit exced 1 2 YES 0 NO OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR FM HLIM EXC This determines if the high or low measurement limits for the Audio Frequency Analyzer FM Deviation measurement have been exceeded S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS efpkc sec NOTE
196. O YOU ASSISTANCE Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Agilent Technologies Manufacturer s Address 24001 E Mission Avenue Liberty Lake Washington 99019 9599 USA declares that the product Product Name RF Communications Test Set Cell Site Test Set Model Number AgilentTechnologies 8920A 8920B and8921A Product Options This declaration covers all options of the above product conforms to the following Product specifications Safety IEC 1010 1 1990 A1 A2 EN 61010 1 1993 EMC CISPR 11 1990 EN 55011 1991 Group 1 Class A EN 50082 1 1992 IEC 801 2 1991 4 kV CD 8 kV AD IEC 801 3 1984 3V m IEC 801 4 1988 0 5 kV Sig Lines 1 kV Power Lines Supplementary Information This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures This product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and carries the CD marking accordingly Spokane Washington USA November 20 1998 Vince Roland Quality Manager Table 1 United States of America Agilent Technologies Test and Measurement Call Cent
197. O nee fo lt Printer n Returns quoted string A e FAILure j lt space gt UC Continue 5 i lt Stop gt E 1 Returns quoted string Returns quoted string EX TEST continued 170 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS test sec e LA LA e CRESults space os lt All gt M l 7 NE Failures b u Returns quoted string RUN x space gt A lt Continuous gt z Du Single Step ema E 4 2 Reums quoted string M CFREQuency space gt gt lt integer value gt z real number gt gt C lt string gt a N lt JC o Gtring NOS f z real number gt lt lt string gt a Tests O lt string gt T 7 elements seperated by commas y 6 real number gt A Returns unquoted string 2 elements seperated by commas real number gt Returns unquoted string 2 elements lt space gt gt lt integer value 5 Returns unquoted string PARAmeter gt an N PARameter y NUMBer space integer value gt DX space gt lt integer value gt t STRing e space gt string gt 2 E ECN GN Ho ONJ PROCedure O e pace e string e Ra AUTOSstart gt Y ETA fe ae bl AUTostart D J A e D 8 Y
198. OMESS AGE2 ACCESS ACCess REG INC RINCrement REG ID RIDentify C FILMESS CFMessage MS WORDI MSWord MSMessOrd MSORder MS IntvcH MS Voice FVC O Mes FVORder FVC C Mes FV Voice Example of Modifying A Single Field OUTPUT 714 CALLP SPOM1 SID 00000001110011 Example of Modifying Multiple Fields With One OUTPUT OUTPUT714 CALLP SPOM1 DCC 01 SID 00000001110011 OHD 110 486 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions This section describes the individual data fields contained in each of the forward control channel and forward voice channel messages SPC WORD 1 Message Fields Figure 45 SPC WORD Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message 2 binary characters required DCC This field sets the digital color code 2 binary characters required 487 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions SID1 RSVD NAWC OHD Parity 488 First part of the system identification field The field contains the decimal equivalent of the 14 most significant bits of the system identification number 14 binary characters required Reserved for future use 3 binary characters requ
199. Part Numbers CR2016 or Agilent 1420 0383 Replacing the Battery 1 Turn the Test Set on and insert the memory card An inserted memory card takes power from the Test Set preventing the card s contents from being lost 2 Holdthe memory card in the slot with one hand and pull the battery holder out with your other hand See Figure 22 3 Install the battery with the side marked on the same side marked on the battery holder Avoid touching the flat sides of the battery finger oils may contaminate battery contacts in the memory card 4 Re insert the battery holder into the memory card 5 Remove the memory card from the Test Set Ry WS Figure 22 Replacing the Memory Card s Battery WARNING Do not mutilate puncture or dispose of batteries in fire The batteries can burst or explode releasing hazardous chemicals Discard unused batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions 344 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS memcard fb Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Using Memory Cards Memory Card Mass Storage Volume Specifier The front panel memory card slot s mass storage volume specifier is INTERNAL 4 and is the default mass storage device for the Test Set For example to catalogue the contents of a memory card from the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen execute the following IBASIC command C376AT INTERNAL 4 or if the mass storage location has not been changed CAT If the MS
200. Processing Subsystem Status Register Group should be used to control program flow Refer to Using the Call Processing Status Register Group To Control Program Flow on page 435 for further information 432 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Using the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing NOTE It is recommended the control program perform the following steps when first entering the Call Processing Subsystem that is the first time the CALL CONTROL screen is selected during a measurement session Zero the RF Power meter to ensure accurate power meter measurements There are two reasons for zeroing the RF power meter a When any Call Processing Subsystem screen is displayed except the ANALOG MEAS screen and the Call Processing Subsystem is in the Connect state the host firmware constantly monitors the mobile station s transmitted carrier power If the power falls below 0 0005 Watts the error message RF Power Loss indicates loss of Voice Channel will be displayed and the Test Set will terminate the call and return to the Active state Zeroing the power meter cancels any inherent dc offsets that may be present within the power meter under zero power conditions This ensures that the host firmware makes the correct decisions regarding the presence of the mobile stations s RF carrier b Zeroing
201. R 714 Values or OUTPUT 714 PROG STR Variable ENTER 714 Values Example of querying the value of a string array with 3 elements of 5 characters each such as Array 2 5 OUTPUT 714 PROGram SELected STRing Array ENTER 714 USING 3 X 5A 2X Result_arrayS or OUTPUT 714 PROG STR Array ENTER 714 USING 3 X 5A 2X Result arrayS This example assumes that the string array named Result array is dimensioned exactly the same as the array named Array in the IBASIC program and that each element in the string array Array has five characters in it S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem Example of querying the value of a string array whose name is known but whose cur rent size is unknown 05 OPTION BASE 1 10 DIM Temp 5000 This will hold 5000 characters 20 DIM Temp array 50 200 Temp array 50 elements of 200 character 30 OUTPUT 714 PROG STR Array Query the desired array 40 ENTER 714 TempS Enter the values into a temporary string variable 50 N 0 Initialize array pointer 60 EPEAT Start loop to take values from string and put in array 70 N N 1 Increment array pointer 80 Pos comma POS Temp Find comma separator 90 Temp array N Temp 2 Pos comma 2 Put value into array 100 Temp Temp Pos_comma 1 Remove value from temporary string 110 UN
202. RAM memory card present as an intermediate storage location before running the program For shorter programs the intermediate storage location is not necessary No IBASIC command syntax is checked until the program is run after downloading Also when running IBASIC programs on the Test Set s internal controller the Test Set displays only the IBASIC screen not the individual instrument screens as the program executes This makes troubleshooting larger programs more difficult S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 1 Program Development on an External BASIC Language Computer Method 1 Program Development on an External BASIC Language Computer CA E HP 200 300 Series Controller Connect to GPIB connector on rear aa Ooooooooo a oo Soo000 nima poda oo rina 20 o 0 0000 00 Test Set GPIB LLL 5 amp Personal Computer BASIC language environment and GPIB I O card ch6drw5 drw Figure 28 Connecting IBASIC Language Computers to the Test Set 375 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 1 Program Development on an External BASIC Language Computer Configuring the Test Set s GPIB Interface To use GPIB the IEEE 488 interface bus as a means of communicating with the Test Set connect a standard GPIB cable such as the Agilent 10833B between the Test Set s rear panel GPIB connector and the GPIB connector on the external BASIC
203. Reading Measurement Results contains guidelines for programming the test set for returning measurement results Topics discussed include how to recover from a hung state when a measurement fails to complete Sample code is included Chapter 3 HP IB Command Guidelines contains information about sequential and overlapped commands command syntax units of measure and measurement states A short example program is also presented to familiarize the user with remote operation of the Test Set Chapter 4 HP IB Commands contains command syntax diagrams equivalent front panel key commands IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and triggering commands Chapter 5 Advanced Operations includes information about increasing measurement throughput status reporting error reporting service requests instrument initialization and passing control Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage describes the types of mass storage RAM disk ROM disk external disk drives SRAM cards and ROM cards and the file system formats DOS LIF available in the Test Set 11 12 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller describes how to develop Instrument BASIC IBASIC programs for use on the Test Set s built in IBASIC Controller Topics discussed are interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using the serial ports overview of the three program development methods entering and editing IBASIC programs program control using the PROGram Subsystem and an introduction to writing programs
204. Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the DUNits UNITS STATe or MODe commands Cont aa p 4 Single a e SENSe 158 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS osc sec e SOURce Nee A Internal TYPE NL p X Internal lt Ext TTL gt lt Encoder P Returns quoted string Auto ranean aet Norm gt Returns quoted string Program PROGram lt SELected xw be B DEFine Program space gt program gt A gt lt string 5 EXECute STATE STRing Se WAIT CONTinue PAUSe ead RUN Wwe STOP M A Returns current program state HA J Returns quoted string d lt space gt lt variable name gt number value gt A 2 espace variable name gt Returns quoted string d 2 Returns integer value y ad DELete x UALL 3 J Ni EI 159 Save Recall Registers Save Recall Registers CREGister pa M CLEar gt SeRECall SH SAVE NOTE 160 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS reg sec j space J integer value or string O i MALL d E lt space De integer value or string 7 y 1 lt space C integer value or string Da De The Test Set does not check for a duplicate file name when
205. Registration message to a mobile station when the Call Processing Subsystem was not in the Active state Origination in progress Indicates that an attempt was made to register page handoff release order a change in power level put the mobile station in maintenance mode or send an alert message to the mobile station while an origination was in progress Timeout occurred while attempting to register Mobile Indicates that the simulated Base Station s internal timer expired before receiving a response from the mobile station during a registration attempt The internal timer is set to 20 seconds when the Register state is entered Timeout occurred while attempting to page Mobile Indicates that the simulated Base Station s internal timer expired before receiving a response from the mobile station during a page attempt The internal timer is set to 20 seconds when the Page state is entered Timeout occurred while attempting to access Mobile Indicates that the simulated Base Station s internal timer expired before receiving a response from the mobile station during an access attempt The internal timer is set to 20 seconds when the Access state is entered Timeout occurred while attempting to alert Mobile Indicates that the simulated Base Station s internal timer expired before receiving a response from the mobile station during an alert attempt The internal timer is set to 20 seconds when the alert order is sent to the mo
206. Results output All Results output All Gen Anl 0 000000 If Unit Under Test Fails Continue Range Hold Auto All Test Procedure run mode Continuous Notch Coupl None RF Display Freq RF Chan Std MS AMPS User Def Base Freq 800 000000 Chan Space 30 0000 Gen Anl 45 000000 RF Level Offset Off RF In Out 0 0 Duplex Out 0 0 Antenna In 0 0 305 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Instrument Initialization The Power On Reset condition in the Test Set was specifically designed to configure the instruments for manual testing of an FM radio The Power On Reset default display screen is the RX TEST screen Other operational characteristics are also affected by the Power On Reset as follows e The Power up self test diagnostics are performed e The Contents of the SAVE RECALL registers are not affected e All pending operations are aborted e Measurement triggering is set to TRIG MODE SETT FULL RETR REP e All Enable registers are cleared Service Request Standard Event Communicate Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Operation Calibration Call Processing and Questionable Data Signal e All Negative Transition Filter registers are initialized to all zeros Communicate Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Operation Calibration Call Processing and Questionable Data Signal e All Positive Transition Filter registers are initialized to all ones Communicate
207. SINAD E ER 714 Sinad Running_total Running_total Sinad NEXT Loop counter Avg sinad Running total Loop counter PRINT USING K 3D 2D K SINAD Avg sinad dB at 116 dBm OUTPUT 714 TRIG MODE RETR REP SETT FULL OUTPUT 714 RFG AMPL 47DBM DISP ACNT SUBEND Un C 4 N E E OOOCOCCOOH fs 515 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the ANALOG MEAS Screen Example FM Hum amp Noise Measurement The following example code segment shows how to program the ANALOG MEAS screen to make an FM Hum amp Noise measurement The code segment represents a HP BASIC subprogram In order for this subprogram to work properly the following conditions must be true when the subroutine is called e Call Processing Subsystem is in the Connect state that is the Connect annunciator is lit the mobile station s speaker output is connected to the Test Set s AUDIO IN connector e the mobile station s microphone input must be connected to the Test Set s AUDIO OUT connector The intended purpose of this example subprogram is to illustrate how to program the ANALOG MEAS screen There are a variety of ways to make an FM Hum amp Noise measurement The method used in this example is based upon the EIA IS 19 B Standard May 1988 The method and standard chosen for any
208. SN hex 450 fm deivaiton 451 handoff 452 MSid 452 order 454 page 455 phone num 456 pwr lvl 457 register 458 release 459 sat 460 scm 461 sid 461 system type 462 tx freq error 462 tx power 463 Call Control screen Index Chan 442 Call Data Screen access 465 active 465 connect 465 display word 465 handoff 466 order 466 page 466 reading the call data screen message fields 467 register 466 release 466 Call Processing HP IB command syntax diagram 122 call processing state diagram 428 Call Processing Status Register Group 271 program flow control 435 Call Processing Subsystem Accessing the Call Processing Sub system Screens 431 command syntax 432 connecting a mobile station 429 error messages described 564 error messages reading 434 first time setup 433 HP IB Error Messages 434 operational overview 427 polling 436 programming Analog Meas screen 510 programming Call Bit screen 478 programming Call Configure screen 543 programming Call Control screen 439 464 querying data messages 437 remote user interface description 426 screen mnemonics 431 service request 436 status register group 435 CALLP RECCW A 464 RECCW B 464 RECCW C 464 RECCW D 464 RECCW E 464 RVCOrdCon 464 Chan Call Control screen 442 clear status CLS 220 CMAX CALL CONFIGURE screen 518 Code files 333 420 Common Commands 208 RST 201 TRG 224 Communicate Status Register Group 289
209. STOPPED Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem Syntax PROGram SELected STATe RUN PAUSe STOP CONTinue Example OUTPUT 714 PROGram SELected STATe RUN or OUTPUT 714 PROG STAT RUN STATe The STATe query command is used to query from an external controller the current execution state of the IBASIC program in the Test Set The return data RUN STOP or PAUS is sent as a series of ASCII characters The program execution states are defined as follows RUN the program is currently executing e PAUS the program has reached a break in execution but can be continued e STOP program execution has been terminated Syntax PROGram SELected STATe Example OUTPUT 714 PROGram SELected STATe ENTER 714 State or OUTPUT 714 PROG STAT ENTER 714 State 407 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem NOTE NOTE 408 STRing lt varname gt lt svalues gt The STRing command is used to set from an external controller the value of string variables or string arrays in an IBASIC program in the Test Set lt varname gt is the name of an existing string variable or string array in the IBASIC program lt svalues gt is a list of comma separated quoted strings which are used to set the value of lt varname gt If the variable name lt var_name gt is longer than 12 characters it must be sent as string data lt var_name gt enclosed in quo
210. Service Request Standard Event Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Operation Calibration Call Processing and Questionable Data Signal All Negative Transition Filter registers are unaffected Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Op eration Calibration Call Processing and Questionable Data Signa l All Positive Transition Filter registers are unaffected Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Op eration Calibration Call Processing and Questionable Data Signal e The contents of the RAM memory are unaffected The contents of the Error Queue are unaffected e The contents of the Output Queue are unaffected e The state of the Test Set display screen is not affected S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Passing Control Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Passing Control Communications on the GPIB bus are accomplished according to a precisely defined set of rules IEEE 488 1 and 488 2 Standards Communication data transfer is accomplished by designating one device to be a talker source of data or commands and designating one or more devices to be listeners receivers of data or commands The device on the bus responsible for designating talkers and listeners is the Controller The structure of the GPIB bus allows for more than one Controller to be connected to the bus at the same time As a means of ensuring that orderly communications can be established on power up or when communications have failed the rules state that only one Controlle
211. Set In order to make a measurement or input data from a DUT the desired measurement field or data field must be active This is done by using the front panel keypad rotary knob to select the instrument whose front panel contains the desired measurement or data field and making sure that the desired measurement or data field is turned ON Figure 1 shows that instrument selection is handled by the To Screen control hardware which routes the selected instrument s front panel to the CRT for display Once an instrument s front panel is displayed on the CRT the user can manipulate the instrument settings such as turning a specific measurement or data field on or off using the keypad rotary knob Figure 1 also shows that instrument setup is handled by the Instrument Control hardware which routes setup information from the front panel to the individual instruments A GPIB RS 232 Parallel Printer interface capability is available in the Test Set In Manual Control mode this provides the capability of connecting an external GPIB serial or parallel printer to the Test Set so that display screens can be printed 27 Chapter 1 Using GPIB Overview of the Test Set Internal Automatic Control Mode 28 In Internal Automatic Control mode the Test Set s operation is controlled by an application program running on the built in Instrument BASIC IBASIC Controller The built in controller runs programs written in IBASIC a subset of the HP
212. Set s power supply has been turned off and then on since the last time this register was read 6 64 User Not implemented in Test Set Request 5 32 Command 1 The Test Set detected an error while trying to process a command Error The following events cause a command error An IEEE 488 2 syntax error This means that the Test Set received a message that did not follow the syntax defined by the Standard A semantic error For example the Test Set received an incorrectly spelled command The Test Set received a Group Execute Trigger GET inside a program message 4 16 Execution 1 The Test Set detected an error while trying to execute a command Error The following events cause an execution error A PROGRAM DATA element received in a command is outside the legal range for the Test Set or is inconsistent with the operation of the Test Set The Test Set could not execute a valid command due to some Test Set hardware firmware condition 3 8 Device 1 A Test Set dependent error has occurred This means that some Test Dependent Set operation did not execute properly due to some internal condition Error such as overrange This bit indicates that the error was not a command query or execution error 257 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Table 19 Standard Event Status Register Bit Assignments Continued Bit Binary as Number Weighting Condition Comment 2 4 Query 1 An error ha
213. Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions Local This field displays the local control field This field is specific to each system The ORDER field must be set to local control for this field to be interpreted by the Test Set ORDQ This field displays the received order qualifier The field qualifies the order confirmation to a specific action Order This field displays the Order field and identifies the order type received by the Test Set RSVD Reserved for future use Parity This field displays the parity of the received data Querying a Single Field Example of Querying A Single Field OUTPUT 714 CALLP DATA RECCW A OUTPUT 714 CALLP RECA SCM ENTER 714 Scm PRINT Scm Example Printout 1110 476 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc f Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions Querying Multiple Fields With Single OUTPUT ENTER When multiple queries are combined into one command string the Test Set responds by sending one response message containing individual response message units separated by a response message unit separator Example of Multiple Queries Combined Into One Command String OUTPUT 714 CALLP RECA NAWC SER EXT SCM MIN OUTPUT 714 CALLP DATA RECCW A ENTER 714 Message PRINT Message Printed Test Set Response M
214. T The MEAS RESET key clears the measurement history for all of the Test Set s measurement algorithms Averaging AVG key Spectrum Analyzer trace averaging Measurement limit checking HI LIMIT and LO LIMIT keys Peak Hold AF Analyzer peak hold detectors Spectrum Analyzer trace peak hold autotuning and autoranging and re starts all active measurements The GPIB commands MEASure RESet are used to select this function programmatically Syntax MEASure RESet Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS RES This resets all of the active measurements in the Test Set PRESET The PRESET key resets the Test Set to its power up state The IEEE 488 2 Common Command RST is used to select this function programmatically Syntax RST Example OUTPUT 714 RST This resets the Test Set to its power up state 201 Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands 202 RECALL The RECALL key is used to recall an instrument state that has been saved using the SAVE key The GPIB commands REGister RECall are used to select this function programmatically The SAVE RECALL mass storage device is selected using the SAVE RECALL field on the I O CONFIGURE screen Syntax REGister RECall lt file name gt Example OUTPUT 714 REG REC SETUP1 This recalls the instrument state saved in the file SETUP1 See Also SAV Save Instrument State on page 261 RCL Recall Instrument State on page 260
215. TABXY 1 5 Ready to receive ASCII file data PRINT Begin ON TIMEOUT 9 1 GOTO Begin Loops until data begins coming ENTER 9 In OUTPUT File In PRINT In Transfer LOOP Loops to bring in ASCII file one line at a time ON TIMEOUT 9 5 GOTO Done Exit loop if data stops for gt 5 sec ENTER 9 In PRINT In OUTPUT QFile In END LOOP Done ASSIGN File TO CLEAR SCREEN Returns Test Set Serial Port 9 input to instrument allowing serial communication to the IBASIC Command line field OUTPUT 800 CONF SPORT SIN Inst IECHO ON IBECHO ON PRINT TABXY 1 5 Down load of ASCII file is complete SUBEND 389 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 3 Developing Programs Using Word Processor on a PC Least Preferred Sending ASCII Text Files Over RS 232 With Windows Terminal Set up the Windows Terminal emulator software on the PC as covered in Setting Up Microsoft Windows Terminal on your PC Windows Version 3 1 on page 368 Load and run the ASCII DN download program in the Test Set s IBASIC controller When the prompt Ready to receive ASCII file data is displayed on the Test Set make the following settings in Windows Terminal on the PC 1 Select Settings 2 Select Text Transfers 3 Select Flow Control Standard Flow Control 4 Select Word Wrap Outgoing Text at Column unselected This will use Xon Xoff flow control by default Select OK Select Transfers Select Send Text File ASA a
216. TIL POS Temp 0 Check for last value in temporary string 120 Temp array N 1 Temp 2 LEN Temp 1 Put last value in array 130 END The above example assumes that the total number of characters in the dimensioned size of the IBASIC string array named Array is smaller than the dimensioned size of the string variable named Temp Also the maximum length of any element in the IBASIC string ar ray Array must be less than or equal to 200 characters WAIT The WAIT command stops the Test Set from executing any commands or queries received through GPIB until after the IBASIC program exits the RUN state that is the program is either PAUSED or STOPPED 411 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem CAUTION 412 The Test Set will continue to process GPIB commands into the GPIB input buffer up to the point that the buffer is full If the external controller attempts to send more commands than can fit into the GPIB input buffer before the IBASIC program is PAUSED or STOPPED the GPIB bus will appear to be locked up This is due to the fact that the GPIB bus and the external controller will be in a temporary holdoff state while waiting for the GPIB input buffer to empty If a query command is sent to the Test Set while the IBASIC program is under the influence of a WAIT command no data will be put into the Test Set s Output Queue until the IBASIC program is either PAUSED or STOPPED If the external controller attempts to e
217. TRing EXPLicit WAIT Sending the Test Set any of the unsupported SCPI PROGram Subsystem commands can result in unexpected and or erroneous operation of IBASIC This may require the Test Set s RAM to be initialized from the SERVICE screen to regain proper IBASIC operation 397 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem PROGram Subsystem Commands NOTE 398 See the syntax diagram Program on page 159 for PROGram Subsystem command syntax rules Command Notation The following notation is used in the command descriptions Letter case uppercase or lowercase is used to differentiate between the short form the uppercase characters and long form the whole keyword of the command The lower case letters in the keyword are optional they can be deleted and the com mand will still be understood by the Test Set Optional keyword this is the default state the Test Set will process the command to have the same effect whether the optional keyword is included by the programmer or not lt gt Specific SCPI defined parameter types Refer to the SCPI Standard for definitions of the SCPI defined parameter types One or more parameters that must be included one or more times Separator for choices for a parameter Can be read the same as or Command Descriptions When a PROGram Subsystem command is sent to the Test Set through GPIB from an external controller the Test Set is put into REMOTE
218. The contents of the Error Queue are unaffected e The state of the Test Set s display screen is unaffected 311 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Instrument Initialization Selected Device Clear SDC GPIB Bus Command The Selected Device Clear SDC Reset is accomplished by sending the SDC message to the Test Set through GPIB The Test Set responds to the Selected Device Clear SDC and the Device Clear DCL bus commands equally Refer to the Device Clear DCL GPIB Bus Command on page 311 for a description of the effects of the SDC Reset Interface Clear IFC GPIB Bus Command 312 The Interface Clear IFC Reset is accomplished by having the Active Controller send the ABORT message to the GPIB bus ABORT message IFC bus control line TRUE for 100 ms The IFC bus command unconditionally terminates all GPIB bus activity and the Test Set is unaddressed The IFC bus command has no effect on the I O CONFIGURE CONFIGURE PRINT CONFIGURE or TESTS Main Menu Execution Conditions External Devices Printer Setup screens Other operational characteristics are also affected by the IFC bus command as follows e The Power up self test diagnostics are not performed The GPIB interface is not reset any pending Service Request is not cleared The Contents of the SAVE RECALL registers are not affected Measurement triggering is not affected Calibration data is not affected All Enable registers are unaffected
219. UTPUT 714 CALLP SPOMI DCC SID OHD ENTER 714 Message PRINT Message Printed Test Set Response Message 01 00000001110011 110 In order to read individual response message units into individual string variables combined into one ENTER statement the programming language used must recognize the response message unit separator as an entry terminator for each string in the input list If the programming language used cannot recognize the response message unit separator as an entry terminator then the response message must be read into one string and individual responses parsed out 485 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL BIT Screen Modifying the CALL BIT Screen Message Fields This section provides programming information on how to set the contents of individual fields in the signaling messages available on the CALL BITS screen The syntactical structure for setting the contents of a field in an individual message is as follows General Syntax CALLP lt message name gt lt field name gt lt space gt lt gt lt data string gt lt gt Table 51 CALL BIT Screen Signaling Message Names on page 486 lists the message names used to access each of the signaling messages available on the CALL BIT screen Table 51 CALL BIT Screen Signaling Message Names Message Message Name SPC WORD 1 SPOMI SPOMESSAGEI SPC WORD2 SPOM2 SP
220. UTPUT statement sets the RF Analyzer s tune frequency to 850 MHz and then sets the AF Analyzer s input to FM Demod Compound Commands for Combining ENTER Statements To reduce the number of ENTER statements used to read measured values within one screen string together multiple measure commands within one OUTPUT statement followed by an ENTER statement with the appropriate number of variables to hold the measured values The following example illustrates this technique Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW FREQ ABS ENTER 714 Power Freq abs This OUTPUT statement requests an RF power and an absolute RF frequency measurement The ENTER statement then reads both values into program variables S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Status Reporting Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting This section describes the status reporting structure used in the Test Set The structure is based on the IEEE 488 1 1987 and 488 2 1987 Standards and the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI Version 1994 0 Status Reporting Structure Overview NOTE Figure 3 on page 240 shows an overview of the status reporting structure used in the Test Set The status reporting structure is used to communicate the Test Set s current status information to the application program The term status information encompasses a variety of conditions which can occur in a Test Set such as has a measur
221. Units Use the UNITs command to read back the current GPIB Units setting for a measurement or instrument setup field For example the following BASIC language program statements read back the current GPIB Units setting for the TX Power measurement Query the current GPIB Units setting for TX Power OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW UNIT Enter the returned value into a string variable ER 714 AS Ho zm Guidelines for GPIB Units When setting the value of a numeric field such as AFGen1 Freq any non GPIB Unit unit of measure must be specified in the command string otherwise the current GPIB Unit is assumed by the Test Set For example if the command RFG FREQ 900 is sent through GPIB the Test Set will interpret the data as 900 Hz since HZ is the GPIB Unit for frequency This would resultin an Input value out of range error Sending the command RFG FREQ 900 MHZ would set the value to 900 MHz When querying measurements or settings through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric values in GPIB units regardless of the current Display Unit setting Numeric values are expressed in scientific notation For example if the TX Frequency measurement is displayed as 150 000000 MHz on the Test Set the value returned through GPIB is 1 5000000E 008 1 5x108 Converting the returned value to a format other than scientific notation must be done programmatically S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS guidelin fb
222. Using Word Processor on a PC Least Preferred Writing Lines of IBASIC Code on a Word Processor When writing IBASIC programs follow these steps to ensure that the Test Set will accept the code when it is downloaded Always begin new lines at the far left margin Never use a leading space or tab Number each consecutive line just like an IBASIC language program Typically begin with 10 and increment by ten for each consecutive line Do not leave any space or double space between lines Make sure to use hard carriage return line feeds at the end of each line When saving the completed program save it as an ASCII file Some word processors have ASCII options which require that the user specify CR LF at the end of each line It is important that each line end with a carriage return line feed 7 Experiment with a short program first to make sure everything is working correctly ANAND 386 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 3 Developing Programs Using Word Processor on a PC Least Preferred Transferring Programs from the Word Processor to the Test Set For short less than 100 lines programs use an ASCII file transfer utility on the PC to send the program one line at a time down to the Test Set over RS 232 directly into the IBASIC Command Line field The Test Set must be configured to receive serial ASCII characters by positioning the Test Set cursor at the IBASIC Command
223. Windows NT a licensed version with security key of HP BASIC for Windows How to install 1 Uie uq A 10 11 Install the Agilent 82341B C into an open expansion slot Refer to the interface card s installation guide details Utilize the default card settings Install the SICL libraries using the SETUP32 EXE setup file Run the SICL I_O Config program to configure the card Select Agilent 82340 82341 GPIB from the available interface list of choices Select the Configure command button Use the default settings shown by the program This will verify that the card is functioning Install HP BASIC for Windows 6 3 or later Run HP BASIC for Windows Edit the AUTOST file change line 330 as follows LOAD BIN HPIBS DEV hpib7 SICL Library for Agilent 82341 card Re store the AUTOST file Quit HP BASIC for Windows Run HP BASIC for Windows The program should load normally and allow you to send orders to the Test Set 377 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 1 Program Development on an External BASIC Language Computer Program Development Procedure 378 As discussed in Overview of the Test Set on page 26 the Test Set has two GPIB buses an internal GPIB at select code 8 and an external GPIB at select code 7 The Test Set s built in IBASIC controller uses the internal GPIB to communicate with the Test Set s various instruments and devices The process of developing a program on an exter
224. a priority driven and an event driven basis Each process is given a timeslice on the CPU depending upon its priority the priority of other processes and the nature of the events occurring within the Test Set Upon completion processes within the Call Processing Subsystem pass data messages received from the mobile station to the Measurement Display Process which displays the information on the CRT during its next CPU timeslice If the control program attempts to query the data fields before the Measurement Display Process has posted the information to the CRT it is possible that the fields will be blank or contain data from a previous call processing function Waiting to read the data messages until after all state transitions have occurred ensures that the data from the most recent call processing function will have been posted Table 45 Call Processing Subsystem State Transitions on page 438 lists the possible state transitions within the Call Processing Subsystem 437 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Using the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface Table 45 NOTE 438 Call Processing Subsystem State Transitions Starting State Command State Transitions Final State Idle Active Idle Active Active Active Register Active Register Active Active Active Page Active Page Access Connect Connect Connect Handoff Connect Access Connect Connect Connect Release
225. able Hi limit val F ER 714 Hi limit val Query the LOw LIMIT value OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR DIST LLIM VAL p OUTE Rea Que OUTP Rea End value Read the LOw LIMIT value into variable Lo limit val R 714 Lo limit val Query the Meter Hi UT 714 M d the R 714 ry the Me Me EAS AF ter Hi t_hiend_val Meter Lo R DIST M ET H END End value in End value to variable Met hiend val UT 714 d the R 714 EAS AF ter Lo t_loend_val ter interval R DIST M ET L END End value in p OUTE ry th to variable Met loend val UT 714 EAS AF R Rea d th R 714 r interval in int val DIST MET I to r2 variable Met int val 85 Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation 86 Reading back Attribute Units Use the AUNits command to read back the Attribute Units setting for the selected measurement For example the following BASIC language program statements show how the AUNits command can be used to read back a Distortion REFerence SET level Query the REFerence SET value for the Distortion measurement OUT IR PUT 714 MEAS AFR DIST REF VAL ad the REFerence SET value into variable Ref set val ER 714 Ref set val Query the Attribute Units setting for the D
226. addressed to listen or receipt of the Clear Lockout Set Local message REN bus line false No instrument settings are changed by the transition from Remote to Local mode but triggering is reset to FULL SETTling and REPetitive RETRiggering 227 Triggering Measurements Trigger Commands 228 TRIGger IMMediate The TRIGger MMediate command tells the Test Set to start a measurement cycle now The type of triggering used depends on the trigger mode settings This command is equivalent to a Group Execute Trigger Command GET as defined by IEEE 488 1 1987 or a Trigger Common Command TRG as defined by IEEE 488 2 1987 The IMMediate statement is implied and is optional Syntax TRIGger IMMediate Example OUTPUT 714 TRIG IMM or OUTPUT 714 TRIG ABORt The ABORt command tells the Test Set to stop a currently executing measurement cycle and get ready for a new GPIB command If for any reason a valid measurement cannot be made this command allows the control program to terminate the requested measurement and regain control of the Test Set Syntax TRIGger ABORt Example OUTPUT 714 TRIG ABOR S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS tm sec MODE Triggering Measurements The MODE command is used to set the Trigger Mode for all active measurements The trigger mode is defined by two parameters retriggering and settling Retriggering Syntax Retriggering Examples
227. ain control of the Test Set Any other sequence of commands will result in unexpected operation The following programs demonstrate a recommended technique for querying and entering data from the Test Set This technique will prevent the Test Set from getting into a hung state such that power must be cycled on the Test Set to regain manual or programmatic control There are a variety of programming constructs which can be used to implement this technique In the programming examples presented a function call is implemented which returns a numeric measurement result The function call has two pass parameters the query command passed as a quoted string and a time out value passed as a integer number The time out value represents how long you want to wait in seconds for the Test Set to return a valid measurement result If a valid measurement result is not returned by the Test Set within the time out value the function returns a very large number The calling program can check the value and take appropriate action The program examples are written so as to be self explanatory In practice the length of variable names line labels function names etc will be implementation dependent 59 Chapter 2 Methods For Reading Measurement Results HP BASIC ON TIMEOUT Example Program HP BASIC ON TIMEOUT Example Program NOTE 60 The following example program demonstrates a recommended technique which can b
228. alize program variables Configure the Test Set s status registers for service request or polling Condition the Test Set for Call Processing Configure the Test Set Set the Active state Register the mobile station and print the registration data Page the mobile station Measure several parameters of the mobile station s carrier and print results Order the mobile station to change power and print the mobile station order verification Configure the Test Set for a handoff Handoff the mobile station to a new channel Put the mobile station into the maintenance mode Send an alert order to the mobile station to take it out of maintenance mode Release the mobile station Prompt the operator to originate a call from the mobile station Print the origination data from the mobile station Release the mobile station End S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Example Programs The program traps any errors which may occur while executing If an error is detected the error data is printed and the program stops In a real world environment the control program would have to make some flow decision based upon the nature of the error Following each program is a Comments section which contains relevant comments regarding individual program lines The example program uses function calls to set the various call processing states and to send orders to the mobile station Fu
229. am to Set Up and Service an SRQ Interrupt omMAtnauw BP WN FE oO OOO OO Oo CO Ex 00 pa un o 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 The following Instrument BASIC program was written for an HP 9000 Series 300 Controller and a Test Set The program assumes that the Test Set is the only instrument on the bus The program sets up an interrupt from the Standard Event Status Register Group the Calibration Status Register Group and the Hardware Status Register 1 Group For demonstration purposes the program is written to stay in a dummy loop waiting for an interrupt from the Test Set OPTION BASE 1 COM Io_names INTEGER Inst_address Std_event_reg Calibration_reg COM Io_names INTEGER Hardwarel_reg Srq_enab_reg Status_byte Event_reg Define instrument address Inst address 714 PRINTER IS CRT CLEAR SCREEN 1 Reset the Test Set to bring it to a known state OUTPUT Inst_address RST I Clear the Test Set status reporting system OUTPUT Inst address CLS 1 Set up the desired interrupt conditions in the Test Set 1 1 Standard Event Status Register Group Event register conditions which will set the Summary Message TRUE if they occur Bit 5 Command Error decimal value 2 5 32 Bit 4
230. ammatic control of the Test Set 400 Command the Test Set to abort the currently executing measurement cycle Set the trigger mode back to repetitive retriggering Setting the Test Set back to repetitive retriggering will be implementation dependent 410 Re enable event initiated branching If any event initiated branches were logged while the Measure function was executing they will be executed when system priority permits 420 Exit the Measure function and return a result value of 9 E 99 430 The following lines of code handle the case where the control program cannot regain control of the Test Set The actions taken in this section of the code will be implementation dependent For the example case a message is displayed to the operator and the program is stopped 440 Display a message to the operator that the control program cannot regain control of the Test Set 450 Stop execution of the control program 63 Chapter 2 Methods For Reading Measurement Results HP BASIC MAV Example Program HP BASIC MAV Example Program NOTE 64 The following Agilent RMB example program demonstrates a technique which can be used in situations where a 32 767 measurement result timeout value is not adequate Measurement result timeout value is defined to mean the amount of time the control program is willing to wait for the Test Set to return a valid measurement result to the co
231. arameters Procedure 2 radio tests specifications and pName2 tests Procedure N pNameN ch6drw06 drw Figure 29 TESTS Subsystem File Relationship 421 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller The TESTS Subsystem TESTS Subsystem Screens 422 The TESTS Subsystem uses several screens to create select and copy files and to run tests The Main TESTS Subsystem Screen Refer to Figure 30 on page 423 The TESTS Main Menu screen is accessed by pressing the front panel TESTS key Test procedures are selected and run from this screen Additionally access to all other TESTS Subsystem screens is accomplished from this screen The Select Procedure Location field is used to select the mass storage location for the procedure to be loaded The Select Procedure Filename field is used to select the name of the procedure to be loaded The Description field gives the user a brief description of the procedure currently selected in the Select Procedure Filename field To view all the Procedures available on the mass storage location currently selected in the Select Procedure Location field position the cursor on the Select Procedure Filename field and push the rotary knob A menu will appear in the lower right corner of the screen displaying all the procedure files which are available This is not a listing of the full contents of the selected mass storage location it is only a list of the procedures files that are stored on that media S agilent 89
232. ard Control Channel Messages for Paging Origination Order Confirmation and orders e SPC WORD Message Fields on page 487 e SPC WORD2 Message Fields on page 489 e ACCESS Message Fields on page 492 e REG INC Message Fields on page 494 e REG ID Message Fields on page 496 e C FILMESS Message Fields on page 498 MS WORD Message Fields on page 501 e MSMessOrd Message Fields on page 502 e MS IntVCh Message Fields on page 504 e FVC O Mes Message Fields on page 506 e FVC V Mes Message Fields on page 508 479 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL BIT Screen When the CALL BIT screen is displayed and the Call Processing Subsystem is in the Connect state the host firmware constantly monitors the mobile station s transmitted carrier power If the power falls below 0 0005 Watts the error message RF Power Loss indicates loss of Voice Channel will be displayed and the Test Set will terminate the call and return to the Active state NOTE In order to ensure that the host firmware makes the correct decisions regarding the presence of the mobile stations s RF carrier the Test Set s RF power meter should be zeroed before using the Call Processing Subsystem Failure to zero the power meter can result in erroneous RF power measurements See Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 433 for information on zeroing the RF Power meter manually Refer to t
233. are error or failure Refer to the Test Set s for diagnostic information Order attempted while not in Connect state Indicates that an attempt was made to send an order type Mobile Station Control Message that is order a change in power level put the mobile station in maintenance mode or send an alert message to the mobile station when the Call Processing Subsystem was not in the Connect state Handoff attempted while not in Connect state Indicates that an attempt was made to handoff a mobile station to a new voice channel when the Call Processing Subsystem was not in the Connect state Release attempted while not in Connect state Indicates that an attempt was made to send a Release message to a mobile station when the Call Processing Subsystem was not in the Connect state Page attempted while not in Active state Indicates that an attempt was made to Page a mobile station when the Call Processing Subsystem was not in the Active state S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errormsg fb Error Error Error Error Error Error Error 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 1310 Origination attempted while not in Active state Indicates that a mobile station attempted to originate a call to the simulated Base Station when the Call Processing Subsystem was not in the Active state Registration attempted while not in Active state Indicates that an attempt was made to send a
234. ass control 1 COM Gpib_names INTEGER Internal_gpib Inst_address Cntrl_state COM Cntrl_names Ext_cntrl_addrs Int_cntrl_addrs COM Io names INTEGER Printer addrs Pwr suply addrs COM Io values REAL Meas power Prog state 80 Prog name 50 COM Reg vals INTEGER Status byte Stdevnt reg val T OFF INTR Internal_gpib Status_byte SPOLL Inst_address IF NOT BIT Status_byte 5 THEN PRINT SRO for unknown reason Status Byte Status byte STOP END IF Tell Test Set where to pass control back to OUTPUT Inst_address PCB Int_cntrl_addrs 1 Put Test Set in LOCAL mode so front panel keys function LOCAL Inst_address PASS CONTROL Inst address ENABLE INTR Internal gpib 2 SUBEND S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Passing Control The following IBASIC program would be loaded off the Memory Card and run in the Test Set POM TAO BWNE OOo0O0O0Oo0Oo0OoO0O Try OUTPUT Not_actve COM gpib_names I COM Cntrl names TEGE COM Io names INT R Internal gpib External gpib COM Io values REAL Meas power Internal gpib 800 External gpib 700 Ext cntrl addrs 21 Int cntrl addrs 14 Printer addrs 1 Pwr suply addrs 26 1 OUTPUT CLEAR PRINTI SCREE R IS Ed CRT EXECUTE _again ON ERROR GOTO Interna
235. ass_control ENABLE INTR Internal_gpib 2 1 Bring Test Set to known state OUTPUT Inst_address RST 1 Set the Test Set to cause SRQ interrupt on Request Control OUTPUT Inst_address CLS OUTPUT Inst_address ESE 2 OUTPUT Inst_address SRE 32 1 Load the desired program into the Test Set from Memory Card OUTPUT Inst_address DISP TIB Display the IBASIC screen OUTPUT Inst_address PROG EXEC DISP amp Loading program amp OUTPUT Inst address PROG EXEC GET amp Prog name amp OUTPUT Inst address PROG EXEC DISP g ngmm mmIm Run the program in the Test Set UTPUT Inst address PROG EXEC RUN o REPEAT STATUS Internal gpib 3 Cntrl state DISP WAITING TO PASS CONTROL TO THE Test Set UNTIL NOT BIT Cntrl state 6 1 REPEAT STATUS Internal_gpib 3 Cntrl_state DISP WAITING FOR CONTROL BACK FROM THE Test Set UNTIL BIT Cntrl_state 6 1 T 319 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Passing Control 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 320 Data is ready in the Test Set OUTPUT Inst address PROG NUMB Meas power ENTER Inst address Meas power PRINT Measured power Meas power DISP Program finished END SUB P
236. ation by introducing known errors into the signaling messages Once an error has been introduced the control program can monitor the response of the mobile station Operational Overview The Test Set simulates a cellular base station by using its hardware and firmware resources to initiate and maintain a link with a mobile station Unlike a real base station the Test Set has only one transceiver its signal generator and RF AF analyzer and can support only one mobile station at a time This means that the Test Set s transceiver can be configured as either a control channel or a voice channel but not both simultaneously To establish a link with a mobile station the Test Set s transceiver is configured as a control channel Once a link has been established and the user wishes to test the mobile station on a voice channel the Test Set sends the appropriate information to the mobile station on the control channel and then automatically re configures its transceiver to the voice channel assigned to the mobile station Once the voice channel link is terminated the Test Set automatically re configures its transceiver back to being a control channel Handoffs are accomplished in a similar manner When a handoff is initiated while on a voice channel the Test Set sends the necessary information to the mobile station on the current voice channel At the proper time the Test Set automatically re configures its transceiver to the new voice channel
237. ation for transmission to the base station such as dialed digits for call origination disconnect signal at the completion of a call or mobile identification number In addition to the mobile station s call processing functions the control program can utilize the RF and audio instruments in the Test Set to characterize the overall performance of the mobile station while on an active voice channel by making such measurements as receiver sensitivity FM Hum amp Noise transmitter carrier power carrier frequency accuracy or SAT tone deviation The Call Processing Subsystem decodes various reverse control channel and reverse voice channel signaling messages The remote user interface provides commands which allow the control program access to the contents of the decoded messages S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Description of the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface For forward control channel and forward voice channel signaling messages the Call Processing Subsystem provides the option of sending messages whose contents are built using the rules and regulations specified in the applicable industry standard or the control program can define the message contents as desired Having the capability to set the bit patterns of the signaling messages sent to the mobile station gives the control program the capability to test the robustness of the mobile st
238. ation measurement EAS AFR FM REF STAT ON This assumes the AFGen1 To field is set to FM 87 Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation Reading back the measurement instrument function or data function state Use the query form of the command STATe to determine the current state of a measurement instrument function or data function If a measurement instrument function or data function is queried the returned value will be either a 1 ON or a 0 OFF For example the following BASIC language statements illustrate the use of the STATe command to determine the current state of the TX Power measurement Query the state of the TX Power measurement OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW STAT ENTER 714 State_on_off IF State_on_off 1 THEN DISP TX Power Measurement is ON 0 IF State on off HEN DISP TX Power Measurement is OFF STATe Command Guidelines 88 Measurements that are displayed as numbers or as analog meters using the METER function can be turned on and off The data functions REFerence METer HLIMit and LLIMit can be turned on and off Any instrument function that generates a signal can be turned on and off This includes the RF Generator Tracking Generator AF Generator 1 AF Generator 2 and the Signaling Encoder The Oscilloscope s trace cannot be turned off The Spectrum Analyzer s trace cannot be turned off S agi
239. ator 2 Encoder 102 Configure I O Configure 117 Call Processing 122 Decoder 141 Display 145 Measure 147 Oscilloscope 154 Program 159 Save Recall Registers 160 RF Analyzer 161 RF Generator 163 Radio Interface 164 Spectrum Analyzer 165 GPIB Only Commands 167 16 Contents Status 168 System 169 Tests 170 Trigger 173 Integer Number Setting Syntax 174 Real Number Setting Syntax 175 Multiple Real Number Setting Syntax 176 Number Measurement Syntax 177 Multiple Number Measurement Syntax 179 Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands 180 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands 208 Triggering Measurements 224 17 Contents 5 Advanced Operations Increasing Measurement Throughput 234 Status Reporting 239 GPIB Service Requests 293 Instrument Initialization 303 Passing Control 313 18 Contents 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Default File System 324 Mass Storage Device Overview 325 Default Mass Storage Locations 331 Mass Storage Access 333 DOS and LIF File System Considerations 334 Using the ROM Disk 340 Using Memory Cards 341 Backing Up Procedure and Library Files 346 Copying Files Using IBASIC Commands 347 Using RAM Disk 349 Using External Disk Drives 351 19 Contents 20 7 IBASIC Controller Introduction 354 The IBASIC Controller Screen 355 Important Notes for Program Development 357 Program Development 358 Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports 360 Choosing Your Development Method 37
240. ays 3 Use FAST SETTling This avoids the signal transient settling delays 4 Turn off all measurements that are not required This avoids any delays caused by contention for measurement resources within the Test Set Trigger Mode Settings for Most Reliable Measurements Use the following Test Set configuration and trigger mode settings to get the most accurate most reliable fully settled measurement results See Increasing Measurement Throughput on page 234 for more information on improving measurement throughput 1 Turn on all autoranging and autotuning functions This is the Test Set s default turn on and PRESET state 2 Use SINGle RETRiggering 3 Use FULL SETTling 4 Individually trigger each measurement 1 Using FAST settling increases the possibility that transient signal conditions which occur during the measurement cycle will be included in the measurement result S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS tm sec Triggering Measurements Measurement Pacing Measurement pacing can be accomplished by using the IEEE 488 2 1987 Common Commands OPC OPC and WAI These commands are implemented within the Test Set using the criteria that an operation has not completed until e all active measurements have obtained at least one valid measurement result e all signals generated by the Test Set are within specifications Refer to the Common Command Descriptions on page 245 and the IEEE 488 2 1987 Standa
241. bile station 565 Error 1311 NOTE Error 1312 Error 1313 Error 1314 566 RF power loss indicates loss of Voice Channel When any Call Processing Subsystem screen is displayed except the ANALOG MEAS screen and the Call Processing Subsystem is in the Connect state the host firmware constantly monitors the mobile station s transmitted carrier power If the power falls below 0 0005 Watts the simulated Base Station will terminate the call and return to the Active state This error message is displayed if the host firmware has detected that the mobile station s carrier power has fallen below the 0 0005 Watts threshold The call is dropped and the Call Processing Subsystem returns to the Active state In order to ensure that the host firmware makes the correct decisions regarding the presence of the mobile stations s RF carrier the Test Set s RF power meter should be zeroed when first entering the Call Processing Subsystem that is the first time the Call Processing Subsystem is selected during a measurement session Failure to zero the power meter can result in erroneous RF power measurements See Conditioning The Test Set For Call Processing in the Agilent Technologies 8920 User s Guide for information on zeroing the RF Power meter manually or Conditioning the Test Set for Call Processing on page 433 of this manual for information on zeroing the RF Power meter programmatically Data from RVC contains invalid bits
242. ble Register on page 295 for further information S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS ieee sec IEEE 488 2 Common Commands Example program Using OPC through polling of the Standard Event Status Register 10 INTEGER Stdevnt_reg_val 20 OUTPUT 714 DISP RFG RFG OUTP Dupl AMPL 0 dBm FREQ 320 MHz OPC 30 LOOP 40 OUTPUT 714 ESR Poll the register 50 ENTER 714 Stdevnt reg val 60 EXIT IF BIT Stdevnt reg val 0 Exit if Operation Complete bit set 70 END LOOP 80 PRINT All operations complete 90 END 215 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands OPC Operation The OPC query allows for synchronization between the Test Set and an external Complete Query NOTE CAUTION 216 controller by reading the Output Queue or by polling the Message Available MAV bit in the Status Byte Register The OPC query causes the Test Set to place an ASCII character 1 into its Output Queue when the Test Set completes all pending operations A consequence of this action is that the MAV bit in the Status Byte Register is set to the 1 state The Test Set contains signal generation and signal measurement instrumentation The instrument control processor is able to query the signal measurement instrumentation to determine if a measurement cycle has completed However the instrument control processor is not able to query the signal generation instrumentation to determine if the signal
243. ble query ESE 220 standard event status enable ESE 220 Standard Event Status Register Group 256 accessing registers contained in 257 bit assignments 257 standard event status register query ESR 220 Status HP IB command syntax diagram 168 169 status byte query STB 221 Status Byte Register 241 bit assignments 243 294 clearing 245 reading with serial poll 244 reading with STB Common Command 244 writing 245 Status reporting 239 Calibration Status Register Group see Calibration StatusRegister Group 276 Call Processing Status Register Group 271 clearing the Status Byte Register 245 Communicate Status Register Group see Communicate StatusRegister Group 289 Condition register definition 247 Enable register definition 248 Error Message Queue Group see Error Message Queue Group 264 Event register definition 248 Hardware Status Register 1 Group see Hardware StatusRegister 1 Group 284 Hardware Status Register 2 Group see Hardware StatusRegister 2 Group 280 Operation Status Register Group see Operation StatusRegister Group 252 Output Queue Group see Output Queue Group 262 Questionable Data Signal Register Group see QuestionableData Sig nal Register Group 266 reading Status Byte Register with serial poll 244 reading Status Byte Register with STB CommonCommand 244 Standard Event Status Register Group see Standard EventStatus Register Group 256 Status Byte Register
244. cates that there is no room in the queue and an error occurred but was not recorded This code is entered into the queue in lieu of the code that caused the error S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errormsg fb Error 400 Error 410 Error 420 Error 430 Error 440 Query error This code indicates only that a Query Error as defined in JEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 7 and 6 3 has occurred Query INTERRUPTED Indicates that a condition causing an INTERRUPTED Query error occurred see JEEE 488 2 6 3 2 3 For example a query followed by DAB or GET before a response was completely sent This message appears when you query a measurement without immediately entering the returned value into a variable For example the following program lines query the TX Frequency measurement and enter its value into a variable Rf freq OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR FREQ ABS ENTER 714 Rf freq Query UNTERMINATED Indicates that a condition causing an UNTERMINATED Query error occurred see IEEE 488 2 6 3 2 2 For example the device was addressed to talk and an incomplete program message was received This message usually appears when trying to access a measurement that is not active For example you cannot query the DTMF Decoder measurements from the DUPLEX TEST screen or query the TX Frequency measurement when the TX Freq Error measurement is displayed Query DEADLOCKED Indicates that a condition causing a DEADLOCKED Query error occurre
245. ce Function Capabilities 48 Passing Control see Passing Control 313 Remote Interface Message Capabili ties 50 SRQ see Service Requests 293 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands 208 Common Commands ESE 261 Common Commands ESE 260 Common Commands ESR 258 Common Commands PCB 315 Common Commands RST 201 Common Commands SRE 296 Common Commands SRE 296 Common Commands STB 244 Common Commands TRG 224 Common CommandsRST 308 compliance 47 48 Output Queue 262 Overlapped commands 70 Sequential commands 70 Standard Event Status Register 256 Status Byte Register 241 Increasing measurement speed 234 autoranging 234 autotuning 234 combining ENTER statements 238 combining OUTPUT statements 237 compound commands 237 measurement setup time 236 speed of control program 237 instrument function querying ON OFF state 88 turning ON and OFF 87 Instrument Initialization 303 Device Clear DCL HP IB Bus Com mand 311 Front panel PRESET key 306 Interface Clear IFC HP IB Bus Com mand 312 methods of 304 power on reset 304 RST Common Command 308 Selected Device Clear SDC HP IB Bus Command 312 Integer Number Setting HP IB command syntax diagram 174 Internal Automatic Control Mode 28 31 Index K keys front panel 47 575 L Library files 420 backing up 346 LIF file names 334 LIF file system 334 initializing media for 338 lock up HP IB bus 226 231 576 M Manual Control Mode 27
246. ce request is detected the application program can take appropriate action Refer to Status Byte Register and Service Request Enable Register in the Advanced Operations chapter of the Agilent 8920B Programmer s Guide for further information 217 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands Example program 10 OUTPUT 714 SRE 16 Enable SRQ on data available in 20 Output Queue MAV bit 30 ON INTR 7 15 CALL Srvice interupt Set up interrupt 40 ENABLE INTR 7 2 Enable SRQ interrupts 50 OUTPUT 714 DISP RFG RFG OUTP Dupl AMPL 0 dBm FREQ 320 MHz OPC 60 LOOP Dummy loop to do nothing 70 DISP I am in a dummy loop 80 END LOOP 90 END 100 SUB Srvice_interupt 110 ENTER 714 Output que val Read the 1 returned by the OPC 120 query command 130 PRINT All operations complete 140 Note 150 This interrupt service routine is not complete 160 Refer to Status Byte Service Request Enable Register in 170 Status Reporting in the Agilent 8920B Programmer s Guide 180 SUBEND 218 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS ieee sec WAI Wait To Complete NOTE CAUTION IEEE 488 2 Common Commands The WAI command stops the Test Set from executing any further commands or queries until all commands or queries preceding the WAI command have completed Example statement OUTPUT 714 DISP RFG RFG OUTP Dupl WAI AMPL 0 dBm The Test Set c
247. ch command to finish executing The Test Set s GPIB Mode field must be set to Talk amp Lstn and the TESTS IBASIC CONTROLLER screen must be displayed 1 OUTPUT 714 PROG DEL ALL Deletes any programs that reside in Test Set RAM 2 OUTPUT 714 PROG DEF 0 Defines the address in Test Set RAM where the downloaded program will be stored 3 LIST 714 Causes all program lines to transfer over GPIB to the Test Set which is at address 714 4 OUTPUT 714 END Defines end of download process by generating an EOI command After the above commands complete the program code will be in the Test Set ready to run If any bugs are detected when the program is run the program can be uploaded back into the external BASIC language controller to correct the error Alternately the full screen IBASIC EDIT function through RS 232 can be used to correct the error refer to Method 2 Developing Programs on the Test Set Using the IBASIC EDIT Mode on page 381 for details After the program is working properly in the Test Set IBASIC environment it should be stored for backup purposes 379 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 1 Program Development on an External BASIC Language Computer Uploading Programs from the Test Set to an External BASIC Controller through GPIB To upload a program from the Test Set to an external BASIC language controller through GPIB the following program which uses a command from the PROGram subsystem to init
248. chapter 425 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Description of the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface Description of the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface 426 The Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface consists of the following items e a set of programming commands which access all available fields on the five Call Processing Subsystem screens e a Status register group whose condition register reflects the current state of the Call Processing Subsystem annunciator state indicators e aset of error messages available through HP IB which provide information about error conditions encountered while in the Call Processing Subsystem The programming commands provide the capability to generate control programs which can establish a cellular link between the Test Set and a cellular phone mobile station The status register group and the error messages provide the control program with the information necessary to make program flow decisions Once a link is established the control program can exercise the call processing functionality of the mobile station such as the decoding of orders from the Base Station such as orders to retune the transceiver to a new frequency to alert the mobile station user to an incoming call to adjust the transceiver output power level or to release the mobile station upon completion of a call e the encoding of signaling inform
249. clude the STATe command K lt lt 20HzHPF gt em M be 50Hz HPF DS E 300Hz HPF gt A Optional Filters Da I Returns quoted string i pace yl FILTerl N m lt 300Hz LPF 3kHz LPF 15kHz LPF lt gt 99kHz LP lt Optional Filters Returns quoted string GTIMe gt See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe command INPut A Re FMDemod gt Y AF Anl In lt AMDemod gt lt SSBDemod gt aa Audio In DS Radio Int A Ext Mod 4 Mic Mod gt FMMod gt lt AM Mod M Audio Out gt Returns quoted string SOAM pa ee OB eO 20 dB 3 Input Gain we pee 2 7 Returns quoted strin J NE AFAN continued NJ q g 98 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS afan sec AF Analyzer AFANalyzer ES gt IN y NOTCh FREQuency D See Real Number Setting Syntax 7 Does not include the STATe command GAIN wee 0 dB CM 10 dB 3 lt 20 dB gt a 30 dB gt lt 40 dB M C o gt 5 J Y Returns quoted string a RANGing lt space gt s Auto O lt Hold X Returns quoted string SMPoint D space De Emp A De lt Filters M Scope To M Input DS Notch Dd Returns quoted string I 4 s PEaker AS EE BDO om ROM 2
250. command If the code file was stored to the DOS formatted media using the STORE command an ERROR 58 Improper file typeis generated If an ERROR 58 Improper file type is generated the code file must be loaded into memory and then stored back to mass storage using the SAVE command as follows 1 Access the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen and LOAD the code file into the Test Set 2 Delete the stored code file from the mass storage location using the IBASIC PURGE command 3 SAVE the program as a Code file using a lower case c as a prefix to the same mass storage location as the original code file The IBASIC 1 0 file system can distinguish between LIF files that have been SAVER and those that were STOREd Consequently the Test Set can determine whether to use a GET or a LOAD on a code file which is located on a LIF formatted media 339 Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Using the ROM Disk Using the ROM Disk The Test Set comes with several Test Procedures stored on the internal ROM disk These Test procedures provide instrument diagnostic utilities periodic calibration utilities memory management utilities a variety of general purpose utilities and several IBASIC demonstration programs To see a brief description of what each procedure does perform the following steps 1 Display the TESTS Main Menu screen by selecting the front panel TESTS key 2 Using the rotary knob select the Select Procedure Locatio
251. command OPC is cleared e Any previously received Operation Complete query command OPC is cleared e The Test Set s display screen is in the UNLOCKED state e The Power up self test diagnostics are not performed The Contents of the SAVE RECALL registers are not affected Calibration data is not affected The GPIB interface is not reset any pending Service Request is not cleared All Enable registers are unaffected Service Request Standard Event Communicate Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Operation Calibration Call Processing and Questionable Data Signal e All Negative Transition Filter registers are unaffected Communicate Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Operation Calibration Call Processing and Questionable Data Signal All Positive Transition Filter registers are unaffected Communicate Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Operation Calibration Call Processing and Questionable Data Signal e The contents of the RAM memory are unaffected e The contents of the Output Queue are unaffected The contents of the Error Queue are unaffected 310 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Instrument Initialization Device Clear DCL GPIB Bus Command The Device Clear DCL Reset is accomplished by sending the DCL message to the Test Set through the GPIB bus The DCL command clears the Input Buffer and Output Queue clears any commands in process puts the Test Set into the Operation C
252. complete bit is set In a real world situation the Srvice_interupt subprogram should take some action if the Call Processing subsystem did not generate the interrupt if the command IF BIT Status_byte 7 was not true This branch is left out of the example subprogram to minimize the number of program lines As written the subprogram assumes that the interrupt was caused by the desired call processing activity completing successfully 6080 Ptr_value is the value that the positive transition filter will be set to The value is determined by which pseudo LED will light when the desired command is completed For example a successful PAGE is indicated by the Connect pseudo LED lighting Therefore the Ptr_value is set to 32 245 for the Page command 529 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Example Programs Polling Example Program 10 OPTION BASE 1 20 COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr 30 COM Prog control INTEGER Std event Wait time 40 50 Bus addr 7 Set to 8 when running on 8920 60 Inst addr 714 Set to 814 when running on 8920 70 Wait time 5 Set to minimum of 5 when running on an 8920 80 ABORT Bus addr 90 CLEAR SCREEN 100 PRINTER IS CRT 110 Cnfg stat reg 120 130 Start test 140 Cond test set 150 OUTPUT Inst addr DISP ACNT 160 IF NOT FNCnfg base sta 333 0 212 231 5970 47 AMPS THEN CALL Print error
253. control INTEGER Oper complete Wait time Error flag INTEG ER Std event Status byte Call proc event Oper event Statu S byte SPOLL Inst addr IF BIT Status byte 5 THEN Check for error conditions first Error flag 1 SUBI EXIT Dont re enable interrupts until current errors processed 523 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Example Programs 3080 ELSE 3090 Error_flag 0 3100 END IF 3110 IF BINAND Status byte 31 THEN 3120 BEEP 3130 PRINT Error in SRQ process Status Byte Status byte 3140 STOP 3150 END IF 3160 IF BIT Status byte 7 THEN Check for call processing state 3170 OUTPUT Inst addr STAT OPER EVEN STAT CALLP EVEN 3180 ENTER Inst addr Oper event Call proc event 3190 Oper complete 1 3200 END IF 3210 ENABLE INTR Bus addr 2 3220 SUBEND 3230 5000 Cnfg base sta DEF FNCnfg base sta Vmac Vch Sid Sat REAL Ampl Sys INT 5010 COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr 5020 COM Prog control INTEGER Oper complete Wait time Error flag 5030 OUTPUT Inst addr CALLP AMPL amp VALS Ampl amp DBM SID amp VALS Sid 5040 OUTPUT Inst addr CALLP VCH amp VALS Vch 5050 OUTPUT Inst addr CALLP SAT amp VALS Sat amp HZ amp VMAC amp VALS Vmac 5060 OUTPUT Inst addr STAT CALLP PTR 1 CALLP CCH amp VALS Cch 5070 GOSUB Wait loop 5080 IF Error flag THEN RETURN 0 5090 Oper complete 0 5100 Error flag 0
254. controlled by the external controller In this mode the Test Set is NOT configured as the System Controller Generally speaking in this mode of operation the Test Set is considered just another device on the GPIB bus and its Controller capabilities are not used However it may be desirable under certain conditions to print a Test Set screen to the GPIB printer for documentation or program debugging purposes With manual intervention it is possible to have the Active Controller pass control to the Test Set have the operator select and print the desired screen and then pass control back to the formerly Active Controller The following steps outline a procedure for accomplishing this task The example is based upon having an HP 9000 Series 300 Workstation as the external controller connected to the Test Set through the GPIB bus Further it assumes that the GPIB interface in the HP 9000 Controller is set to the default select code of 7 and address of 21 317 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Passing Control 1 Ifa program is running on the HP 9000 Workstation PAUSE the program 2 Put the Test Set in local mode press the LOCAL key on the front panel 3 Configure the Test Set to print to the GPIB printer using the PRINT CONFIGURE screen Configure the Test Set to display the screen to be printed 5 From the keyboard of the HP 9000 Workstation type in and execute the following command OUTPUT 714 PCB 21 gt This command tells t
255. countered when one of the Data Function values listed above is set to zero If this error is encountered the programmer must change the Data Function settings to values that can be converted to the new units of measure before sending the AUNits command to the Test Set For example the following BASIC language program statements l reset the Test Set 2 setthe Data Function default zero values to non zero values 3 setthe Attribute Units to DB 4 then query the value of each Data Function The units of measure for the returned values will be DB 84 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS guidelin fb Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation Display Units and GPIB Units are not affected when changing Attribute Units Reset the Test Set OUTPU 714 BSTT Set HIgh LIMIT value to 15 OUTPU 714 MEAS AFR DIST HLIM VAL 15 Set LOw LIMIT value to 1 OUTPU 714 MEAS AFR DIST LLIM VAL 1 Set the Meter Lo End value to 1 OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR DIST MET LEND 1 Set Attribute Units for Distortion measurement to DB OUTPU 714 MEAS AFR DIST AUN DB Query the REFerence SET value OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR DIST REF VAL Read the REFerence SET value into variable Ref set val E ER 714 Ref_set_val Query the HIgh LIMIT value OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR DIST HLIM VAL Read the HIgh LIMIT value into vari
256. ctor This field is used to select the type of detector used to measure the amplitude of the audio signal being analyzed on the ANALOG MEAS screen The Detector field is imported from the AF ANALYZER screen and is programmed exactly as it is on its home screen See AF Analyzer on page 97 for programming command syntax TX Pwr Zero The TX Pwr Zero function establishes a 0 0000 W reference for measuring RF power at the RF IN OUT port The TX Pwr Zero field is imported from the RF ANALYZER screen and is programmed exactly as it is on its home screen See RF Analyzer on page 161 for programming command syntax CAUTION RF power must not be applied while zeroing the power meter 519 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Example Programs Example Programs This section contains two example programs for controlling the Call Processing Subsystem The SRQ Example Program demonstrates how to control program flow using the service request feature of the HP IB The Polling Example Program demonstrates how to control program flow by polling the Test Set s status registers The programs can be run on an external controller or on the Test Set s built in IBASIC Controller If the programs are run on the Test Set s built in IBASIC Controller bus addresses and time out values must be changed as noted in the programs Both example programs have the same basic structure and execute as follows 520 Start Initi
257. cture works correctly as long as the Test Set returns a valid measurement result If for some reason the Test Set does not return a measurement result the control program becomes hung on the ENTER statement and program execution effectively stops In order to prevent the control program from becoming hung programmers usually enclose the operation with some form of timeout function The form of the timeout will of course depend upon the programming language being used The purpose of the timeout is to specify a fixed amount of time that the control program will wait for the Test Set to return the requested result After this time has expired the control program will abandon the ENTER statement and try to take some corrective action to regain control of the Test Set If the control program does not send the proper commands in the proper sequence when trying to regain control of the Test Set unexpected operation will result When this condition is encountered power must be cycled on the Test Set to regain control S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS measrslt fb Chapter 2 Methods For Reading Measurement Results Background This situation can be avoided entirely by 1 sending a Selected Device Clear SDC interface message to put the Test Set s GPIB subsystem into a known state 2 sending a command to terminate the requested measurement cycle These commands issued in this order will allow the control program to reg
258. d Speaker ALC lt off Ba Returns quoted string MS VOLume space C Pot AY EN Off 4 7 Returns quoted string 99 AF Generator 1 AF Generator 1 AFGenerator1 aN CAFGI DA 1 gt DESTination space pe O lt AM eM Y AFGenl To lt FM gt lt Audio Out bd A Returns quoted string 4 SAM B See Real Number Setting Syntax FM gt See Real Number Setting Syntax eO OUTPut B See Real Number Setting Syntax 2 FREQuency See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe command ln setting AFGenerator 1 you must first select a destination DESTination then set the modulation depth AM or deviation FM or amplitude OUTPut then set the modulation rate or audio output frequency FREQuency 2AM sets depth when DESTination set to AM FM sets deviation when DESTination set to FM OUTPut sets amplitude when DESTination set to Audio Out FREQuency sets modulation rate when DESTination set to AM FM FREQuency sets audio output frequency when DESTination set to Audio Out 100 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS afg1 sec AF Generator 2 Pre Modulation Filters AF Generator 2 Pre Modulation Filters AFGenerator2 CAFG2 ENCoder S lt i FILTER To improve performance one of four pre modulation filters is automatically selected for each Encoder Mode The automatically selected filter can only be changed using GPIB c
259. d see IEEE 488 2 6 3 1 7 For example both input buffer and output buffer are full and the device cannot continue Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response Indicates that a query was received in the same program message after a query requesting an indefinite response was executed see JEEE 488 2 6 5 7 5 7 563 Error Error Error Error Error Error Error 564 606 607 608 1300 1301 1302 1303 Update of Input Module Relay Switch Count file failed Indicates that the Test Set was not able to update the Input Module Relay Switch Count EEPROM file with the current switch count data from the non volatile RAM switch count array This error is most probably generated as a result of a hardware error or failure Refer to the Test Set s Assembly Level Repair for diagnostic information Checksum of Non Volatile RAM Relay Count data bad Indicates that the Test Set was not able to generate the proper checksum for the Input Module Relay Switch Count data from the non volatile RAM switch count array This error is most probably generated as a result of a hardware error or failure Refer to the Test Set s for diagnostic information Initialization of Input Module Relay Count file failed Indicates that the Test Set was not able to initialize the Input Module Relay Switch Count EEPROM file during installation of a new input module This error is most probably generated as a result of a hardw
260. d HO Returns quoted string C 2 chars required gt Returns quoted string ONA ed lt 2charsrequired gt Returns quoted string Returns quoted string ye 3 chars required gt Gu 11 chars required yey Returns quoted string Parity Returns quoted string Decoder Decoder For Decoder measurements see the MEASure command diagram For selecting Decoder Input see AF Anaylzer command diagram DECoder DEN ARM 4 5 MODE space gt gt Single gt Cy Cont DS SET Returns quoted string gt LEVel DE be AM B See Real Number Setting Syntax i Does not include the STATe command at FM gt See Real Number Setting Syntax i Does not include the STATe command Me VOLTS D See Real Number Setting Syntax i Does not include the STATe command gt MODE gt space gt gt lt FuncGen gt Da i lt Tone Seq o DTMF gt CDCSS Es Digi Page A AMPS TACS gt lt NAMP NTACS gt lt NMT A lt MPT 1327 gt lt LTR gt lt EDACS DS Returns quoted string POLarity lt space gt C Norm gt Y i i B Inver gt E Returns quoted string _ i STOP D Ss DEC continued 141 Decoder NAMPs or NTACS and EDACs
261. d line would set a new AMPS ENCoder SAT tone deviation and then turn on the SAT tone note the use of the to back up one level in the command hierarchy so that more than one command can be executed in a single line Example OUTPUT 714 ENC AMPS SAT FM 2 1 KHZ FM STAT ON To just turn on the SAT tone without changing the current setting the following commands would be used OUTPUT 714 ENC AMPS SAT FM STAT ON 41 Chapter 1 Using GPIB Getting Started Control Annunciators Guideline 6 Numeric values are returned in GPIB Units or Attribute Units only When querying measurements or settings through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric values in GPIB Units or Attribute Units regardless of the current Display Units setting GPIB Units Attribute Units and Display Units determine the units of measure used for a measurement or setting for example Hz Volts Watts Amperes Ohms Refer to Specifying Units of Measure for Settings and Measurement Results on page 75 for further information For example if the Test Set s front panel is displaying TX Frequency as 835 02 MHz and the field is queried through GPIB the value returned will be 835020000 since the GPIB Units for frequency are Hz Note that changing Display Units will not change GPIB Units or Attribute Units Note also that setting the value of a numeric field through GPIB can be done using a variety of units of measure The GPIB Units or Attribute Units fo
262. d not be executed because the file name on the device media was in error For example an attempt was made to copy to a duplicate file name Media protected Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because the media was protected For example the write protect switch on a memory card was set 559 Error 260 Error 261 Error 270 Error 271 Error 272 Error 273 Error 274 Error 275 560 Expression error Indicates that an expression program data element related error occurred Math error in expression Indicates that a syntactically legal expression program data element could not be executed due to a math error For example a divide by zero was attempted Macro error Indicates that a macro related execution error occurred Macro syntax error Indicates that a syntactically legal macro program data sequence according to IEEE 486 2 10 7 2 could not be executed due to a syntax error within the macro definition see IEEE 488 2 10 7 6 3 Macro execution error Indicates that a syntactically legal macro program data sequence could not be executed due to some error in the macro definition see JEEE 486 2 10 7 6 3 Illegal macro label Indicates that the macro label defined in the DMC command was a legal string syntax but could not be accepted by the device see IEEE 488 2 10 7 3 and 10 7 6 2 For example the label was too long the same as a common command header o
263. d to query the increment value Syntax INCRement Example OUTPUT 714 RFG FREQ INCR ENTER 714 Incr value This queries the increment value for the RF Gen Freq field When querying a field setting or measurement result through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric values in GPIB Units or Attribute Units regardless of the field s current Display Units setting Refer to Attribute Units AUNits on page 81 and GPIB Units UNITs on page 78 To Set the Increment Mode Use the INCRement MODE commands to set the increment mode to linear or logarithmic Syntax INCRement MODE LOGarithm or LINear Example OUTPUT 714 RFG FREQ INCR MODE LOG This sets the increment mode for the RF Generator s frequency to logarithmic To Query the Increment Mode Use the INCRement MODE commands to query the increment mode Syntax INCRement MODE Example ENTER 714 Mode returns LIN or LOG OUTPUT 714 RFG FREQ INCR MODE This queries the increment mode of the RF Generator s frequency S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS efpkc sec NOTE Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands To Set the Increment Value Display Units Use the INCRement DUNits commands to set the units of measure used to display the increment value Refer to Display Units DUNits on page 75 for description of Display Units Syntax INCRement DUNits disp units
264. data from the DUT the desired screen for the measurement result or data field must be selected using the DISPlay command and the field must be in the ON state 2 In Manual Control mode instrument configuration information is not routed through the To Screen control hardware block From a programming perspective this means that configuration information can be sent to any desired instrument without having to first select the instrument s front panel with the DISPlay command Keeping these points in mind during program development will minimize program development time and reduce problems encountered when running the program 31 Chapter 1 Using GPIB Overview of the Test Set HL YALNTAd TATIVYIVd saxog dOL Ont HHdOOHG A T TVIJAS DNITVNDIS NOLIVINYOHNI dnJas HAZATVNV di LNAWNALSNI YAZATVNV NNYLDAAS ASIA WOU E st 3 N4TIOXINOO A C TAVMAAVH TOAL adODSOTMOSO NOD INSIATQLISNI OISVHI QVO ASOINHIN WHZXIVNV AV NOLLVIASIOHNI HHGOONS TANVd DNI IVNDIS NADO NOLLON TH NAD JV SONDI AX V LO QVdAHM HE NAD JV HHVAGPIVH IOXINOO NAD JA NAJAS OL TANVd LNOU VING LOG ANY SITASAY LNSIASSIOS VAN Manual Control Mode Figure 1 32 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Chapter 1 Using GPIB Overview of the Test Set STH YALNTAd TATIVUVd 6i J L IVIIHS SdxOd dOL Ont HHdOOHd A TIVISHS DNI IVNDIS NOLLVIAIOHNI dfiLdS INSIAQLLSN
265. e 5 257 details the Standard Event Status Register bit assignments and their meanings The Standard Event Status Register Group is accessed using IEEE 488 2 Common Commands The Standard Event Status Register Group includes an Event Register an Enable Register and a Summary Bit Refer to the Status Reporting Structure Overview on page 239 for a discussion of status register operation Figure 9 shows the structure and IEEE 488 2 Common Commands used to access the Standard Event Status Register Group ESR ESE lt integer gt ESE Logical OR Event Summary Bit ESB to bit 5 of Status Byte Register 5 Ei p 1 T T T T a o Ie To Ei A o m Jo 2 Event Enable Register Register Figure 9 Standard Event Status Register Group 256 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Accessing the Standard Event Status Register Group s Registers Table 19 Standard Event Status Register Bit Assignments Bit Binary vis Number Weighting Condition Comment 15 32879 Always 0 Reserved by IEEE 488 2 14 16384 Always 0 Reserved by IEEE 488 2 13 8192 Always 0 Reserved by IEEE 488 2 12 4096 Always 0 Reserved by IEEE 488 2 11 2048 Always 0 Reserved by IEEE 488 2 10 1024 Always 0 Reserved by IEEE 488 2 9 512 Always 0 Reserved by IEEE 488 2 8 256 Always 0 Reserved by IEEE 488 2 7 128 Power On 1 Test
266. e commands with a semicolon The semicolon tells the Test Set s GPIB command parser to back up one level of hierarchy and accept the next command at the same level as the previous command For example on one command line it is possible to access the AF ANALYZER screen set the AF Analyzer s Input to AM Demod set Filter 1 to 300 Hz HPF set Filter 2 to 3kHz LPF R U N a DISP AFAN AFAN INP AM DEMOD FILT1 300Hz HPF FILT2 3kHz LPF The semicolon after the DISP AFAN command tells the Test Set s GPIB command parser that the next command is at the same level in the command hierarchy as the display command Similarly the semicolon after the INP AM DEMOD command tells the command parser that the next command FILT1 300Hz HPF is at the same command level as the INP AM DEMOD command 73 Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation 74 Using the Semicolon and Colon to Output Multiple Commands A semicolon followed by a colon tells the GPIB command parser that the next command is at the top level of the command hierarchy This allows commands from different instruments to be output on one command line The following example sets the RF Analyzer s tune frequency to 850 MHz and then sets the AF Analyzer s input to FM Demod RFAN FREQ 850MHZ AFAN INP FM DEMOD Using Question Marks to Query Setting or Measurement Fields The question mark is used to query read bac
267. e IBASIC program downloaded into the Test Set must be transferred as IEEE 488 2 Arbitrary Block Program Data Refer to the IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 for detailed information on this data type Two syntax forms are provided with the Arbitrary Block Program Data data type one form if the length of the program is known and another one if it is not Syntax length of program not known PROGram SELected DEFine lt 0 gt lt program gt lt NL gt lt END gt The following notation is used in the command description lt 0 gt IEEE 488 2 Arbitrary Block Program Data header lt program gt the IBASIC program sent as 8 bit data bytes NL new line ASCII line feed character lt END gt IEEE 488 1 END message This terminates the block transfer and is only sent once with the last byte of the indefinite block data Example BASIC program to download an IBASIC program to Test Set 10 OUTPUT 714 PROG DEL ALL Delete current program 20 OUTPUT 714 PROG DEF 0 Create program send header 30 OUTPUT 714 10 FOR J 1 TO 10 1st prog line 40 OUTPUT 714 20 DISP J 2nd prog line 50 OUTPUT 714 30 BEEP 3rd prog line 60 OUTPUT 714 40 NEXT J 4th prog line 70 OUTPUT 714 50 END END Send END message at end of last line 80 END 399 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem 400 Syntax length of program known PROGram SELected DEFine lt gt l
268. e TRUE logic 1 state When read by a serial poll the RQS bit is cleared set to logic 0 so that the RQS message will be FALSE if the Test Set is polled again before a new reason for requesting service has occurred S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations GPIB Service Requests Service Request Enable Register Service request enabling allows the application programmer to select which Summary Messages in the Status Byte Register may cause a service request The Service Request Enable Register illustrated in Figure 18 is an 8 bit register that enables corresponding Summary Messages in the Status Byte Register Summary Message Bits SRQ 4 read by Serial Poll RQS Service Generation MSS 4 read by STB Logical o e OR C Y NY Service Request EN 5 4 3 2 1 Enable Register ch diwi5 drw SRE lt interger gt SRE Figure 18 Service Request Enable Register 295 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations GPIB Service Requests 296 Reading the Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register is read with the SRE Common Command The SRE query allows the programmer to determine the current contents bit pattern of the Service Request Enable Register The Test Set responds to the SRE query by placing the binary weighted decimal value of the Service Request Enable Register bit pattern into the Output Queue The decimal val
269. e Transition Filters Syntax STATus QUEStionable PTRansition STATus QUEStionable NTRansition Example OUTPUT 714 STAT QUES PTR ENTER 714 Register value Writing the Transition Filters Syntax STATus QUEStionable PTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable NTRansition integer Example OUTPUT 714 STAT QUES PTR 256 269 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting 270 Reading the Event Register Syntax STATus QUEStionable EVENt Example OUTPUT 714 STAT QUES EVEN ENTER 714 Register value Clearing the Event Register The EVENT register is cleared whenever it is queried or whenever the Common Command CLS is sent to the Test Set Reading the Enable Register Syntax STATus QUEStionable ENABle Example OUTPUT 714 STAT QUES ENAB ENTER 714 Register value Writing the Enable Register Syntax STATus QUEStionable ENABle integer Example OUTPUT 714 STAT QUES ENAB 256 Clearing the Enable Register The ENABLE register is cleared by writing to it with an integer value of zero S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Call Processing Status Register Group The Call Processing Status Register Group contains information about the Test Set s Call Proces
270. e action field That is whenever the CSY Stem command is sent the change is reflected immediately in the physical configuration of the Test Set the control channel is immediately deactivated reconfigured and then reactivated to reflect the change and causes an immediate change to the current state of the Call Processing Subsystem the state is set to Active If the Test Set is in the Connect state and a change is made to the System Type field the Connect state will be lost The query form of the command that is CS YStem can be used to determine the type of cellular system currently being simulated Syntax CSYStem lt gt lt AMPS TACS JTACS gt lt gt CSYStem Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP CSYS AMPS OUTPUT 714 CALLP CSYS ENTER 714 System type S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb TX Freq Error TX Power Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen This field displays the frequency error frequency error assigned carrier frequency measured carrier frequency of the RF carrier being transmitted by the mobile station Four dashes indicate that no RF carrier is present to measure A numeric value would only be displayed in the connected state that is the Connect annunciator is lit The TX Freq Error field is only displayed when the Display field is set to Meas Refer to the Display field descriptio
271. e package for PC s with MS DOS One of its functions is to provide an RS 232 terminal function on a typical PC Running ProComm in MSDOS You can use ProComm s built in help function to learn more about setting it up 1 2 3 To access the help and command functions press the Alt and F10 keys simultaneously abbreviated as Alt F10 Press the space bar to move among the choices for a particular field Press ENTER to accept the displayed choice Setting up the ProComm Software 1 2 Press Alt P to access the LINE SETTINGS window Enter the number 11 This will automatically set the following Baud rate 9600 Parity None Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Selected communications port COM1 This may be different on your PC To select a different communications port enter the following numbers 20 COM1 21 COM2 22 COM3 23 COM4 Enter the number 24 to save changes to make the new configuration your default and to exit LINE SETTINGS 369 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports Press Alt S for the SETUP MENU Enter the number for MODEM SETUP Enter the number 1 for the Modem init string Press Enter to set a null string Y 2 A A fn Press Esc to exit MODEM SETUP back to the SETUP MENU 10 Enter the number 2 for TERMINAL SETUP 11 Terminal emulation VI 100 Duplex FULL Flow Control XON XOFF CR translation in CR CR translation out CR BS
272. e range of 0 to 255 Sending a negative number or a number greater than 255 causes an HP IB Error 222 Data out of range Clearing the Enable Register The ENABLE register is cleared by writing to it with an integer value of zero 261 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Output Queue Group The Output Queue Group is a specific implementation of the status queue model described in Status Queue Model on page 250 The Output Queue queue type is defined by the IEEE 488 2 1987 Standard to be a first in first out FIFO queue The Output Queue Group includes a FIFO queue and a Message Available MAV Summary Message Refer to the Status Reporting Structure Overview on page 239 for an overview of status queue operation Figure 10 shows the structure of the Output Queue Group E Vice HEEL Last Data Byte Last Data Byte Entered to be Read Next Data Byte Entered S First Data Byte First Data Byte Entered to be Read Output Queue Message Available MAV to bit 4 of Status Byte Register Queue Empty Q Queue Not Empty 1 Figure 10 Output Queue Group 262 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Accessing the Output Queue When messages are sent to the Test Set it decodes the message to determine what commands have been sent Depending upon the type of command the Test Set s processor sends messages to
273. e the overlapped command is still in progress All commands in the Test Set are sequential The processing architecture of the Test Set allows it to accept commands through the GPIB while it is executing commands already parsed into its command buffer While this may appear to be overlapped commands are always executed sequentially in the order received The process of executing a command can be divided into three steps 1 Command is accepted from GPIB and checked for proper structure and parameters 2 Commands is sent to instrument hardware 3 Instrument hardware fully responds after some time At For example in programming the Test Set s RF Signal Generator it takes 150 ms after receipt of the frequency setting command for the output signal to be within 100 Hz of the desired frequency In the Test Set commands are considered to have completed their task at the end of step 2 In manual operation all displayed measurement results take into account the instrument hardware s response time When programming measurements through GPIB the Triggering mode selected will determine whether the instrument s response time is accounted for automatically or if the control program must account for it Refer to Triggering Measurements on page 224 for a discussion of the different Trigger modes available in the Test Set and their affect on measurement results S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS guidelin fb Chapter 3 GPIB Command G
274. e utilized in situations where a measurement result timeout value of 32 767 seconds or less is adequate In the Agilent RMB language the timeout parameter for the ON TIMEOUT command has a maximum value of 32 767 seconds If a timeout value of greater than 32 767 seconds is required refer to the HP BASIC MAV Bit Example Program The measurement result timeout value is defined to mean the amount of time the control program is willing to wait for the Test Set to return a valid measurement result to the control program Lines 10 thru 230 in this example set up a measurement situation to demonstrate the use of the recommended technique The recommended technique is exampled in the Measure Function Lines 50 and 60 should be included in the beginning of all control program These lines are required to ensure that the Test Set is properly reset This covers the case where the program was previously run and was stopped with the Test Set in an error condition S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS measrslt fb o Io names INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr R SCREEN OGG aa g H Oa I e UTA G o H H O Fl 0 _addr 714 addr 7 R Inst_addr UT Ins UT Inst_addr RST UT Inst_addr DISP RFAN t_addr TRIG ABORT Chapter 2 Methods For Reading Measurement Results HP BASIC ON TIMEOUT Example Program xecute a call to the Measure function with a request to measure RF
275. earing of the Event Register 6 64 Request Service RQS when 1 Test Set has requested service read by serial poll OR Master OR Summary Status message 1 one or more of the enabled service request when read by STB conditions is true command 5 32 Standard Event Status Bit 1 one or more of the enabled events have ESB Summary Message occurred since the last reading or clearing of the Event Register 4 16 Output Queue Message 1 information is available in the Output Available MAV Summary Queue Message 3 8 Questionable Data Signal 1 one or more of the enabled events have Register Group Summary occurred since the last reading or clearing of Message the Event Register 2 4 Unused in Test Set 1 2 Hardware 2 Status Register 1 one or more of the enabled events have Group Summary Message occurred since the last reading or clearing of the Event Register 0 1 Hardware 1 Status Register 1 one or more of the enabled events have Group Summary Message occurred since the last reading or clearing of the Event Register The Status Byte Register is unique in that bit 6 can take on two different meanings The contents of the Status Byte Register can be read two ways by using a serial poll or by using the STB Common Command Both methods return the status byte message bits 0 5 and bit 7 as defined in Table 17 The value sent for bit 6 is however dependent upon the method used 243 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Statu
276. ease Ptr value 1 END SELECT PRINT Sending the IF State Originate OUTPUT Inst_addr STAT ELS O END FN Order D IF LOOP ISP Waiting for an interrupt WAIT Wait_time D END DISE Error_flag THI R IF LOOP D El z ETURN 0 ELS E END END R ETURN 1 IE amp State amp COM Io addresses IN COM per complete 0 Prog control O Error_flag 0 S ELECT Order CASE Power OUTPUT Inst addr OUTPUT Inst addr CASE Mainten BEEP OUTPUT Inst addr CASE Alert BEEP OUTPUT Inst addr END SELECT LOOP WAIT Wait time END LOOP IN H EN l CALI UTPUT Inst addr STAT CAI EXIT IF Oper complete OR EG EG STAT CALLP PT CALLP ORD EXIT IF Oper complete OR CALLP PT CALLP PT CHNG PL Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem command Error_flag EF FNOrder Order INTEGER Parm ER Inst addr Bus addr ER Oper complete Wait time l Initialize to zero at start of any order to mobile Initialize to zero at start of any order to mobile R 32 R 16 CAI R 32 CAI Error flag LP PTR amp VALS Ptr value LLP ORD LLP ORD Example Programs LLP PTR amp VALS Ptr value amp CALLP am
277. easure result ISABLE N TIM 1 UT Recommended Tec ck ck ck ck ck ck ok ck ck ck ck kk ck Ck KKK ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kk KKK kk ck kk ck KKK KKK KKK kk ko kc koko KK KA AA hniqu Chapter 2 Methods For Reading Measurement R esults Io names INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr Measure MEAS RFR POW 50 t of the function call EF FNMeasure Query command Time out value OM Io names INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr EOUT Bus addr 5 GOTO Timed out UTPUT Inst addr TRIG MODE RETR SING TRIG IMM PUT Inst addr Query command ct e H _time TIMEDATE ia D H TT zin cts 3 Zc ABLE MNUADOCQOCHGCHMAHMOMAHNADNOOOCUQU HANVE URN Result D IF ZZE imed_out zi EAR Inst addr ETURN 9 E 99 annot recover TOP END z PUT Inst addr T atus byte SPOLL Inst addr BIT Status byte 4 THEN ER Inst addr Result RIG MODE RETR R EP IL TIMEDATE Start_time gt Time_ou t_value TIMEOUT Bus_addr 5 GOTO Cannot_recover UTPUT Inst_addr TRIG ABORT MOD ISP Cannot regain control of Tes RETR REP t Set HP BASIC MAV Example Program to the Measure function with a request to measure RF The time out value is specified as 50 seconds function is assigned to the variable Measure result The value KKKKKKK kk
278. ed bits displayed in the MSMessOrd field to the mobile station This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message 2 binary characters required SAT color code field 2 binary characters required Second part of the mobile identification number field 10 binary character required Reserved for future use all bits must be set as indicated 1 binary character required S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc flb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions LOCAL This field is specific to each system The ORDER field must be set to local control for this field to be interpreted 5 binary character required ORDQ The order qualifier field qualifies the order confirmation to a specific action 3 binary character required ORDER This field identifies the order type 5 binary character required Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 503 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions MS IntVCh Message Fields Set Message MS Int Ch FCC Mobile Station Control Message Extended Address Word TiT2 scc MIN2 DI 0111110010 Figure 53 MS IntVCh Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address
279. ed to talk or listen the Test Set will respond to the Clear DCL Local Lockout Clear Lockout Set Local and Abort messages 53 Chapter 1 Using GPIB Remote Local Modes Local To Remote Transitions The Test Set switches from Local to Remote mode upon receipt of the Remote message REN bus line true and Test Set is addressed to listen No instrument settings are changed by the transition from Local to Remote mode but triggering is set to the state it was last set to in Remote mode if no previous setting the default is FULL SETTling and REPetitive RETRiggering The R annunciator in the upper right corner of the display is turned on When the Test Set makes a transition from local to remote mode all currently active measurements are flagged as invalid causing any currently available measurement results to become unavailable If the GPIB trigger mode is RETR REP then a new measurement cycle is started and measurement results will be available for all active measurements when valid results have been obtained If the GPIB trigger mode is RETR SING then a measurement cycle must be started by issuing a trigger event Refer to Triggering Measurements on page 224 for more information Remote To Local Transitions 54 The Test Set switches from Remote to Local mode upon receipt of the Local message Go To Local bus message is sent and Test Set is addressed to listen or receipt of the Clear Lockout Set Local message REN bus line
280. eld If the file is being stored to a DOS formatted media 8 character file name and the file name specified in the file name entry field is 8 characters ABCDEFGH the last character will be silently truncated when the file is stored PABCDEFG S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS memcard fo Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage DOS and LIF File System Considerations When copying LIF named files to a DOS formatted media the file name is silently truncated to 8 characters since DOS only allows 8 character file names This could resultin ERROR 54 Duplicate File Name When storing or deleting files to a DOS formatted media the file name is silently truncated to 8 characters since DOS only allows 8 character file names This could resultin ERROR 54 Duplicate File Name File Naming Recommendations If switching between media types DOS and LIF or operating exclusively in DOS the following naming conventions are recommended Ensure that only TESTS Subsystem procedure files begin with the letter p upper or lower case Ensure that only TESTS Subsystem library files begin with the letter 1 upper or lower case Ensure that only TESTS Subsystem code files begin with the letter c upper or lower case Ensure that only user written NMT test files begin with the letter n upper or lower case Avoid using DOS file extensions If possible only use file names of 7 characters or less for Save Recall registers or TESTS Subsyst
281. em Identity Prefix DENdy _ Jy LN SIDentity D See Integer Number Setting Syntax gt ia See Integer Number Setting Syntax E y See Integer Number Setting Syntax CHANnel J r Setti 5 S r ing Sy p S Setti Sy 5 MA TRAFfic CNUMber gt See Integer Number Setting Syntax CALOHa D bd See Integer Number Setting Syntax Aloha Number li QUALifier gt Ed See Integer Number Setting Syntax Address Qualifier CRDELay D bd See Integer Number Setting Syntax S SYNC gt Ed See Integer Number Setting Syntax See Integer Number Setting Syntax SYNT D wee AFG2 MPT1327 Continued On Next Page 115 AF Generator 2 Encoder AFGenerator2g N ENCoder N STANdard M TMODe los e Test Mode pes FILLer e CRESet Pe UPDATe Ne Returns quoted string Off Control D Traffic gt 1200Hz De 1800Hz 2 Dotting CLEAR gt space gt lt integer 1 DATA D lt space gt lt integer gt e MESSage Ja CONTrol TRAFIC Valid range I to 32 Valid range I to 32 SN f L lt string gt J ur 2 RESO So CLEAR space gt lt integer gt 1 1 Integer value from 1 to 32 2 String maximum length 300 116 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS afg2_enc sec 2 y DATA space lt integer RU Dom string Configure I O Configure Conf
282. em files prefix character 7 characters 8 character DOS file name limit This will avoid silent truncation of file names which leads to many of the problems discussed under Potential File Name Conflicts on page 336 337 Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage DOS and LIF File System Considerations Initializing Media for DOS or LIF File System The INITIALIZE command is used to initialize a media external hard disk external 3 5 inch floppy disk Epson SRAM Card PCMCIA SRAM Card and RAM Disk for use with the DOS or LIF file system The DOS or LIF file system is specified with the parameter LIF is the default Test Set File Types The Test Set file system supports the following file types e ASCII files containing ASCII characters e BDAT files containing binary data e DIR DOS subdirectory DOS e HP UX STOREd code file Storing Code Files Two IBASIC commands are available for storing program code to a mass storage location SAVE and STORE The type of file created by the Test Set s file system when the program code is stored is dependent upon the format of the media being used The type of file created verses the media format is outlined in Table 37 Table 37 Stored Program Code File Types DOS Formatted Media LIF Formatted Media SAVE DOS ASCII STORE DOS HP UX Files that have been stored using the SAVE command must be retrieved using the GET command SAVE FM TEST 704 1 GET
283. ement been completed has an internal hardware failure occurred has a command error occurred has data available and so forth Many such conditions can exist in the Test Set Like conditions are grouped together and maintained in Status Register Groups Information in each register group is summarized into a Summary Message Bit Summary Message Bits always track the current status of the associated register group All of the Summary Message Bits are in turn summarized into the Status Byte Register Therefore by monitoring the bits in the Status Byte Register the application program can determine if a condition has occurred which needs attention which register to interrogate to determine what condition s have occurred and what action to take in response to the condition A Status Register Group Summary Message Bit may be summarized indirectly to the Status Byte Register through a Status Register Group which is summarized directly into the Status Byte Register Bits in the Status Byte Register can also be used to initiate a Service Request message SRQ by enabling the associated bit in the Service Request Enable Register When an enabled condition exists the Test Set sends the Service Request message SRQ on the GPIB bus and reports that it has requested service by setting the Request Service RQS bit in the Status Byte Register to the TRUE logic 1 state The Service Request message SRQ capability of the GPIB bus is used to automaticall
284. emp 0 Check for last value in temporary string 120 Result array N 1 VAL Temp 130 END The above example assumes that the dimensioned size of the IBASIC array is small er than the dimensioned size of the array named Result array Find comma separator 000 1001 YN EP oO 2 2 O OC OO CO Put last value into array NOTE Individual array elements cannot be queried with the NUMBer command STATe RUNIPAUSelSTOPICONTinue The STATe command is used to set from an external controller the execution state of the IBASIC program in the Test Set Table 43 defines the effect of setting the execution state of the IBASIC program to a desired state from each of the possible current states Table 43 Effect of STATe Commands Desired State of IBASIC Program STATe command sent to Test Set Current State of IBASIC Program RUNNING PAUSED STOPPED 406 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb RUN HP IB Error 221 Settings conflict RUNNING RUNNING CONT HP IB Error 221 Settings conflict RUNNING HP IB Error 221 Settings conflict PAUSE PAUSED PAUSED STOPPED STOP STOPPED STOPPED The program execution states are defined as follows RUNNING the program is currently executing PAUSED the program has reached a break in execution but can be continued STOPPED program execution has been terminated
285. ent Technologies warrants that Agilent Technologies software will not fail to execute its programming instructions for the period specified above due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used If Agilent Technologies receives notice of such defects during the warranty period Agilent Technologies will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects 3 Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of Agilent Technologies products will be uninterrupted or error free If Agilent Technologies is unable within a reasonable time to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product 4 Agilent Technologies products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use 5 The warranty period begins on the date of delivery or on the date of installation if installed by Agilent Technologies If customer schedules or delays Agilent Technologies installation more than 30 days after delivery warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery 6 Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from a improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration b software interfacing parts or supplies not supplied by Agilent Technologies c unauthorized modification or misuse d operation outside of the published env
286. ents of the Test Set This GPIB interface is only available to the IBASIC Controller There is no external connector for this GPIB interface No external instruments may be added to this GPIB interface The GPIB interface select code 7 in Figure 2 is used to interface the Test Set to external instruments or to an external controller The dedicated GPIB interface at select code 8 conforms to the IEEE 488 2 Standard in all respects but one The difference being that each instrument on the bus does not have a unique address The Instrument Control Hardware determines which instrument is being addressed through the command syntax Refer to Chapter 4 GPIB Commands for a listing of the GPIB command syntax for the Test Set 29 Chapter 1 Using GPIB Overview of the Test Set External Automatic Control Mode In External Automatic Control mode the Test Set s operation is controlled by an external controller connected to the Test Set through the GPIB interface When in External Automatic Control mode the Test Set s internal configuration is the same as in Manual Control Mode with two exceptions 1 Configuration and setup commands are received through the external GPIB interface select code 7 rather than from the front panel keypad rotary knob 2 The MEASure command is used to obtain measurement results and DUT data through the external GPIB interface Figure 1 on page 32 shows how information is routed inside the Test Set in Manual Co
287. er P O Box 4026 Englewood CO 80155 4026 tel 1 800 452 4844 Regional Sales Offices Canada Agilent Technologies Canada Inc 5150 Spectrum Way Mississauga Ontario LAW 5G1 tel 1 877 894 4414 Europe Agilent Technologies European Marketing Organization P O Box 999 1180 AZ Amstelveen The Netherlands tel 3120 547 9999 Japan Agilent Technologies J apan Ltd Measurement Assistance Center 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji Shi Tokyo 192 8510 J apan tel 81 456 56 7832 fax 81 426 56 7840 Latin America Agilent Technologies Latin America Region Headquarters 5200 Blue Lagoon Drive Suite 950 Miami Florida 33126 U S A tel 305 267 4245 fax 305 267 4286 Australia New Zealand Agilent Technologies Australia Pty Ltd 347 Burwood Highway Forest Hill Victoria 3131 Australia tel 1 800 629 485 fax 61 3 9272 0749 New Zealand tel O 800 738 378 fax 64 4 802 6881 Asia Pacific Agilent Technologies 24 F Cityplaza One 111 Kings Road Taikoo Shing Hong Kong tel 852 3197 7777 fax 852 2506 9233 Service and Support Table 2 10 Any adjustment maintenance or repair of this product must be performed by qualified personnel Contact your customer engineer through your local Agilent Technologies Service Center You can find a list of local service representatives on the Web at http www agilent tech com services English index html
288. er to generate a Service Request on the GPIB bus the binary weighted decimal value of the bit pattern for the Service Request Enable Register would be determined as shown in Table 27 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations GPIB Service Requests Table 27 Determining the Service Request Enable Register Bit Pattern Bit Position 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Logical Value 0 X 0 1 0 0 1 O X ignored by the Test Set Binary Weighting 128 X 32 16 8 4 2 1 Xc uignored by the Test Set Decimal Value 0 0 0 16 0 0 2 0 18 Example OUTPUT 714 SRE 18 NOTE The decimal value of the bit pattern must be a positive integer in the range of 0 to 255 Sending a negative number or a number greater than 255 causes an HP IB Error 222 Data out of range Clearing the Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register is cleared by sending the SRE Common Command with a decimal value of zero Clearing the Service Request Enable Register turns off service requests 297 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations GPIB Service Requests Procedure for Generating a Service Request 298 The following steps outline a generalized procedure for properly setting up the Test Set to generate a Service Request SRQ message to the Active Controller This procedure does not include instructions for setting up the Active Controller to respond to the Service Request message generated by the Test Set Refer to the
289. er Mode The Trigger mode is set to FULL SETTling and REPetitive RETRiggering whenever the Test Set is powered on the PRESET key is selected the Test Set is put into LOCAL mode the Test Set is reset using the RST command the Test Set is put in remote mode and no other trigger mode is set Local Remote Triggering Changes Local To Remote Transitions The Test Set switches from Local to Remote mode upon receipt of the Remote message REN bus line true and Test Set is addressed to listen No instrument settings are changed by the transition from Local to Remote mode but triggering is set to the state it was last set to in Remote mode if no previous setting the default is FULL SETTling and REPetitive RETRiggering When the Test Set makes a transition from local to remote mode all currently active measurements are flagged as invalid causing any currently available measurement results to become unavailable If the GPIB trigger mode is RETR REP then a new measurement cycle is started and measurement results will be available for all active measurements when valid results have been obtained If the GPIB trigger mode is RETR SING then a measurement cycle must be started by issuing a trigger event Refer to Triggering Measurements on page 224 for more information Remote To Local Transitions The Test Set switches from Remote to Local mode upon receipt of the Local message Go To Local bus message is sent and Test Set is
290. er Summary Message S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 000 010 020 030 040 050 060 070 080 090 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 1390 ererererrrrrrrrrrrr rrr rre E Chapter 5 Advanced Operations GPIB Service Requests decimal value 2 5 32 Bit 3 Questionable Data Signal Register Group Summary Message decimal value 2 3 8 Bit 0 Hardware Status Register 1 Group Summary Message decimal value 2 0 1 Srg_enab_reg 32 8 1 OUTPUT Inst_address SRE 100 Srq_enab_reg Set up the Active Controller to respond to an SRQ interrupt Call subprogram Check interrupt if an SRO condition exists on select code 7 The interrupt priority level is set to 15 highest level ON INTR 7 15 CALL Srvice interupt 6 Enable interrupts on select code 7 The interface mask is set to a value of 2 which enables interrupts on the GPIB bus when the SRO line is asserted ENABLE INTR 7 2 Start of the dummy loop LOOE DISP I am sitting in a dummy loop END LOOP END D Srvice interupt SUB Srvice interupt OPTION BASE 1 Io names INTEGER Inst address Std event reg Calibration reg Io names INTEGER Hardwarel reg Srq enab reg Status byte E
291. er case For example if dBuV is displayed DBUV is returned Guidelines for Display Units e When querying a field s setting or measurement result through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric values in GPIB Units or Attribute Units regardless of the field s current Display Units setting e The Display Units for a field s setting or measurement result can be set to any valid unit of measure regardless of the field s GPIB Units or Attribute Units e The Display Units setting for a field s setting is not affected when changing the field s value through GPIB For example if the AFGen1 Freq Display Units are set to KHz and the command AFGI FREQ 10 HZ is sent to change AFGen1 s frequency to 10 Hz the Test Set displays 0 0100 kHz not 10 Hz 7T Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation GPIB Units UNITs GPIB Units are the units of measure used by the Test Set when sending numeric data field settings and measurement results through GPIB and the default units of measure for receiving numeric data field settings and measurement results through GPIB Changing GPIB Units has no affect on the Display Units or Attribute Units settings Table 9 lists the GPIB Units used in the Test Set Table 9 GPIB Units Parameter Unit of Measure Power Watts W or dBm DBM Amplitude Volts V or dBuV DBUV Frequency Hertz Hz Frequency Error Hertz HZ or parts per million PPM
292. er required Local control field This field is specific to each system The ORDER field must be set to local control for this field to be interpreted 5 binary character required S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions ORDQ Order qualifier field Qualifies the order to a specific action 3 binary character required ORDER Order field Identifies the order type 5 binary character required Parity Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 507 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions FVC V Mes Message Fields Set Message FYC Mobile Station Control Voice Message TiT2 scc PSCC RSVD YMAC BI CP O 1 Figure 55 FVC V Mes Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message 2 binary characters required SCC SAT color code for new channel 2 binary characters required PSCC Present SAT color code Indicates the SAT color code associated with the present channel 2 binary characters required 508 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions RSVD Reserved for future use all bits
293. er s Handbook not included with manual set e Instrument BASIC Users Handbook Agilent P N E2083 90601 The format of the displayed message determines which manual contains information about the error message There are four basic error message formats e Positive numbered error messages BASIC error messages GPIB error messages e Text only error messages The following paragraphs give a brief description of each message format and direct you to the manual to look in for information about error messages displayed in that format 540 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errormsg fb Positive Numbered Error Messages Positive numbered error messages are generally associated with IBASIC Refer to the Instrument BASIC User s Handbook for information on IBASIC error messages Positive numbered error messages take the form ERROR XX lt error message gt For example Error 54 Duplicate file name or Error 80 in 632 Medium changed or not in drive 541 Negative Numbered Error Messages 542 Negative numbers preceding the error messages text correspond to the error conditions outlined in the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI For more information on SCPI order the following book A Beginner s Guide to SCPI Addison Wesley Publishing Company ISBN 0 201 56350 9 Agilent P N 5010 7166 or contact Fred Bode Executive Director SCPI Consortium 8380 Hercules Drive Suite P3 La Mesa CA 91
294. erating information on the use of the CALL CONFIGURE screen Refer to Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem in the HP 8920 User s Guide for detailed information on the operation and manual use of the CALL CONFIGURE screen The information presented in this section covers the CALL CONFIGURE screen programming commands and how to use them The cMax field sets the number of access channels in the system This will determine how many channels must be scanned by the mobile station when trying to access the Test Set The value of this field will affect the time required for the mobile station to connect with the Test Set The CMAXimum command is used to control this field The CMAX field is an immediate action field That is whenever the CMAXimum command is sent the change is reflected immediately in the appropriate signaling message s being sent on the forward control channel No change occurs to the current state i e Active Register Page Access Connect of the Call Processing Subsystem The query form of the command that is CMA Ximum can be used to determine the current control channel setting Syntax CMAXimum integer number CMAXimum Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP CMAX 21 OUTPUT 714 CALLP CMAX ENTER 714 Num_acc_chans S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONFIGURE Screen Dete
295. erefore set the Standard Event Enable Register to a value of 60 ESE 60 Set the correct Summary Message bit s in the Service Request Enable Register to generate a Service Request SRQ if the Summary Message s become TRUE Bit 7 Operation Status Register Group Summary Message decimal value 2 7 128 Bit 5 Standard Event Status Register Summary Message decimal value 2 5 32 128432 160 Therefore set the Service Request Enable Register to a value of 160 SRE 160 2030 Preset the transition filters to pass no transitions The filters will be set by the functions FNSet_state and FNOrder The functions will set the proper filter values to pass the desired transition 528 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Table 52 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Example Programs Comments For SRQ Example Program Continued Program Line Number Comment 2040 Call Processing Status Register Group Condition register conditions which will set the Summary Message TRUE if they occur Bit 5 Connect LED lit decimal value 245 32 Bit 4 Access LED lit decimal value 2 4 16 Bit 3 Page LED lit decimal value 243 8 Bit 2 Unused in Test Set decimal value 242 4 Bit 1 Register LED lit decimal value 241 2 Bit 0 Active LED lit decimal value 240 1 32 16 8 4 2 1 63 Therefore set the Call Processing Enable Register to 63 STAT CALLP ENAB 63 The Call Processing Status Regis
296. es available on the CALL BIT screen The syntactical structure for reading the contents of one or more fields from an individual message is as follows General Syntax CALLP lt message name gt lt field name gt lt gt lt gt lt additional field gt lt gt Table 50 on page 484 lists the message names used to access each of the signaling messages available on the CALL BIT screen Table 50 CALL BIT Screen Signaling Message Names Message Message Name SPC WORD1 SPOMI SPOMESSAGEI SPC WORD2 SPOM2 SPOMESSAGE2 ACCESS ACCess REG INC RINCrement REG ID RIDentify C FILMESS CFMessage MS WORDI MSWord MSMessOrd MSORder MS IntvcH MSVoice FVC O Mes FVORder FVC C Mes FV Voice Example of Querying A Single Field OUTPUT 714 CALLP MESS SPC WORD1 OUTPUT 714 CALLP SPOMI SID ENTER 714 Sid PRINT Sid Example Printout 00000001110011 484 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL BIT Screen Querying Multiple Fields With Single OUTPUT ENTER When multiple querries are combined into one command string the Test Set responds by sending one response message containing individual response message units separated by a response message unit separator Example of Multiple Querries Combined Into One Command String OUTPUT 714 CALLP MESS SPC WORD1 O
297. es from the internal SAVE RECALL mass storage device See Also SA V Save Instrument State on page 261 RCL Recall Instrument State on page 260 203 Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands SCREEN CONTROL Keys and To Screen Field 204 In manual mode the RX TX DUPLEX TESTS MSSG HELP CONFIG keys and the To Screen field selections are used to display the various Test Set screens on the CRT The GPIB command DISPlay is used to perform this function programmatically See Table 13 on page 206 for the screen mnemonics for the DISPlay command To Select a Screen Use the DISPlay command to select the desired screen Syntax DISPlay lt screen mnemonic gt Example OUTPUT 714 DISP AFAN This displays the Audio Frequency Analyzer screen To Query Currently Displayed Screen Use the DISPlay command to query the currently displayed screen Syntax DISPlay Example OUTPUT 714 DISP ENTER 714 Disp screen This queries the currently displayed screen S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS efpkc sec USER Keys Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands HOLD The HOLD key is used to hold resume all active measurements There is no equivalent GPIB command for the HOLD key However the functionality of the HOLD key can be implemented remotely by using Single Triggering of measurements Refer to Triggering Measurements on page 224 PREV The PREV key is used to display the pr
298. esponse data is obtained by reading the Output Queue into a numeric variable real or integer Upon successful completion of the self test the Test Set settings are restored to their values prior to receipt of the TST command The numeric response definition is as shown in Table 16 Table 16 Self Test Response Detected Error Returned Error Error Code Displayed on Test Code Decimal Set s CRT Hexadecimal None all self tests passed 0 0000 68000 Processor Failure 2 0002 ROM Checksum Failure 4 0004 Standard Non Volatile System RAM Failure 8 0008 Non Volatile System RAM Failure 16 0010 6840 Timer Chip Failure 32 0020 Real time Clock Chip Failure 64 0040 Keyboard Failure stuck key 128 0080 RS 232 Chip 256 0010 I O option installed and not functioning correctly Serial Bus Communications Failure with a Standard Board 512 0200 Signaling Board Self Test Failure 1024 0400 CRT Controller Self Test Failure 2048 0800 Miscellaneous Hardware Failure 4096 1000 Example program 10 INTEGER Slf tst response 20 OUTPUT 714 TST 30 ENTER 714 S1f tst respons 40 PRINT S1f tst respons 50 END Example response 512 212 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS ieee sec OPC Operation Complete NOTE IEEE 488 2 Common Commands The OPC command allows for synchronization between the Test Set and an external controller The OPC
299. essage OlQ i ITs UI 1110 110111100101101111010101 In order to read individual response message units into individual string variables combined into one ENTER statement the programming language used must recognize the response message unit separator as an entry terminator for each string in the input list If the programming language used cannot recognize the response message unit separator as an entry terminator then the response message must be read into one string and individual responses parsed out 477 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL BIT Screen Programming the CALL BIT Screen Figure 44 478 CALL BIT Active Active Register Register Page Page Handoff Access Release Connect Data Spec Message To Screen C WORDI System Parameter Overhead Message Word 1 The CALL BIT Screen The CALL BIT screen has been designed to give the advanced user the capability to modify the contents of the forward control channel and forward voice channel signaling messages used in a call processing messaging protocol A messaging protocol is defined as the sequence of messages sent from the Test Set to the mobile station to perform a desired action such as registering a mobile station Modifying the contents of one or more messages may be required for testing the robustness of a mobile station s call processing algorithms or for new product development The CALL BIT screen
300. est Set make the following settings in the ProComm terminal emulator on the PC The ProComm terminal emulator views the file transfer as sending the file from the PC up to the Test Set This is opposite to the direction used by the previous Windows Terminal example Therefore with ProComm an ASCII upload transfer is used Press Alt F10 to display the ProComm help screen Press Alt P to display the SETUP MENU Select item 6 ASCII TRANSFER SETUP Set Echo locally NO Expand blank lines YES Pace character 0 Character pacing 15 Line pacing 10 CR translation NONE LF 10 Translation NONE This is important since the default setting will strip line feeds and this will cause the transfer to never begin 11 Select the Escape key to exit setup mode and return to the main screen 12 Press Alt F10 to access the help menu 13 To begin sending the file select PgUp 14 In the UPLOAD screen select 7 ASCII protocol 15 Run the ASCII_DN download program on the Test Set 16 When the Test Set displays Ready to receive ASCII file data press Enter on the PC to begin the transfer At this point each line of the program will rapidly scroll across the screen of the Test Set When the transfer is finished the download program will display Down load of ASCII file complete and the program file will be stored on the SRAM card in the TEMP CODE file 17 Before running the transferred program execute a SCRATCH command
301. et always returns numeric values in GPIB Units or Attribute Units regardless of the current Display Units setting Refer to GPIB Units UNITSs on page 78 and Attribute Units AUNits on page 81 for further information There are three sets of units of measure used in the Test Set Display Units GPIB Units and Attribute Units Writing correct GPIB programs requires an understanding of how the Test Set deals with these different sets of units of measure Display Units DUNits Display Units are the units of measure used by the Test Set to display numeric data field settings and measurement results on the front panel CRT display For example the RF Generator s frequency can be displayed in Hz KHz MHz and GHz Similarly the measured TX Frequency can be displayed in Hz KHz MHz and GHz When evaluating an entered value for a numeric field the Test Set interprets the data it receives in terms of the Display Units currently set For example if the Display Units for the RF Gen Freq field are set to GHz and the operator tries to enter 500 into the field an Input value out of range erroris generated since the Test Set interpreted the value as 500 GHz which is outside the valid frequency range of the Test Set 75 Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation Changing Display Units Use the DUNits command to change the units of measure used by the Test Set to display any field setting or measurement result For
302. eviously displayed screen There is no equivalent GPIB command for the PREV key function PRINT The PRINT key is used to print a pixel dump of the currently displayed screen to an external printer There is no equivalent GPIB command to the PRINT key To print measurement results through GPIB the program must query the measurement and print the result in a format determined by the programmer The USER Keys k1 through k5 and k1 through k3 can be assigned to various Test Set fields for operator convenience There are no equivalent GPIB commands for assigning Test Set fields to the USER keys The IBASIC Programming language ON KEY command could be used to force execution of a user written IBASIC routine which emulates the user key to Test Set field assignment while an IBASIC program is running Refer to the Instrument BASIC Users Handbook for further information on the ON KEY command 205 Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands Table 13 Screen Mnemonics for the DISPlay Command Mnemonic Screen Mnemonic Screen ACNTrol CALL CONTROL ACPower ADJACENT CHANNEL POWER RFGen RF GENERATOR AFANalyzer AF ANALYZER RINTerface RADIO INTERFACE CANalyzer CDMA ANALYZER RX RX TEST CBIT CALL BIT SANalyzer SPECTRUM ANALYZER CCNFigure CALL CONFIGURE SERVice SERVICE CDATa CALL DATA TCONfigure TESTS External Devices CMEasure ANALOG MEAS TDMA Test TDMA DUAL MODE CELLULAR TEST CDANalyzer
303. example to change the Display Units setting for the TX Power measurement field from W to dBm the following command would be used MEAS RFR POW DUN DB Display Units DUNits Command Example GHz MEAS RFR FREQ ABS DUN GHZ MHz MEAS RFR FREQ ABS DUN MHZ kHz MEAS RFR FREQ ABS DUN KHZ Hz MEAS RFR FREQ ABS DUN HZ ppm MEAS RFR FREQ ERR DUN PPM D MEAS RER FREQ ERR DUN PCTDIFF V MEAS RFR POW DUN V mV MEAS RFR POW DUN MV mV RFG AMPL DUN UV dBmV RFG AMPL DUN DBUV W MEAS RFR POW DUN W mW MEAS RFR POW DUN MW dBm MEAS RFR POW DUN DBM db MEAS AFR DISTN DUN DB MEAS AFR DISTN DUN PCT S DEC FGEN GATE DUN S ms DEC FGEN GATE DUN MS 76 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS guidelin fb Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation Reading Back Display Units Setting Use the Display Units query command DUNits to read back the current Display Units setting For example the following BASIC language program statements query the current Display Units setting for the TX Power measurement Query Display Units setting for TX Power measurement OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW DUNits Enter the returned value into a string variable ENTER 714 AS The returned units of measure will be whatever is shown on the Test Set s front panel display for the TX Power measurement dBm V mV dBuV or W All returned characters are in upp
304. false No instrument settings are changed by the transition from Remote to Local mode but triggering is reset to FULL SETTling and REPetitive RETRiggering The R annunciator in the upper right corner of the display is turned off If it is not in Local Lockout mode the Test Set switches from Remote to Local mode whenever the front panel LOCAL key is pressed If the Test Set was in Local Lockout mode when the Local message was received front panel control is returned but Local Lockout mode is not cleared Unless the Test Set receives the Clear Lockout Set Local message the Test Set will still be in Local Lockout mode the next time it goes to the Remote mode S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Chapter 1 Using GPIB Remote Local Modes Local Lockout The Local Lockout mode disables the front panel LOCAL key and allows return to Local mode only by commands from the System Controller Clear Lockout Set Local message When a data transmission to the Test Set is interrupted which can happen if the LOCAL key is pressed the data being transmitted may be lost This can leave the Test Set in an unknown state The Local Lockout mode prevents loss of data or system control due to someone unintentionally pressing front panel keys NOTE Return to Local mode can also be accomplished by setting the POWER switch to OFF and back to ON However returning to Local mode in this way has the following disadvantages 1 It defeats
305. flect the state of the DUT when the TRIG IMM command was sent The IMM keyword is optional 320 Send the query command passed to the Measure function to the Test Set 330 Establish a start time against which to compare the measurement result timeout value passed to the Measure function 340 Start the status byte polling loop 350 Allow the Test Set some time 100 milliseconds to process the measurement When polling the Test Set the polling loop must give the Test Set time to process the requested measurement Since GPIB command processing has a higher sys tem priority within the Test Set than measurement functions constantly sending GPIB commands will result in longer measurement times 66 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS Wmeasrslt fb Table 8 Chapter 2 Methods For Reading Measurement Results HP BASIC MAV Example Program Comments for Measure Function from MAV Example Program Continued Program Line Number Comments 360 Perform a serial poll to read the Status Byte from the Test Set A serial poll is used because the STB Common Command cannot be processed by the Test Set while a query is pending Sending the STB command will cause an HP IB Error 410 Query INTERRUPTED error 370 Check bit 4 the Message Available bit M AV to see if it is set to l If itis then the requested measurement result is ready 380 Read the measurement
306. for an overview of status queue operation Figure 11 shows the structure of the Error Message Queue Group ch4drw09 drw Last Message to be Read Last Message Entered SYSTem ERRor Next Message Entered First Message First Message Entered to be Read Error Message Queue Figure 11 Error Message Queue Group 264 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Accessing the Error Message Queue A message appears in the Error Message Queue any time bit 2 3 4 or 5 of the Standard Event Status register is asserted Each message consists of a signed error number followed by a comma separator followed by an error description string in double quotes The maximum length of the error description string is 255 characters If more than 20 messages are in the queue and another error occurs the last message is replaced with the message 350 Queue overflow If no messages are in the queue the message 0 No error is returned Reading a message removes it from the queue The Error Message Queue is accessed using the SYSTem command Returned information is read into a numeric variable followed by a string variable Reading the Error Message Queue Syntax SYSTem ERRor Example OUTPUT 714 SYST ERR ENTER 714 Error_num Error_msg Example IBASIC program 10 INTEGER Error_num 20 DIM Error_msg 255 30 OUTPUT 714 SYST ERR
307. for the TESTS subsystem Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem describes how to control the Test Set s Call Processing Subsystem using the Call Processing Subsystem s remote user interface Topics discussed are accessing the Call Processing Subsystem screens handling error messages controlling program flow using the Call Processing Status Register Group and how to query data messages received from the mobile station Example programs are provided showing how to control the Call Processing Subsystem using service requests and register polling Error Messages describes the Text Only HP IB Errors and the Numbered HP IB Errors This section also describes other types of error messages that the Test Set displays and where to find more information about those types of error messages Contents 1 Using GPIB Overview of the Test Set 26 Getting Started 34 Remote Operation 47 Addressing 49 IEEE 488 1 Remote Interface Message Capabilities 50 Remote Local Modes 53 13 Contents 2 Methods For Reading Measurement Results Background 58 HP BASIC ON TIMEOUT Example Program 60 HP BASIC MAV Example Program 64 14 Contents 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Sequential and Overlapped Commands Guidelines for Operation 71 70 15 Contents 4 GPIB Commands GPIB Syntax Diagrams 92 Adjacent Channel Power ACP 95 AF Analyzer 97 AF Generator 1 100 AF Generator 2 Pre Modulation Filters 101 AF Gener
308. g Accessing the Communicate Status Register Group s Registers The following sections show the syntax and give programming examples using the Instrument BASIC programming language for the STATus commands used to access the Communicate Status Register Group s registers Reading the Condition Register Syntax STATus COMMunicate CONDition Example OUTPUT 714 STAT COMM COND ENTER 714 Register_value Reading the Transition Filters Syntax STATus COMMunicate PTRansition STATus COMMunicate NTRansition Example OUTPUT 714 STAT COMM PTR ENTER 714 Register_value Writing the Transition Filters Syntax STATus COMMunicate PTRansition lt integer gt STATus COMMunicate NTRansition lt integer gt Example OUTPUT 714 STAT COMM PTR 256 291 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting 292 Reading the Event Register Syntax STATus COMMunicate EVENt Example OUTPUT 714 STAT COMM EVEN ENTER 714 Register value Clearing the Event Register The EVENT register is cleared whenever it is queried or whenever the Common Command CLS is sent to the Test Set Reading the Enable Register Syntax STATus COMMunicate ENABle Example OUTPUT 714 STAT COMM ENAB ENTER 714 Register value Writing the Enable Register Syntax STATus COMMunicate ENABle integer
309. g Setting the Test Set back to repetitive retriggering will be implementation dependent 67 Chapter 2 Methods For Reading Measurement Results HP BASIC MAV Example Program Table 8 Comments for Measure Function from MAV Example Program Continued Program Line Number Comments 480 Exit the Measure function and return a result value of 9 E 99 490 The following lines of code handle the case where the control program cannot regain control of the Test Set The actions taken in this section of the code will be implementation dependent For the example case a message is displayed to the operator and the program is stopped 500 Display a message to the operator that the control program cannot regain control of the Test Set 510 Stop execution of the control program 68 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS measrsit fb GPIB Command Guidelines 1 GPIB was formerly called HP IB for Hewlett Packard instruments Some labels on the instrument may still reflect the former HP name 69 Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Sequential and Overlapped Commands Sequential and Overlapped Commands 70 IEEE 488 2 makes the distinction between sequential and overlapped commands Sequential commands complete their task before execution of the next command can begin Overlapped commands can run concurrently that is a command following an overlapped command may begin execution whil
310. g REF SET via HP IB 197 Default file system 324 Detector CALL CONFIGURE screen 519 Disk drives external 328 351 external default mass storage volume specifier 332 external initializing media for 351 Display HP IB command syntax diagram 145 querying displayed screen via HP IB 204 selecting screens via HP IB 204 Display Units 75 DOS file names 334 DOS file system 334 initializing media for 338 restrictions 339 Downloading programs to Test Set 379 416 572 E Encoder pre modulation filters 101 EPSON card see Memory card 323 329 330 341 Error Message Queue Group 264 accessing the error message queue 265 Error messages 539 format of 540 types of 539 Example Programs 520 comments 528 polling example program 530 SRQ example program 522 extended address word order 502 reverse control channel 470 voice channel assignment 504 External Automatic Control Mode 30 External controller 26 30 44 External disk drives 325 328 351 initializing media for 338 351 Index F FCC mobile station control word 2 order 502 voice channel assignment 504 FCC mobile station control word 1 501 File names conflicts 336 recommendations 337 File system backing up files 346 copying volume 347 DOS 334 DOS file names 334 file name conflicts 336 file naming recommendations 337 file types 338 initializing media 338 345 350 351 LIF 334 LIF file names 334 naming files
311. g the Output Queue into a numeric variable integer or real Reading the Standard Event Status Register clears it sets all bits to zero Example BASIC program 10 INTEGER Std_evn_stat_rg 20 OUTPUT 714 ESR 30 ENTER 714 Std_evn_stat_rg 40 PRINT Std_evn_stat_rg 50 END Example response 32 Clearing the Event Register The EVENT register is cleared whenever it is queried or whenever the CLS Common Command is sent to the Test Set 259 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Reading the Enable Register Syntax Example OUTPUT 714 ESE ENTER 714 Register_value The ESE query allows the programmer to determine the current contents bit pattern of the Standard Event Status Enable Register The Test Set responds to the ESE query by placing the binary weighted decimal value of the Standard Event Status Enable Register bit pattern into the Output Queue The decimal value of the bit pattern will be a positive integer in the range of 0 to 255 The response data is obtained by reading the Output Queue into a numeric variable integer or real Example BASIC program 10 INTEGER Std_evn_enab_rg 20 OUTPUT 714 ESE 30 ENTER 714 Std evn enab rg 40 PRINT Std evn enab rg 50 END Example response 36 260 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting
312. gh GPIB 82 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS guidelin fb Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation Changing Attribute Units The AUNits command can be used to change the Attribute Units setting for selected measurements Only the Attribute Units for power and relative level measurements can be changed Table 12 lists the measurements which have changeable Attribute Units Table 12 Measurements with Attribute Units That Can Be Changed Function Available Attribute Units TX Power measurement W or DBM Adjacent Channel Power LRATio URATio DB or PCT LLEVel ULEVel W or DBM SINAD measurement DB or PCT DISTN measurement DB or PCT SNR measurement DB or PCT Before changing the Attribute Units for a selected measurement the Test Set verifies that all Data Function values can be properly converted from the current unit of measure to the new unit of measure The following Data Function settings are checked the Reference value the High Limit e the Low Limit e the Meter s high end setting the Meter s low end setting the Meter s interval 83 Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation If it is not possible to properly convert all the values to the new unit of measure the Attribute Units are not changed and the following error is generated HP IB Error HP IB Units cause invalid conversion of attr This error is most often en
313. gister Group on page 271 for further information 455 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen Phone Num CAUTION NOTE 456 This field displays the phone number decoded from the MIN number received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel in response to a forward control channel message The Phone Num field is only displayed when the Display field is set to Data and a reverse control channel message containing this information has been decoded Refer to the Display field description on page 444 for information on how to read data in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen Do not confuse the Phone Num field which is displayed in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen with the Phone Num selection of the MS Id field An all zero MIN number 000000000 which does not represent a valid phone number will convert to the following phone number 111111 111 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen Pwr Lvl The Pwr Lvl field is divided into two fields The left hand field displays the mobile station s output power level assignment for the voice channel currently being used by the Test Set and the mobile station A numeric value is only displayed when a mobile station is actively connected on a voice channel that
314. gister_value Reading the Transition Filters Syntax STATus CALLProc PTRansition STATus CALLProc NTRansition Example OUTPUT 714 STAT CALLP PTR ENTER 714 Register_value Writing the Transition Filters Syntax STATus CALLProc PTRansition lt integer gt STATus CALLProc NTRansition lt integer gt Example OUTPUT 714 STAT CALLP PTR 256 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Reading the Event Register Syntax STATus CALLProc EVENt Example OUTPUT 714 STAT CALLP EVEN ENTER 714 Register value Clearing the Event Register The EVENT register is cleared whenever it is queried or whenever the Common Command CLS is sent to the Test Set Reading the Enable Register Syntax STATus CALLProc ENABle Example OUTPUT 714 STAT CALLP ENAB ENTER 714 Register value Writing the Enable Register Syntax STATus CALLProc ENABle integer Example OUTPUT 714 STAT CALLP ENAB 256 Clearing the Enable Register The ENABLE register is cleared by writing to it with an integer value of zero 275 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Calibration Status Register Group The Calibration Status Register Group contains information about the Test Set s hardware This status group is accessed us
315. h 504 MS WORDI 501 MSMessOrd 502 RECCW A 468 RECCW B 470 RECCW C 472 RECCW D 473 RECCW E 474 REG ID 496 REG INC 494 registration identification message 496 registration increment global action 494 reverse control channel 468 reverse voice channel 468 RVCOrdCon 475 SPC Word 1 487 SPC Word 2 489 system parameter overhead word 1 487 system parameter overhead word 2 489 messages error 539 Microsoft Windows Terminal terminal emulator 368 383 Multiple Number Measurement HP IB command syntax diagram 179 Multiple Real Number Setting HP IB command syntax diagram 176 N Non Recoverable Firmware Error 547 Number Measurement HP IB command syntax diagram 177 O Operating Modes external automatic control 26 30 internal automatic control 26 28 31 manual control 26 27 31 operation complete query OPC 216 Operation Status Register Group 252 accessing registers contained in 254 Condition Register bit assignments 253 Order Call Data screen 482 Oscilloscope HP IB command syntax diagram 154 OTP Memory card 325 330 Output Queue Group 262 accessing the output queue 263 Overlapped Commands 70 Index P Pacing measurements 231 pass back control PCB 221 Passing Control 313 example programs 317 passing control back automatically 316 passing control back to another control ler 316 passing control back using PASS CON TROL 316 passing control to Test Set 315 requesting co
316. h the analysis chain and settle out Delays are also inserted to allow for internal hardware transients to settle 2 Fast settling introduces no delay for internal or external signal transients to settle The programmer must account for transient settling before issuing the Trigger Event NOTE There will still be delays introduced by the couplings between autotuning and autoranging If the programmer wishes to remove these delays as well all autoranging and autotuning functions must be turned OFF and the program must explicitly set the ranging amplifiers and the frequency tuning Delays introduced by the measurement processes themselves cannot be eliminated Bus Lock Up If a measurement cycle does not successfully obtain a valid measurement result it will continue to try until it does or until the measurement trigger is aborted This is true for both retriggering modes This has the consequence that both the GPIB bus and the Active Controller handshake are in a temporary holdoff state while the Active Controller waits to read the measurement result from the Test Set The control program should include measurement time out routines that CLEAR the bus and ABORt the trigger if a measurement does not complete within a specified amount of time This provides a method of preventing the bus from remaining in the temporary holdoff state indefinitely 226 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS tm sec Triggering Measurements Default Trigg
317. hannels N no All Chans and for test 7 tests all channels Y yes All Chans 172 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS test sec Yy ey x Upper o Lower M Both ce None Returns unquoted string 4 elements seperated by commas Trigger CTRIGger gt S Trigger 7 IMMediate gt xX at Pe ABORt lt lt space gt J lt REPetitive ba SINGle S 1 gd ON P d Returns REP or SING FAST MG MODE CAM D eC RETRigger SETTling 1 FULL Returns FAST or FULL 173 Integer Number Setting Syntax Integer Number Setting Syntax rel Previous Syntax uS space gt integer value gt Binary i 1 M P y integer value gt SON a o lt Octal integer value M 0 H aa Hexidecimal integer value i i Returns integer value INCRement lt space gt lt UP gt DOWN gt Returns real value 174 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS inss sec Real Number Setting Syntax Real Number Setting Syntax Previous Syntax A space gt lt real value gt units 95 p Se Returns real value be DUNIts be INCRement gt e DIVide V MULTiply __ MODE DUNits gt lt lt space gt lt units gt Returns units A space gt gt value gt 5 7
318. hapter Since the Test Set only has the rotary knob and numeric keypad for data character entry developing programs on the Test Set alone is not recommended All three development methods employ an external computer or terminal The choice of development method will typically be driven by available equipment and extent of development task If the development task is large it is strongly recommended that a BASIC language computer be used as outlined in development Method 1 Method 2 is recommended for large program modification or smaller program development Method 2 uses an external PC or terminal as the CRT and keyboard for the built in IBASIC controller Method 3 is least preferred for program development or modification because no syntax checking occurs until the program is first run making it difficult to debug long programs Details of each development method are given later in this chapter S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Program Development Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Not Recommended Develop on BASIC Language Computer external to Test Set Develop on Test Set using screen EDIT mode Develop in Word Processor on PC Connect GPIB cable to Test Set and run program from external computer Run program in IBASIC environment Download into Test Set over RS 232 using terminal emulator program Run Program Change Address in program and download into Te
319. hapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Default Mass Storage Locations External Disk Drive TESTS Subsystem The default mass storage volume specifier for the external disk drive is set using the External Disk Specification field in the TESTS External Devices screen The default mass storage location for the TESTS Subsystem is set using the Select Procedure Location field on the TESTS Main Menu screen The default mass storage volume specifiers for the TESTS Subsystem mass storage locations are as follows e Card selection not changeable INTERNAL 4 e ROM selection not changeable MEMORY 0 4 e RAM selection not changeable MEMORY 0 0 Disk selection the External Disk Specification field in the TESTS External Devices screen Selecting the Mass Storage Location 332 The IBASIC mass storage location is selected using the IBASIC Mass Storage Is command The mass storage volume specifier for the desired mass storage location is appended to the Mass Storage Is command Refer to the Instrument BASIC User s Handbook for further information regarding the Mass Storage Is command For example to change the default mass storage location to RAM Disk unit 2 execute the following command Mass Storage Is MEMORY 0 2 The Mass Storage Is command is keyboard and program executable however any changes made are lost when the Test Set is turned off or when the SERVICE screen s RAM Initialize function is executed
320. hapter of the Agilent 8920B Programmer s Guide for a detailed explanation of the ESE command The Test Set responds to the ESR command See Standard Event Status Register Group in the Advanced Operations chapter of the Agilent 8920B Programmer s Guide for a detailed explanation of the ESR command S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS ieee sec IEEE 488 2 Common Commands PCB Pass Control The Test Set accepts the PCB command Refer to Passing Instrument Control Back SRE Service Request Enable SRE Service Request Enable Query STB Status Byte Query TRG Trigger in the Advanced Operations chapter of the Agilent 8920B Programmer s Guide The Test Set responds to the SRE command See Status Byte Register and Service Request Enable Register in the Advanced Operations chapter of the Agilent 8920B Programmer s Guide for a detailed explanation of the SRE command The Test Set responds to the SRE command See Status Byte Register and Service Request Enable Register in the Advanced Operations chapter of the Agilent 8920B Programmer s Guide for a detailed explanation of the SRE command The Test Set responds to the STB command See Status Byte Register and Service Request Enable Register in the Advanced Operations chapter of the Agilent 8920B Programmer s Guide for a detailed explanation of the STB command The TRG command is equivalent to the IEEE 48
321. he Active Register and Page states and 300 Hz to 15 kHz when in the Connected state This is done to ensure that no signaling tones are filtered off This wide post detection bandwidth allows more noise to be introduced into the measurement process which affects the measured deviation Given these conditions it is recommended that FM deviation measurements requiring full Test Set FM deviation accuracy be made on the ANALOG MEAS screen or the AF ANALYZER screen The audio frequency gains stages are set to autorange while on these screens and post detection filters can be selected to optimize deviation measurements 451 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen Handoff MS Id 452 This field is used to initiate a handoff The voice channel number to hand the mobile station off to the initial power level to use on the new voice channel and the SAT tone frequency to transpond on the new voice channel are specified using the Chan Pwr Lvl and SAT fields under the Voice Channel Assignment section of the CALL CONTROL screen The HANDoff command is used to control this field There is no query form of the HANDoff command Syntax HANDof f Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP HAND This field is used to enter the identification number of the mobile station The MS Idfield has two fields The content of the lower field is automatically updated upon successful completion of a mobile sta
322. he RCDD fields to be read 240 ELSF 250 Print error 260 END IF 270 IF NOT FNSet state Page THEN CALL Print error 280 eas carrier 290 IF FNOrder Power 7 THEN 300 Read rcdd data 1 310 ELSE 320 Print_error 330 END IF 340 OUTPUT Inst addr CALLP VCH 211 VMAC 4 SAT 5970Hz 350 IF NOT FNSet state Handoff THEN CALL Print error 360 eas sinad 370 IF NOT FNOrder Mainten 0 THEN CALL Print error 0 dummy variable 380 IF FNOrder Alert 0 THEN 0 dummy variable to satisfy parm list 381 BEEP 390 INPUT Did the phone ALERT Y N Yes no 400 IF Yes no 1 1 N OR Yes no 1 1 n THEN 410 PRINT Phone failed to ALERT 420 STOP 430 END IF 440 ELSE 450 Print error 460 END IF 470 IF NOT FNSet state Release THEN CALL Print error 522 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 000 010 020 030 040 050 060 070 080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 2000 010 020 030 040 050 060 070 080 090 2100 2110 2120 2130 3000 010 020 030 040 050 060 070 n PRPRPRPRP PPR NNNNNNDN PN N WWWW WW CO Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Example Programs
323. he RF generator s amplitude frequency and output state Example 2 OUTPUT 714 RFG MOD EXT DEST FM Vpk FM 12 5 KHZ FM STAT ON This OUTPUT statement configures the RF generator to accept external modulation from the rear panel input sets the amount of deviation and turns FM on 237 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Increasing Measurement Throughput 238 Example 3 OUTPUT 714 ENC AMPS SAT FM 2 35 KHZ FREQ 5 970 KHZ This OUTPUT statement sets the AMPS SAT tone s frequency and deviation The semicolon separator tells the Test Set s GPIB command parser to back up only one level of command hierarchy The following OUTPUT statement illustrates improper use of the semicolon separator OUTPUT 714 RFG MOD EXT DEST FM Vpk AOUT DC Trying to execute this OUTPUT statement would cause HP IB Error 113 Undefined header This is because the AOUT command is two levels higher than the DEST FM Vpk command Refer to the syntax diagram RF Generator on page 163 for the command hierarchy The semicolon colon Separator The semicolon colon separator tells the Test Set s GPIB command parser that the next command is at the top level of the command hierarchy This allows commands from different instruments to be output on one command line The following example illustrates proper use of the semicolon colon separator Example OUTPUT 714 RFAN FREQ 850 MHZ AFAN INP FM DEMOD This O
324. he Test Set s TESTS Subsystem uses the following file naming conventions e The c prefix is used to indicate a code file and is automatically prefixed onto the file name when the program code file is stored for use by the TESTS susbsystem e Thep prefix is used to indicate a procedure file and is prefixed onto the file name when the file is stored by the TESTS Subsystem e The prefix is used to indicate a library file and is prefixed onto the file name when the file is created by the Program Development System for use with the TESTS Subsystem The Test Set s Save Recall register subsystem uses the following file naming convention The _ prefix is used to indicate a stored Save Recall register file and is prefixed onto the file name when the file is created The Test Set s Signaling Decoder in NMT mode uses the following file naming convention e Then prefix is used to indicate a stored NMT file and is prefixed onto the file name when the file is created Test Set File Entry Field Width The TESTS Subsystem and the Save Recall register subsystem have fields into which the operator enters a file name These fields are used by the operator to enter the name of a file to be stored or loaded The files accessed by these fields have a one character prefix of c p 1 or The width of these fields is 9 characters The prefix character 9 characters 10 characters which conforms to the LIF file system s naming convention Consequently t
325. he Test Set the address of the Controller to pass control back to 6 From the keyboard of the HP 9000 Workstation type in and execute the following command PASS CONTROL 714 This command passes control to the Test Set 7 Put the Test Set in local mode press the LOCAL key on the front panel 8 Press SHIFT then TESTS on the front panel of the Test Set to print the screen 9 After the Test Set finishes printing the screen it will automatically pass control back to the HP 9000 Workstation Passing Control Between an External Controller and the Test Set with an IBASIC Program Running The following example program illustrates the passing of control between an external Controller and the Test Set while an IBASIC program is running in the Test Set The example is based upon having an HP 9000 Series 300 Workstation as the external controller connected to the Test Set through the GPIB bus Further it is based on the assumption that the GPIB interface in the HP 9000 Controller is set to the default select code of 7 and address of 21 In this example the Test Set is NOT configured as the System Controller This example illustrates the situation where the External Controller would perform the functions listed below 1 Sends commands to the Test Set to cause a program to be loaded off of a Memory Card which is in the Test Set s front panel Memory Card slot 2 Sends commands to the Test Set to run the program just loaded 3 Passes c
326. he User s Guide for detailed information on the operation and manual use of the CALL BIT screen The field descriptions for each of the decoded messages are given in the CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions section of Call Processing Subsystem chapter in the User s Guide The information presented in this section covers the CALL BIT screen programming commands and how to use them 480 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Access Active Active Connect Data Spec Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL BIT Screen See Access on page 439 for programming information See Active on page 440 for programming information See Active on page 440 for programming information See Connect on page 444 for programming information This field is used to determine how the contents of the signaling messages are built e Std Use the signaling formats defined in the applicable industry standard to build the forward control channel and forward voice channel signaling messages Use the contents of the applicable fields on the CALL CONTROL screen and the CALL CONFIGURE screen to obtain information necessary to build the messages Whenever a signaling message is used update the contents of all fields in that message on the CALL BIT screen e Bits Use the bit patterns as set on the CALL BIT screen to build all forward control channel and
327. he control program queries a measurement that is not currently available on the currently displayed screen and in the ON state such as querying the TX Frequency measurement when TX Freq Error is displayed This message may also be immediately followed by the message HP IB Error 420 Query UNTERMINATED 549 550 HP IB Error Not Enough Memory Available for Save This message will be generated when the control program tries to save the current Test Set state into a Save Recall register using the REG SAVE commands but there is insufficient memory available in the Test Set The Test Set s non volatile RAM is shared by the following resources BASIC programs e Save Recall registers RAM Disk In order to save the current Test Set state into a Save Recall register more non volatile RAM will have to be made available This can be done by reducing the size of the IBASIC program deleting one or more existing Save Recall registers recovering RAM Disk space The ROM Disk utility RAM USAGE will display the total amount of non volatile RAM installed in the Test Set the RAM Disk allocation the Save Recall register allocation and the amount of non volatile RAM available to IBASIC HP IB Error HP IB Units cause invalid conversion of attr This error is generated when trying to change Attribute Units and one of the Data Function values is set to zero If this error is encountered the programmer must change the Data Function
328. he two serial ports are identical However operationally there is one major difference The Serial Port Address 9 settings are adjustable on the I O CONFIGURE screen or with IBASIC commands while the Serial Port 10 settings are adjustable only with IBASIC commands There is no screen for Serial Port 10 settings For more information see Chapter 4 GPIB Commands which gives the command syntax for Serial Port 9 and 10 393 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Serial I O from IBASIC Programs Example IBASIC Program Using Serial Port 10 394 The following program illustrates I O to both serial ports The program sends a prompt message to a terminal connected to Serial Port 9 and waits for a response from the user at the terminal When the response is received from the terminal connected to Serial Port 9 a series of ASCII characters are sent out Serial Port 10 10 ASCII CHARACTER CYCLER 30 be connected to a terminal at 9600 baud 40 Outputs ASCII characters on Serial Port 10 beginning with ASCII 5 d aee character 32 space and ending with ASCII character 126 O ais ee Characters are output with no CR LF 70 OUTPUT 9 When you are ready to send data on portlO0 press ENTER 80 OUTPUT 800 CONF SPOR SIN IBASIC BAUD 9600 90 Allows IBASIC to read port 9 100 DIM A 10 110 ENTER 9 A Program waits here until CR LF is received T20 io 130 I 32 140 HILE I
329. hen performs an inclusive OR on all the resulting bits to generate the Summary Message By using the enable bits the application program can direct the Test Set to set the Summary Message to the 1 or TRUE state for a single event or an inclusive OR of any group of events Enable Registers are read write Enable Registers in the Test Set are either 8 or 16 bits long and may contain unused bits which correspond to unused bits in the associated Event Register All unused bits return a zero value when read and are ignored when written to Enable Registers are unaffected by a CLS clear status command or queries Summary Message Bit The Summary Message is a single bit message which indicates whether or not one or more of the enabled events have occurred since the last reading or clearing of the Event Register The Test Set logically ANDs corresponding bits in the Event and Enable registers and then performs an inclusive OR on all the resulting bits to generate the Summary Message By use of the enable bits the application program can direct the Test Set to set the Summary Message to the 1 or TRUE state for a single event or an inclusive OR of any group of events The Summary Message is TRUE when an enabled event in the Event Register is set TRUE Conversely the Summary Message is FALSE when no enabled events are TRUE Summary Messages are always seen as bits in another register S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Ad
330. hese fields will hold a file name which is longer than the 8 characters allowed by the DOS file system 335 Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage DOS and LIF File System Considerations Potential File Name Conflicts 336 Unexpected file operation can occur if proper consideration is not given to the different file system naming conventions and the Test Set file entry field width A full DOS file name is 12 characters 8 character file name 3 character extension A full DOS file name will not fit in the Test Set s file entry field Trying to store a file to a LIF formatted media with a DOS file name that contains an extension will generate ERROR 53 Improper file name e Ona DOS formatted disk any file beginning with the letter c upper or lower case is considered a TESTS Subsystem code file On a LIF formatted disk any file beginning with a lower case c is considered a TESTS Subsystem code file If the TESTS Subsystem attempts to retrieve a file which is not a code file the following error will be generated Error reading code file Check file and media OnaDOS formatted disk any file beginning with the letter p upper or lower case is considered a TESTS Subsystem procedure file On a LIF formatted disk any file beginning with a lower case p is considered a TESTS Subsystem procedure file If the TESTS Subsystem attempts to retrieve a file which is not a procedure file the following error will be generated Error read
331. hich does not represent a valid phone number will convert to the following phone number 111111 111 The query form of the programming commands that is the form can be used to interrogate the contents of each field Syntax NMODI NMODI E PHON E E E NUM MIN2 MIN1 gt lt gt PNUMber lt gt lt 10 character phone number gt lt gt PNUMber MINumber lt gt lt 3 character MIN2 6 character MIN1 gt lt gt MINumber Example OU OU OU OU OU PU PU PU PU PU EN 714 CALI 714 CALI 714 CALI 714 CALI 714 CALI LP LP LP LP LP NMOD PHO PNUM 509 NMOD MIN MIN 1F2DI NMOD ER 714 Number mode E NUM 9906092 ru E5BD5 453 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen Order This field is used to send an order type mobile station control message on the forward voice channel to the mobile station The orders available are Change Power to Power Level 0 7 Maintenance put the mobile station in maintenance mode Alert alert the mobile station The ORDER field is updated using the command e ORDER for system types AMPS TACS AND JTACS This command is used to send an order type mobile station control message to the mobile station The Access annunciator will light momentarily while the Test Set is sending the mobile
332. iate the upload must be running on the external BASIC language controller The uploaded program is stored to a file specified by the user In the following program the external BASIC language controller is a PC running TransEra HT BASIC The file is stored to the CAHTB386 directory If the external BASIC language controller is an HP 9000 Series 200 300 Workstation modify the mass storage volume specifier appropriately After running the program the uploaded program code will be in the designated file Use the GET command to retrieve the file for editing 10 PROGRAM TO UPLOAD IBASIC CODE FROM TEST SET TO BASIC CONTROLLER THROUGH GPIB 20 LEE EE EH HH EEE EE ERE ERE RE ERE EEE EEE EE HEH EE HE EEE HH EE EEE EE EH HE EE EE HEE 30 40 The file for uploaded code will be C htb386 code 50 If you want to use a different file or directory modify the two lines 60 with the labels File name 1 and File name 2 70 80 LEE HE TE FE FE HEH FE HE TE FE FE HE EE FE FE E EE ERE EE E TE EE ERE E E E E E E E E E EE 90 Addr 714 Test Set GPIB address 100 ALLOCATE Line 200 110 PRINTER IS 1 120 CLEAR SCREEN 130 DISP It may be several minutes before code begins transferring if the program is long 140 OUTPUT Addr RST Reset the Test Set 150 OUTPUT
333. ice Overview Mass Storage Device Overview NOTE As shown in Figure 19 on page 326 the Test Set has both internal and external mass storage devices There are five types of mass storage devices in the Test Set On board random access memory disk RAM disk located on the Test Set s internal memory board On board read only memory disk ROM disk located on the Test Set s internal memory board External disk drives connected to the Test Set s external GPIB Internal static random access memory SRAM cards which are inserted into the Test Set s front panel Memory Card slot Internal read only memory ROM cards also called One Time Programmable or OTP cards which are inserted into the Test Set s front panel Memory Card slot The hardware for reading from and writing to memory cards is located internal to the Test Set Therefore the static random access memory SRAM cards and the read only memory ROM cards are considered internal to the Test Set even thought the physical media must be inserted into the Test Set s front panel Memory Card slot 325 Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Mass Storage Device Overview Microprocessor On board RAM lt lt RAM Disk memory 0 n On board ROM n 0 1 2 3 ROM Disk o Memory 0 4 2 External Disk Drive en lt GPIB I O lt 7XX n Q XX 0 to 30 J n 0 1 lt Z c Front Panel Memor Z Card Slot AS GPIB LIF CS80 3 1 2 Drive INTER
334. ied type normal blow time delay etc should be used Do not use repaired fuses or short circuited fuse holders To do so could cause a shock or fire hazard DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable gases or fumes DO NOT REMOVE THE INSTRUMENT COVER Operating personnel must not remove instrument covers Component replacement and internal adjustments must be made only by qualified service personnel Instruments that appear damaged or defective should be made inoperative and secured against unintended operation until they can be repaired by qualified service personnel The WARNING sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in personal injury Do not proceed beyond a WARNING sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met The CAUTION sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Safety Symbols Caution refer to accompanying documents he Warning risk of electric shock Y Earth ground terminal Alternating current Frame or chassis terminal 5 Product Markings CERTIFICATION Standby s
335. ield displays the last try code field Reserved for future use This field displays the second part of the mobile identification number received by the Test Set This field displays the parity of the received data 471 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions RECCW C Message Fields Figure 40 F NAWC Serial Parity 472 RECCW C Message Fields This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A I indicates that this is the first word e A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile This field displays the serial number of the mobile station This field displays the parity of the received data S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc f Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions RECCW D Message Fields Figure 41 RECCW D Message Fields F This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A I indicates that this is the first word A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words NAWC This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile Dig 1 through Dig 8 These fields display digits 1 through 8 of the phone number dialed on the mobile station Parity This field displays the parity of the rece
336. if the extended address word is sent e Set to 0 if the extended address word is not sent binary character required Registration field for home stations binary character required Registration field for roaming stations binary character required Discontinuous transmission field 2 binary characters required N is the number of paging channels in the system 5 binary characters required Read control filler field binary character required S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc f CPA CMAX 1 END OHD Parity Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions Combined paging access field 1 binary character required CMAX is the number of access channels in the system 7 binary characters required End indication field e Set to 1 to indicate the last word of the overhead message train e Set to 0 if not the last word 1 binary characters required This field displays the overhead message type e A 100 indicates a global action message e A 110 indicates that this is the first word of the system overhead parameter message e A 111 indicates this is the second word of the system parameter overhead message 3 binary characters required Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 491 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Proce
337. igure I O Configure NOTE The CONFIGURE screen RF Display RF Chan Std User Def Base Freq Chan Space and Gen Anl fields are not accessible through GPIB CONFigure gt e CARTSwitching x space Os RX TX Cntl A See Integer Number Setting Syntax BADDres Xe E DATE D EDISk INTensity A See Integer Number Setting Syntax NOTChmode space gt C lt Notch Coupl OFRequency See Real Number Setting Syntax Auto Manual AFGenl None Returns quoted string os TRE 25 Returns quoted string HP IB Adr DEEPer O ey lt Quiet 2 lt Loud gt 2 Returns quoted string BMODe Control gt y A TS f s HP IB Mode eC Talk amp Lsmn gt 2 Returns quoted string External Disk Specification w D Returns quoted s 53 PO gt x4 A gt IW CONF continued Gen Anl Does not include the INCRement or STATe commands NA D gt 7 gt tOMODe y space LZ T On 2 TX E RF Offset a Off gt RA a2 se e COPERation l l 2 Returns quoted string Range Hold AUTO e CHOLD gt 117 Configure I O Configure CONFigure ES PDOWn Low Battery 1 min lt 2 min lt 5 min 10 min Disable KNOB D LU A ERIN J Print 00 00 Configure CADDRess jJ
338. in RJ 11 female to 25 pin DB 25 98642 66508 98642 66508 male Adapter Cable with Connectors Long Cable from 6 pin RJ 11 male to 6 pin RJ 11 male 98642 66505 Test Set to PC or 15 meter cable printer use with 98642 66508 362 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb 2 Meter Cable 9 pin DB 9 5 Female 08921 61 038 Usable Serial Port 9 ONLY 3 Meter Cable D 25 pin DB 25 Mas 6 RUN RJ 11 08921 61029 Usable Serial Port 9 ONLY 0 6 Meter Cable Dual 6 pin RJ 11 Female 7 6 pin RJ 11 Male 08921 61031 Figure 25 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports 15 Meter Cable gp 6 pin RJ 11 Male 6 pin RJ 11 Female in back of adapter Y Y 6 pin RJ 11 Male 98642 66505 To the eet ee Set To the Test Set 98642 66508 Usable Serial Port 9 ONLY To Computer A B or D plus E im To Computer A B or B a z plus E ime D DUT To Device Under Test ch6drw3 ds4 Available Agilent RS 232 Serial Cables and Adapters 363 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports Test Set Rear Panel Computer Rear Panel x Serial Data Com a DB 9 Ne DB 25 TRANSMIT ADDRESS 10 Serial Port B 2nd RS 232 GROUND for Device
339. in word 1 2 3 Indicates that the decoded data received on the reverse voice channel contains invalid bits in word and or word 2 and or word 3 The raw decoded data is displayed in hexadecimal format in the top right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen Raw decoded data is only displayed when the CALL CONTROL screen Display field is set to Data Timeout occurred while in Maintenance state Indicates that the simulated Base Station s internal timer expired before the mobile station was taken out of the maintenance state The internal timer is set to 20 seconds when the maintenance order is sent to the mobile station Alert attempted while not in Maintenance or Connect state Indicates that an attempt was made to send an Alert order to the mobile station when the Call Processing Subsystem was not in the Maintenance state or Active state S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errormsg fb Error 1315 Error 1316 Error 1317 Data from RECC coniains invalid bits in word 1 2 3 Indicates that the decoded data received on the reverse control channel contains invalid bits in word 1 and or word 2 and or word 3 The raw decoded data is displayed in hexadecimal format in the top right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen Raw decoded data is only displayed when the CALL CONTROL screen Display field is set to Data Incomplete data received on RECC for word 1 2 3 Indicates that the decoded data received on the reverse co
340. information needed to test a specific type of radio is available to the user through the TESTS Subsystem To generate change and maintain this radio specific information the TESTS Subsystem provides menu driven input screens to define specifications parameters test sequencing and system configuration for a particular radio type 419 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller The TESTS Subsystem Writing Programs For the TESTS Subsystem The Agilent 83224A IBASIC Developer s Tool Kit for Windows is required for developing programs which use the Tests Subsystem Contact your local Agilent Technologies sales representative or sales office for ordering and pricing information TESTS Subsystem File Descriptions 420 Three types of files are used in the TESTS Subsystem to store different types of information Code Files The first aspect of an automated definition is the code itself This is just a standard IBASIC Code file that can reside either on the Memory card on an external disk drive connected to the GPIB port of the Test Set or in an internal RAM disk The name of this file is preceded by a lower case c in the Test Set This tells the TESTS Subsystem that this particular file contains program code Library Files A Library indicates all of the available test subroutines in the code the set of all parameters that might be entered using the user interface screens and all specifications that might be used by the subroutines in the code t
341. ing commandis are required 39 Chapter 1 Using GPIB Getting Started Guideline 3 Avoid program hangs If the program stops or hangs up when trying to ENTER a measured value it is most likely that the desired measurement field is not available There are several reasons that can happen 1 40 The screen where the measurement field is located has not been DISPlayed before querying the measurement field The measurement is not turned ON The squelch control is set too high If a measurement is turned ON but is not available due to the Squelch setting the measurement field contains four dashes This is a valid state The Test Set is waiting for a signal of sufficient strength to unsquelch the receiver before making a measurement If a measurement field which is squelched is queried the Test Set will wait indefinitely for the receiver to unsquelch and return a measured value The RF Analyzer s Input Port is set to ANT antenna while trying to read TX power TX power is not measurable with the Input Port setto ANT The TX power measurement field will display four dashes indicating the measurement is unavailable The input signal to the Test Set is very unstable causing the Test Set to continuously autorange This condition will be apparent if an attempt is made to make the measurement manually Trigger mode has been set to single trigger TRIG MODE RETRig SINGle and a new measurement cycle has n
342. ing an IBASIC Program To A Memory Card The following procedure can be used to save an IBASIC program from the IBASIC Controller s RAM memory to a memory card inserted into the front panel of the Test Set 1 Press LOCAL SHIFT CANCEL on the Test Set to perform an IBASIC reset 2 Ifthe memory card has not been initialized insert it into the Test Set and execute the following command on the external controller OUTPUT 714 PROG EXEC INITIALIZE INTERNAL 4 3 Insert the initialized memory card into the Test Set 4 Define the memory card as the Mass Storage device by executing the following command on the external controller OUTPUT 714 PROG EXEC MSI INTERNAL 4 5 Savethe program to the memory card by executing the following command on the external controller OUTPUT 714 PROG EXEC SAVE filename 418 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller The TESTS Subsystem The TESTS Subsystem The Test Set makes available to the user an automated user interface which has been specifically designed for radio test One of the primary problems associated with automated radio testing is the need to rapidly configure the software with the information needed to test a specific type of radio Information such as test frequencies channels test specifications test parameters test conditions and pass fail limits Most often the test s and test procedure s used to test a class of radio
343. ing procedure file Check file and media e On a DOS formatted disk any file beginning with the letter 1 upper or lower case is considered a TESTS Subsystem library file On a LIF formatted disk any file beginning with a lower case l is considered a TESTS Subsystem library file If the TESTS Subsystem attempts to retrieve a file which is not a library file the following error will begenerated Error reading library file Check file and media Whenreading files from mass storage to either the TESTS Subsystem procedure code or library files or the Save Recall register Subsystem the Test Set interprets the period as a delimiter and ignores any following characters If TESTS Subsystem or Save Recall register subsystem files are stored to a DOS formatted media using file extensions the extensions will be stripped off by the Test Set before displaying the file in the file list e When reading files from mass storage to either the TESTS Subsystem procedure code or library files or the Save Recall register subsystem the Test Set strips the prefix character c p 1 _ off the file name before displaying the file in the file list e When storing files to mass storage from either the TESTS Subsystem procedure code or library files or the Save Recall register subsystem the Test Set puts the prefix character c p 1 _ onto the file name making the file name 1 character longer than that displayed in the file name entry fi
344. ing the STATus commands The Calibration Status Register Group uses 16 bit registers and includes a Condition Register Transition Filters an Event Register an Enable Register and a Summary Message Refer to the Status Reporting Structure Overview on page 239 for a discussion of status register operation Figure 14 shows the structure and STATus commands for the Calibration Status Register Group STATus CALibration CONDition 2 PTRansition STATus CALibration E NTRansition lt integer gt STATus CALibration EVENt STATus CALibration ENABIe_integer gt Summary Message Bit Logical OR to bit 8 of Questionable Data Signal Register Group Condition Register E pnt ary ny N oO A w N p A wo N o 5 ch4drw11 drw Condition Transition Event Enable Register Filter Registers Register Register Figure 14 Calibration Status Register Group 276 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Table 22 details the Calibration Status Register Group s Condition Register bit assignments Table 22 Calibration Status Register Group Condition Register Bit Assignments m o Condition Comment 15 32768 Not Used Always 0 Defined by SCPI Version 1994 0 14 16384 Unused in Test Set 13 8192 Unused in Test Set 12 4096 Unused in Test Set 11 2048 Unused in Test Set 10 1024 Unused in Test Set
345. ing to an external terminal Terminals typically have a DB 25 male connector Set the terminal for DEC VT 100 ANSI emulation Many ASCII terminals will also function properly To set up the terminal use the field settings found in the Agilent AdvanceLink terminal emulator section found earlier in this chapter As a minimum make sure the terminal s basic setup information matches the fields on the Test Set s I O CONFIGURE screen refer to Table 41 on page 366 for recommended settings 372 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Choosing Your Development Method Choosing Your Development Method There are three fundamental methods for developing IBASIC programs for the Test Set See Figure 27 below Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Not Recommended Develop on BASIC Language Computer external to Test Set Develop on Test Set using screen EDIT mode Develop in Word Processor on PC Connect GPIB cable to Test Set and run program from external computer Run program in IBASIC environment Download into Test Set over RS 232 using terminal emulator program Run Program Change Address in program and download into Test Set Save program in mass storage Verify program operation in IBASIC environment Save program in mass storage Save program in mass storage ch6drw2 drw Figure 27 Three Possible Development Methods 373 Chapter 7 IBASIC C
346. interface is not reset any pending Service Request is not cleared The Contents of the SAVE RECALL registers are not affected Calibration data is not affected All Enable registers are unaffected Service Request Standard Event Communicate Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Operation Calibration Call Processing and Questionable Data Signal e All Negative Transition Filter registers are unaffected Communicate Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Operation Calibration Call Processing and Questionable Data Signal All Positive Transition Filter registers are unaffected Communicate Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Operation Calibration Call Processing and Questionable Data Signal e The contents of the RAM memory are unaffected RST IEEE 488 2 Common Command 308 The RST Reset is accomplished by sending the RST Common Command to the Test Set through the GPIB bus For the CONFIGURE PRINT CONFIGURE TESTS Execution Conditions TESTS Printer Setup and I O CONFIGURE screens Table 30 lists the fields which are restored initialized when the RST command is received The restored state or initialized value is listed below the field name Fields which are not listed are maintained at their current value whatever that may happen to be AII fields in the TESTS Main Menu screen and the TESTS External Devices screen are maintained at their current state value The current state value of the maintained fields can be ascertained programmatically
347. internal ROM Disk will make backup copies of TESTS Subsystem s Procedure and Library files onto a second SRAM memory card and can also initialize an uninitialized SRAM memory card This program does not make backup copies of TESTS Subsystem s code files or copy any type of file to OTP memory cards The COPY_PL procedure is designed for use with Agilent 11807 software to make backup copies of Agilent Technologies supplied TESTS Subsystem s Procedure and Library files or user generated TESTS Subsystem s Procedure and Library files To run COPY_PL Access the TESTS Main Menu screen Select the Select Procedure Location field and choose ROM 1 2 3 Select the Select Procedure Filename field and select COPY_PL 4 Select the Run Test softkey to start the procedure 5 Follow the displayed instructions 346 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS memcard fo Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Copying Files Using IBASIC Commands Copying Files Using IBASIC Commands Files can be copied from one mass storage device to another using the IBASIC COPY command For example to copy a file from a memory card to the left drive of an external dual disk drive with a mass storage volume specifier of 702 0 execute the following IBASIC command from the TESTS IBASIC Controller command line COPY FM TEST INTERNAL 4 TO FM TEST 704 0 Stored or saved files on one memory card can be co
348. ional array Array 1 2 with 6 elements OUTPUT 714 PROGram SELected NUMBer Array 0 1 2 3 4 5 or OUTPUT 714 PROG NUMB Array 0 1 2 3 4 5 Arrays are filled by varying the right most dimension the fastest After executing the above statement the array values would be Array 0 0 0 Array 0 1 1 Array 0 2 2 Array 1 0 3 Array 1 1 4 Array 1 2 5 Individual array elements cannot be set with the NUMBer command NUMber lt varname gt The NUMBer query command is used to return to an external controller the current value of numeric variables or arrays in an IBASIC program in the Test Set lt varname gt is the name of an existing numeric variable or array in the IBASIC program and can be sent as either character data name not enclosed in quotes or string data name enclosed in quotes Attempting to send a lt var_name gt longer than 12 characters as character data lt var_name gt not enclosed in quotes will generate the following error If the variable name lt var_name gt is longer than 12 characters it must be sent as string data lt var_name gt enclosed in quotes For example OUTPUT 714 PROG NUMB Var name HP IB Error 112 Program mnemonic too long For simple variables the value is returned as a series of ASCII characters representing a numeric value in scientific notation 3 00000000000E 000 For arrays the values are returned as a comma separated list of ASCII characters representing a nume
349. ired This field displays the number of additional words coming 4 binary characters required This field displays the overhead message type e A 100 indicates a global action message e A 110 indicates that this is the first word of the system overhead parameter message A 111 indicates this is the second word of the system parameter overhead message 3 binary characters required Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc f Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions SPC WORD2 Message Fields Figure 46 T1T2 DCC System Parameter Overhead Message SPC WORD2 Message Fields This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message 2 binary characters required Digital color code field 2 binary characters required This field displays whether the serial number word is sent to the mobile station e Set to 1 if the serial number word is sent e Set to 0 if the serial number word is not sent 1 binary character required 489 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions REGH REGR DTX N 1 RCF 490 This field displays the extended address word sent to the mobile e Setto 1
350. ironmental specifications for the product or e improper site preparation or maintenance 7 TO HE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTYOR CONDITION WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE 8 Agilent Technologies will be liable for damage to tangible property per incident up to the greater of 300 000 or the actual amount paid for the product that is the subject of the claim and for damages for bodily injury or death to the extent that all such dam ages are determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to have been directly caused by a defective Agilent Technologies product 9 TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE CUSTOMER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE IN NO EVENT WILL AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA OR OTHER DAMAGE WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED DO NOT EXCLUDE RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT T
351. ission type continuous discontinuous and the transmission bandwidth 20 MHz or 25 MHz The scm field is only displayed when the Display field is set to Data and a reverse control channel message has been decoded Refer to the Display field description on page 444 for information on how to read data in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen This field is used to set the system identification number SID of the Test Set The SIDentify command is used to control this field The SID field is an immediate action field That is whenever the SIDentify command is sent the change is reflected immediately in the appropriate signaling message s being sent on the forward control channel No change occurs to the current state i e Active Register Page Access Connect of the Call Processing Subsystem The query form of the command that is SIDentify can be used to determine the current system identification number SID setting Syntax SIDentify integer number SIDentify Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP SID 231 OUTPUT 714 CALLP SID ENTER 714 Sid number 461 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen System Type NOTE 462 This field is used to select the type of cellular system AMPS TACS JTACS which will be simulated The CS Y Stem command is used to control this field The System Type field is an immediat
352. istortion measurement OUT Read the Attribute Units setting into string variable Atribute_set PUT 714 MEAS AFR DIST AUN ER 714 Atribute set IPrint out the variables in the form lt VALUE gt lt UNITS gt PRINT Ref set val Atribute set If a reference of 25 is set 25 PCT would be printed Guidelines for Attribute Units When setting the value of measurement functions REFerence METer HLIMit and LLIMit through GPIB a non Attribute Unit unit of measure must be specified in the command string otherwise the current Attribute Unit is assumed by the Test Set For example if the Test Set is in a RESET condition and the command MEAS AFR DIST REF VAL 10 is sent through GPIB the Test Set will interpret the data as 10 since is the RESET Attribute Unit for the Distortion measurement Sending the command MEAS AFR DIST REF VAL 10 DBM would set the REFerence SET value to 10 dB When querying measurement functions REFerence METer HLIMit and LLIMit through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric values in Attribute Units regardless of the current Display Units or GPIB Units settings Numeric values are expressed in scientific notation For example if the REF SET measurement function is displayed as 25 on the Test Set the value returned through GPIB is 2 50000000E 001 2 5x10 Converting the returned value to a format other than scientific notation must be done programmatically Bef
353. ite the program using a word processor on a PC save it as an ASCII file and then download it into the Test Set through the serial port The benefit of this method is that it can be done on the PC without connecting to a Test Set until download and no BASIC language compiler interpreter is needed The primary drawback is that no syntax checking occurs until the downloaded program is run on the Test Set A second drawback is that especially for longer programs gt 100 lines it is very time consuming to transfer the code into the Test Set Configuring a Word Processor NOTE The word processor on which the IBASIC code is developed must be able to save the file in ASCII format and have an ASCII file transfer utility This is necessary because word processors use a variety of escape codes to mark all the special display formats such as bold face font size indented text and the like When a word processor file is stored in ASCH format all escape codes are stripped off The ASCII file transfer utility is used to transfer the file to the Test Set The GET command can be used on external BASIC language controllers to load ASCII files containing IBASIC programs developed on word processors Once loaded the steps for downloading described in Method 1 Program Development on an External BASIC Language Computer on page 375 can be used to transfer the program to the Test Set 385 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 3 Developing Programs
354. itiation of a measurement is set to GET and subsequent measurement query is received The measurement cannot be started until a GET is received but the GET would cause an INTERRUPTED error Parameter error Indicates that a program data element related error occurred 557 Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error 558 221 222 223 224 230 231 240 241 250 Settings conflict Indicates that a legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed due to the current device state see IEEE 488 2 6 4 5 3 and 11 5 1 1 5 Data out of range Indicates that a legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed because the interpreted value was outside the legal range as defined by the device see IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 Too much data Indicates that a legal program data element of block expression or string type was received that contained more data than the device could handle due to memory or related device specific requirements Illegal parameter value Used where exact value from a list of possibles was expected Data corrupt or stale Possibly invalid data new reading started but not completed since last access Data questionable Indicates that measurement accuracy is suspect Hardware error Indicates that a legal program command or query could not be executed because of a hardware problem in the device Hardware
355. ivalent Front Panel Key Commands 194 To Query the State of the Meter Use the METer STATe commands to query the state of the analog bar graph meter The query returns a 1 if the meter is ON anda 0 if the meter is OFF Syntax METer STATe Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW MET STAT ENTER 714 Meter on off returns a 1 ON or O OFF This queries the state of the analog bar graph meter for the TX Power measurement To Set the Number of Intervals on the Meter Use the METer INTerval commandis to set the number of intervals displayed on the analog bar graph meter Syntax METer INTerval integer valve Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW MET INT 5 This sets the number of intervals displayed on the analog bar graph meter for the TX Power measurement To Query the Number of Intervals on the Meter Use the METer INTerval commands to query the number of intervals displayed on the analog bar graph meter Syntax METer INTerval Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW MET INT ENTER 714 Num intervals This queries the number of intervals displayed on the analog bar graph meter for the TX Power measurement S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS efpkc sec NOTE NOTE Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands To Set the Meter High End and Low End Points Use the METer HEND and MEter LEND commands to set the analog bar graph meter s high endpoint and lo
356. ivalent Front Panel Key Commands To Set Measurement Reference Point Display Units Use the REFerence DUNits commands to set a measurement reference point s Display Units Refer to Display Units DUNits on page 75 for description of Display Units Syntax REFerence DUNits lt disp_units gt Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW REF DUN DBM This sets the measurement reference point s Display Units for the TX Power measurement to dBm When querying a measurement reference point through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric values in Attribute Units regardless of the current Display Units or GPIB Units settings Numeric values are expressed in scientific notation To Query Measurement Reference Point Display Units Use the REFerence DUNits commands to query a measurement reference point s Display Units Refer to Display Units DUNits on page 75 for description of Display Units Syntax REFerence DUNits Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW REF DUN ENTER 714 Disp unit This queries the measurement reference point s Display Units for the TX Power measurement When querying a measurement reference point through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric values in Attribute Units regardless of the current Display Units or GPIB Units settings Numeric values are expressed in scientific notation 199 Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands INSTRUMENT STATE Keys 200
357. ive Measurements The Test Set is capable of making many measurements simultaneously Measurements are either in the active state ON or in the inactive state OFF When the Test Set receives a trigger event all active measurements are triggered A measurement cycle is complete when all active measurements have obtained a valid measurement result To decrease the measurement cycle time all unused measurements should be set to the inactive state turned OFF Turning OFF unused measurements will have the greatest impact on reading repetition rate Use the STATe command to turn OFF all unneeded measurements on the displayed screen Optimizing Measurement Setup Time 236 Measurement setup time is defined as the time required to configure an individual instrument within the Test Set to make a measurement In general there are two methodologies which can be used to setup individual instruments in the Test Set 1 Setup every field every time a measurement is made 2 Define a base instrument state and then modify it as needed for each measurement always returning to the base state after finishing the measurement Defining a base instrument state requires fewer GPIB transactions to set up an instrument in the majority of cases which in turn reduces measurement setup time S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Increasing Measurement Throughput Optimizing the Execution Speed of the Co
358. ived data 473 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions RECCW E Message Fields Figure 42 RECCW E Message Fields F This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A I indicates that this is the first word e A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words NAWC This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile Dig 9 through Dig 16 These fields display digits 9 through 16 of the phone number dialed on the mobile station Parity This field displays the parity of the received data 474 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions RVCOrdCon Message Fields Display Word RY YCOrdCon Order Confirmation Message Figure 43 RVCOrdCon Message Fields F This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A I indicates that this is the first word A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words NAWC This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile This field displays the message type received from the mobile station e Set to l to identify the message as an origination or an order e Set to 0 to identify the message as an order response or page response 475 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing
359. ived from the mobile e Set to 1 if the extended address word is sent e Set to 0 if the extended address word is not sent This field is reserved for future use This field displays the mobile station s received station class mark This field displays the first part of the mobile identification number received from the mobile station This field displays the parity of the transmitted data 469 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions RECCW B Message Fields Figure 39 RECCW B Message Fields F This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A I indicates that this is the first word e A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words NAWC This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile LOCAL This field displays the local control field This field is specific to each system The ORDER field must be set to local control for this field to be interpreted by the Test Set ORDQ This field displays the received order qualifier The field qualifies the order confirmation to a specific action 470 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc f ORDER LT RSVD MIN2 Parity Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions This field displays the Order field and identifies the order type received by the Test Set This f
360. ived from the mobile station The control program would query the appropriate received data field to obtain the displayed information string Table 46 Information Strings Available From Reverse Control Channel Reverse Control Channel Message o Bae Max kic Order Confirmation Message Phone Number RCDDI ESN dec RCDD2 ESN hex RCDD3 Station Class Mark RCDD4 Origination Message Phone Number RCDDI ESN dec RCDD2 ESN hex RCDD3 Station Class Mark RCDD4 Called Number RCDD5 Order Message Phone Number RCDDI ESN dec RCDD2 ESN hex RCDD3 Station Class Mark RCDD4 Table 47 lists the information strings available from the reverse voice channel data messages received from the mobile station The control program would query the appropriate received data field to obtain the displayed information string 446 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fo Table 47 Table 48 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen Information Strings Available from Reverse Voice Channel Reverse Voice Channel Information Strings Displayed Displayed in Received Message Data Field Order Confirmation Message Change Power Level Confirmation RCDDI Order Type RCDD2 Table 48 Information Strings Available When A Decoding Error Occurs on page 447 lists the information strings available when a decoding error occurs The control program would query the ap
361. j IS MEAS DEC Continued On Next Page 152 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS meas sec gt Returns integer value Returns integer value XS E gt space lt integer value gt Returns quoted string Returns quoted string e cABSolute e ERRor JA Returns up to 19 real values Returns up to 19 real values 1 See Multiple Number Measurement Syntax Returns quoted string Measure LTR b Returns real value Returns quoted string A EDACs SN Returns quoted string of 74 characters 153 Oscilloscope Oscilloscope For Oscilloscope measurements see the MEASure command diagram i x OSCilloscope JS a CONTrol Main CM NES Neu aa UL per Trigger DS lt Marker gt Returns quoted string OCMARKer aN e NPEak Peak e PPEak J 7 Peak e POSition See Real Number Setting Syntax l l Does not include the STATe command OSC continued 154 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS osc sec OSCilloscope SCALe b N TIME bu OSC SCAL Continued On Next Page we OSC continued se 7 SAMEERA ADA 200 ms 100 ms 50 ms 20 ms 10 ms 5 ms 2 ms AA 1 ms 500
362. k an instrument setting or measurement value To generate the query form of a command place the question mark immediately after the command Queried information must be read into the proper variable type within the program context before it can be displayed printed or used as a numeric value in the program Queried information is returned in the same format used to set the value queried numeric fields return numeric data quoted string fields return quoted string information For example the following BASIC language program statements query the current setting of the AFGen 1 To field Query the AFGenl To field OUTPUT 714 AFG1 DEST Enter queried value into a string variable ENTER 714 Afg1_toS S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS guidelin fb Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation Specifying Units of Measure for Settings and Measurement Results NOTE Numeric settings and measurement results in the Test Set can be displayed using one or more units of measure V mV mV Hz kHz MHz When operating the Test Set manually the units of measure can be easily changed to display measurement results and field settings in the most convenient format GPIB operation is similar to manual operation in that the units of measure used to display numeric data can be programmatically changed to the most convenient form When querying measurements or settings through GPIB the Test S
363. k Response Data type Refer to the IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 for detailed information on this data type The data starts with a header which begins with a followed by a single non zero digit in the range 1 9 which specifies the number of digits in the following count field followed by a series of digits in the range of 0 9 which gives the number of data bytes being sent followed by the number of data bytes specified by the count field S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Example Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem 16 lt data byte gt lt data byte gt lt data byte gt lt data byte gt lt data byte gt lt data byte gt The transfer is terminated by the transmission from the Test Set to the external control ler of the response message terminator NL amp END messge lt NL gt new line ASCII linefeed character lt END gt IEEE 488 1 END message Syntax PROGram SELected DEFine Example BASIC program to upload an IBASIC program from Test Set 0 0 o 10 0 J aus O OO CO CO 0 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 1 170 180 190 1 2 gram 3 DIM Prog_line 200 Holds 1 LINPUT Enter name of in File name OUTPUT 714 PROG DEF T I Get number of characters in T T Create ASCII file to hold CREATE ASCII File name Cha ASSIGN File TO File name LOOP mi x R 714 Prog line Read
364. l_gpib RST REQUEST_CONTROL ot_actve_cntrl u pl DISP WAITING TO G External_gpib DISP T CALL Start_program Pass_back DISP PASSING CONTROL BACK Control is passed back automatically when the program stops Control is passed back to address specified by PCB command DISP STOP PROGRAM FINI 1 Lentil OFF ERROR ET CO ITf OUTPUT successful then Active Controller PUT not successful then not Active Controller If OUT NTROL EST SET NOW ACTIVE SHED DISP CHECKING FOR IF ERRN 173 THEN GOTO Try again ELSE PRINT STOP END IF ERROR END 1 SUB Start_program COM COM COM Gpib names Cntrl names Io names INT ERRO ERRN CONTROLLER R INTE GE R Internal gpib l Ext EGE TING POWER E eas power SUPPLY COM Io values REAL 1 PRINT SE OU OU PRINT SE PUT External gpib PUT External gpib TING UP Pwr suply addrs I Pwr suply addrs V IN ERNAL INSTRUMENTS OUTPUT Internal gpib RFG FREQ 850 030 OUTPUT Internal gpib AFG1 FREQ 3 KHZ D AX AX EST Ext cntrl addrs Int cntrl addrs EGER Printer addrs Pwr suply addrs External gpib cntrl addrs Int cntrl addrs Printer addrs Pwr suply addrs 8 ISET 5 15 VSET 13 2 Hz AMPL 40 d
365. language computer On the Test Set 1 Select the O CONFIGURE screen 2 Set the Mode field to Talk amp Lstn NOTE If the Mode field is set to Control there could possibly be a System Controller conflict between the external BASIC language computer and the Test Set resulting in either an Interface Status Error or lock up of the GPIB Refer to Passing Control on page 313 3 Set the HP IB Adrs field to the desired address for the Test Set The default value is 14 Compatible BASIC Language Computers As shown in Figure 28 on page 375 there are two types of computers that can be used in this development method e The HP 9000 Series 200 300 Workstation running Rocky Mountain BASIC 6 2 or later IBASIC is a subset of Rocky Mountain BASIC RMB All IBASIC commands are compatible with RMB and thus will execute from a HP 9000 Series 200 300 Workstation APC running Windows 3 1 or Windows NT with HP BASIC for Windows and an GPIB interface card can be used 376 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 1 Program Development on an External BASIC Language Computer HP BASIC for Windows PC Configuration for Windows NT Operating System To prepare for HP BASIC program development utilizing Windows NT the external PC must be configured to operate with the Test Set You will need an Agilent 82341B C interface card the Agilent 82335 card does not support
366. lent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS guidelin fb Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation Sample GPIB Program The following program was written on an HP 9000 Series 300 controller using Rocky Mountain BASIC RMB To run this program directly in the Test Set s IBASIC Controller make the following modifications 1 Use exclamation marks to comment out lines 440 450 and 460 these commands not supported in IBASIC 2 Change line 70 to Bus 8 internal GPIB select code 8 O This program generates an FM carrier measures and displays the O deviation and draws the modulation waveform from the O oscilloscope to the CRT display For demonstration purposes the O carrier is generated and analyzed through the uncalibrated input 0 path so that no external cables are required 0 GCLEAR Clear graphics display O Bus 7 Interface select code of GPIB interface O Dut 100 Bus 14 Default Test Set GPIB address is 14 0 CLEAR Bus Good practice to clear the bus 00 CLEAR SCREEN Clear the CRT 110 PUT Dut RST Preset the Test Set 120 PUT Dut DISP DUPL Display the DUPLEX TEST screen 130 PUT Dut RFG AMPL 14 DBM Set RF Gen Amptd to 14 dBm 140 PUT Dut AFAN INP FM Demod 150 Set AF Analyzer s input to FM Demod 160 OUTP Dut AFAN DET Pk Max 170 Set AF Analyzer s detector to Peak Max 180 The following trigger guarantees the instrument will auto tune 190 and auto range to the
367. lized or changed under the following conditions e The Test Set is turned off e The Test Set is PRESET e A saved register is recalled 181 Equivalent Front Panel Key Commands Guidelines for Using Numeric Entry Field Data Functions Increment values are set scaled and changed for individual numeric entry fields The GPIB Data Function commands must immediately follow the GPIB command for the individual field For example to set the increment value for the RF Generator frequency to 2 5 MEZ the following command string would be sent to the Test Set OUTPUT 714 RFG FREQ INCR 2 5 MHZ e GPIB Units UNITS are used with the Data Functions to specify the units of measure for numeric data which is read or set through GPIB Refer to GPIB Units UNITs on page 78 Data Function settings are not retained The setting values are initialized or changed under the following conditions e The Test Set is turned off values initialized on power up The Test Set is PRESET values initialized Asavedregister is recalled values changed to those in the recalled register AVG The AVG data function is used to smooth noisy signals that is decrease or eliminate rapid fluctuations in amplitude The GPIB command AVERage is used to select this data function programmatically NOTE Measurement averaging works the same way programmatically as it does manually If the AVG data function is enabled manually and the number of averages is set
368. ls of the Test Set Record in sequential order the screens selected and the settings made within each screen The record of the screens selected and settings made in each screen becomes the measurement procedure 3 Record the measurement result s In addition to the DISPlay command the signaling ENCoder and DECoder require further commands to display the correct fields for each signaling mode For example DISP ENC ENC MODE DTMF 4 Develop the program using the measurement procedure generated in step 2 Be sure to start the programmatic measurement sequence by bringing the Test Set to its preset state using the RST Common Command As the measurement procedure requires changing screens use the DISPlay command to select the desired screen followed by the correct commands to set the desired field s NOTE When IBASIC programs are running the CRT is dedicated to the IBASIC Controller for program and graphics display This means instrument front panels are not displayed on the CRT when an IBASIC program is running However the DISPlay screen command causes all setting and measurement fields in the screen to be accessible programmatically Attempting to read from a screen that has not been made accessible by the DISPlay command will cause HP IB Error 420 Query UNTERMINATED or HP IB Error 113 Undefined header 5 Make sure the desired measurement is in the ON state This is the preset state for most measurements However if a
369. lume copy form to copy the contents of a 64 Kbyte SRAM card to an external GPIB 630 KByte floppy disk will result in the external floppy disk having a capacity of only 64 Kbyte when the volume copy is finished Furthermore all files on the floppy disk before the volume copy was executed will be lost and are not recoverable Additionally the file system type on the source media LIF or DOS is forced onto the destination media Caution should be exercised when using the volume copy form of the COPY command The Test Set only supports the following types of volume copy using the volume copy form of the COPY command 1 Like media to like media RAM disk to RAM disk external floppy to external floppy and so forth 2 Like file system to like file system DOS to DOS LIF to LIF All other types of volume copy are unsupported and will produce unexpected results or system errors Using wildcards in the COPY command can eliminate the need to use the volume form of the COPY command Refer to the Instrument BASIC User s Handbook for further information on wildcards and their use in the COPY command S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS memcard fo Using RAM Disk NOTE Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Using RAM Disk RAM Disk is a section of the Test Set s internal RAM memory that has been set aside for use as a mass storage device RAM Disk acts much the same as an external disk drive that is program and data files can
370. ly gt A M MLENgth gt See Integer Number Setting Syntax Mssg Length wa AFG2 DPAG Continued On Next Page 108 we AFG2 continued S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS afg2_enc sec Pager Type lt ToneVoice gt lt Numeric gt Nee Apha Num P AFGenerator2ZW ENCoder N Ma DPAGing AF Generator 2 Encoder Poe POCSAG FUNCtion _ 00 M mE 01 M j 10 4 11 y ael 9 J Returns quoted string MESSage gt a Pager Alpha Numeric Message NMESsage ON Pager Numeric Message M space e strin ZC Y 2 Returns quoted string TYPE space gt p lt Tone Only gt gt C ToneVoice gt a lt Numeric Apha Num Pager Type AA X Returns quoted string RATE e STANdard gt J U POCSAG GSC oC 7 Returns quoted string we AFG2 continued 109 AF Generator 2 Encoder FGENerator and TSEQuential AFGenerator2N ENCoder N e CFGENerator Func Gen e TSEQuential Tone Seg e CAMPLitude LAFREOuencv FREQuency M gt OFFTime CONTime e cSEQuence Symbol Sequence So WAVeform space Sine i B lt Square M lt Triangle DS eC Ramp lt Ramp De MC DC oM Y DC 4 ee Uni Noise z ES 4 Gau Noise el Returns quoted s
371. manual operation of the Test Set Refer to the Agilent Technologies 8920 User s Guide for information on text only error messages Text only error messages can also be displayed while running the Test Set s built in diagnostic or calibration utility programs Refer to the Agilent Technologies 8920 Assembly Level Repair manual for information on text only error messages displayed while running the Test Set s built in diagnostic or calibration utility programs Text only error messages take the following form This is an error message For example Input value out of range 545 The Message Display During instrument operation various messages may appear on the Test Set s display Prompt type messages generally appear on the first line of the Test Set s display General operating and error messages usually appear on the second line of the display Some messages are persistent they remain displayed until the error condition no longer exists or until another persistent message with greater priority occurs Other messages are only displayed when the error first occurs they are removed when a key is pressed or the knob is turned or when an GPIB command is received Many of the messages are displayed on the MESSAGE screen until the instrument is turned off Messages that are about error conditions may tell you what to do to correct the error turn something off reduce a field s value press a certain key and so forth Messages
372. me way under automatic control as it does under manual control This has several implications when designing and writing programs for the Test Set e To automate a particular task determine how to do the task manually and then duplicate the steps in the program In Manual Control mode a Test Set function must be displayed and active to make a measurement or receive DUT data Therefore to make a measurement using an IBASIC program follow these basic steps 1 Use the DISPlay command to select the screen for the instrument whose front panel contains the desired measurement result or data field such as AF ANALYZER 2 Set the measurement field such as SINAD to the ON state 3 Trigger a reading 4 Read the result NOTE The following sections discuss developing IBASIC programs which do not use the TESTS Subsystem Programs written for the TESTS Subsystem require the creation of supporting Library Procedure and Code files and must be written using a specific program structure The Agilent 11807A Radio Test Software packages are examples of this type of program Refer to the Writing Programs For the TESTS Subsystem on page 420 for information on writing programs for the TESTS Subsystem 357 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Program Development Program Development 358 There are three recommended approaches for developing IBASIC programs They are outlined in Figure 24 and discussed in more detail later in this c
373. message 2 binary characters required SCC SAT color code field 2 binary characters required MIN2 Second part of the mobile identification number field 10 binary character required 504 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc f VMAC CHAN Parity Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions This field displays the voice mobile attenuation code It shows the mobile station s power level associated with the designated voice channel 1 binary character reqired 3 Channel number field Indicates the designated voice channel 11 binary character required Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 505 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions FVC O Mes Message Fields Figure 54 T1T2 SCC PSCC RSVD LOCAL 506 Set Message FYC O Mes FYC monies Station Control Order Messase FVC O Mes Message Fields This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message 2 binary characters required SAT color code for new channel 2 binary characters required Present SAT color code Indicates the SAT color code associated with the present channel 2 binary characters required Reserved for future use all bits must be set as indicated 9 binary charact
374. messages during testing The Test Parameters screen is used to define instrument settings and characteristics to match those of the radio being tested audio load impedance audio power power supply voltage The External Devices screen identifies all connected GPIB equipped instruments and their GPIB addresses The Save Delete Procedure screen is used to save or delete Procedures The Printer Setup screen is used to select the printer used for IBASIC PRINT commands and to configure the format of the printer page The Execution Cond screen is used to configure the IBASIC program execution conditions The BASIC Cntrl screen is the IBASIC Controllers display screen Refer to the TESTS screen descriptions in the Test Set User s Guide for information concerning how the different TESTS Subsystem screens are used The use of the JBASIC Controller screen is described in the beginning of this chapter 424 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Programming the Call Processing Subsystem This chapter presents information on how to control the Test Set s Call Processing Subsystem using the Call Processing Subsystem s remote user interface For information on how to control the Call Processing Subsystem manually refer to Chapter 6 Call Processing Subsystem in the Test Set s User s Guide It is highly recommended that the programmer be familiar with using the Call Processing Subsystem manually before reading this
375. mmand 4240 Polling loops require a wait statement to allow time for the Test Set to process the Call Processing commands 4250 to 4280 Poll the Standard Event Status Register and the Call Processing Event Register First check for an error condition in the Standard Event Status Register If an error is detected return a zero operation not complete If no errors are detected then the Call Processing Event register is checked to determine if the operation has completed If the operation has completed then return a 1 operation complete If the operation has not completed then loop again In a real world situation the function should take some action if the Call Processing subsystem never completes if the command IF BIT Call proc even LOG Ptr value LOG 2 never goes to the TRUE state This branch is left out of the example function to minimize the number of program lines As written the function assumes that the Call Processing subsystem will complete successfully and the polling loop will be exited 537 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Example Programs 538 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Error Messages 539 General Information About Error Messages Information concerning error messages displayed by the Test Set may be found in one of the following manuals User s Guides e Programmer s Guide Assembly Level Repair Manual Instrument BASIC Us
376. mmands NOTE NOTE 196 To Set the Meter High End and Low End Point Display Units Use the METer HEND DUNIts and MEter LEND DUNIts commands to set the analog bar graph meter high end point and low end point Display Units Refer to Display Units DUNits on page 75 for description of Display Units Syntax METer HEND DUNits lt disp_units gt METer HEND DUNits lt disp_units gt Example END DUN DBM END DUN DBM OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW ME OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW ME T E This sets the high end point and low end point display units of the analog bar graph meter for the TX Power measurement to DBM When querying the METER Data Function through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric values in Attribute Units regardless of the current Display Units or GPIB Units settings Numeric values are expressed in scientific notation To Query the Meter High End and Low End Point Display Units Use the METer HEND DUNIts and MEter LEND DUNIts commands to query the analog bar graph meter high end point and low end point Display Units Refer to Display Units DUNits on page 75 for description of Display Units Syntax METer HEND DUNits METer LEND DUNits Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW MET HEND DUN OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW MET LEND DUN ENTER 714 Met hidisp unit ENTER 714 Met lodisp unit
377. mode The Test Set must be put in LOCAL mode to use the front panel keys or to use the serial ports to input data into the IBASIC Command line SELected All the commands under this keyword access the IBASIC program currently resident in the Test Set Note that this keyword is optional in the command syntax Syntax PROGram SELected DEFine lt program gt The DEFine command is used to create and download an IBASIC program into the Test Set from an external controller To download an IBASIC program any currently resident IBASIC program must first be deleted using the DELete ALL command Attempting to download a new IBASIC program while an IBASIC program is currently resident causes IBASIC Error 282 Illegal program name S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb NOTE Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem It is possible for the PROGram Subsystem to think that there is an IBASIC program resident in the Test Set when in actuality there is not This situation would exist for example if an IBASIC program had been created and downloaded using the DEFine command and then deleted from the front panel using the SCRATCH ALL command from the IBASIC Command line Under this circumstance IBASIC Error 282 would be generated when another attempt is made to download a program with the PROGram Subsystem It is recommended that the DELete ALL command always be sent immediately before the DEFine command Th
378. n Enter a program into the external controller Use the sample program below if no program is available When run the sample program clears the Test Set s IBASIC Controller display area and prints a message indicating that the download procedure worked 10 20 CLEAR SCREEN THIS IS A SAMPLE PROGRAM 30 PRINT DOWNLOADING COMPLETED 40 END Execute the following commands on the external controller OUTPUT 714 PROG DEL ALL OUTPUT 714 PROG DEF 0 LIST 4714 OUTPUT 714 END To verify that the program was downloaded execute the following commands from the external controller OUTPUT 714 PROG EXEC LIST The program should be listed on the Test Set s TESTS IBASIC Controller screen Run the program on the Test Set by first selecting the LOCAL key on the front panel of the Test Set and then selecting the Run key on the Test Set s TESTS IBASIC Controller screen S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem Uploading a Program From the Test Set The following BASIC program copies an IBASIC program from the Test Set s IBASIC Controller RAM to the external controller and then stores it to a file on the external controller s currently assigned mass storage device When the upload program is entered and run on the external controller the operator is prompted for the name of the file t
379. n field and choose ROM from the choices 3 Using the rotary knob select the Select Procedure Filename field A list of Test Procedures stored on the ROM disk is displayed in the Choices field Using the rotary knob select the Test Procedure of interest 4 A brief description of the Test Procedure will be displayed in the Description field ROM DISK cannot be written to for user storage The ROM Disk s mass storage volume specifier is MEMORY 0 4 For example to catalogue the contents of the ROM Disk from the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen enter 30 OUTPUT 814 AFAN DEMP GAIN 20 dB 340 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS memcard fb Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Using Memory Cards Using Memory Cards OTP One Time Programmable cards provide removable read only storage File editing and erasure are not possible These cards cannot be programmed by the Test Set they require a special memory card programmer to save files SRAM cards provide removable read write memory for your files similar to a flexible disk Data can be stored re stored read or erased as needed SRAM memory cards require a battery to maintain stored information Table 38 Memory Card Par umbers menory Type e ADR 32 kilobytes SRAM 85700A 128 kilobytes OTP 85701A 128 kilobytes SRAM 85702A 256 kilobytes OTP 85703A 256 kilobytes SRAM 85704A 512 kilobytes SRAM 85705A 512 kilobytes OTP 85706A
380. n lt integer gt STATus OPERation NTRansition lt integer gt Example OUTPUT 714 STAT OPER PTR 256 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Reading the Event Register Syntax STATus OPERation EVENt Example OUTPUT 714 STAT OPER EVEN ENTER 714 Register value Clearing the Event Register The EVENT register is cleared whenever it is queried or whenever the Common Command CLS is sent to the Test Set Reading the Enable Register Syntax STATus OPERation ENABle Example OUTPUT 714 STAT OPER ENAB ENTER 714 Register value Writing the Enable Register Syntax STATus OPERation ENABle integer Example OUTPUT 714 STAT OPER ENAB 256 Clearing the Enable Register The ENABLE register is cleared by writing to it with an integer value of zero 255 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Standard Event Status Register Group The Standard Event Status Register Group is a specific implementation of the status register model described in the Status Register Structure Overview section The conditions monitored by the Standard Event Status Register Group are defined by the IEEE 488 2 1987 Standard The Standard assigns specific Test Set conditions to specific bits in the Standard Event Status Register Table 19 on pag
381. n on page 444 for information on how to read data in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen This field displays the measured RF power of the RF carrier being transmitted by the mobile station A nonzero value would only be displayed in the connected state that is the Connect annunciator is lit The TX Power field is only displayed when the Display field is set to Meas Refer to the Display field description on page 444 for information on how to read data in the upper right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen 463 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL DATA Screen Programming the CALL DATA Screen Figure 37 464 CALL DATA Active EB Active O Register O Pase Handaff O Access Release O Connect Order Display Mord To Screen RECCH A F HRHC T 5 RSYD SCM 1 011 1 1 D 1010 MIHI Pority 110110011000101010101100 010111100111 The CALL DATA Screen This screen displays the decoded reverse control channel and reverse voice channel signaling messages received by the Test Set from the mobile station Six different decoded messages can be viewed on this screen The message to be viewed is selected using the Display Word field The messages which can be viewed are Reverse Control Channel Messages for Paging Origination Orders and Order Confirmation RECCW A Message Fields on page 468 RECCW B Message Fields on page 470 RECCW C Message Fields
382. n the Test Set has the capability to demand control pass control accept control and request control of the bus depending upon its configuration its current operating mode and the system configuration Many possibilities for passing control among several controllers on the same bus exist Attempting to identify all the possible techniques of passing control in such a system is beyond the scope of this document refer to the IEEE 488 1 and 488 2 Standards for additional information 313 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Passing Control Configuring the Test Set as the System Controller To configure the Test Set as a System Controller select the I O CONFIGURE screen position the cursor to the Mode field using the Cursor Control knob highlight the Mode field by pushing the Rotary Knob select Control from the Choices menu As a consequence of setting the Test Set to be the System Controller it will also become the Active Controller The letter C appears in the upper right corner of the display to indicate that the Test Set is now the Active Controller If the Test Set is the only controller on the bus it must be configured as the System Controller If the Test Set is not the only controller on the bus then whether or not it is configured as the System Controller would depend upon three issues 1 2 3 whether or not other controllers have System Controller capability which controller will be the Active Controller upon power up
383. n line feed is encountered the Test Set will attempt to execute the command To display the IBASIC Command Line field on the Test Set execute the following steps Press the TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will be displayed 1 2 3 Using the rotary knob position the cursor on the IBASIC Cntrl field and select it 4 The TESTS IBASIC CONTROLLER screen will be displayed 5 The small horizontal rectangle at the top left is the IBASIC Command Line To Access the IBASIC Command Line Field 1 Position the cursor on the screen s upper left This is the IBASIC Command Line field 2 The IBASIC Command Line field does not have a title like other fields in the Test Set it is the highlighted horizontal 2 line bar just below the screen title TESTS IBASIC Controller To Use the IBASIC Command Line Field with the Test Set s Rotary Knob 1 Position the cursor at the IBASIC Command Line field and push the knob 2 A Choices field will be displayed in the lower right corner of the display 3 By rotating the knob a list of ASCII characters and cursor positioning commands can be displayed on the right side of the screen 4 When the cursor is next to the desired character or command push the knob to select that character 5 No external hardware is required for this entry method but it is tedious and is recommended only for short commands Use this method when doing simple tasks such as initializing memory cards
384. nal BASIC language computer utilizes this hardware feature to an advantage First develop the program directly on the external BASIC language computer treating the Test Set as a device on the external BASIC language computer s GPIB For example to setup the Test Set s RF Generator use the OUTPUT command with the Test Set s GPIB address If the select code of the GPIB card in the external BASIC language computer is 7 and the address of the Test Set is 14 the address following the OUTPUT command would be 714 When the command executes on the external BASIC language computer the information on how the Test Set s RF Generator is to be configured is sent to the Test Set through its external GPIB bus After the program is fully developed making it run on the Test Set is simply a matter of changing the address of all the GPIB commands to 8XX Test Set internal GPIB bus and downloading the program into the Test Set s IBASIC controller and executing it There are two ways of allowing easy conversion of all GPIB commands to a different address The first way is to establish a variable to which the 3 digit address number is assigned For example 10 Addr 714 Sets the value of variable Addr to be 714 20 OUTPUT Addr RST Commands the Test Set to reset at address 714 To change the address simply change the value of variable Addr to 814 For example 10 Addr 814 Sets the value of variable Addr to be 814 20 OUTPUT Addr RST Command
385. nction calls are not the only programming construct which can be used to control the Call Processing Subsystem The example programs were designed to illustrate how to use the Call Processing Subsystem in a simple straightforward manner The program structure and program constructs used in your application will depend upon the programming language used and the requirements of your application 521 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Example Programs SRQ Example Program 10 SRO sample program 20 OPTION BASE 1 30 COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr 40 COM Prog control INTEGER Oper complete Wait time Error flag 50 60 Bus addr 7 Set to 8 when running on 8920 70 Inst_addr 714 Set to 814 when running on 8920 80 Wait_time 0 Set to minimum of 5 when running on an 8920 90 Oper complete 0 1 Operation complete 0 Operation not complete 100 Error flag 0 1 An error has occurred 0 no error has occurred 110 ABORT Bus addr 120 CLEAR SCREEN 130 PRINTER IS CRT 140 Cnfg_srvc_intrp 150 ON INTR Bus_addr 15 CALL Srvice_interupt 160 ENABLE INTR Bus_addr 2 170 180 Start test 190 Cond test set 200 OUTPUT Inst addr DISP ACNT 210 IF NOT FNCnfg base sta 0 212 231 5970 47 AMPS 321 THEN Print error 220 IF FNSet state Register THEN 230 Read rcdd data 1234 Pass the numbers of t
386. ndard Event Status Enable Query ESR Standard Event Status Register Query IDN Identification Query OPC Operation Complete Command OPC Operation Complete Query OPT Option Identification Query PCB Pass Control Back Command RCL Recall Command RST Reset Command SAV Save Command SRE Service Request Enable Command SRE Service Request Enable Query STB Read Status Byte Query TRG Trigger Command TST Self Test Query WAI Wait to Continue Command 208 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS ieee sec IEEE 488 2 Common Commands Common Command Descriptions IDN The IDN query causes a device to send its identification information over the Identification bus The Test Set responds to the IDN command by placing its identification Query information in ASCII format into the Output Queue The response data is obtained by reading the Output Queue into a string variable of length 72 The response data is organized into four fields separated by commas The field definitions are described in Table 15 Table 15 Device Identification Field Contents Typical Response from Test Set Comments 1 Manufacturer Agilent Technologies 2 Model 8920A 3 Serial Number US12345678 ASCII character 0 decimal value 48 if not available 4 Firmware Revision A 02 04 ASCII character 0 decimal value Level 48 1f not available NOTE The Serial Number format can take one of two forms AAXXXXXXXX or
387. nds DATA FUNCTIONS Keys The Data Functions keys can be divided into two groups those which affect measurements REF SET METER AVG HI LIMIT and LO LIMIT and those which affect numeric entry fields INCR 10 INCR SET INCRx10 Up arrow Down arrow For measurements the Data Functions enable the programmer to change the way measurements are calculated and displayed and provide measurement limit detection For numeric entry fields the Data Functions enable the programmer to set scale and change the field s increment value Each Data Function is described in detail in the Test Set s User s Guide Refer to the Number Measurement Syntax on page 177 for full command syntax Guidelines for Using Measurement Data Functions Data Functions are turned ON and OFF for individual measurements The GPIB Data Function commands must immediately follow the GPIB command for the individual measurement For example to turn the AVG Data Function ON for the Audio Frequency Analyzer Distortion measurement the following command string would be sent to the Test Set OUTPUT 714 MEAS AFR DISTN AVER STAT ON e Attribute Units AUNits are used with the Data Functions to specify the units of measure for numeric data which is read or set through GPIB Refer to Attribute Units AUNits on page 81 Data Function settings such as Number of Averages or Reference value are retained if the function is turned off The setting values are initia
388. ned in eight register groups Information in each register group is summarized into a Summary Message All of the Summary Messages are in turn summarized into the Status Byte Register either directly to specific bit positions in the Status Byte Register as shown in Table 26 or indirectly through another register group refer to Status Reporting on page 239 for a detailed discussion of the register groups and status reporting Bits in the Status Byte Register can be used to generate a Service Request SRQ Table 26 Status Byte Register Bit Assignments Bit Binary Position Weighting Assigomenig 7 128 Operation Status Register Group Summary Message 6 64 Request Service RQS message when read by serial poll 294 or Master Summary Status MSS message when read by STB command 5 32 Standard Event Status Bit ESB Summary Message 4 16 Output Queue Message Available MAV Summary Message 3 8 Questionable Data Signal Register Group Summary Message 2 4 Unused in Test Set 1 2 Hardware 2 Status Register Group Summary Message 0 1 Hardware 1 Status Register Group Summary Message message by enabling the associated bit in the Service Request Enable Register When an enabled service request condition exists the Test Set sends the Service Request message SRQ on the GPIB bus and reports that it has requested service by setting the Request Service RQS bit in the Status Byte register to th
389. ng operations are aborted e The Test Set s display screen is in the UNLOCKED state Measurement triggering is set to TRIG MODE SETT FULL RETR REP e Any previously received Operation Complete command OPC is cleared e Any previously received Operation Complete query command OPC is cleared The power up self test diagnostics are not performed e The contents of the SAVE RECALL registers are not affected Calibration data is not affected The GPIB interface is not reset any pending Service Request is not cleared All Enable registers are unaffected Service Request Standard Event Communicate Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Operation Calibration and Questionable Data Signal e All Negative Transition Filter registers are unaffected Communicate Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Operational Calibration and Questionable Data Signal All Positive Transition Filter registers are unaffected Communicate Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Operational Calibration and Questionable Data Signal e The contents of the RAM memory are unaffected e The contents of the Output Queue are unaffected The contents of the Error Queue are unaffected 211 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands TST Self Test Query The TST self test query causes the Test Set to execute a series of internal self tests and place a numeric response into the Output Queue indicating whether or not the Test Set completed the self test without any detected errors The r
390. ng or clearing of the Event Register 285 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Table 24 Hardware Status Register Group 1 Condition Register Bit Assignments Continued Bit Binary uii Number Weighting Condition Comment 5 32 Measurement Limit s This bit is set high if the Measurement High Exceeded Limit or Low Limit is exceeded 4 16 Power up Self Test s Failed 3 8 Overpower Protection Tripped 2 4 Unused in Test Set 1 2 External Mike Keyed 0 1 External Battery Voltage Low Accessing the Hardware Status Register 1 Group s Registers The following sections show the syntax and give programming examples using the Instrument BASIC programming language for the STATus commands used to access the Hardware Status Register 1 Group s registers Reading the Condition Register Syntax STATus HARDwarel CONDition Example OUTPUT 714 STAT HARD1 COND ENTER 714 Register value 286 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Reading the Transition Filters Syntax Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting STATus HARDwarel PTRansition STATus HARDwarel NTRansition Example OUTPUT 714 STAT HARD1 PTR Writing the Transition Filters Syntax ENTER 714 Register value STATus HARDwarel PTRansition integer STATus HARDwarel NTRansition integer Example OUTPUT 714 STAT HARD1 PTR 256
391. nition 75 display units guidelines 77 display units querying 77 downloading programs to Test Set 379 error messages 539 Errors 539 548 extended addressing 49 external select code 7 29 44 getting started 34 Group Execute Trigger GET 224 HP IB units changing 79 HP IB units definition 78 HP IB units guidelines 80 HP IB units querying 80 Increasing measurement speed 234 Increasing measurement speed see In creasing Measurement Speed 234 Instrument Initialization see Instru ment Initialization 303 Index internal select code 8 29 44 local lockout 55 Local Remote Triggering Changes 227 making a simple measurement 46 measurement pacing 231 multiple addressing 49 passing control see Passing Control 313 PROGram commands see PROGram Subsystem 396 programming examples 39 45 89 programming guidelines 36 reading a field setting 45 Service requests see Service Re quests 293 standards 34 STATe command definition 87 STATe command guidelines 88 Status reporting see Status reporting 239 System Controller 43 313 314 topics covered 35 Trigger aborting 228 Trigger commands 228 Trigger event 224 Trigger modes 225 229 Trigger modes affect on measurement speed 230 234 Trigger modes default settings 227 Trigger modes retriggering 225 229 Trigger modes settings for fastest measurements 230 Trigger modes settings for most
392. nt 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS ieee sec NOTE Example program IN IEEE 488 2 Common Commands Using the OPC query by reading Output Queue Bit 4 in the Service Request Enable Register is set to a value of zero disabled The OPC query is sent to the Test Set at the end of a command message data stream The application program then attempts to read the OPC query response from the Test Set s Output Queue The Test Set will not put a response to the OPC query into the Output Queue until the commands have all finished Reading the response to the OPC query has the penalty that both the GPIB bus and the Active Controller handshake are in temporary holdoff state while the Active Controller waits to read the OPC query response from the Test Set EGER Output_que_val OU PUT 714 SRI OU PUT 714 DIS EN ER 714 Outpu PRI END E 0 Disable Service Requests P RFG RFG OUTP Dupl AMPL 0 dBm FREO 320 MHz OPC t que val Program will wait here until all operations complete T All operations complete Using the OPC query to set the MAV bit in the Status Byte Register Bit 4 in the Service Request Enable Register is set to a value of 1 enabled The OPC query is sent to the Test Set at the end of a command message data stream The Test Set will request service when the MAV bit in the Status Byte register is setto the TRUE logic 1 state After the servi
393. nter the queried data before the IBASIC program is PAUSED or STOPPED the GPIB bus will appear to be locked up This is due to the fact that the GPIB bus and the external controller will be in a temporary holdoff state while waiting for the data to be put into the Output queue to satisfy the enter command Syntax PROGram SELected WAIT Example OUTPUT 714 PROGram SELected WAIT or OUTPUT 714 PROG WAIT S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb CAUTION Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem WAIT The WAIT query command stops the Test Set from executing any commands or queries received through GPIB until after the IBASIC program exits the RUN state that is the program is either PAUSED or STOPPED A 1 is returned in response to the WAIT query command when the IBASIC program is either stopped or paused When the WAIT query command is sent to the Test Set the program running on the external controller will hang on the enter or input statement until the IBASIC program is either STOPPED or PAUSED This is due to the fact that the GPIB bus and the external controller will be in a temporary holdoff state while waiting for the Test Set to put a 1 into the Output queue to satisfy the WAIT query command Syntax PROGram SELected WAIT Example OUTPUT 714 PROGram SELected WAIT ENTER 714 Dummy or OUTPUT 714 PROG WAIT ENTER 714 Dummy
394. ntrol INTEGER Std event Wait time 4030 INTEGER Ptr value Call proc even 4040 SELECT State 4050 CASE Active 4060 Ptr value 1 4070 CASE Register 4080 Ptr value 1 4090 CASE Page 4100 Ptr value 32 4110 CASE Handoff 4120 Ptr value 32 4130 CASE Originate 4140 Ptr value 32 4150 CASE Release 4160 Ptr value 1 4170 END SELECT 4180 IF State Originate THEN 4190 OUTPUT Inst addr STAT CALLP PTR amp VALS Ptr value 4200 ELSE 4210 OUTPUT Inst addr STAT CALLP PTR amp VALS Ptr_value amp CALLP amp State 4220 END IF 4230 LOOP 4240 WAIT Wait_time 4250 OUTPUT Inst_addr ESR STAT CALLP EVEN 4260 ENTER Inst addr Std event Call proc even 4270 IF Std event THEN RETURN 0 4280 IF BIT Call proc even LOG Ptr value LOG 2 THEN RETURN 1 4290 END LOOP 4300 FNEND 5010 Read rcdd data SUB Read rcdd data Fields 5020 OPTION BASE 1 5030 COM Io addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr 5040 COM Prog control INTEGER Std event Wait time 5050 DIM Reda 6 40 5060 INTEGER N 5070 WAIT 1 Allow time for RCDD data fields to be updated 5080 FOR N 1 TO LEN TRIMS Fields 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 514 532 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 Order D
395. ntrol Program Execution speed of the control program is defined as the time required to execute a given number of program lines Each time the GPIB is accessed a given amount of time is required to configure the devices on the bus for data transfer Every time a BASIC or IBASIC OUTPUT or ENTER statement is executed this bus configuration time is incurred The total amount of bus configuration time expended for a given number of program lines can be minimized by reducing the number of OUTPUT and ENTER statements used in the control program This is accomplished by combining several commands into one GPIB transaction Execution speed of the control program is influenced by the use of compound commands and screen display time as described in the following paragraphs Compound Commands for Combining OUTPUT Statements To reduce the number of OUTPUT statements used to make the desired settings within one screen string together multiple settings within one OUTPUT statement This is accomplished using the semicolon separator and the semicolon colon separator The semicolon Separator The semicolon separator tells the Test Set s GPIB command parser to back up one level of command hierarchy and accept the next command at the same level as the previous command The following examples illustrate proper use of the semicolon separator Example 1 OUTPUT 714 RFG AMPL 66 DBM FREQ 500 MHZ AMPL STAT ON This OUTPUT statement sets t
396. ntrol channel did not contain the proper number of bits in word 1 and or word 2 and or word 3 The raw decoded data is displayed in hexadecimal format in the top right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen Raw decoded data is only displayed when the CALL CONTROL screen Display field is set to Data Incomplete data received on RVC for word 1 2 3 Indicates that the decoded data received on the reverse voice channel did not contain the proper number of bits in word and or word 2 and or word 3 The raw decoded data is displayed in hexadecimal format in the top right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen Raw decoded data is only displayed when the CALL CONTROL screen Display field is set to Data 567 568 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errormsg fb Symbols CLS 220 ESE 220 ESE 220 ESR 220 IDN 209 OPC 213 OPC 216 OPT 210 PCB 221 RCL 222 RST 211 SAV 222 SRE 221 SRE 221 STB 221 TRG 221 TST 212 WAL 219 LIB files 420 NMT files 333 PGM files 420 PRC files 421 files 335 c files 335 420 T files 335 420 n files 333 335 p files 335 421 Index A Attribute Units 81 abbreviated address word Autoranging forward control channel 501 affect on measurement speed 234 reverse control channel 468 Autotuning access message 492 affect on measurement speed 234 Active Controller when capability required 314
397. ntrol from IBASIC 317 PC AdvanceLink HP 68333F Version B 02 00 terminal emulator 371 384 Microsoft Windows Terminal termi nal emulator 383 ProCommr Revision 2 4 3 terminal emulator 384 Serial Port Configuration 367 Terminal emulator 367 PCMCIA card see Memory card 323 329 330 341 printer connecting to HP IB 43 Procedure files 333 421 backing up 346 ProCommr Revision 2 4 3 terminal em ulator 384 Program HP IB command syntax diagram 159 Program Development choosing development method 373 IBASIC 358 Method 1 Using external computer 375 Method 2 Using IBASIC EDIT mode 381 Method 3 Using word processor on PC 385 methods of 358 program hangs avoiding 40 PROGram Subsystem 379 396 commands 398 executing commands 414 577 Q Questionable Group 266 accessing registers contained in 269 condition register bit assignments 268 Data Signal Register 578 R Radio Interface HP IB command syntax diagram 164 RAM Disk 325 327 initializing 350 using 349 RAM MNG 349 Real Number Setting HP IB command syntax diagram 175 recall instrument state RCL 222 Recalling registers HP IB command syntax diagram 160 RECCW A CALLP 464 messages 468 RECCW B CALLP 464 messages 470 RECCW C CALLP 464 messages 472 RECCW D CALLP 464 messages 473 RECCW E CALLP 464 messages 474 Register HP IB command syntax diagram 160 registration identification me
398. ntrol mode Figure 1 on page 32 also shows that certain Test Set resources are dedicated to the IBASIC Controller Memory Card ROM disk Serial Interface 10 and are not directly accessible to the user in Manual Control Mode In addition Figure 1 on page 32 shows that Serial Interface 9 and Parallel Printer Interface 15 are accessible as write only interfaces for printing in Manual Control mode These same conditions are true when in External Automatic Control mode If the user wished to access these resources from an external controller an IBASIC program would have to be run on the Test Set from the external controller 30 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Chapter 1 Using GPIB Overview of the Test Set Writing programs for the Test Set One of the design goals for automatic control of the Test Set was that it operate the same way programmatically as it does manually This is a key point to remember when developing programs for the Test Set The benefit of this approach is that to automate a particular task one need only figure out how to do the task manually and then duplicate the same process in software This has several implications when designing and writing programs for the Test Set 1 In Manual Control mode a measurement must be active in order to obtain a measurement result or input data from the DUT From a programming perspective this means that before attempting to read a measurement result or to input
399. ntrol program The technique uses the MAV Message Available bit in the Test Set s GPIB Status Byte to determine when there is data in the Output Queue A polling loop is used to query the Status byte The timeout duration for returning the measurement result is handled by the polling loop An GPIB interface activity timeout is also set up to handle time outs resulting from problems with the GPIB interface Lines 10 thru 230 in this example set up a measurement situation to demonstrate the use of the recommended technique The recommended technique is exampled in the Measure Function Lines 50 and 60 should be included in the beginning of all control program These lines are required to ensure that the Test Set is properly reset This covers the case where the program was previously run and was stopped with the Test Set in an error condition S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS measrslt fb P2400 I o UTA G P2 rA OGG aa g OOCOAWHAA M E P o FEAR SCREEN nst_addr 714 us_addr 7 EAR Inst addr xecute a call ower H O Fl eturned by the UTPUT Inst addr TRIG ABORT UTPUT Inst addr UTPUT Inst addr DISP RFAN RST asure result FN Check the resul F asure_result 9 E 99 THEN SE RINT Measuremen RINT Power t failed ND IF zi iw kckckckckckck ckck KKK ck ck kk M
400. o decide if a test point passes or fails Only one Library is defined for each Code file The name of this file is preceded by a lower case in the Test Set telling the TESTS system that this is a Library file Also both the Library and Code file should have the same base name to indicate the relationship between them A Library is required to use the user interface screen functions of the TESTS Subsystem If the program is simple enough that there is no need for user input or if all the user input is simple enough to be accomplished with INPUT statements a NO LIB option is available S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller The TESTS Subsystem Procedure Files A Procedure allows the user to define which of the test subroutines parameters and specifications defined in the Library will be used to test a specific Radio There may be many Procedures defined that use the same IBASIC Code and Library each using a different subset of the choices available in the Library These files are preceded with a lower case p in the Test Set but are not required to have the same base name as either the Library or the Code The name of the corresponding Library if any is stored in each Procedure file Procedure 1 pName Parameters Specifications and test for each radio IBASIC Test Code Test Library cName IName Code for all possible Set of all p
401. o store the IBASIC program in As the upload program is running the total number of characters in the program and the number of characters transferred are displayed Upload an IBASIC program in Test Set to an external controller DIM Prog line 200 Holds longest program line in Test Set DIM File name 10 Holds the name of file to store IBASIC program Addr 714 Test Set GPIB address LINPUT Enter name of file to store IBASIC program in File name OUTPUT Addr PROG DEF ENTER Addr USING X D Count_length Get length of count field Get number of characters in program includes CR LF on each line O ENTER Addr USING VALS Count_length amp D Chars_total 00 Create ASCII file to hold program add 5 records for buffer 110 CREATE ASCII File name Chars total 256 45 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000 10 015 UN rp p 120 ASSIGN GFile TO File name 130 LOOP 140 ENTER Addr Prog line Read in one program line 150 OUTPUT GFile Prog line Store in file 160 Chars_xferd Chars_xferd LEN Prog_line 2 CR LF not read 170 DISP Chars_xferd of Chars_total characters transferred 180 EXIT IF Chars_xferd gt Chars_total 190 END LOOP 200 ENTER Addr Msg terminator Terminate the block data transfer 210 ASSIGN File TO Close the file 220 END 417 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem Sav
402. o the Test Set through RS 232 is used as the CRT and keyboard for the Test Set s built in IBASIC controller In this method the program always resides in the Test Set and can be run at any time Mass storage is usually an SRAM memory card When running IBASIC programs on the Test Set s internal controller the Test Set displays only the IBASIC screen The Test Set s IBASIC controller has an editor that is interactive with a terminal or PC over the RS 232 serial port The editor does not work unless a terminal or PC with terminal emulator is connected to Serial Port 9 The editor hereafter referred to as the IBASIC EDIT Mode allows the programmer to develop code directly in the Test Set with no uploading or downloading The IBASIC EDIT Mode can be used to develop programs from scratch or to modify existing programs Refer to Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports on page 360 for information on connecting a terminal or PC to the Test Set 381 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 2 Developing Programs on the Test Set Using the IBASIC EDIT Mode Selecting the IBASIC Command Line Field To use the IBASIC EDIT Mode for program development the IBASIC Command Line field must be displayed on the Test Set and Serial Port 9 must be connected to the IBASIC Command Line field An IBASIC command sent as a series of ASCII characters through Serial Port 9 will appear on the IBASIC Command Line field When a carriage retur
403. ocessing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions REG ID Message Fields Set Message REG ID Registration ID Message Figure 49 REG ID Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message 2 binary characters required DCC Digital color code field 2 binary characters required REGID Registration ID field 20 binary character required END End indication field e Set to 1 to indicate the last word of the overhead message train e Set to 0 if not the last word 1 binary character required 496 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb OHD Parity Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions This field displays the overhead message type A 100 indicates a global action message e A 110 indicates this is the first word of the system parameter overhead parameter message e A 111 indicates this is the second word of the system parameter overhead message 3 binary character required Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 497 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions C FILMESS Message Fields Set Message C FILMESS Control filler Message TiT2 occ F1 CMAC RSYD1 F2 RSYD2 MN DE oe DDIED DE
404. od of preventing the bus from remaining in the temporary holdoff state indefinitely 231 Triggering Measurements 232 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS tm sec Advanced Operations 233 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Increasing Measurement Throughput Increasing Measurement Throughput Measurement throughput is defined as the number of measurements made per unit of time When operating the Test Set in the Internal or External Automatic Control Mode measurement throughput is influenced by measurement speed measurement setup time and execution speed of the control program Each of these factors is in turn influenced by several parameters The following sections discuss the parameters and their effect on measurement throughput Optimizing Measurement Speed 234 Measurement speed is defined as the time required to complete one measurement cycle after receipt of a valid trigger event Measurement speed is influenced by the following four parameters 1 Trigger Mode The Trigger Mode affects the time to first reading and the length of the measurement cycle and is defined by two parameters retriggering and settling Retriggering refers to what a measurement does once it has completed a measurement cycle Settling refers to the amount of delay introduced to allow signal transients to propagate through the analysis chain and settle out Refer to Triggering Measurements on page 224 for information on Trigger
405. ogram syntax error is generated Any IBASIC program in the Test Set must be in either the PAUSed or STOPped state before the external controller issues the EXECute program command command If the IBASIC program is in the RUN state an IBASIC Error 284 Program currently running is generated Syntax PROGram SELected EXECute lt delimiter gt lt program_command gt lt delimiter gt The following notation is used in the command description lt delimiter gt IEEE 488 2 lt string data gt delimiter single quote or double quote must be the same Example OUTPUT 714 PROGram SELected EXECute CLEAR SCREEN Or OUTPUT 714 PROG EXEC CLEAR SCREEN S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb NOTE NOTE Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem NUMber lt varname gt lt nvalues gt The NUMBer command is used to set from an external controller the value of numeric variables or arrays in an IBASIC program in the Test Set lt varname gt is the name of an existing numeric variable or array and can be sent as either character data lt varname gt not enclosed in quotes or string data lt varname gt enclosed in quotes lt nvalues gt is a list of comma separated lt numeric_values gt which are used to set the value of lt varname gt If the variable name lt var_name gt is longer than 12 characters it must
406. ommand Line field it is permissible to set Rev Pace and Xmt Pace to None When sending data through the Test Set s Serial Port to external devices like printers which may have small input buffers it is important to set Rev Pace and Xmt Pace to Xon Xof f This allows the printer to stop data transmission from the Test Set when the printer s buffer is full and then start it again when the printer is ready The Test Set has a Serial Port input buffer length of 2000 characters with firmware revision A 09 04 Buffer size becomes important when IBASIC programs expect to receive large amounts of data through the Serial Port with a single ENTER statement Table 41 Test Set Serial Port 9 Configuration Field Available Settings Recommended Setting Serial In Inst IBASIC Inst IBASIC Echo On Off On Inst Echo On Off On Serial Baud Rate 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9 600 9600 19200 Parity None Odd Even Always 1 None Always 0 Data Length 7 bits 8 bits 8 bits Stop Length 1 bit 2 bits bit Rcv Pace receive pacing None Xon Xoff Xon Xoff Xmt Pace transmit pacing None Xon Xoff Xon Xoff 366 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS libasic fb PC Configuration Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports To prepare for IBASIC program development the external PC or terminal must be configured to operate with the Test Set This configuration include
407. ommands however we recommend you do not change this setting In order to change the automatically selected filter the Filter Mode must be set to ON Filter Mode ON allows independent selection of filters The Filter Mode ON command must be executed first to override default settings Filter Mode OFF is the power up default state The following error will occur if the user attempts to select an alternate filter without first setting the Filter Mode to ON Entry not accepted Auto entries take precedence The syntax to change or query the premodulation filter is shown below AFG2 FILTER MODE ONIOFF select one AFG2 FILTER MODE query the current mode setting AFG2 FILTER NONEI20KHz LPFI250Hz LPFI150Hz LPF select one AFG2 FILTER query the current filter setting ON space O NONE OY i hee 20KHz LPF 54 250HzLPF 5 i I50HzLPF 53 eO Returns quoted string MODE gt D ON O OFF M Returns quoted string 101 AF Generator 2 Encoder AF Generator 2 Encoder C AFGenerator2 CAFG2 P ENCoder H A AM See Real Number Setting Syntax BURSt jJ See IntegerNumber Setting Syntax INCRement command only CDESTination space pl AM E aon AFGen2 To FM gt lt Audio Out DS 2 Returns quoted string FM gt See Real Number Setting Syntax FREQuency See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe command
408. omplete idle state and prepares the Test Set to receive new commands The DCL bus command does not change any settings or stored data except as noted previously interrupt front panel I O interrupt any Test Set operation in progress except as noted previously or change the contents of the Status Byte Register other than clearing the MAV bit as a consequence of clearing the Output Queue The DCL bus command has no effect on the I O CONFIGURE CONFIGURE PRINT CONFIGURE or TESTS Main Menu Execution Conditions External Devices Printer Setup screens Other operational characteristics are also affected by the DCL bus command as follows The Power up self test diagnostics are not performed The GPIB interface is not reset any pending Service Request is not cleared Measurement triggering is not affected Calibration data is not affected The Contents of the SAVE RECALL registers are not affected All Enable registers are unaffected Service Request Standard Event Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Operation Calibration Call Processing and Questionable Data Signal e All Negative Transition Filter registers are unaffected Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Op eration Calibration Call Processing and Questionable Data Signal e All Positive Transition Filter registers are unaffected Hardware 1 Hardware 2 Op eration Calibration Call Processing and Questionable Data Signal e The contents of the RAM memory are unaffected e
409. on on the reverse control channel or the reverse voice channel If a decoding error occurs the raw data message bits received from the mobile station are displayed in hexadecimal format Modulation quality measurements made on the mobile station s RF carrier while on a voice channel The Display field is used to select the type of mobile station information to be displayed The MODE command is used to control the Display field for AMPS TACS and JTACS system types The query form of the command that is MODE can be used to determine the current setting of the Display field while AMPS TACS and JTACS system type is selected Syntax MODE DATA MEAS MODE Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP MODE DATA OUTPUT 714 CALLP MODE ENTER 714 Screen 444 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen Setting the Display field to Data When the Display field is set to Data the top right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen is used to display decoded data message s received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel or the reverse voice channel If the data message s received from the mobile station can be correctly decoded the decoded message contents are displayed Figure 34 on page 439 shows an example of a correctly decoded reverse control channel data message
410. on the IBA SIC Command Line line to remove the ASCII DN download program from Test Set memory 18 Next execute a GET TEMP CODE command on the IBASIC Command Line This will load the ASCII text into the IBASIC program memory 19 Finally execute a RUN command on the IBASIC Command Line This will run the pro gram If any syntax errors are present in the program IBASIC will generate the appro priate error messages 29 90 SYN UN dx Y Foris 391 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Uploading Programs from the Test Set to a PC Uploading Programs from the Test Set to a PC As an overview the following steps must be performed 1 The Test Set must output the program over Serial Port 9 2 The PC must receive the data through its serial port and direct the data to a file on disk This can be done by a terminal emulator program such as Windows Terminal Pro Comm or Agilent AdvanceLink This requires having the serial port connection estab lished as outlined in Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports on page 360 To configure the Test Set to output the program to Serial Port 9 position the cursor on the IBASIC Command Line field Execute the command PRINTER IS 9 This command sets Serial Port 9 as the default printer port When PRINT commands are executed ASCII characters will be sent to Serial Port 9 On the PC select Receive Text File in Windows Terminal or Receive Files PgDn which is called Download in ProComm
411. ontains signal generation and signal measurement instrumentation The instrument control processor is able to query the signal measurement instrumentation to determine if a measurement cycle has completed However the instrument control processor is not able to query the signal generation instrumentation to determine if the signal s have settled In order to ensure that all signals have settled to proper values the instrument control processor initiates a one second delay upon receipt of the OPC OPC and WAI commands In parallel with the one second timer the instrument control processor commands all active measurements to tell it when the measurement s are done When all active measurements are done and the one second timer has elapsed the OPC OPC and W AI commands are satisfied The WAI command should not be used for determining if a Call Processing Subsystem state command has completed successfully Call Processing Subsystem states do not complete a state is either active or not active Using the WAI command with a Call Processing Subsystem state command results in a deadlock condition The Test Set will not process any further GPIB commands until the Call Processing Subsystem command preceding the WAI command completes but the command never completes For example the following command sequence should not be used OUTPUT 714 CALLP ACTive WAL CALLP REGister The WAI command should not be used with any of the following Call
412. ontrol to the Test Set and then does other work while the Test Set is making measurements When the Test Set is finished making measurements and has data available for the External Controller it passes control back to the External Controller 4 The External Controller then requests the data from the Test Set 318 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Passing Control The following program would run in the External Controller 00 1001 5 uNa OOOO OO CO CO lt 2 mn 00 pp 2 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 305 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Bos os ab GB aw am COM Gpib_names INTEGER Internal_gpib Inst_address Cntrl_state COM Cntrl names Ext cntrl addrs Int cntrl addrs COM Io names INTEGER Printer addrs Pwr suply addrs COM Io values REAL Meas power Prog state 80 Prog name 50 COM Reg vals INTEGER Status byte Stdevnt reg val Internal gpib 7 Ext cntrl addrs 14 Int cntrl addrs 21 Printer addrs 1 Pwr suply addrs 26 Inst address Internal gpib 100 Ext cntrl addrs Prog_name PASCTLEX INTERNAL 4 1 PRINTER IS CRT 1 Set the Controller up to respond to an SRQ from Test Set The interrupt is generated by the Request Control bit in the Test Set ON INTR Internal_gpib CALL P
413. ontroller Choosing Your Development Method Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 374 Using a BASIC language computer either an Agilent technical computer or a PC running BASIC with GPIB is the best method for developing any size program This is because the program can be debugged directly on the external computer before downloading the program into the Test Set Using this approach the programmer can observe the Test Set s display to see changes in state and easily verify the correct measurements If a BASIC language computer is not available program development can be done directly on the Test Set using the IBASIC EDIT mode A PC connected to the Test Set through RS 232 as described earlier in this chapter is used as the CRT and keyboard for the internal controller In this method the program always resides in the Test Set and can be run at any time Mass storage is usually an SRAM card When running IBASIC programs on the Test Set s internal controller the Test Set displays only the IBASIC screen not the individual instrument screens as the program executes This makes troubleshooting larger programs more difficult The third method of program development is to use a word processor on a PC with RS 232 and then download the program into the Test Set for execution This is the least favorable choice for development because downloading code into the Test Set over RS 232 requires a loader utility program running in the Test Set and a
414. or example X YZ is not defined for any device Header suffix out of range Indicates that a nonheader character has been encountered in what the parser expects is a header element Numeric data error This error as well as errors 121 through 128 are generated when parsing a data element which appears to be numeric including the nondecimal numeric types Invalid character in number An invalid character for the data type being parsed was encountered For example an alpha in a decimal numeric or a 9 in octal data Exponent too large The magnitude of the exponent was larger than 32000 see IEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 Too many digits The mantissa of a decimal numeric data element contained more than 255 digits excluding leading zeros see JEEE 488 2 7 7 2 4 1 553 Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error 554 128 130 131 134 138 140 141 144 148 Numeric data not allowed A legal numeric data element was received but the device does not accept one in this position for the header Suffix error This error as well as errors 131 through 138 are generated when parsing a suffix Invalid suffix The suffix does not follow the syntax described in JEEE 488 2 7 7 3 2 or the suffix is inappropriate for this device Suffix too long The suffix contained more than 12 characters see IEEE 488 2 7 7 3 4 Suffix not allowed
415. or CATaloging a memory card 6 Program development using the rotary knob alone is not recommended 382 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 2 Developing Programs on the Test Set Using the IBASIC EDIT Mode Entering and Exiting the IBASIC EDIT Mode To enter the IBASIC EDIT Mode first position the cursor on the IBASIC Command Line field type the word EDIT on the terminal or PC connected to the Test Set and then press the ENTER key on the terminal or PC At this point the Test Set will fill the PC screen with 22 lines of IBASIC code from the program currently in the Test Set s RAM memory No program lines will be displayed on the Test Set screen If no program is currently in the Test Set s memory the number 10 will be displayed on the terminal or PC screen This represents program line number 10 and is displayed to allow you to begin writing an IBASIC program beginning at line number 10 The annunciator will be displayed in the upper right corner of the Test Set indicating that the IBASIC controller is running to support the full screen edit mode After editing is complete exit the IBASIC EDIT Mode by pressing the terminal or PC s ESCAPE key twice or pressing the SHIFT CANCEL keys on the Test Set A variety of editing commands are supported by the IBASIC EDIT Mode These commands are activated in the Test Set as escape code sequences Most terminals and PC terminal emulat
416. or programs allow function keys to be configured with user defined escape code sequences and user defined labels for the keys An escape command when received by a peripheral device like a printer or the Test Set causes the peripheral to recognize subsequent ASCII characters differently In the case of the Test Set escape sequences are used for executing IBASIC EDIT Mode editing commands For example ESCAPE L causes the Test Set to insert a new line number where the cursor is positioned Table 42 on page 384 lists the editing escape codes for the Test Set There is no escape code for DELETE CHARACTER Use the Backspace key for deleting Use the arrow keys to position the cursor Setting Up Function Keys In Microsoft Windows Terminal NOTE When in the TERMINAL mode click on Settings then Function Keys is ESCAPE in Windows Terminal See Table 42 on page 384 for the escape codes Windows Terminal seems to work best when a mouse is used to access the function keys not the keyboard Also scrolling a program works best when the Terminal window display is maximized 383 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 2 Developing Programs on the Test Set Using the IBASIC EDIT Mode Setting Up Function Keys in Agilent AdvanceLink From the Main highest level screen set up the 8 softkeys as follows 1 Display User Definition screens by pressing Ctrl F9 2 Enter all the LABEL titles for K1 through K8 3 4 Activate the Di
417. ore changing the Attribute Units for a selected measurement the Test Set verifies that all Data Function values can be properly converted from the current unit of measure to the new unit of measure If it is not possible to properly convert all the values to the new unit of measure the Attribute Units are not changed and the following error is generated HP IB Error HP IB Units cause invalid conversion of attr S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS guidelin fb Using the STATe Command The STATe command corresponds to the front panel ON OFF key and is used to programmatically turn measurements instrument functions and data functions ON or OFF Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation Turning measurements instrument functions and data functions ON OFF Use 1 or ON to turn measurements instrument functions or data functions ON Use 0 or OFF to turn measurements instrument functions or data functions OFF For example the following BASIC language statements illustrate the use of the STATe command to turn several measurements instrument functions and data functions ON and OFF Turn off F OUTPUT 714 A Turn OUTPUT 714 M Turn off TX OUTPUT 714 M Turn on REF OUTPUT 714 M source AFGl FG1 FM STAT OFF off REFerence SET data function EAS AFR DISTN REF STAT OFF Power measurement EAS RFER POW STAT 0 SET measurement function for FM Devi
418. orresponding Event Bits Event Register Latched Conditions Event Enable Register Selects which Events can set the Summary Message Bit Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Status Register Model This section explains how the status registers are structured in the Test Set The generalized status register model shown in Figure 5 on page 246 is the basis upon which all the status registers in the Test Set are built The model consists of a Condition Register Transition Filters an Event Register an Enable Register and a Summary Message A set of these registers is called a Status Register Group Condition Register A condition is a Test Set state that is either TRUE or FALSE an GPIB command error has occurred or an GPIB command error has not occurred Each bit in a Condition Register is assigned to a particular Test Set state A Condition Register continuously monitors the hardware and firmware states assigned to it There is no latching or buffering of any bits in a Condition Register it is updated in real time Condition Registers are read only Condition Registers in the Test Set are 16 bits long and may contain unused bits All unused bits return a zero value when read Transition Filters For each bit in the Condition Register the Transition Filters determine which of two bit state transitions will set the corresponding bit in the Event Register Transition Filters may be set to pass positive transitions PTR
419. ot been triggered before attempting to read the measured value The program is attempting to make an FM deviation or AM depth measurement while in the RX TEST screen FM or AM measurements are not available in the RX TEST screen FM or AM measurements are made from the AF Analyzer screen by setting the AF Anl In field to FM or AM Demod S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Chapter 1 Using GPIB Getting Started Guideline 4 Use single quotes and spaces properly The syntax diagrams in Chapter 4 GPIB Commands show where single quotes are needed and where spaces are needed Example OUTPUT 714 DISP lt space gt AFAN OUTPUT 714 AFAN DEMP lt space gt Off Improper use of single quotes and spaces will cause HP IB Error 103 Invalid Separator Guideline 5 Ensure that settable fields are active by using the STATe ON command When making settings to fields that can be turned OFF with the STATe ON OFF command refer to the Chapter 4 GPIB Commands make sure the STATe is ON if the program uses that field Note that if the STATe is OFF just setting a numeric value in the field will not change the STATe to ON This is different than front panel operation whereby the process of selecting the field and entering a value automatically sets the STATe to ON Programmatically fields must be explicitly set to the ON state if they are in the OFF state For example the following comman
420. ote Interface Message Capabilities The remote interface message capabilities of the Test Set and the associated IEEE 488 1 messages and control lines are listed in Table 6 Table 6 Test Set IEEE 488 1 Interface Message Capability IEEE Message Type Implemented Response 488 1 Message Data Yes All front panel functions except those listed in Table 4 DAB on page 47 are programmable The Test Set can send sta END tus byte message and setting information All measure MTA ment results except dashed displays and error MLA messages are available through the bus OTA Remote Yes Remote programming mode is entered when the Remote REN Enable REN bus control line is true and the Test Set is MLA addressed to listen The R annunciator will appear in the upper right corner of the display screen when the Test Set is in remote mode All front panel keys are disabled except for the LOCAL key POWER switch Volume con trol and Squelch control knobs When the Test Set enters remote mode the output signals and internal settings remain unchanged except that triggering is reset to the state it was last set to in remote mode Refer to Trigger ing Measurements on page 224 Local Yes The Test Set returns to local mode full front panel con GTL trol when either the Go To Local GTL bus command is MLA received the front panel LOCAL key is pressed or the REN line goes false When the Test Set returns to local mode the
421. p Length 2Bits P e RPACe K Returns quoted string e XPACe N Xon Xoff gt y P xu None DS Returns quoted string e SINPut Inst PES Serial In IBASIC e l dBECho N Returns quoted string BASIC Echo TECHO W M rd i Inst Echo o TIME D f See Real Number Setting Syntax i i Does not include the DUNits INCRement UNITs or STATe commands 121 Call Processing Call Processing CALLP j CPRocess Y 122 CCHannel D Cntrl Chan ia E CSYStem J System Type VCHannel gt Chan SIDentify SID gt AMPLitude WW CALLP continued See IntegerNumber Setting Syntax Range 1 to 1023 See IntegerNumber Setting Syntax Range 1 to 1023 See IntegerNumber Setting Syntax Range 1 to 4004 See Real Number Setting Syntax Range 18 to 137 dBm gr nes or MODE P MEAS gt PU Display DATA P Returns quoted string CACTive f REGister gt S P PAGE D S CHANDoff RELease A Ne J q ifer V DSPecifer sc gt ae Y Data Spec gt y l lt AMPS gt nae d lt TACS 2 JTACS M Returns quoted string Call Processing CALLP pa xD PNUMber jJ space e lt 10 characters max gt Y Phone Num Returns quoted st
422. p State Error flag amp VALS Parm amp MAINTEN ALI ERT 525 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Example Programs 7200 IF Error_flag THEN 7210 RETURN 0 7220 ELSE 7230 RETURN 1 7240 END IF 7250 FNEND 7260 8000 Print_error SUB Print_error 8010 OPTION BASE 1 8020 COM Io_addresses INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr 8030 COM Prog control INTEGER Oper complete Wait time Error flag 8040 DIM Error_message 255 Error 5 20 8050 INTEGER Std_event N 8060 Error 2 Query 8070 Error 3 Device Dependent 8080 Error 4 Execution 8090 Errors 5 Command 8100 OUTPUT Inst addr ESR 8110 ENTER Inst addr Std event 8120 FOR N 2 TO 5 8130 IF BIT Std event N THEN 8140 PRINT A amp Error N amp error has occurred 8150 OUTPUT Inst addr SYSTem ERRor 8160 ENTER Inst addr Error number Error message 8170 PRINT Error number Error message 8180 END IF 8190 NEXT N 8200 IF BINAND Std event 195 THEN 8210 BEEP 8220 PRINT Unrecognized condition Standard Event register Std event 8230 END IF 8240 STOP 8250 SUBEND 8260 10000 Read rcdd data SUB Read rcdd data Fields 10010 OPTION BASE 1 10020 COM Io addresses INTE
423. pied to another memory card as follows Insert the memory card containing the file to be copied LOAD or GET the desired file from the memory card into the Test Set Remove the original memory card Insert the destination memory card in the Test Set STORE or SAVE the file to the destination memory card Copying an Entire Volume An entire volume can be copied from one mass storage device to the same type of mass storage device using the volume copy form of the COPY command The destination volume must be as large as or larger than the source volume The directory and any files on the destination volume are destroyed The directory size on the destination volume becomes the same size as the source media Disc to disc copy time is dependent on the mass storage device type The volume copy form of the COPY command was designed to copy like media to like media and like file systems to like file systems For example to copy the entire contents of one internal RAM disk to another internal RAM disk execute the following IBASIC command from the TESTS IBASIC Controller command line COPY MEMORY 0 0 TO MEMORY 0 1 1 See Storing Code Files on page 338 for information about the LOAD GET STORE and SAVE commands 347 Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Copying Files Using IBASIC Commands NOTE 348 Using the volume copy form of the COPY command can produce unexpected results For example using the vo
424. previous program has set the state to OFF the measurement will not be available Attempting to read from a measurement field that is not in the ON state will cause HP IB Error 420 Query UNTERMINATED 6 Ifthe trigger mode has been changed trigger a reading NOTE Triggering is set to FULL SETTling and REPetitive RETRiggering after receipt of the RST Common Command These settings cause the Test Set to trigger itself and a separate trigger command is not necessary 38 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Chapter 1 Using GPIB Getting Started 7 Send the MEASure query command to initiate a reading This will place the measured value into the Test Set s Output Queue NOTE When making AF Analyzer SINAD Distortion Signal to Noise Ratio AF Frequency DC Level or Current measurements the measurement type must first be selected using the SELect command For example MEAS AFR SEL SINAD followed by MEAS AFR SINAD 8 Use the ENTER statement to transfer the measured value to a variable within the context of the program The following example program illustrates how to make settings and then take a reading from the Test Set This setup takes a reading from the spectrum analyzer marker after tuning it to the RF generator s output frequency Example 10 Addr 714 20 OUTPUT Addr RST Preset to known state 30 UTPUT Addr TRIG MODE RETR SING Sets single trigger 40 UTPUT Addr DISP RFG
425. propriate received data field to obtain the displayed information string Information Strings Available When A Decoding Error Occurs Information Strings Displayed ir iex 5 oo error data received from lt channel type gt word 1 RCDDI 30 characters max word 2 RCDD2 40 characters max word 3 RCDD3 30 characters max word 4 RCDD4 40 characters max word 5 RCDD5 40 characters max word 6 RCDD6 40 characters max 447 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen 448 Reading The Received Data Fields To read the decoded data messages received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel or reverse voice channel or the raw data message bits displayed when a decoding error occurs the control program queries one some or all of the six received data fields The information in each field is returned exactly as displayed on the CRT The information is returned to the control program as a quoted string This is an example The received data fields are read only data fields The RCDD1 through RCDD6 query commands are used to read the contents of the six received data fields Syntax RCDD 1 6 Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP RCDD1 ENTER 714 Rcv data Setting the Display Field to Meas When the Display field is set to Meas the top right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen is used to display modulation quality measurements made on the
426. pter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Clearing the Event Register The EVENT register is cleared whenever it is queried or whenever the Common Command CLS is sent to the Test Set Reading the Enable Register Syntax STATus CALibration ENABle Example OUTPUT 714 STAT CAL ENAB ENTER 714 Register value Writing the Enable Register Syntax STATus CALibration ENABle integer Example OUTPUT 714 STAT CAL ENAB 256 Clearing the Enable Register The ENABLE register is cleared by writing to it with an integer value of zero 279 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Hardware Status Register 2 Group The Hardware Status Register 2 Group contains information about the Test Set s hardware This status group is accessed using the STATus commands The Hardware Status Register 2 Group uses 16 bit registers and includes a Condition Register Transition Filters an Event Register an Enable Register and a Summary Message Refer to the Status Reporting Structure Overview on page 239 for a discussion of status register operation Figure 15 shows the structure and STATus commands for the Hardware Status Register 2 Group STATus HARDware2 CONDition PTRansition integer STATus HARDware2 2 NTRansition lt integer gt STATus HARDware2 EVENt STATus HARDware2 ENABle integer Summary Message Bit Logical OR
427. quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string CALLP Y RED gt RECD gt Word D J Dig 6 NAWComing NAWO DIGI 6DIGITI Hop NX DIG2 LK Mig 2 DIGIT Y D gt 7 lt J ie 3 j P3 Py lt Dig 4 2 DIG5 Wig 5 DIGITS Y DIG6 7 ILI A Wig 7 y DIG8 D gt PAR ity Ma CALLP continued DIGIT8 j lt Dig 8 5 Parity iuc Call Processing Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string 127 Call Processing CALLP a 128 RECE i Word E N ry gt Z NAWComing T NAWC DIGI la Dig 9 Se DIGIT9 DIGIO DIGIT10 DIGI1 DIGIT11 DIG 12 DIGIT12 DIGI3 DIGIT13 DIG14 DIGIT14 Z a DIG15 SH DIGITIS _ DIG16 SA DIGITI6 PARity Ma CAL
428. r query command is used to query the contents of the left hand field There is no command form of the AVCNumber query Syntax AVCNumber Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP AVCN ENTER 714 Active vc number The right hand field highlighted field is used to set the voice channel number which will be assigned to the mobile station by the Test Set as either an initial voice channel assignment or as a handoff voice channel assignment The VCHannel command is used to control the right hand subfield The query form of the command that is VCHannle can be used to determine the current voice channel setting Syntax VCHannel real number VCHannel Example 442 OUTPUT 714 CALLP VCH 215 OUTPUT 714 CALLP VCH ENTER 714 Vch number S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Cntl Channel NOTE Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen This field is used to set the control channel number used by the Test Set The CCHannel command is used to control this field The Cntl Channel field is an immediate action field That is whenever the CCHannel command is sent the change is reflected immediately in the physical configuration of the Test Set the control channel is immediately deactivated reconfigured and then reactivated to reflect the change and causes an immediate change to the current state of the Call Processing Subsystem the state is set
429. r a queried value can always be determined using the UNITs command or AUNits command respectively refer to Number Measurement Syntax on page 177 or Multiple Number Measurement Syntax on page 179 for command syntax The letters and symbols at the top right corner of the display indicate these conditions 42 R indicates the Test Set is in remote mode The Test Set can be put into the remote mode by an external controller or by an IBASIC program running on the built in IBASIC controller L indicates that the Test Set has been addressed to Listen T indicates that the Test Set has been addressed to Talk S indicates that the Test Set has sent the Require Service message by setting the Service Request SRQ bus line true See Status Reporting on page 239 C indicates that the Test Set is currently the Active Controller on the bus indicates that an IBASIC program is running indicates that an IBASIC program is waiting for a user response indicates that an IBASIC program is paused S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Chapter 1 Using GPIB Getting Started Preparing the Test Set For GPIB Use 1 If other GPIB devices are in the system attach a GPIB cable from the Test Set s rear panel GPIB connector to any one of the other devices in the test system 2 Access the I O CONFIGURE screen and perform the following steps a Set the Test Set s GPIB address using the HP IB Adrs field
430. r can unconditionally demand control of the bus through the IFC line This controller is referred to as the System Controller There can be only one System Controller connected to the bus at any time As a means of ensuring orderly communications in environments where more than one controller is connected to the bus the rules state that only one Controller can be actively addressing talkers and listeners at any given time This device is referred to as the Active Controller The System Controller is the default Active Controller on power up or after a bus reset Controllers which are not the Active Controller are referred to as Non Active Controllers The Active Controller can pass control of device addressing to one of the Non Active Controllers Additionally Non Active Controllers can request control from the Active Controller The process by which the Active Controller passes device addressing responsibility to a Non Active Controller is referred to as Passing Control The Active Controller must first address the prospective new Active Controller to Talk after which it sends the Take Control Talker TCT message across the bus If the other Controller accepts the message it assumes the role of Active Controller and the previous Active Controller becomes a Non Active Controller The Test Set has bus control capability Active Non Active Controller Additionally the Test Set can be also be configured as the System Controller By definition the
431. r contained invalid header syntax Macro parameter error Indicates that the macro definition improperly used a macro parameter placeholder see IEEE 468 2 10 7 3 Macro definition too long Indicates that a syntactically legal macro program data sequence could not be executed because the string of block contents were too long for the device to handle see JEEE 488 2 10 7 6 1 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errormsg fb Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error 276 277 278 280 281 282 283 284 285 Macro recursion error Indicates that a syntactically legal macro program data sequence could not be executed because the device found it to be recursive see JEEE 468 2 10 7 6 6 Macro redefinition not allowed Indicates that syntactically legal macro label in the DMC command could not be executed because the macro label was already defined see IEEE 488 2 10 7 6 4 Macro header not found Indicates that a syntactically legal macro label in the GMC query could not be executed because the header was not previously defined Program error Indicates that a downloaded program related execution error occurred Cannot create program Indicates that an attempt to create a program was unsuccessful A reason for the failure might include not enough memory Illegal program name The name used to reference a program was invalid For example
432. r dashes indicate that no carrier is present to measure See Measure on page 147 for programming command syntax This field displays the frequency error error assigned carrier frequency measured carrier frequency of the carrier being transmitted by the mobile station Four dashes indicates that there is no carrier frequency present to measure See Measure on page 147 for programming command syntax This field displays the measured RF power of the carrier being transmitted by the mobile station Four dashes indicates that there is no carrier present to measure See Measure on page 147 for programming command syntax 513 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the ANALOG MEAS Screen Example Measurement Routines 514 There are a wide variety of audio measurements which can be made from the ANALOG MEAS screen The following examples illustrate how to make a typical mobile station receiver measurement RF Sensitivity and a typical mobile station transmitter measurement FM Hum and Noise Refer to the HP 8920A RF Communications Test Set Applications Handbook section Testing FM Radios for further information on using the Test Set s Audio Analyzer to make audio measurements Example RF Sensitivity Measurement The following example code segment shows how to program the ANALOG MEAS screen to make an RF Sensitivity measurement The code segment represents a HP
433. r radio systems currently in use today Users can also develop their own IBASIC programs for automated radio testing This chapter is designed to provide the programmer with the information needed to develop IBASIC programs for use on the built in IBASIC controller Refer to the individual Agilent 11807 software manuals for information on using the IBASIC controller with Agilent Technologies supplied software S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller The IBASIC Controller Screen The IBASIC Controller Screen The Test Set has a dedicated screen for interfacing with the built in IBASIC controller This is the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen as shown in Figure 23 This screen is accessed as follows Select the front panel TESTS key The TESTS Main Menu screen will be displayed Using the rotary knob position the cursor on the IBASTC field in the lower center of the screen e Push the rotary knob and the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen will be displayed TESTS IBRSIC Controller Continue ch6drw1 drw Figure 23 The IBASIC Controller Screen 355 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller The IBASIC Controller Screen 356 The TESTS IBASIC Controller screen can be accessed programmatically by sending the following command OUTPUT 714 DISP TIBasic The TESTS IBASIC Controller screen is divided into several areas which are used by the IBASIC controller for differen
434. r register group is TRUE logic 1 its assigned bit in the Status Byte Register will also be TRUE If the Summary Bit from a particular register group is FALSE logic 0 its assigned bit in the Status Byte Register will also be FALSE A Status Register Group Summary Message Bit may be summarized indirectly to the Status Byte Register through a Status Register Group which is summarized directly into the Status Byte Register 241 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Communicate Status Register Group Calibration Status Register Group Call Processing Status Register Group Operation Status Register Group Request Service Message Standard Event Status Register O utput Queue Questionable Data Signal Register Group Unused in HP 8920 Hardware Status Register 2 Group Hardware Status Register 1 Group Read by Serial Poll RQS Status Byte Register Read by STB Master Summary Status Message ch4drw2 ds4 Figure 4 Status Byte Register Table 17 details the Status Byte Register bit assignments and their associated meaning 242 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Table 17 Status Byte Register Bit Assignments Bit Binary o Number Weighting Condition Comment 7 128 Operation Status Register 1 one or more of the enabled events have Group Summary Message occurred since the last reading or cl
435. r sum msg BINAND Stat byte reg 64 mask out the Stat Byte 70 PRINT Mstr sum msg 80 END Example response 32 0 Writing the Status Byte Register The Status Byte Register is a read only register and is altered only when the state of the Summary Messages from the overlaying data structures are altered Clearing the Status Byte Register The CLS Common Command clears all Event Registers and Queues so that their corresponding Summary Messages are cleared The Output Queue and its MAV Summary Message are an exception and are unaffected by the CLS Common Command Status Register Structure Overview The structure of the register groups used in the Test Set is based upon the status data structures outlined in the IEEE 488 and SCPI 1994 0 Standards There are two types of status data structures used in the Test Set status registers and status queues The general models components and operation of each type of status data structure are explained in the following sections 245 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Test Set States Continuously Monitored A E Logical OR EE ere EX E EJ Summary Message ch4drw3 ds4 Bit Figure 5 Status Data Structure Register Model 246 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Positive Transition Filter Negative Transition Filter Positive and Negative Transition Filters select which transitions of Condition Bits will set c
436. r the mobile station registered correctly In the manual user interface the annunciators supply this state information to the operator In the remote user interface the Call Processing Status Register Group supplies the state information to the control program The control program can access this information in one of two ways by polling the status registers or by using the service request feature of the HP IB If properly implemented either method can be used to obtain the information 435 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Using the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface 436 Advantages Disadvantages of Polling Polling has the advantage that the control program can react quicker to the change in state since the control program does not have to execute the code necessary to determine what condition caused the service request line to be asserted Polling has the disadvantage that if improperly implemented it can prevent the Call Processing Subsystem from properly interfacing with the mobile station The Test Set has a multitasking architecture wherein multiple processes execute on a priority driven and event driven basis One of the highest priority processes is the process that services the HP IB If a control program constantly polls the status registers to determine when a particular state is true that state may take a very long time to go true or it may never go to the true state This is becau
437. rate the basic approach to controlling the Test Set through the GPIB The punctuation and command syntax used for these examples is given in Chapter 4 GPIB Commands The bus address 714 used in the following BASIC language examples assumes a GPIB interface at select code 7 and a Test Set GPIB address of 14 All examples assume an external controller is being used To Change a Field s Setting over GPIB 1 Use the DISPlay command to access the screen containing the field whose setting is to be changed 2 Make the desired setting using the proper command syntax refer to Chapter 4 GPIB Commands for proper syntax The following example makes several instrument setting changes Example OU OU OU OU OU PU PU PU PU PU 714 DISP RFG Display the RF Generator screen 714 RFG FREQ 850 MHZ Set the RF Gen Freq to 850 MHz 714 RFG OUTP DUPL Set the Output Port to Duplex 714 DISP AFAN Display the AF Analyzer screen 714 AFAN INP FM DEMOD Set the AF Anl In to FM Demod To Read a Field s Setting over GPIB37 1 Usethe DISPlay command to access the screen containing the field whose setting is to be read 2 Use the Query form of the syntax for that field to place the setting value into the Test Set s output buffer 3 Enter the value into the correct variable type within the program context refer to Chapter 4 GPIB Commands for proper variable type
438. rd for more information on using these commands Arming Hardware Triggered Measurements NOTE Some measurements such as the Tone Sequence Decoder require an external signal to trigger the measurement These measurements require that the measurement be armed in order for it to be triggered by the external signal The TRIGger IMMediate command is used to arm these types of measurements within the Test Set When the trigger mode is set to RETRigger SINGle the measurement must be re armed after each measurement cycle When the trigger mode is set to RETRigger REPetitive the measurement is continually re armed after each measurement cycle Bus Lock Up If the required triggering signalis not received or if the signal level is incorrect the measurement will not trigger and the measurement cycle will not complete If a measurement cycle does not successfully obtain a valid measurement result it will continue to try until it does an external trigger is detected or until the measurement trigger is aborted This is true for both retriggering modes This has the consequence that both the GPIB bus and the Active Controller handshake are in a temporary holdoff state while the Active Controller waits to read the measurement result from the Test Set The control program should include measurement time out routines that CLEAR the bus and ABORt the trigger if a measurement does not complete within a specified amount of time This provides a meth
439. reen Message Field Descriptions REG INC Message Fields Registration Increment Global Action Message ACT REGINCR OHD P i 1 arity 100110010010 Figure 48 REG INC Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message 2 binary characters required DCC Digital color code field 2 binary characters required ACT Global Action Field 4 binary characters required 494 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc f REGINCR RSVD END OHD Parity Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions Registration increment field 12 binary characters required Reserved for future use all bits must be set as indicated 4 binary characters required End indication field e Set to 1 to indicate the last word of the overhead message train e Set to 0 if not the last word 1 binary character required This field displays the overhead message type e A 100 indicates a global action message e A 110 indicates this is the first word of the system parameter overhead parameter message e A 111 indicates this is the second word of the system parameter overhead message 3 binary character required Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 495 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Pr
440. reen is currently displayed Call Processing Screen Mnemonics Screen Mnemonic CALL CONTROL ACNT CALL DATA CDAT CALL BIT CBIT CALL CONFIGURE CCNF ANALOG MEAS CME Syntax DISPlay screen mnemonic DISPlay Example OUTPUT 714 DISP ACNT OUTPUT 714 DISP ENTER 714 Screen 431 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Using the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface Command Syntax The Call Processing Subsystem programming commands and command syntax are detailed in Call Processing on page 122 Refer to the Programming the screen name Screen sections in this chapter for detailed information on using the Call Processing Subsystem programming commands for each screen CAUTION The OPC OPC and WAI commands should not be used for determining if a Call Processing Subsystem state command has completed successfully Call Processing Subsystem states do not complete a state is either active or not active Using the OPC OPC or WAI commands with a Call Processing Subsystem state command results in a deadlock condition Refer to the OPC OPC and WAI commands in section Common Command Descriptions on page 245 for descriptions of the deadlock conditions The OPC OPC or WAI commands should not be used with any of the following Call Processing Subsystem commands ACTive REGister PAGE HANDoff RELease The Call
441. rement that is not currently available or tries to access an instrument connected to the external GPIB without configuring the Test Set as the System Controller When diagnosing the cause of an error condition check for these conditions first 548 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errormsg fb Text Only GPIB Errors Un numbered text only GPIB error messages are generally self explanatory For example trying to retrieve a saved register that does not exist generates the following error message HP IB Error Register does not exist The following list contains a subset of the Test Set s text only GPIB error messages These messages represent error conditions which may require explanation in addition to the error message text HP IB Error during Procedure catalog Check Config This error occurs when the Test Set fails to access an external GPIB disk drive when trying to obtain a catalog of procedure files This would occur when the Select Procedure Location field on the TESTS Main Menu screen is set to Disk and the operator then tries to select a procedure filename using the Select Procedure FIlename field Ensure that the Mode field on the I O CONFIGURE screen is set to Control and that the External Disk Specification field on the TESTS External Devices screen has the correct mass storage volume specifier for the external disk drive HP IB Query Error Check instrument state This message usually appears when t
442. restrictions 339 file descriptions 420 file relationships 421 screens 422 writing programs for 420 TestSet file name entry field width 335 579 file names see also DOS amp LIF file names 335 Trigger HP IB command syntax diagram 173 HP IB commands 228 Trigger aborting 228 Trigger event 224 Trigger modes 225 229 affect on measurement speed 230 default settings 227 Local Remote Triggering Changes 22T retriggering 225 229 settings for fastest measurements 230 settings for most reliable measure ments 230 settling 226 229 trigger TRG 221 Triggering measurements 224 TX Pwr Zero CALL CONFIGURE screen 519 580 U Uploading programs from Test Set to ex ternal controller 417 Uploading programs from Test Set to PC 392 Uploading programs to Test Set 380 V voice channel assignment 442 Volume copy 347 Index W X wait to complete WAI 219 Xon Xoff 366 Wildcards 348 word abbreviated address 468 extended address 470 first word of called address 473 reverse voice channel order confirma tion message 475 second word of called address 474 serial number 472 Word processor 385 configuring for program development 385 transferring programs to Test Set 387 writing lines of IBASIC code 386 Write protect switch 343 Index 581
443. result 390 Set the trigger mode to repetitive retriggering Setting the trigger mode to repetitive will be implementation dependent 400 Re enable event initiated branching If any event initiated branches were logged while the Measure function was executing they will be executed when system priority permits 410 Exit the Measure function and return the result value 430 Check to see if the measurement result time out value has been equaled or exceeded If it has the polling loop will be exited 440 The following lines of code handle the case where the request for a measurement result has timed out because the polling loop has completed with no result available 450 Set up a timeout for any I O activity on the GPIB while the control program is trying to regain control of the Test Set This will allow the function to gracefully stop program execution if the control program cannot regain control of the Test Set This timeout should only occur if there is some type of hardware failure either in the Test Set or the external controller which prevents them from communicating via GPIB 460 Send a Selected Device Clear SDC to the Test Set to put the GPIB subsystem into a known state This allows the control program to regain programmatic control of the Test Set 470 Command the Test Set to abort the currently executing measurement cycle Set the trigger mode back to repetitive retriggerin
444. ric value in scientific notation For example 3 00000000000E 000 3 00000000000E 000 3 00000000000E 000 etc Array values are sent by varying the rightmost dimension of the array the fastest If an attempt is made to query the value of a numeric variable or array and no IBASIC program is in the Test Set an IBASIC Error 283 Illegal variable name is generated If an attempt is made to query the value of a numeric variable or array and the variable specified in lt varname gt does not exist in the program an IBASIC Error 283 Illegal variable name is generated S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem Syntax PROGram SELected NUMBer lt varname gt NOTE The program commands and syntax used to enter data from the Test Set into the external controller will depend upon the programming language used in the external controller Considerations such as type conversion integer to real real to complex etc the sequence in which values are entered into arrays the capability to fill an entire array with a single enter statement etc will depend upon the capabilities of the programming language used in the external controller The examples which follow represent the capabilities of Rocky Mountain BASIC programming language running on an HP 9000 300 Series Controller Example querying the value of a simple variable OUTPUT 714 PROGram SELected NUMBer Variable ENT
445. rimary Call Processing Subsystem screen It contains the most often used Test Set configuration fields and the command fields used to initiate call processing functions When lit the Access annunciator indicates that the Test Set is signaling the mobile station with command information on the forward voice channel This is a transitory state The Access annunciator is not programmable The state of the Access annunciator is reflected in the Call Processing Status Register Group Condition Register bit 4 See Status Reporting in the User s Guide for further information The Test Set s speaker is turned off when in the Access state This is done to eliminate any possible audio feedback which may occur if the mobile station s microphone is open 439 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen Active Active 440 This field is used to turn on the forward control channel of the Test Set or to force a return to the Active state from any other state Register Page Access Connect If the forward control channel of the Test Set is already active sending the ACTive command will deactivate and then reactivate the control channel The ACTive command is used to control this field There is no query form of the ACTive command Syntax ACTive Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP ACT When lit the Active annunciator indicates that the control channel of the Test Set is t
446. ring cMINumber _ lt lt space gt C lt 9 characters max gt C Min Returns quoted string CMA Ximum See IntegerNumber Setting Syntax CMAX _ Range 1 to 4049 SATone D B lt 5970Hz gt Y SAT E 6000Hz M lt 6030Hz Da 0 Returns quoted string VMACode See IntegerNumber Setting Syntax l Pwr Lvl Range 0 to 7 NMODe__ ve pace oe J EON nue gt MS Id lt gt 1 Returns quoted string NW CALLP continued 123 Call Processing CALLP s 124 ORDer Order MESSage gt Set Message EN DATA Display Word Ma CALLP continued ESA Oye ChngPLO gt C e lt ChngPLI gt lt ChmgPL2 gt lt ChmgPL3 gt M Chng PL 4 A Chng PL 5 27 lt ChngPL6 YX lt ChmgPL7 YX lt lt Mainten gt lt Alert gt Returns quoted string O0 SPCWORDI gt C lt SPC WORD2 gt aa ACCESS DS REG INC DS lt REG ID J C FILMESS Z lt MSWORDI gt lt MSMessOrd gt lt MSIntVCh gt lt FVCOMes gt lt FVCVMes y Returns quoted string mpa e RECCWA gt O o x lt RECCWB gt lt RECCWC gt lt RECCWD gt M RECCW E J we RVCORDCON Z Returns quoted string CALLP uh V RCDDI RCDDATA1 w4 gt X ec RESer
447. rnal controller to the Test Set will depend upon the programming language used in the external controller The examples which follow represent the capabilities of Rocky Mountain BASIC programming language running on an HP 9000 300 Series Controller NOTE When a PROGram Subsystem command is sent to the Test Set through GPIB from an external controller the Test Set is put into REMOTE mode The Test Set must be put in LOCAL mode to use the front panel keys or to use the serial ports to input data into the IBASIC Command line 414 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSiibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem Entering a new IBASIC program line IBASIC program lines can be entered directly into the Test Set s RAM memory one line at a time from an external controller using the PROGram EXECute command as follows PROG EXEC lt new program line number program line gt where new program line number program line represents a valid IBASIC program line For example to enter the following new program line into the Test Set 20 A 3 14 execute the following command from the external controller OUTPUT 714 PROG EXEC 20 A 3 14 Quoted strings such as those used in PRINT commands must use double quotes For example OUTPUT 714 PROG EXEC 30 PRINT TEST Editing an existing IBASIC program line Existing IBASIC program lines which are resident in the Test Set s RA
448. rogrammed through the GPIB bus a hard copy list of the default condition for every field in every instrument screen would be cumbersome The recommended method of determining the default condition for every field in a particular instrument screen is to select the PRESET key display the instrument screen of interest and view the contents of the fields Apart from the individual instruments it is important from a programmatic perspective to know the default conditions of the I O configuration of the Test Set and how it may be affected by the various methods of initialization Seven screens are used to control the I O configuration of the Test Set CONFIGURE screen I O CONFIGURE screen PRINT CONFIGURE screen TESTS Main Menu screen TESTS Execution Conditions screen TESTS External Devices screen TESTS Printer Setup screen The following sections discuss how the various methods of initialization affect these seven screens as well as the Status Reporting Structure of the Test Set 303 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Instrument Initialization Methods of Initialization Power On Reset 304 There are six methods of initializing the Test Set Power On Reset Front panel PRESET key RST IEEE 488 2 Common Command Device Clear DCL GPIB Bus Command Selected Device Clear SDC GPIB Bus Command Interface Clear IFC GPIB Bus Command When the Test Set is initialized some fields are restored put back to their defaul
449. rs are unaffected by a CLS clear status command or queries The Transitions Filters are set to pass positive transitions PTR at power on and after receiving the RST reset command all 16 bits of the PTR register set to 1 and all 16 bits of the NTR register set to 0 Event Register The Event Register captures bit state transitions in the Condition Register as defined by the Transition Filters Each bit in the Event Register corresponds to a bit in the Condition Register or if there is no Condition Register Transition Filter combination each bit corresponds to a specific condition in the Test Set Bits in the Event Register are latched and once set they remain set until cleared by a query of the Event Register or a CLS clear status command This guarantees that the application can t miss a bit state transition in the Condition Register There is no buffering so while an event bit is set subsequent transitions in the Condition Register corresponding to that bit are ignored Event Registers are read only Event Registers in the Test Set are either 8 or 16 bits long and may contain unused bits All unused bits return a zero value when read Event Enable Register The Event Enable Register defines which bits in the Event Register will be used to generate the Summary Message Each bit in the Enable Register has a corresponding bit in the Event Register The Test Set logically ANDs corresponding bits in the Event and Enable registers and t
450. rts the IBASIC Command Line field will intensify and characters will scroll in left to right As each line is finished the annunciator will be displayed for about 0 5 seconds in the upper right corner of the Test Set indicating that the IBASIC controller is running as the line is parsed If another line is sent before this parsing is complete the Test Set will beep indicating an error and the next line of the transfer will be rejected If the transfer is rejected the transfer must be halted and the delay between lines increased to a slightly higher number Start the transfer again from the beginning When all lines have transferred list the program to verify it was completely received At this time the program is ready to run The RUN command can be keyed in from the PC or the K1 Run key in the TESTS IBASIC Controller screen can be pressed NOTE Do not press the Run Test key in the TESTS Main Menu screen as this will scratch the program you just loaded and look to the memory card for a procedure file For longer programs greater than 100 lines transferring the ASCII text file directly into the IBASIC program memory through the RS 232 serial port is too time consuming To speed the process up it is necessary to transfer the program using a two step process 1 Transfer the ASCII text file directly to a Test Set mass storage location typically an SRAM card 2 Perform a GET command to bring the program from mass storage in
451. s Hardware Terminal Emulator Software PC Serial Port Configuration Refer to Figure 26 on page 364 for connection details Connect the Test Set s Serial Port 9 to a serial I O input output port on the PC On many PCs a serial port is available as either a 25 pin DB 25 female connector or a 9 pin DB 9 male connector This port can be configured as COMI COM2 COM3 or COMA communications port 1 2 3 or 4 depending on the installed PC hardware and user defined setup Refer to the instructions shipped with the PC for hardware and software configuration information Terminal Emulator Configuration Information A terminal emulator is an application program running on the PC that communicates with one of the serial communication ports installed in the PC It provides a bi directional means of sending and receiving ASCII characters to the Test Set s serial port In general a terminal emulator enables the PC to act like a dedicated computer terminal This type of terminal was used before PCs to allow remote users to communicate through RS232 with central mainframe computers An ANSI compatible terminal like the Digital Equipment Corporation VT 100 can be used to directly communicate with the Test Set PC terminal emulation application programs have been designed to have setup fields much like these older technology terminals 367 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports 368
452. s Built in IBASIC Controller The default mass storage location for the built in IBASIC Controller is the front panel memory card slot mass storage volume specifier INTERNAL 4 after any of the following conditions e power up initializing RAM with the SERVICE screen s RAM Initialize function The mass storage location for the built in IBASIC Controller can be changed using the MASS STORAGE IS command Refer to the Instrument BASIC Users Handbook for further information on the MASS STORAGE IS command Save Recall Registers The default mass storage location for the Save Recall registers is the Test Set s internal RAM no mass storage volume specifier after any of the following conditions e power up initializing RAM with the SERVICE screen s RAM Initialize function resetting the Test Set using the front panel PRESET key e resetting the Test Set using the RST GPIB Common Command The mass storage location for Save Recall registers can be changed using the Save Reca11 field in the I O CONFIGURE screen The default mass storage volume specifiers for the Save Recall register mass storage locations are as follows Internal selection no mass storage volume specifier registers are saved to allocated RAM space e Card selection not changeable INTERNAL 4 e RAM selection not changeable MEMORY 0 0 Disk selection the External Disk Specification field in the TESTS External Devices screen 331 C
453. s Reporting 244 Reading with a Serial Poll The contents of the Status Byte Register can be read by a serial poll from the Active Controller in response to some device on the bus sending the Service Request SRQ message When read with a serial poll bit 6 in the Status Byte Register represents the Request Service RQS condition Bit 6 is TRUE logic 1 if the Test Set is sending the Service Request SRQ message and FALSE logic 0 if it is not Bits 0 5 and bit 7 are defined as shown in Table 17 on page 5 243 When read by a serial poll the RQS bit is cleared set to 0 so that the ROS message will be FALSE if the Test Set is polled again before a new reason for requesting service has occurred Bits 0 5 and bit 7 are unaffected by a serial poll Reading with the STB Common Command The contents of the Status Byte Register can be read by the application program using the STB Common Command When read with the STB Common Command bit 6 represents the Master Summary Status MSS message The MSS message is the inclusive OR of the bitwise combination excluding bit 6 of the Status Byte Register and the Service Request Enable Register For a discussion of Summary Messages see Status Register Structure Overview on page 245 Bit 6 is TRUE logic 1 if the Test Set has at least one reason for requesting service and FALSE logic 0 if it does not Bits 0 5 and bit 7 are defined as shown in Table 17 on page 5 243 When read by the STB Common
454. s occurred while trying to read the Test Set s Output Error Queue The following events cause a query error a An attempt is being made to read data from the Output Queue when no data is present or pending b Data in the Output Queue has been lost An example of this would be Output Queue overflow 1 2 Request 1 The Test Set is requesting permission to become the Active Control Controller on the GPIB bus 0 1 Operation 1 The Test Set has completed all selected pending operations and is Complete ready to accept new commands This bit is only generated in response to the OPC IEEE 488 2 Common Command The following sections show the syntax and give programming examples using the Instrument BASIC programming language for the Common Commands used to access the Standard Event Status Register Group s registers Reading the Event Register Syntax ESR 258 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Example OUTPUT 714 ESR ENTER 714 Register_value The ESR query allows the programmer to determine the current contents bit pattern of the Standard Event Status Register The Test Set responds to the ESR query by placing the binary weighted decimal value of the Standard Event Status Register bit pattern into the Output Queue The decimal value of the bit pattern will be a positive integer in the range of 0 to 255 The response data is obtained by readin
455. s set to single retriggering consecutive queries of the same measurement with no intervening trigger event will return the same value Measurements that rely on external signals or hardware generated events such as the DTMF Decoder must be re armed with a new trigger command before another measurement can be made 2 Repetitive retriggering causes the measurement cycle to immediately start over once a valid measurement result has been obtained No trigger event must be received to start the measurement again Repetitive retriggering will cause measurements that rely on external signals or hardware generated events such as the DTMF Decoder to be re armed upon completion of a measurement cycle a valid measurement result has been obtained When the trigger mode is set to repetitive retriggering consecutive queries of the same measurement return new measured values NOTE If a measurement cycle does not successfully obtain a valid measurement result it will continue to try until it does or the measurement trigger is aborted This is true for both retriggering modes 225 Triggering Measurements Settling Settling refers to the amount of delay introduced to allow signal transients to propagate through the analysis chain and settle out There are two options 1 Full settling introduces the appropriate delay for all signal transients which might have occurred at the front panel at just the same time as the trigger event to pass throug
456. s the Test Set to reset at address 814 A second method is to assign an I O path to the desired I O port For example To control device 14 on the port with select code 7 20 Establishes IO path to select code 7 address 14 10 ASSIGN Device TO 714 30 Commands Test Set to reset at address 714 20 OUTPUT Device RST To change the address simply change line 10 to 10 ASSIGN Device TO 800 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb NOTE Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 1 Program Development on an External BASIC Language Computer The dedicated GPIB interface at select code 8 conforms to the IEEE 488 2 Standard in all respects but one The difference being that each instrument on the bus does not have a unique address The Instrument Control Hardware determines which instrument is being addressed with the command syntax As such an explicit device address does not have to be specified The address 800 and 814 are equally correct Downloading Programs to the Test Set through GPIB An IBASIC PROGram subsystem has been developed to allow the external BASIC language controller to download programs to the Test Set through GPIB refer to the PROGram Subsystem Commands on page 398 for more information on the PROGram Subsystem Four commands from the external BASIC language controller to the Test Set are necessary to transfer the program The commands are executed serially allowing enough time for ea
457. se the process which would cause that state to go true will take a long time to complete or never complete because it is constantly being interrupted by the HP IB service process This condition may cause problems with the timing of the message protocol between the Test Set and the mobile station Therefore care must be exercised when using the polling technique to allow enough time between polls for processes to execute within the Test Set Some computer systems and or programming languages may not support the service request feature of the HP IB and consequently polling would be the only technique available to the programmer When using a polling technique be sure to include a delay in the polling loop Advantages Disadvantages of Using Service Request The service request feature of the HP IB has the advantage that it allows the Call Processing Subsystem to execute at its maximum speed since processes within the subsystem are not being constantly interrupted by the need to service the HP IB The service request feature of the HP IB has the disadvantage that it takes more code to implement within the control program The consequence of which is a slight reduction in the overall throughput of the control program since more code must be executed to accomplish the same task See Setting Up and Enabling SRQ Interrupts on page 294 for information on using the service request method The choice of which technique to use polling or service
458. sed to the Measure function to the Test Set 330 Read the measurement result 340 Set the trigger mode to repetitive retriggering Setting the trigger mode to repetitive will be implementation dependent 350 Re enable event initiated branching If any event initiated branches were logged while the Measure function was executing they will be executed when system priority permits 62 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS measrsit fb Table 7 Chapter 2 Methods For Reading Measurement Results HP BASIC ON TIMEOUT Example Program Comments for Measure Function from ON TIMEOUT Example Program Continued Program Line Number Comments 360 Exit the Measure function and return the result value 370 The following lines of code handle the case where the request for a measurement result has timed out 380 Set up a timeout for any I O activity on the GPIB while the control program is trying to regain control of the Test Set This will allow the function to gracefully stop program execution if the control program cannot regain control of the Test Set This timeout should only occur if there is some type of hardware failure either in the Test Set or the external controller which prevents them from communicating via GPIB 390 Send a Selected Device Clear SDC to the Test Set to put the GPIB subsystem into a known state This allows the control program to regain progr
459. settings to values that can be converted to the new units of measure Refer to Changing Attribute Units on page 83 for more details S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS errormsg fb Numbered GPIB Error Descriptions NOTE The following GPIB errors can be generated under any of the following conditions controlling the Test Set with an IBASIC program running on the built in IBASIC controller controlling GPIB devices instruments connected to the Test Set s external GPIB bus with an IBASIC program running on the built in IBASIC controller controlling the Test Set with a program running on an external controller using the Test Set manually to print to an external GPIB printer e using the Test Set manually to access procedure library code files stored on an external GPIB disk GPIB Parser The term Parser is used in the following error message descriptions It refers to the Test Set s GPIB command parser 551 Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error 552 100 101 102 103 104 105 108 109 Command error This code indicates only that a Command Error as defined in EEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 4 has occurred Invalid character A syntactic element contains a character which is invalid for that type Syntax error An unrecognized command or data type was encountered for example a string value was received when the device does not accept strings
460. sing Subsystem This status group is accessed using the STATus commands The Call Processing Status Register Group uses 16 bit registers and includes a Condition Register Transition Filters an Event Register an Enable Register and a Summary Message Refer to the Status Reporting Structure Overview on page 239 for a discussion of status register operation Figure 13 shows the structure and STATus commands for the Call Processing Status Register Group 271 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting STATus CALLProc CONDition PTRansition integer NTRansition integer STATus CALLProc STATus CALLProc EVENt STATus CALLProc ENABle integer Summary Message Bit Logical OR to bit 9 of Operation Status Register Group Condition Register p pa A A N m A Co N ar A wo N o Condition Transition Event Enable ch4drwi8 ds Register Filter Registers Register Register Call Processing Status Register Group Table 21 details the Call Processing Status Register Group s Condition Register bit assignments S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Table 21 Call Processing Status Register Group Condition Register Bit Assignments o eos Condition Comment 15 32768 Not Used Always 0 Defined by SCPI Version 1994 0 14 16384 Unused in Test Set
461. splay Function feature by pressing softkey F7 Now you can enter the escape codes for each edit command aligned with the soft key definitions you just entered With the Display Functions key pressed when you press the escape key a left arrow will be displayed Once you have set up all 8 keys you activate them by pressing Shift F12 To deactivate your user defined softkeys press F12 is ESCAPE in Agilent AdvanceLink See Table 42 on page 384 for the escape codes Setting Up Function Keys in ProComm ProComm does not have function keys However escape sequences can be assigned to number keys 0 through 9 by using the Keyboard Macro function This function is accessed by keying Alt M There is no method of displaying key labels so they will have to be recorded elsewhere See the ProComm manual for further information Table 42 Edit Mode Escape Code Commands Function Key Names dans Terminal tet an INSERT LINE L L DELETE LINE M C M GO TO LINE g Eg CLEAR LINE A K K PAGE UP OQ OQ PAGE DOWN ATOR OR RECALL LINE Ar Cr BEGIN LINE OP OP END LINE OS OS 384 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 3 Developing Programs Using Word Processor on a PC Least Preferred Method 3 Developing Programs Using Word Processor on a PC Least Preferred The third method of IBASIC program development is to wr
462. ssage 496 registration increment global action mes sage 494 reset RST 211 reverse voice channel order confirmation message 475 RF Analyzer HP IB command syntax diagram 161 RF Generator HP IB command syntax diagram 163 RJ 11 jack 360 ROM Disk 325 327 using 340 ROM Memory card 325 330 RVCOrdCon CALLP 464 messages 475 Index S save instrument state SAV 222 Save Recall Registers default mass storage locations 331 Saving registers HP IB command syntax diagram 160 second word of called address 474 Sequential Commands 70 serial number word 472 Serial Port 360 cables adapters for 362 configuration 360 365 393 input buffer length 366 receive transmit pacing 366 select code 10 361 393 395 select code 9 361 365 393 serial I O from IBASIC program 393 service request enable query SRE 221 Service Request Enable Register 295 clearing 297 reading 296 writing 296 service request enable SRE 221 Service Requests 293 enabling SRQ interrupts 294 procedure for generating 298 Service Request Enable Register see Service Request EnableRegister 295 setting up SRQ interrupts 294 Signaling Decoder HP IB command syntax diagram 141 Signaling Encoder HP IB command syntax diagram 102 Special HP IB command syntax diagram 167 Spectrum Analyzer HP IB command syntax diagram 165 SRAM Memory card 325 329 SRQ see Service Requests 293 standard event status ena
463. ssage Name RECCW A RECA RECCW B RECB RECCW C RECC RECCW D RECD RECCW E RECE RVCOrdCon RCOConfirm 467 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions This section describes the individual data fields contained in each of the decoded reverse control channel and reverse voice channel messages accessible through the CALL DATA screen RECCW A Message Fields Figure 38 RECCW A Message Fields F This field displays the first word indication received from the mobile station e A I indicates that this is the first word A 0 is displayed for all subsequent words NAWC This field displays the number of additional words coming from the mobile station T This field displays the message type received from the mobile station e Set to l to identify the message as an origination or an order e Set to 0 to identify the message as an order response or page response 468 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb RSVD SCM MIN1 Parity Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL DATA Screen Message Field Descriptions This field displays whether the serial number word is received from the mobile station e Set to 1 if the serial number word is sent e Set to 0 if the serial number word is not sent This field displays the extended address word rece
464. ssing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions ACCESS Message Fields Access Type Parameters Global Action Message ACT Figure 47 ACCESS Message Fields T1T2 This field identifies the received message as an order confirmation an order or a called address message 2 binary characters required DCC Digital color code field 2 binary characters required ACT Global Action Field 4 binary characters required 492 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb BIS RSVD END OHD Parity Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Screen Message Field Descriptions Busy Idle status field binary character required Reserved for future use all bits must be set as indicated 15 binary characters required End indication field e Set to 1 to indicate the last word of the overhead message train e Set to 0 if not the last word 1 binary character required This field displays the overhead message type e A 100 indicates a global action message e A 110 indicates this is the first word of the system parameter overhead parameter message e A 111 indicates this is the second word of the system parameter overhead message 3 binary characters required Parity field The contents of the Parity field cannot be set by the user The Test Set calculates the parity bits 493 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem CALL BIT Sc
465. st Set Save program in mass storage Verify program operation in IBASIC environment Save program in mass storage Save program in mass storage ch6drw2 drw Figure 24 Program Development Methods 359 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports This section describes how to interconnect the Test Set to an external PC or terminal using the Test Set s serial I O ports Program development methods 2 and 3 use PC s or terminals connected to the Test Set through the Test Set s serial I O ports To determine which programming environment best fits your application refer to Choosing Your Development Method on page 373 Test Set Serial Port Configuration To prepare for IBASIC program development the Test Set must first be configured to operate with a PC or terminal This includes e Hardware e Cables Screens I O CONFIGURE and TESTS IBASIC Controller There are two independently controllable serial interfaces in the Test Set each using a 3 wire transmit receive ground implementation of the RS232 standard The IBASIC Controller can send and receive data from either port by using its assigned select code Serial Port Information The Test Set s rear panel RJ 11 connector has 6 conductors Note that this jack appears the same as a common 4 conductor RJ 11 telephone jack but the Test Set jack uses
466. st Set need to remain relatively constant since autoranging has been disabled If the automatic functions are turned off the control program must set the gain stages and frequency tuning before triggering a measurement The automatic functions can be turned off as follows Disable RF autotuning by setting the Tune Mode field to Manual using the following command RFAN TMOD MANUAL Disable RF autoranging by setting the Input Atten field to Hold using the following command RFAN ATT MODE HOLD Disable AF autoranging by setting the Gain Cnt1 field to Hold using the following command AFAN RANG HOLD 235 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Increasing Measurement Throughput 3 Frequency Counter Gate Time The frequency counter s gate time specifies how long the RF or AF frequency counter samples the signal before displaying the measured result Short gate times measure instantaneous frequency and long gate times measure average frequency The longer the gate time the longer the measurement cycle The proper gate time is determined by the measurement requirements Use the following commands to set gate times For AF frequency measurements set the AF Analyzer s gate time with the AF Cnt Gate field using the following command AFAN GTIM value MS For RF frequency measurements set the RF Analyzer s gate time with the RF Cnt Gate field using the following command RFAN GTIM value MS 4 Number of Act
467. stination printer for the program itself This is schematically shown in Figure 26 on page 364 If simultaneous multiple serial I O is not a requirement then only use serial port 9 as it can directly access the IBASIC Command Line field For your convenience Figure 25 on page 363 and Table 39 on this page show the cables and adapters that are available from Agilent Technologies for connecting external devices to the Test Set s serial I O ports See Figure 26 on page 364 for a wiring diagram to construct your own cables RJ 11 cables and adapters can be wired several ways If you buy a cable or adapter other than the Agilent parts listed in Table 39 verify the connections for the pins indicated before connecting the cables to the Test Set 361 Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports Table 39 Available Agilent RS232 Serial Cables and Adapters Device for RS232 Serial Typical Uses Description Aileni Pari i Number connections Single to Dual RJ 11 To connect to Serial Single 6 pin RJ 11 male to Dual 6 pin 08921 61031 Adapter Cable Ports 9 and 10 RJ 11 female 0 6 meter cable simultaneously Cable with Connectors Test Set to PC 6 pin RJ 11 male to 9 pin DB 9 female 08921 61038 2 meter cable Cable with Connectors Test Set to printer 6 pin RJ 11 male to 25 pin DB 25 08921 61039 or terminal male 3 meter cable RJ 11 to DB 25 Adapter Use with long cable 6 p
468. t WW AFG2 continued x an a JA space gt gt j See Real Number Setting Syntax FREQuency A AN OFFTime 3 See Real Number Setting Syntax r CSEQuence J STANdard _ AF Generator 2 Encoder x espace gt e strin s gt H 1 Returns quoted string f See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe command lt cpcss gt Returns quoted string DAY Ns ud Does not include the STATe command 1 See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe command M gt COLumn ROW P ha e N See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe command Does not include the STATe command e string s space P string UM y Returns quoted string ES A y Bell gt Returns quoted string Iu See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the INCR or STAT command 107 AF Generator 2 Encoder DPAGing AFGenerator28 ENCoder N N MESSage gt x Pager l Alpha Numeric Message N NMESsage ON Pager Numeric A TYPE e space e eC DPAGing B CODE D lt space gt o gt lt string gt Pager Code E Returns quoted string FUNCtion See Integer Number Setting Syntax C coe lt stri Y Message X space gt string Nec gt A Returns quoted string Tone On
469. t It is designed to operate at a maximum relative humidity of 95 and at altitudes of up to 2000 meters Refer to the specifications tables for the ac mains voltage requirements and ambient operating temperature range Ventilation Requirements When installing the product in a cabinet the convection into and out of the product must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the product by 4 C for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used BEFORE APPLYING POWER Verify that the product is set to match the available line voltage the correct fuse is installed and all safety precautions are taken Note the instrument s external markings described under Safety Symbols WARNING CAUTION GROUND THE INSTRUMENT To minimize shock hazard the instrument chassis and cover must be connected to an electrical protective earth ground The instrument must be connected to the ac power mains through a grounded power cable with the ground wire firmly connected to an electrical ground safety ground at the power outlet Any interruption of the protective grounding conductor or disconnection of the protective earth terminal will cause a potential shock hazard that could result in personal injury FUSES Only fuses with the required rated current voltage and specif
470. t No The Test Set does not have the capability to respond to a PPE Parallel Poll PPD PPU PPC IDY Clear Yes This message clears the Input Buffer and Output Queue DCL clears any commands in process puts the Test Set into the SDC Operation Complete idle state and prepares the Test Setto MLA receive new commands The Device Clear DCL or Selected Device Clear SDC bus commands e do not change any settings or stored data except as noted previously do not interrupt front panel I O or any Test Set operation in progress except as noted previously donotchange the contents of the Status Byte Register other than clearing the MAV bit as a consequence of clearing the Output Queue The Test Set responds equally to DCL or SDC bus com mands 51 Chapter 1 Using GPIB IEEE 488 1 Remote Interface Message Capabilities Table 6 Test Set IEEE 488 1 Interface Message Capability Continued IEEE Message Type Implemented Response 488 1 Message Trigger Yes If in remote programming mode and addressed to listen GET the Test Set makes a triggered measurement following the MLA trigger conditions currently in effect in the instrument The Test Set responds equally to the Group Execute Trig ger GET bus command or the TRG Common Com mand Take Control Yes The Test Set begins to act as the Active Controller on the TCT bus MTA Abort Yes The Test Set stops talking and listening IFC
471. t Set to be controlled by an external controller 2 It allows the Test Set to print to an external GPIB printer 3 It allows the built in IBASIC Controller to control external GPIB devices IBASIC programs running on the Test Set s IBASIC Controller must use the internal only GPIB at select code 8 to control the Test Set IBASIC programs would use the external GPIB at select code 7 to control GPIB devices connected to the rear panel GPIB connector NOTE Refer to Overview of the Test Set on page 26 for a detailed explanation of the Test Set s architecture When using a BASIC language Workstation with an GPIB interface at select code 7 to control the Test Set GPIB commands would look like this Example This command is sent to the Test Set at address 14 OUTPUT 714 RST This command is sent to another instrument whose address is 19 OUTPUT 719 RST When executing the same commands on the Test Set s IBASIC Controller the commands would look like this Example OUTPUT 814 RST Command sent to internal only GPIB at select code 8 Test Set s address does not change OUTPUT 719 RST Command sent to external GPIB at select code 7 other instrument s address does not change 1 Optional Connector on the Test Set 44 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Basic Programming Examples Chapter 1 Using GPIB Getting Started The following simple examples illust
472. t of digits in count field count field of data bytes in program program data bytes The following notation is used in the command description The data starts with a header which begins with a followed by a single non zero digit in the range 1 9 which specifies the number of digits in the following count field followed by a series of digits in the range of 0 9 which gives the number of data bytes being sent followed by the number of data bytes specified by the count field Example 16 lt data byte gt lt data byte data byte data byte data byte data by te Example BASIC program to download an IBASIC program to Test Set 10 OUTPUT 714 PROG DEL ALL Delete current program 20 OUTPUT 714 PROG DEF 4257 Create program send header 30 OUTPUT 714 10 FOR J 1 TO 10 18 characters CR LF 40 OUTPUT 714 20 DISP J 9 characters CR LF 50 OUTPUT 714 30 BEEP 7 characters CR LF 60 OUTPUT 714 40 NEXT J 9 characters CR LF 70 OUTPUT 714 50 END 6 characters 80 END DEFine The DEFine query command is used to upload an IBASIC program from the Test Set to an external controller The IBASIC program uploaded to the external controller is transferred as IEEE 488 2 Definite Length Arbitrary Block Response Data The following information describes some of the characteristics of the IEEE 488 2 Definite Length Arbitrary Bloc
473. t purposes The small horizontal rectangle at the top left is the IBASIC command line As the name implies IBASIC commands can be executed from this line Commands can be entered locally using the rotary knob or remotely using serial port 9 A maximum of 100 characters may be entered into the command line The vertical rectangle at the top right side is the softkey label area The five highlighted areas within the softkey label area correspond to the five special function keys on the front panel of the Test Set IBASIC programs can assign tables to these keys and control program execution by using ON KEY interrupts The vertical rectangle at the bottom right side is the To Screen area and is the same as the To Screen area displayed on any other Test Set screen The user may switch to some other Test Set screen by using the rotary knob to position the cursor onto the desired screen and then pushing the knob The large rectangle in the center of the screen is the CRT display screen for the IBASIC controller The IBASIC controller uses this area for displaying alpha numeric and graphic information program editing program listing and so forth This area operates as would the CRT on an external HP 9000 Series 200 300 Workstation S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Important Notes for Program Development Important Notes for Program Development The Test Set is designed to operate the sa
474. t state some fields are maintained kept at their current state or value and some fields are initialized returned to their default value The following sections discuss the effects each of the six initialization methods has on the Test Set The Power On Reset is accomplished by applying or cycling AC DC power to the Test Set For the CONFIGURE PRINT CONFIGURE TESTS Execution Conditions TESTS Printer Setup and I O CONFIGURE screens Table 28 lists the fields which are restored initialized when the Test Set AC DC power is cycled The restored state or initialized value is listed below the field name Fields which are not listed are maintained at their current value whatever that may happen to be All fields in the TESTS Main Menu screen and the TESTS External Devices screen are maintained at their current state value The current state value of the maintained fields can be ascertained programmatically S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Table 28 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Screen Fields Restored Initialized During Power On Reset Instrument Initialization CONFIGURE Screen Fields PRINT CONFIGURE Screen Fields TESTS Execution Conditions Screen Fields TESTS Printer Setup Screen Fields T O CONFIGURE RX TX Cntl Auto PTT Print Title field is cleared Test output location Crt Test output location Crt Save Recall Internal RF Offset Off
475. tation A numeric value is only displayed when a mobile station is actively connected on a voice channel that is the Connect annunciator is lit A is displayed if a mobile station is not actively connected on a voice channel This is a read only field The AVCSat query command is used to query the contents of the left hand subfield There is no command form of the AVCSat command Syntax AVCSat Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP AVCS ENTER 714 Active_vc_sat The right hand field highlighted field is used to set the SAT Color Code SCC to be used on the designated voice channel the channel number entered into the Chan right hand subfield The SATone command is used to control the right hand subfield The query form of the command that is SATone can be used to determine the cur rent SAT Color Code SCC setting Syntax SATone lt gt lt 5970HZ 6000HZ 6030HZ gt lt gt SATone Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP SAT OUTPUT 714 CALLP SAT 5970HZ ENTER 714 Sat color code S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb SCM SID Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen This field displays the decoded station class mark information received from the mobile station on the reverse control channel in response to a forward control channel message The decoded SCM consists of the mobile station power class Class I II or IID the transm
476. ter Group Summary Message is passed to the Status Byte Register through Bit 9 in the Operational Status Register Group Condition Register The Operational Status Register Group must be configured to set its Summary Message TRUE if the Summary Message from the Call Processing Status Register Group is TRUE Therefore Bit 9 249 512 in the Operational Status Register Group Enable Register must be set HIGH STAT OPER ENAB 512 The Test Set s HP IB interface has a large input buffer and can handshake in several commands The commands are processed serially out of the input buffer In this example program the Cnfg_srvc_intrp sends 8 commands to the Test Set in rapid succession The RST command requires several seconds to execute Since the Test Set can handshake in many commands it can appear to the control program that the Test Set has executed all of the commands sent when in reality they have only been placed in the input buffer To prevent the control program from getting ahead of the Test Set the OPC query command is used to synchronize the Test Set and the control program 3000 The Srvice_interupt subprogram first checks for errors If an error is detected from one of the enabled registers the Error_flag is set and the subprogram is exited If an error is detected from a non enabled register the program stops If no errors are detected then the Call Processing registers are queried to clear them to allow further interrupts and the operation
477. tes For example OUTPUT 714 PROG STR m Var name data Attempting to send a var name longer than 12 characters as character data var name not enclosed in quotes will generate the following error HP IB Error 112 Program mnemonic too long If the programmer wishes to append the IBASIC string identifier onto the string variable name the string variable name must be sent as string data that is enclosed in quotes For example OUTPUT 714 PROG STR Var name data Appending the IBASIC string identifier onto the string variable name without enclosing the string variable name in quotes will generate HP IB Error 101 Invalid character If an attempt is made to set the value of a string variable or array and no IBASIC program is in the Test Set an IBASIC Error 282 Illegal program name is generated If an attempt is made to set the value of a string variable or array and the string variable specified in lt varname gt does not exist in the program an IBASIC Error 283 Illegal variable name is generated If a quoted string value is too long to fit into the string variable then it is silently truncated when stored into the IBASIC string variable If the specified string variable cannot hold all of the quoted strings an IBASIC Error 108 Parameter not allowed is generated S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS ibasic fb NOTE NOTE NOTE Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller PROGram Subsystem
478. the Data Functions are not available to that measurement the Data Function s not available will be listed under the black bubble see the syntax diagram Measure on page 147 81 Chapter 3 GPIB Command Guidelines Guidelines for Operation For each measurement that can be made using the Data Functions there is a default set of values for each Data Function for that measurement For example the Audio Frequency Analyzer Distortion measurement can be made using all of the Data Functions This would include REF SET METER AVG HI LIMIT and LO LIMIT A complete listing of the Distortion measurement s Data Functions and their default values would appear as follows e The Attribute units are PCT e The number of Averages is 10 The Average state is 0 The Reference value is 1 The Reference Display units are PCT e The Reference state is O e The High Limit is 0 The High Limit Display units are PCT e The High Limit state is O e The Low Limit is 0 e The Low Limit Display units are PCT e The Low Limit state is O The Meter state is 0 The Meter high end setting is 10 The Meter high end Display units are PCT e The Meter low end setting is 0 The Meter low end Display units are PCT The Meter interval is 10 The Data Functions are set to their default values whenever e the power is cycled on the Test Set the front panel PRESET key is selected the RST Common Command is received throu
479. the SAVE command is issued therefore any existing register of the same name will be overwrittren without warning RF Analyzer RF Analyzer RFANalyzer A For RF Analyzer measurements see the MEASure command diagram Returns quoted string we RFAN continued ew ATTenuator gt space CK lt 40 dB gt CY et 20 dB gt lt 0 dB gt Returns quoted string MODE jJ space Auto Oy s TUN Hold HQ Returns quoted string A FREQuency D See Real Number Setting Syntax Tune Freq i Does not include the STATe command GTIMe D See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the INCRement OR STATe commands IFBW 2 v space psu lt 15 kHz gt Dal IF Filter 230kHz gt Returns quoted string e CINPut D K lt RF In gt C Y l ME Ant sS PMEasurement a Returns quoted string l ZERO D 4 TX PWR Zero DETector E Peak gt Y TX PWR Meas Sample 4 7 161 RF Analyzer RFANalyzer RES SENSitivity gt gt J Normal gt AY Lu High M J Returns quoted string SQUelch gt lt Pot Open a Fixed ES Returns quoted string A TKEY _ Ext TX Key TMODe gt TMODe space On gt DY y Nu lt off 5 Returns quoted string Tune Mode 162 SAagilent i8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS rfa sec
480. the power meter establishes a 0 0000 W reference for measuring the mobile station s RF power at the RF IN OUT port This ensures the most accurate RF power measurements of the mobile stations s RF carrier at different power levels Example OUTPUT 714 RFG AMPL STATE OFF OUTPUT 714 DISP RFAN RFAN PME ZERO OUTPUT 714 RFG AMPL STATE ON Ensure that no RF power is applied to the RF IN OUT port when the power meter is being zeroed Set the RFGenerator amplitude to OFF before zeroing the power meter and then set the RFGenerator amplitude to ON after zeroing the power meter Couple the variable frequency notch filter to AFGenl This step is only required if audio testing is to be done on the mobile station This step couples the variable frequency notch filter to the output frequency of AFGenl audio frequency generator 1 The notch filter is used when making SINAD measurements AFGenl is used to generate the audio tone for the SINAD measurement Coupling the notch filter to the audio source ensures the most accurate measurement Commands OUTPUT 714 DISP CONF CONF NOTC AFGENI 433 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Using the Call Processing Subsystem s Remote User Interface Call Processing Subsystem HP IB Error Messages The Call Processing Subsystem HP IB error messages are detailed in Error 1300 on page 564 through Error 1317 on page 567 Reading A Call Processing Subsystem HP IB Error
481. tion registration The upper field is a one of many selection field and is used to select the format for entering the identification number The NMODe command is used to set the upper field Two formats are available Phone Num for entering a 10 digit phone number or MIN2 MINI for entering the mobile identification number The lower field is a numeric entry field and is used to enter the identification number in the format selected using the upper field There are two formats which can be used to enter the identification number in the lower field The identification number can be entered as the 10 digit phone number in decimal i e 5095551212 The PNUMber command is used to enter the 10 digit phone number The identification number can be entered as the mobile identification number MIN in hexadecimal i e AAABBBBBB The MIN number is entered as the 3 character MIN2 AAA followed by the 6 character MIN1 BBBBBB The MINumber command is used to enter the MIN number The formats are coupled that is if the Phone Num format is selected and the 10 digit phone number is entered the MIN2 MIN1 information is automatically updated and vice versa S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb NOTE Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen The present values for the MS Id fields are Phone Num 1111111111 MIN2 MIN1 000000400 An all zero MIN number 000000000 w
482. to Active If the Test Set is in the Connect state and a change is made to the Cnt1 Channel field the Connect state will be lost The query form of the command that is CCHannel can be used to determine the current control channel setting Syntax CCHannel integer number CCHannel Example OUTPUT 714 CALLP CCH 333 OUTPUT 714 CALLP CCH ENTER 714 Control_chan 443 Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen Connect When lit the Connect annunciator indicates that the mobile station is connected to the Test Set on a voice channel The Connect annunciator is not programmable The state of the Connect annunciator is reflected in the Call Processing Status Register Group Condition Register bit 5 See Status Reporting in the Application Guide for further information NOTE When the CALL CONTROL screen is displayed and the Call Processing Subsystem is in the Connect state the host firmware constantly monitors the mobile station s transmitted carrier power If the power falls below 0 0005 Watts the Test Set will terminate the call and return to the Active state The mobile station s transmitted carrier power is monitored on all Call Processing Subsystem screens except the ANALOG MEAS screen Display The top right hand portion of the CALL CONTROL screen is used to display e Decoded data messages received from the mobile stati
483. to the IBASIC pro gram memory To perform the ASCII text file transfer for long programs an IBASIC program running in the Test Set is required to manage the transfer A suitable program titled ASCII DN for ASCII downloader is shown on the following page The ASCII DN program runs on the Test Set and directs ASCII characters coming in Serial Port 9 directly to a file named TEMP CODE on an SRAM card The program creates the TEMP CODE file on the SRAM card with a size of 650 records 166 Kbytes or enough for about 6600 lines of ASCII text When the program is run it displays Ready to receive ASCII file data When this prompt is displayed initiate the transfer of the ASCII text file representing the program from the PC to the Test Set Shown below are two methods of sending an ASCII file from the PC to the Test Set Both methods require that the ASCII DN program be running in the Test Set when the transfer begins The ASCII DN program can be transferred into the Test Set either by typing it in using the IBASIC EDIT Mode described earlier or downloading it from an ASCII text file one line at a time as explained earlier 388 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS libasic fb H Oa I e UTA G to H oo0oo0oo0oo0ooooO Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Method 3 Developing Programs Using Word Processor on a PC Least Preferred ASCII_DN Program to download ASCII program file from PC to the Test Set through RS 232 FEAE FE FE E TE FE F
484. torage Type n Volume Media Type File Location Name Specifier System s SRAM Static Random Access Plugs into INTERNAL 4 EPSON SRAM LIF DOS Memory Memory Card Memory Memory Card Card Card slot on front panel of Test Set Typical Uses e Semi permanent program and data storage e Semi permanent Save Recall register storage Comments Low capacity e Contents retained by on card lithium battery Contents lost if on card battery removed while card not in Test Set Memory Card slot Recommended as primary mass storage device for program and data storage 329 Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Mass Storage Device Overview Table 36 ROM Card Mass Storage Overview Mass Mass Physical Mass Storage Supported Storage Storage Location Volume Media Type File Name Type Specifier System s ROM or Read only Plugs into INTERNAL 4 EPSON ROM LIF OTP Memory Memory Card Memory Card Memory Card slot on front Card panel of Test Set Typical Uses e Permanent storage of factory supplied application programs e Permanent storage of factory supplied utility programs e Permanent storage of factory supplied diagnostic programs Comments e Non erasable e Not available for user program or data storage e Not available for Save Recall register storage 330 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS memcard fo Chapter 6 Memory Cards Mass Storage Default Mass Storage Locations Default Mass Storage Location
485. translation NON DEST BS Key definition BS Line wrap ON Scroll ON Break length ms 350 Enquiry CNTL E OFF 12 Press Esc to exit Terminal Setup back to the Setup Menu 13 Enter the number 4 for General Setup Translate Table OFF Alarm sound OFF Alarm time secs 1 Aborted downloads KEEP 14 Press Esc to exit General Setup back to the Setup Menu 15 On the Setup Menu press S to save your entries 16 Press Esc to exit the Setup Menu 17 Press Alt X to exit ProComm back to MS DOS 370 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERSibasic fb Chapter 7 IBASIC Controller Interfacing to the IBASIC Controller using Serial Ports Setting Up Agilent AdvanceLink Agilent 68333F Version B 02 00 on your PC Agilent AdvanceLink is a software program which allows PCs to be used as an alphanumeric or graphics terminal It can also automate terminal and file transfer functions The version described will work with PCs with the MS DOS or PC DOS operating systems AdvanceLink for Windows is also available and configuration is very similar Running AdvanceLink in MSDOS 1 Press the Tab key to move from one field to the next which also accepts the displayed choice 2 Press the NEXT CHOICE and PREVIOUS CHOICE keys to move among the choices for a particular field Setting up the AdvanceLink Software 1 Press the TERMINAL function key 2 Press CONFIG KEYS 3 Press GLOBAL CONFIG Keyboard USASCII Personality ANS
486. tring A SUNits DES RMS AY Sine Units had Peak P 7 Returns quoted string See Multiple Real Number Setting Syntax See Multiple Real Number Setting Syntax See Multiple Real Number Setting Syntax See Multiple Real Number Setting Syntax a etin e 7 Returns quoted string STANdard _ we AFG2 continued 110 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS afg2_enc sec DES CCIRI NY lt CCIR2 lt comt gt sg EEA M sg EIA Py Ky Euro J we NATEL M ZVEH J we ZVEI2 Jj 7 Returns quoted string NMT AFGenerator28 ENCoder N WW AFG2 continued x NMT AF Generator 2 Encoder A AIN formation Add Info M BSIDentity MMS Number XN N MAINtenanc 4 Mgmt Maint PASS word XS pe N T gt SISChallenge N SISResponse ce space jm lt string gt Returns quoted string eCALEVel Alarm Level eGANUMber Area l CBSAVe lj Batt Save tMCHannel ON Meas Chi MFSTrength Meas Field Strenght See Integer Number Setting Syntax PsIGnal 4 Phi Signal Se TCINfO Ed See Integer Number Setting Syntax CCHANnel B Nl l CACCess PS Mec A q Y lt CALLing NUMber MPOWer ud DN STR AFfic N EE Sce Integer Number Setting Syntax MAIN a N
487. troller or on an external controller connected through GPIB Developing programs for the Test Set is simplified if the programmer has a basic understanding of how the Test Set operates An overview of the Test Set s operation is best presented in terms of how information flows through the unit The simplified block diagrams shown in Figure 1 on page 32 and Figure 2 on page 33 depict how instrument control information and measurement result information are routed among the Test Set s instruments instrument control hardware built in IBASIC controller and other components The Test Set has two operating modes Manual Control mode and Automatic Control mode In Manual Control mode the Test Set s operation is controlled through the front panel keypad rotary knob There are two Automatic Control modes Internal and External In Internal Automatic Control mode the Test Set s operation is controlled by an application program running on the built in IBASIC Controller In External Automatic Control mode the Test Set s operation is controlled by an external controller connected to the Test Set through the GPIB interface S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Chapter 1 Using GPIB Overview of the Test Set Manual Control Mode The Test Set s primary instruments are shown on the left side of Figure 1 There are two classes of instruments in the Test Set signal analyzers RF Analyzer AF Analyzer Oscilloscope Spectrum Anal
488. tting via HP IB 188 LO LIMIT resetting limit detection via HP IB 189 LO LIMIT setting display units via HP IB 187 LO LIMIT setting value via HP IB 186 LO LIMIT turning ON OFF via HP IB 185 METER 193 METER querying high end point dis play units via HP IB 196 METER querying high end point via HP IB 195 METER querying low end point dis play units via HP IB 196 METER querying low end point via HP IB 195 METER querying number of intervals via HP IB 194 METER querying ON OFF state via HP IB 194 METER setting high end point display units via HP IB 196 METER setting high end point via HP IB 195 METER setting low end point display units via HP IB 196 METER setting low end point via HP IB 195 METER setting number of intervals via HP IB 194 METER turning ON OFF via HP IB 193 querying ON OFF state 88 REF SET 197 REF SET querying ON OFF state via HP IB 197 REF SET querying reference point display units via HP IB 199 REF SET querying reference point setting via HP IB 198 REF SET setting reference point dis play units via HP IB 199 571 REF SET setting reference point via HP IB 198 REF SET turning ON OFF via HP IB 197 turning ON and OFF 87 using AVG via HP IB 182 using HI LIMIT via HP IB 185 using INCR SET via HP IB 189 using INCR Up Down Arrow keys via HP IB 193 using LO LIMIT via HP IB 185 using METER via HP IB 193 usin
489. turns quoted string 2 chars required gt C Returns quoted string lt Schars required gt De eS M E Returns quoted string J RCFiller _ pace gt gt C 1 char required gt H RCF La Ser Returns quoted string A RM bCPACcess e space m 4 char required C M Piera BEL TS quired gt e CPA hi Returns quoted string A CMAXimum ae MES PW lt 7 chars required 5 Y E iem CMAX 1 E s Returns quoted string A END Jooo o apace 1 char required DC END Mm 2 Returns quoted string A OVERhead space pl OHD Na CALLP continued PARity Parity PERO A 3 chars required DD Returns quoted string Returns quoted string 1 31 Call Processing CALLP gem ACCess E CPRocess f uiv x ACCESS Me CALLP continued 132 g TYPE Jang Y TIT2 as e TIT2 Di DCCode os y met DCC ers E gt gt ACTION space gt ACT A FEN A B IS BISTate y mi gt RSVD E Tasyo Tome l RSVD RES erved yY END Jj space END e COVERhead p MEN OHD Nal 9 NES PARity N gt i IM space el gt 1 char required m BIS Y P Sot lt q gt ye 2 chars required HO Returns quoted string
490. turns quoted string E 4 D See Real Number Setting Syntax FM gt See Real Number Setting Syntax Data Level amp e LEVel D See Real Number Setting Syntax Data Rate Sor RATE See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe command FILLer DATA I M space e string 5 a Returns quoted string J A MESSage DATA 1 y LE Y A SC string sO S space od string k gt AT Returns quoted string STANDard NAMPS gt y NTACS gt 23 Returns quoted string E AFG2 NAMP Continued On Next Page we AFG2 continued 105 AF Generator 2 Encoder AFGenerator ES ENCoder PM a et y lt space gt eC string gt Returns quoted string y FVC DN See Real Number Setting Syntax See Real Number Setting Syntax N Q 2 See Real Number Setting Syntax See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe command MESSage lt space gt gt string gt Returns quoted string C lt Message o DST W A FG2 continued Returns quoted string 106 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS afg2_enc sec CDCSs and DTMF AFGenerator ENCoder N CDCSs RATE STANdard TOCTime DTMF ONTime TWIS
491. uS 200 uS 100 uS 50 uS 20 uS 10 uS 5uS 2uS l uS 7 7 Oscilloscope Y N SAKIY C M ONY a im iu ay Returns quoted string 155 Oscilloscope Cilloscope SN we OSC continued 156 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK SECTIONS osc sec VERTical A OSC SCAL VERT Continued On Next Page Returns quoted string OFFSet 5 See Real Number Setting Syntax Does not include the STATe command a SAM pa 50 Y AF Anl In AM Demod lt lt 20 M lt 10 gt lt 5 gt 2 J we 1 2 0 5 M lt 0 2 M lt 0 1 gt lt 0 05 M Returns quoted string EM Ge 50k vC AF Anl In FM Demod lt 20 kHz gt lt lt l kHz gt lt lt 5 kHz gt 2 kHz 4 we 1kHz Z 50Hz Y lt lt 200Hz Y 100Hz gt 50 Hz M 20 Hz J c 10 Hz Z Oscilloscope KONTON TTA s a VOLTs lt space Sef AF Anl In Audio In 20V 10 V 5V 2V 1V 500 mV 200 mV 100 mV 50 mV 20 mV 10 mV 5 mV 2mV l mV 500 uV 200 uV 100 uV 50 uV 20 uV 2 Returns quoted string M YAY aa e AAA ARE EE X NOT OCC OSC continued 157 Oscilloscope Cilloscope SN Ko UN CTRIGge j4 PRETrigger gt MODE VA RESet gt Ne LEVel ya DELay BN See
492. uage controller specific Refer to the appropriate language controller documentation for specific implementations Before passing control to the Test Set the Active Controller should send the Test Set the address to use when passing control back This is accomplished using the PCB Common Command The PCB command tells the Test Set which address should be used when passing control back to another bus controller Before passing bus control to the Test Set the currently active controller can use the PCB command to tell the Test Set where to send the Take Control TCT command when the Test Set is ready to give up active control of the bus The command is followed by a number which contains the bus address of the device that should become the next active controller The number must round to an integer in the range 0 to 30 decimal The command may be followed by two numbers The first will be used as the primary address the second as the secondary address of the next active controller 315 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Passing Control Passing Control Back to Another Controller 316 The Test Set has two methods of passing control back to another controller 1 automatically and 2 using the IBASIC PASS CONTROL command from an IBASIC program The two methods are described in the following sections Passing Control Back Automatically The Test Set will automatically pass control back to the controller whose address was specified in the P
493. ue of the bit pattern will be a positive integer in the range 0 to 255 The response data is obtained by reading the Output Queue into a numeric variable integer or real Example program 10 INTEGER Srv rqs enab rg 20 OUTPUT 714 SRE 30 ENTER 714 Srv rqs enab rg 40 PRINT Srv rqs enab rg 50 END Example response 18 Writing the Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register is written with the SRE Common Command The SRE command sets the bit pattern bits 0 5 and 7 of the Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register allows the programmer to select which condition s as defined by bits 0 5 and 7 of the Status Byte Register will generate a Service Request on the GPIB bus The Test Set always ignores bit 6 binary weight 64 of the bit pattern set by the SRE command The bit pattern set by the SRE command is determined by selecting the desired condition s from the Status Byte Register setting the value of the bit position s to a logical one setting the value of all non selected bit positions to a logical zero and sending the binary weighted decimal equivalent of bits 0 5 and 7 after the SRE command For example if the programmer wished to have the occurrence of a message available in the Output Queue bit position 4 in the Status Byte Register and the occurrence of a condition in the Hardware 2 Status Register bit position 1 in the Status Byte Regist
494. uest Enable Register SRE 0 Preset the transition filters to pass no transitions STAT CALLP PTR 0 NTR 0 The filters will be set by the functions FNSet state and FNOrder The functions will set the proper filter values to pass the desired transition The Test Set s HP IB interface has a large input buffer and can handshake in several commands The commands are processed serially out of the input buffer In this example program the Cnfg srvc intrp sends 8 commands to the Test Set in rapid succession The RST command requires several seconds to execute Since the Test Set can handshake in many commands it can appear to the control program that the Test Set has executed all of the commands sent when in reality they have only been placed in the input buffer To prevent the control program from getting ahead of the Test Set the OPC query command is used to synchronize the Test Set and the control program 536 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Example Programs Table 53 Comments For Polling Example Program Continued Program Line Comment Number 4060 Ptr_value is the value that the positive transition filter will be set to The value is determined by which pseudo LED will light when the desired command is completed For example a successful PAGE is indicated by the Connect pseudo LED lighting Therefore the Ptr_value is set to 32 2 5 for the Page co
495. ugh the To Screen control hardware In Internal Automatic Control mode the measurement results and data input from the DUT are routed to the IBASIC Controller through a dedicated GPIB interface Also in Internal Automatic Control mode the CRT is dedicated to the IBASIC Controller for program and graphics display This means instrument front panels cannot be displayed on the CRT when an IBASIC program is running S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Chapter 1 Using GPIB Overview of the Test Set Differences Between the Test Set s IBASIC Controller and Other Single Tasking Controllers The IBASIC Controller is unlike other single tasking instrumentation controllers in several ways First it does not have a keyboard This imposes some limitations on creating and editing IBASIC programs directly on the Test Set In Internal Automatic Control mode a virtual keyboard is available in firmware which allows the operator to enter alphanumeric data into a dedicated input field using the rotary knob This is not the recommended programming mode for the IBASIC Controller This feature is provided to allow user access to IBASIC programs for short edits or troubleshooting Several programming modes for developing IBASIC programs to run on the internal IBASIC Controller are discussed in this manual Secondly the IBASIC Controller has a dedicated GPIB interface select code 8 in Figure 2 for communicating with the internal instrum
496. uidelines Guidelines for Operation Guidelines for Operation Command Names The following topics discuss rules and guidelines for controlling the Test Set through GPIB All command names of more than four characters have an alternate abbreviated form using only upper case letters and in some cases a single numeral The commands are not case sensitive Upper and lower case characters can be used for all commands For example to set the destination of AF Generator 1 to Audio Out any of the following command strings are valid AFGENERATOR1 DESTINATION AUDIO OUT or afgeneratorl destination audio out or afgl dest audio out or AFG1 DEST AUDIO OUT or Afgl Dest Audio oUT 71 Chapter 3 GPIB Comman Guidelines for Operation d Guidelines Command Punctuation NOTE 72 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGU Programming Language Considerations The punctuation rules for the Test Set s GPIB commands conform to the IEEE 488 2 standard It is possible that some programming languages used on external controllers may not accept some of the punctuation requirements It is therefore necessary that the equivalent form of the correct punctuation as defined by the language be used for GPIB operation Improper punctuation will results in HP IB Error 102 Syntax Error Using Quotes for String Entries Quotation marks and are used to select a non numeric field setting The value is entered into
497. ull screen images The Test Set requires Option 103 RS 232 HP IB Centronics Current Measurement S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS usehpib fb Chapter 1 Using GPIB Getting Started GPIB Information Provided in This Manual What Is Explained How to configure the Test Set for GPIB operation How to make an instrument setting over GPIB How to read back instrument settings over GPIB How to make measurements over GPIB How to connect external PCs terminals or controllers to the Test Set GPIB command syntax for the Test Set IBASIC program development IBASIC program transfer over GPIB Various advanced functions such as increasing measurement throughput status reporting error reporting pass control and so forth What Is Not Explained 1 GPIB IEEE 488 1 488 2 theory of operation GPIB electrical specifications GPIB connector pin functions IBASIC programming other than general guidelines related to GPIB Refer to the Tutorial Description of the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus Agilent P N 5952 0156 for detailed information on GPIB theory and operation 35 Chapter 1 Using GPIB Getting Started General GPIB Programming Guidelines The following guidelines should be considered when developing programs which control the Test Set through GPIB Guideline 1 Avoid using the TX TEST and RX TEST screens The RX TEST and TX TEST screens are specifically designed for manual testing of land mobile
498. up STATus COMMunicate CONDition PTRansition STATus COMMunicate integer NTRansition A lt integer gt STATus COMMunicate EVENt STATus COMMunicate ENABle lt integer gt Summary Message Bit Logical OR to bit 6 of Hardware Status Register Group 1 Condition Register N de para k N o A w N B o 5 ch4drw14 drw Condition Transition Event Enable Register Filter Registers Register Register Communicate Status Register Group 289 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Table 25 shows the Communicate Status Register Group s Condition Register bit assignments Table 25 Communicate Status Register Group Condition Register Bit Assignments Bit Number a Condition Comment 15 32768 Not Used Always 0 Defined by SCPI Version 1994 0 14 16384 Unused in Test Set 13 8192 Unused in Test Set 12 4096 Unused in Test Set 11 2048 Unused in Test Set 10 1024 Unused in Test Set 9 512 Unused in Test Set 8 256 Unused in Test Set 7 128 Unused in Test Set 6 64 Unused in Test Set 5 32 Unused in Test Set 4 16 Unused in Test Set 3 8 Unused in Test Set 2 4 Unused in Test Set 1 2 Top Box TX DSP Analyzer Communication Channel Failure 0 1 Top Box RX DSP Analyzer Communication Channel Failure 290 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reportin
499. upply Units with this symbol are not completely disconnected from ac mains when this switch is off To completely disconnect the unit from ac mains either disconnect the power cord or have a qualified electrician install an external switch CE the CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community A CE mark accompanied by a year indicated the year the design was proven CSA the CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institute s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Agilent Technologies Warranty Statement for Commercial Products Agilent Technologies 8920A RF Communications Test Set Duration of 1 Agilent Technologies warrants Agilent Technologies hardware accessories and Warranty 1 year supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the period specified above If Agilent Technologies receives notice of such defects during the warranty period Agilent Technologies will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective Replacement products may be either new or like new 2 Agil
500. urned on If this annunciator is lit the Base Station is transmitting system parameter overhead messages on the assigned control channel If the annunciator is not lit the base station is not active note that the Test Set may still be outputting a modulated RF carrier but the Test Set s firmware is not active and no communication can occur between a mobile station and the Test Set The Active annunciator is not programmable The state of the Active annunciator is reflected in the Call Processing Status Register Group Condition Register bit 0 See Status Reporting in the User s Guide for further information S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc f AF Freq Amplitude Called Number Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the CALL CONTROL Screen The AF Freq field is displayed only when the Display field is set to Meas This field displays the audio frequency of the demodulated FM signal being transmitted by the mobile station Four dashes indicate that no audio frequency is present to measure A numeric value would only be displayed when the Test Set s Connected annunciator is lit Refer to the Display field description on page 444 for information on how to read measurement results from this field This field is used to set the output power of the Test Set s transmitter that is the output power of the Test Set s RF Generator The AMPLitude command is used to
501. vanced Operations Status Reporting Status Reporting Structure Operation In general the status reporting structure described on the previous pages is used as follows Determine which conditions as defined by their bit positions in the Condition Register should cause the Summary Message to be set TRUE if they occur For example Condition Register Bit 3 Overpower Protection Tripped Determine the polarity of the bit state transition which will indicate the condition has occurred For example logic 0 Overpower Protection not tripped logic 1 Overpower Protection tripped occurrence indicated by a 0 to transition use positive transition PTR filter for bit 3 Set the Transition Filters to the correct polarity to pass the bit state transition to the Event Register For example Set Positive Transition Filter bit 3 to 1 all other bits to 0 Set Negative Transition Filter bit 3 to 0 all other bits to 0 Set the correct bits in the Enable Register to generate the Summary Message if the condition has been latched into the Event Register For example Set bit 3 of the Enable Register to a logic 1 all other bits to 0 Repeat these steps for any register containing the Summary Message bit 249 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Status Queue Model This section explains how status queues are structured in the Test Set The generalized status queue model shown in Figure 6 is the basis upon which all the status queues
502. ved SCMark MINumber PARity Ma CALLP continued EXTended Y CAVCNumber Chan AVCPower gt CO Pwr Lv w AVCSat SAT RECA K Ne o N Word A 7 Wor lt NAWConming V NAWC N lm lO TFleld Dd C S SERIAL RSVD gt G A SCM nd MINI J Parity Call Processing Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns quoted string 125 Call Processing CALLP 126 gt RECB Word B RECC Word C N NAWComing T NAWC e LOCa Fi Local tORDQualifier ORDQ ORDer D Order b lt AT MINumber c MINI REServed EPARity EN Parity NC lin F ka FWORD Y NAWComing NAWC e6SERial Serial PARity gt S Parity Ma CALLP continued Returns quoted string Returns quoted string Returns
503. vent reg COM COM Turn off in OFF INTR 7 terrupts while processing the current interrupt Conduct a SERIAL POLL to read the Status Byte and clear the SRO Status byte SPOI LL Inst address Determine which Register Group s caused the interrupt Since three were enabled LE IF LE PR BIT Status_byte 5 BIT Status_byte 3 BIT Status_byte 0 all three must be checked H EN GOSUB Srvice_std_evnt H EN GOSUB Srvice_calib H EN GOSUB Srvice_hardl nable the interrupt before leaving the service routine 301 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations GPIB Se 1400 1410 1420SU 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470 1480 1490 1500 1510 O rvice Requests ENABL BEXIT INTER 7 2 Srvice std evn This routine Status Register are TRUE logic 1 NOTE Read th not cleared the Test Se UTPUT Inst address ESR 1520EN ER Inst address Event reg 1530RI 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 16300 m URN Service calib Register Group appropriate action NOTE Read th not cleared it will NOT latc Register thereby preventing PUT Inst address STAT CAL EVEN 1640EN ER Inst address Event reg 1650RI 1660 11670 1680 1690 1700 1710 1720 1730 1740
504. w endpoint Syntax METer HEND real number METer LEND real number Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW MET HEND 20 OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW ME END 10 EA This sets the analog bar graph meter s high endpoint to 20 watts and the low endpoint to 10 watts for the TX Power measurement When setting the value of the METER Data Function through GPIB a non Attribute Unit unit of measure must be specified in the command string otherwise the current Attribute Unit is assumed by the Test Set Refer to Attribute Units AUNits on page 81 To Query the Meter High End and Low End Points Use the METer HEND and MEter LEND commands to query the analog bar graph meter high endpoint and low endpoint Syntax METer HEND METer LEND Example OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW MET HEND ENTER 714 Meter hi end OUTPUT 714 MEAS RFR POW MET LEND ENTER 714 Meter lo end This queries the high end point and low end point of the analog bar graph meter for the TX Power measurement When querying the value of the METER Data Function through GPIB the Test Set always returns numeric values in Attribute Units regardless of the current Display Units or GPIB Units settings Numeric values are expressed in scientific notation Refer to Attribute Units AUNits on page 81 195 Equivalent Front Panel Key Co
505. wer The time out value is specified as 10 seconds The value turned by the function is assigned to the variable Measure_result o 2 Zo OOOO BRO M E o e H H Hi Check the result of the function call VUmUNTU Zu asure_result 9 E 99 THEN RINT Measurement failed RINT Power Measure result IF g e p p C Recommended Techniqu Kc ck kc ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ck ck ck ck kk ck ck ck ck ck ck kk ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck Ck ock ck ko ck ko ko ck ko kx kv Mk ko ko ok EF FN COM DISABLE TIMEOUT Bus addr Time out value R result FNMeasure MEAS RFR POW 10 Ck Ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK KKK ckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck ck ckckckck ck ck ck ck ckck ck ckck ck ck ck k ck kk kk Measure Query command Time out value Io names INTEGER Inst addr Bus addr ER Timed out PUT Inst addr TRIG MODE RETR SING T R Inst addr Result C PUT Inst addr Query command PUT Inst addr TRIG MODE ZOE D BLE URN Result ut Inst addr R o I R U I iE URN 9 E 99 t recover no IS TOP ND RIG IMM EOUT Bus addr Time out value GOTO Cannot recover T Inst addr TRIG ABORT MOD EP P Cannot regain control of Test Set 61 Chapter 2 Methods For Reading Measurement Results
506. y signal the Active Controller that the Test Set needs attention The application program can then interrogate the Test Set and determine what caused it to request service Refer to GPIB Service Requests on page 293 for information on setting up enabling and servicing SRQ generated interrupts 239 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting egister Group Status Register Group Summary Message Bits FOE ror yy i 6 Status Byte Register 1 T MSS Service Request Enable Register Enabled Summary Message MSS Service Request Generation Function Request Service Message Service Request RQS Interface Message SRQ ch4drw01 ds4 HP 8920 Status Reporting Structure Figure 3 Status Reporting Structure Overview 240 S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS advoper fb Status Byte Register NOTE Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting The Status Byte Register is an 8 bit register that is used to summarize the Summary Messages from all the register groups in the Test Set and the Request Service RQS or Master Summary Status MSS messages The contents of the Status Byte Register referred to as the status byte can be read by the Active Controller to determine the condition of each of the register groups The Summary Message from each register group is assigned to a specific bit position in the Status Byte Register as shown in Figure 4 If the Summary Message from a particula
507. yntax This field sets the output power of the Test Sets s transmitter that is the output power of the Test Set s RF Generator See RF Generator on page 163 for programming command syntax This field is used to select or bypass the 750 uSec de emphasis filter network used to condition the audio signal before being analyzed by the Audio Frequency Analyzer See AF Analyzer on page 97 for programming command syntax This field is used to select the type of detector used to measure the amplitude of the audio signal being analyzed by the Audio Frequency Analyzer See AF Analyzer on page 97 for programming command syntax S agilent 8920 8920b PRGGUIDE BOOK CHAPTERS callproc fb Filter 1 Filter 2 FM Deviation TX Freq Error TX Power Chapter 8 Programming the Call Processing Subsystem Programming the ANALOG MEAS Screen This field selects one of several standard or optional audio frequency filters which can be used to condition the audio signal before being analyzed by the Audio Frequency Analyzer See AF Analyzer on page 97 for programming command syntax This field selects one of several standard or optional audio frequency filters which can be used to condition the audio signal before being analyzed by the Audio Frequency Analyzer See AF Analyzer on page 97 for programming command syntax This field displays the measured FM deviation of the carrier being transmitted by the mobile station Fou
508. yntax STATus HARDware2 ENABle Example OUTPUT 714 STAT HARD2 ENAB ENTER 714 Register_value Writing the Enable Register Syntax STATus HARDware2 ENABle integer Example OUTPUT 714 STAT HARD2 ENAB 256 Clearing the Enable Register The ENABLE register is cleared by writing to it with an integer value of zero 283 Chapter 5 Advanced Operations Status Reporting Hardware Status Register 1 Group 5 a Ja o In T BR fo w f The Hardware Status Register 1 Group contains information about the Test Set s hardware This status group is accessed using the STATus commands The Hardware Status Register 1 Group uses 16 bit registers and includes a Condition Register Transition Filters an Event Register an Enable Register and a Summary Message Refer to the Status Reporting Structure Overview on page 239 section for a discussion of status register operation Figure 16 shows the structure and STATus commands for the Hardware Status Register 1 Group STATus HARDware1 CONDition PTRansition lt integer gt STATus HARDware1 NTRansition lt integer gt STATus HARDware1 EVENt STATus HARDware1 ENABIe lt integer gt Summary Message Bit Logical OR to bit O of Status Byte Register ch4drw13 drw Condition Transition Event Enable Register Filter Registers Register Register Figure 16 Hardware Status Register 1 Group
509. yzer Signaling Decoder and signal sources RF Generator AF Generator 1 AF Generator 2 Signaling Encoder The Test Set s measurement capability can be extended by adding application specific top boxes such as the Agilent 83201A Dual Mode Cellular Adapter Since so many instruments are integrated into the Test Set it is not feasible to have an actual front panel for each instrument Therefore each instrument s front panel is maintained in firmware and is displayed on the CRT whenever the instrument is selected Only one instrument front panel can be displayed on the CRT at any given time up to four measurement results can be displayed simultaneously if desired Just as with stand alone instruments instrument front panels in the Test Set can contain instrument setting information measurement result s or data input from the DUT Using the Test Set in Manual Control mode is very analogous to using a set of bench or rack mounted test equipment To obtain a measurement result with a bench or racked system the desired measurement must be active For example if an RF power meter is in the bench or racked system and the user wishes to measure the power of an RF carrier they must turn the power meter on and look at the front panel to see the measurement result Other instruments in the system may be turned off but this would not prevent the operator from measuring the RF power Conceptually the same is true for the Test

Agilent Technologies A.18.00 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents